aed ther lyf tor cant tale pds
tp he ssi were wns §
ecw teB ae moe,
=Sucane 9 *
ws i en SS
rng nh geats
ram Seer ners ; “
Sperrertoteot
Teisecg tasers
shee tek wales HE Eh Ph te
gp itrlt a Rte ete fetes 3s “ : aye
tot
1
TAS
Prive
srs
+ Ne
a
ghevt
}
oe =ao
MP
Pre, oto ee a .
ob Tee RF, ea
nese, sees
say
bi
s, * oar : ‘
Pee OR” : : ew tt ;
ae : : ; Pine ats} ie 4 aa
0% er 3 ; j
ty wage
Pee Thay
aisss tie
‘ peere: oe ed Ved
©
é
5
4 ait
at 4 : : ‘ : ; : Th ae ors
.
% ; 008
it : s ’ - ; «
fae
tote
*«
‘
ite i ef
2.
=
=
a
ed aoe
‘
7
goes ee
ae
te
err as
€3
Pe ne re ts Pe
* i
a et
wee eS
woe RE ar we
=e:
ew
“e- s
Sokecceorss
®
te
ral a
pees oF
o'? é
s+:
—~ —e Age a
2 See €
See em wes eh
a Mea wees
ee oe ee
—aertace
- -#
*? 9 = oe asa e
Zz.
TWEEDDALE.
Sie ee
voy =f)
/)
ay er
hia ce
Hb. 43 ~ BE
es fon) See wknqeens Coveoede Das
$5 af Jaw cree. A Le Se
f3f le eg: We eta). fode
es a: Piet ue
.. ca pie ear Mods ore -
7a LCatk bc fa 4x
447. Ceteleter—
JOURNAL
MmOILATIC SOCIETY
THE SECRETARY AND SUB-SECRETARY.
VOL. XII.
PART I.—JANUARY TO JUNE, 1843.
NEW SERIES.
‘« Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science, in different
parts of Asia will commit their observations to writing, and send them to the Asiatic Society,
in Calcutta ; it will languish, if such communications shall be long intermitted ; and will die away
if they shall entirely cease.”.—Sir Wm. Jones.
ier
| CALCUTTA :
BISHOP’S COLLEGE PRESS.
1843.
Res oh > F
‘J Ve
orcs ode
A ALS: ae Satie
ee cea
ven
tere oe JA Pbey *
“oer a
pphobeeited
“4 Torte
. ¥ 7
ot rath m,
By
f
Contents
OF PART I.
No, 133.
Page.
I.—A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language. By Captain J. B. Eastwick,
Assistant Political Agent, Upper Scinde. From the Political Secretariat of
the Government of India, _ .. ae os fe oa ae <3 che Wek
II.—Report on Upper Sindh and the Eastern portion of Cutchee, with a tia
randum on the Beloochees and other Tribes of Upper Scinde and Cutchee,
and a Map of part of the Country referred to. By Lieut. J. Postans, Assis-
tant Political Agent. From the Political Secretariat of the Government of
India, ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eo ee 25
I{].—Various Routes in Scinde, from Official Documents from Bombay, of March
1840 ; communicated by the Government of India, ee ee oe o. 44
1V.—Report on the Road from Scinde, and from Subzul to Shikarpoor. By
Mr. Nock, oe ee ee ee ee @e ee sof ee ee 59
V.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, ee ee pie ole we -- 62
No. 134,
I.—Documents relating to the Gates of Somnath; forwarded to the Society by
the Government of India. With plates, ... .. ee : oe - 73
1I.—Extract from the Journal of Lieut. J. A. Weller, Executive ee and
Officiating Junior Assistant Commissioner in Keemaon, on a trip to the Bulcha
and Oonta Dhoora Passes, with an eye-sketch. Forwarded by J. H. Batten,
Esq. C. S. Keemaon, .. oe ve ee ee oe ee ee «- 78
III.—A perpetual Moon Table. By Capt. Robt. Shortrede, Ist Assistant G. T. S. ;
F.R. A. 5S. &c. With plates, oe ve «s ee es ee - 103
IV.—On the Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. By S. G. Tolle-
mache Heatly, Esq. .. oe or ee a “6 ve ‘ -» 110
V.—Description of a new genus of Falconide. By B. H. il Esq. ee 127
VI.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, oe ve “e . os 22 129
iv Contents.
No. 135.
Page.
I.—First Report by Dr. Jameson of his deputation by Government to examine
the effects of the great Inundation of the Indus. See Journal Asiatic Soci-
ety, Vol. X, p.615, .. oe ee ae ne ac = oe «» 183
I].—Barometrical Observations taken to ascertain the Altitude of the Station of
Purulia, in the Ramghur District. By Capt. Hannyngton, 24th N. I. Ist
' Assistant to the Governor General’s Agent, Maunbhoom, oe ae oe 226
III.—Brigadier Twemlow on Artificial Fuel. Received from the .
Society, as ee ee oe ae «- 228
1V.—A Companion to the Moon Table. By Capt. Shortrede, Ist aa G. T.
Survey, ee ee ie oe oe ve vs -. 231
V.—Account of a luminous Meteor seen at Charka, lat. 24° 06/, long. 81° 02! on
the morning of the 11th April 1842. By Capt. Shortrede, Ist Assistant G. T.
Survey, oe ee ae oe 2 . “= «» 235
ViI.—Analysis of [ron Ores from Tavoy and Mergui, and of Limestone from
Mergui. By Dr. A. Ure, London. Communicated for the Museum Eco-
nomic Geology of India, by E. A. Blundell, Esq. Commissioner, Tenasserim
Provinces, .- ve ee ar . e. 236
VII.—Supplement to the fiGhogfaph of the Indian and addgatt species ae Cucu-
lide, or Birds of the Cuckoo family, published in Vol. XI, pp. 898, 1095, et
seq. By Edward Blyth, Curator of the Asiatic Society, be ae .. 240
VIII.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, .. ee ee ce ve -. 248
No. 136.
I.—Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. By Lieut. R. Baird Smith, Bengal
Engineers, a ve oe ee os oe oe ee oe -« 258
II].—Remarks on some of the disturbing causes in Barometric Observations. By
Capt. Shortrede, First Assistant G.T. Survey, .. .. ee -. 293
II].—On Barometric Heights. By Capt. R. Shortrede, First Acetotaide Grand
Trigonometrical Survey, As os ‘ ie An ate a «. 298
1V .—Catalogue of Nepalese Birds, presented to mh Asiatic Society, duly named
and classified by the Donor, Mr. Hodgson, [and revised by the Society’s
Curator], - ° = ae oe fs Se ae - aie -. 301
V. as ae of ite Asiatic Society, ae ae oe a =e -- 314
No. 137.
I.—An Eighth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India, being researches relative
to the Storm in the Bay of Bengal, at Madras, and in the Arabian Sea, of 22d
to 31st October, 1842, with two charts. By Henry Piddington, ie 2. dog
I1.—Translation of the Naipalia Devuta Kalyana with Notes. By B. H. Hodg-
son, Esq. Resident at Kathmandoo, ae ve ate -- 400
IlI.—Notice of two Marmots inhabiting respectively the “aie of Tibet Re the
Himalayan Slopes near to the Snows, and also of a Rhinolophus of the cen-
tral region of Nepal. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. .. a Ke ate -- 409
1V.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, 4p A SP Wee ae ~- 415
Contents. Vv
No. 138.
Page.
1.—Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. By Capt. W. J. E.
Boyes, 6th Light Cavalry, Assistant to the Commissioner, Kemaon and
Gurwhal, with four Plates, .... is Siders waiele APE E Ree pal
II1.—Memorandum on the construction of a Portable Meridian. By E. C. Raven-
shaw, Esq. B. C.S. .... perce alate ale pera Shoe coos 437
I1I.—Descriptive list of some Coins lately received from the University of Chris-
tiana by the Asiatic Society, By Dr. E. Roer, Librarian, Asiatic Society,.. 443
1V.—Additions to the Catalogue of Nepal Birds. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. .. 447
V.—On an improved Simpiesometer, ‘‘ The ‘lropical Tempest Simpiesometer,”’
just received in Calcutta. By H. Piddington, Sub-Secretary. Asiatic
Society, &c. aie eevee ae ne : ey arate ane mateian OL
Vi.—Report on the Government experimental tas of the Copper Mines of
Pokree in Ghurwal, with notices of other Copper Mines. By G. S. sre
ton, Esq. Commissioner, Kumaon and Ghurwal, .. aivhe 20/453
VII.—Brief History of Kelat, brought down to the deposition wid didati’ of
Mehrab Khan, Brahoee. By Major Robert Leech, .-.. SG See Fe
Vill.—Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, sates o sme pas soe. Ole
ingen
TO PART I, VOL. XII.
Page.
Analysis of Iron Ores from Mergui,
and of Limestone from Mergui.
By Dr. A. Ure, .. oe <.
Artificial Fuel, Brigadier Twemlow,
on. Received from the Agricul-
tural Society,.. ar an ts gt
Barometrical Observations taken to
ascertain the Altitude of the Sta-
tion of Purulia, in the Ramghur
District. By Capt. Hannyngton, 226
Barometric Heights. On. By Capt.
R. Shortrede,.. is Ms PS)
Barometric Observations, Remarks
on some of the disturbing causes
in. By Capt. Shortrede, om, ao
Coins lately received from the Uni-
versity of Christiana by the Asiatic
Society. Descriptive list of some.
By Dr. E. Roer, .. ae 2» 443
Copper Mines of Pokree in Ghurwal,
with notices of other Copper Mines.
Report on the Government experi-
mental working of the. By G. S.
Lushington, Esq. .. ce y
Documents relating to the Gates of
Somnath; forwarded to the Society
by the Government of India, _ ..
Falconide. Description ofa new ge-
nus of. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq.. 127
Indian Earthquakes. By Lieut. R.
Baird Smith. Memoiron,.. .. 208
Inundation of the Indus. First Re-
port by Dr. Jameson, of his de-
putation by Government toexamine
the effects of the great, .. -. 183
Journal of Lieut. J. A. Weller, Exe-
cutive Engineer and Officiating
Junior Assistant Commissioner in
Keemaon, on a trip to the Bulcha
and Oonta Dhoora Passes, with an
eye-sketch. Extract fromthe. By
J. H. Batten, Esq... ee aie
Kalat, Brief History of brought down
to the deposition and death of
Mehrab Khan, Brahoee. By Ma-
jor Robert Leech, ee ee 473
Law of Storms in India. An Eight
Memoir on the. By Henry Pid-
dington, ae a ee Ae
Luminous Meteor seen at Charka,
lat. 24° 06’ lon. 8]° 02 on the morn-
ing of the llth April 1842. Ac-
count ofa. By Capt. Shortrede,.. 235
453
339
Page.
Marmots of Tibet and the Hima-
layan Slopes near to the Snows.
Notice of two. By B. H. Hodgson,
Esq. .«. a ee oe -. 409
Moon Table with Plates, A perpetual.
By Capt. Robt. Shortrede,.. .. 103
Moon Table. A Companion to the.
By Capt. Shortrede,.. .. .. 23)
Monograph of the Indian and Malay-
an species of Cuculide, or Birds
of the Cuckoo family, published in
Vol. XI, pp. 898, 1095, et seq. Sup-
plement to the. By EdwardBlyth, 240
Naipalia Devuta Kalyana with »
Notes. Translation ofthe. By B.
H. Hodgson, Esq .. ve ve
Nepalese Birds presented to the Asia-
tic Society, duly named and clas-
sified by the Donor. Catalogue of
Mr. Hodgson’s, .. a -- 301
Nepal Birds. Catalogue of Additions
tothe. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. 447
Paussus, with four Plates. Extract
from Note Book regarding the Ge-
nus. By Capt. W. J. E. Boyes,.. 421
Portable Meridian. On the construc-
tion of. By E. C. Ravenshaw,
Esq. .- ve oe ig hae
Proceedings of the Asiatic Socie-
TY, Muse +» 62-129-248- 314-415-513
Road from Sinde, from Subzul to
Shikarpoor. Report on the. By
Mr. Nock, .. oa a5 -
Scindee Language, A Vocabulary of
the. By Capt. J. B. Eastwick,.. 1
Simpiesometer, ‘‘ The Tropical Tem-
pest Simpiesometer,’’ just received
in Calcutta. On an improved, By
Hi. Piddington, .. oe :
Treatment of Geometry as a branch
of Analysis. On the. By 8S. G.
Tollemache Heatly, Esq... -- 110
Upper Sindh and the Eastern portion
of Cutchee, with a Memorandum
on the Beloochee and other Tribes
of Upper Scinde and Cutchee, and
a Map of part of the Country refer-
red to. Report on. By Lieut. J.
Postans, ye aa bi a
Various Routes in Scinde from Offi-
cial Documents from Bombay, of
March !840. Communicated by the
Government of India, is .. 44
23
INDEX TO NAMES OF CONTRIBUTORS
TO PART I, VOL. XII.
Page
Batten, J. H. Esq. Extract from
the Journal of Lieut. J. A. Weller,
Executive Engineer, and Officiat-
ing Junior Assistant Commissioner
in Keemaon, on a trip to the Bul-
cha and Oonta Dhoora Passes,
with an eye-sketch,.. nic cesta:
Boyes, W. J. E. Capt. Extract
from Note Book regarding the
Genus Paussus, with four Plates, .. 421
BrytH, Epwarp. Supplement to
the Monograph of the Indian and
Malayan species of Cuculide, or
Birds of Cuckoo family, published
in Vol. XI, pp. 898, 1095, et seq., 240
Documents relating to the Gates of
Somnath ; forwarded to the Society
by the Government of India, .. 73
Eastwick, J. B. Capt. A Vocabu-
lary of the Scindee Language. -- 1
Government of India, Various Routes
in Scinde from Official Documents
from Bombay, of March 1840, Com-
municated by the, a o. 44
Hannyneton, Capt. Barometrical
Observations taken to ascertain the
Altitude of the Station of Purulia,
in the Ramghur District, .. aie
Heat ty, Totutemacnue S. G. Esq.
On the Treatment of Geometry as
a branch of Analysis, a5 -- 110
Hopeson, B. H. Esq. Description
of a new genus of Falconide, .. 127
—_———— Catalogue of
Nepalese Birds presented to the
Asiatic Society, duly named and
classified by the Donor, .. -- 301
—_— Translation of
the Naipalia Devuta Kalyana with
Note,.. ae dhe mie ae
———— Notice of two
Marmots inhabiting respectively
the plains of Tibet and the Hima-
layan Slopes near to the Snows,
and also of a Rhinolophus of the
central region of Nepal, .. -» 409
—_—__-_————. Additions to
the Catalogue of Nepal Birds, .. 447
Jameson, Dr. First Report of his
deputation by Government to exa-
mine the effects of the great Inun-
dation of the Indus, Semis, o's
Lercu Rosert, Major. Brief His-
tory of Kelat, brought down to the
183
. Heights,
Page.
deposition and death of Mehrab
Khan, Brahoee,_ .. ae ee
Lusuineton, G. S. Esq. Report
on the Government experimental
working of the Copper Mines of
Pokree in Ghurwal, with notices
of other Copper Mines, .. ee
Nock, Mr. Report on the Road from
Scinde, from Subzul to Shikar-
poor, «. Se ae ee ale
Pippineton, Henry. An Eighth
Memoir on the Law of Storms in
India,.. ae ie aa) OOo
—_-——_—_—__——-— On an improved
Simpiesometer, ‘‘ lhe ‘Tropical
Tempest Simpiesometer,’’ just re-
ceived in Calcutta, .. ae oie
Postans, J. Lieut. Report on Up-
per Sindh and the Eastern portion
of Cutchee, with a Memorandum
on the Beloochee and other ‘Tribes
of Upper Scinde and Cutchee, and
a Map of part of the Country re-
ferred to, .. oe ae oe
Proceedings of the Asiatic Socie-
ty, »- 62-129-284-314-415-513
RavensHaw, E. C. Esq. Memo-
randum on the construction of a
Portable Meridian, ae is
Roger, Dr. E. Descriptive list of
some Coins lately received from
the University of Christiana by the
Asiatic Society, .. Se oe 443
SHORTREDE, Rost. Capt. A per-
petual Moon Table with Plates,.. 103
—__—_—__—_—-_——_— A Companion to
the Moon Table, .. ae ee 2al
—_—_—_—_———— Account ofa Lu-
minous Meteor seen at Charka, lat.
24° 06’ lon. 81°02 on the morning
of the llth April 1842, _ _.. Ae Ss)
—____—_—__——_— Remarks onsome
of the disturbing causes in Baro-
metric Observations, ane BSB:
—_—_—__———-— On Barometric
a -. 298
Memoir
o9
437
SmitH, Barirp R. Lieut.
on Indian Earthquakes, .. -- 258
TwemLow, Brigadier. On Artifi-
cial Fuel. Keceived from the
Agricultural Society, ve -. 228
Ure, Dr. A. Analysis of Iron Ores
from Mergui, and of Limestone
from Mergui, ae Ye 2. 236
i }
ah re a
LIST OF PLATES
To Vol. XU. Journal Asiatic Society.
No. Facing Page.
1. Map of the Route from Sukkur to Dadur and Kahun in the Murree country.
By Lieut. Postans, an cle a oe a oe oe 2. =64d
( Inscription in the orginal Cufic npon the gates of Somnath. and By Lieut.
| Thomas Studdart, A drawing of the gates of Somnath to accompany |
a Committee Report: a ue ee ee Ay. ae ce
2°4 A sketch of the Marble Tomb of Sultan Mahmud. By Lieut. Thomas$ 76
| Studdart, oe Me te ae ae we seh de
| A Plate of 3 Stars—No. 1, top star on the left leaf; te. 3, 2d from the {
L_ top on the 2d leaf from the left; No. 5, 2d from the top on the right leaf, J
Oonta Dhoora looking south from the ridge above Chingno, 2. e. the crests of
Kalee Muttee Chinhaie. By Lieut. J. A. Weller, .. ee ne e> 100
4. Perpetual Moon Table. By Capt. Robert Shortreede, oe 40 -- 108
2D. Cymindine Heterophus mihi, H. Pernigra mihi, aud inside of foot, size of
nature. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. es se ee oe ee ee 128
6. Sandstone Cliffs at Maree. Dr. Jameson’s report on the Geology of the
Punjaub,.. ae ee “8 ee oe mee a0
7. Companion to the een Moon Table. By Cant: R. Shortreede, «» 234
( Chart to the Kighth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India; being the
| track of the Madras Hurricane of 24th October 1842, over the ce
} of India and in the Arabian Sea. By H. Piddington, Esq., ee |
UNo. II. Chart to the Eighth Memoir. do.do., .. «2 « e 4
9. Four Plates of the Genus Paussus. By Capt. W. J. E. Boyes, .. ee 436
10. Ravenshaw’s Portable Meridian and Universal Noon Dial, .. aig oe 442
11. Sketch of a Route across the Isthmus of Kraa and of some Tin localities
near the southern boundary of the Tenasserim Provinces. By Capt.
G. B. Tremenheere, a ate ae ae sig ss oe eo O02
12. Cauldron and instruments used in laying Asphalte Floors. By Capt.
Goodwyn, B. E. .. ee ee oie oe ee ee -- 940
13. Fossil Antelope from the Sub-Himalayas. By Capt. w. E. Baker, es 770
14. Chart to the Ninth Memoir on the Law of Storms in India; being the Pooree
Fiurricane of 2d and 5th of October 1842, By H. Piddington, Esq. .. 812
15. Curious species of Tiger or Jaguar, killed near the Snowy Range, north of
Darjeeling. By Lieut. S. R. Tickell,.. ave At “ig bie os
16, Cervus Dimorphé mihi, Hab. Saul Forests 3d year. By B. H. Hodgson, Esq. 897
(Indicator Xanthonotus, Blyth, natural size, .. «+ +» ** oe)
Xiphorhamplus superciliaris, Blyth, ditto ditto, ee os ee -* & 1010
Paradoxornis ruficeps, Blyth, ditto ditto, oa oe sie oa ee
\Cinclidium Frontale, Blyth, ditto ditto, as cee a's ip 4
t fal adi att he Ge ae:
1a) 0) i ie. c ie wht a itty
at? ; a ie | aN ? i
chy ws if on yoda oat
ait Wie |
on
Al Hae
eh lan rg
refi ‘ rot ¥ (5
Th ea hea
ae Re
mii wie hi Ai
a WR A ‘ona a “ tow
kee ea } ne ibs dora tw ne ety inoia Lin, ‘o art 3H
ean a
pa sh td, Heiz) §
Nitra a
t \
Fei
ra) i
} me
:
‘ at
“*
Leo
;
’
NOTICE,
A mistaken impression having gone abroad respecting the high rate of
subscription said to be required from Members of the Asiatic Society of
Bengal, the Committee of Papers desire specially to note that the total
subscription entitling a Member to all the usual privileges as hereinafter
noted, is sixty-four rupees a year, or five rupees five annas a month.
Rules of the Asiatic Socicetp.
The following is an abstract of the Rules of this Institution which are now in force, including
those printed in the Appendix to the sixth and subsequent Volumes of the Society’s Transactions.
Original Rules adopted from the Founder's Discourse 15th February, 1784.
1.—The Institution shall be denominated the Asiatic Society, the bounds of its investigations
will be the Geographical limits of Asia, and within these limits its enquiries will be extended to
whatever is performed by man or produced by nature.
2.—Weekly meetings shall be held for the purpose of hearing Original Papers read on such sub-
jects as fall within the circle of the Society’s enquiries.
3.—All curious and learned men shall be invited to send their Tracts to the Secretary, for which
they shall immediately receive the thanks of the Society.
4.—The Society’s Researches shall be published Annually, if a sufficiency of valuable materials
be received.
5.—Mere Translations of considerable length shall not be admitted except of such unpublished
Essays or Treatises as may be transmitted to the Society by Native Authors.
6.—All questions shall be decided on a Ballot, by a majorty of two-thirds, and nine Members
shall be required to constitute a Board for such decisions.
7.—No new member shall be admitted who has not expressed a voluntary desire to become so,
and in that case no other qualification shall be required than a love of knowledge, and a zeal for
the promotion of it.
Subsequent Resolutions of the Society which are in force.
8.—The future meetings of the Society shall be held on the first Wednesday of each alternate
month, viz. in the months of February, April, June, August, October, and December, at nine
o’clock in the Evening.
9.—If any business shoyld occur to require intermediate meetings they may be convened by the
President, who may also, when necessary, appoint any other day of the week, instead of Wednes-
day for the stated meetings of the Society.
10.—As it may not always be convenient for the President, to attend the meetings of the Society,
a certain Number of Vice Presidents shall be elected annually.
il.—In case the President and the Vice Presidents are absent at any meeting, a quarter of an
hour after the fixed time, the Senior Member present shall take the chair for the Evening.
12,—Every Member of the Society shall have the privilege of introducing as a Visitor, any Gen-
tleman, who is not usually resident in Calcutta.
ll
13.—With a view to provide Funds for the necessary expences of the Society, an admission Fee
shall be established to consist of Two Gold Mohurs, payable by every member on his Election; and
each member of the Society resident in India (Honorary Members excepted) shall also contribute a
Gold Mohur quarterly in the first week of January, April, July, and October, any member neglect-
ing to pay his Subscription for half a year, after it becomes due, to be considered as nd longer a
Member of the Society.
14.—All Members returning to India, shall be called upon to pay their Subscription as usual
from the date of their return.
15.—A Treasurer shall be appointed.
16.—IJn addition to the Secretary, an Assistant Secretary, and a Librarian shall also be appointed.
17.—A Committee of Papers shall be appointed, to consist of the President, Vice Presidents, Se-
cretary, and nine other Members to be elected annually, and any number no less than five shall be
competent to form a Committee.
18.—This Committee will select from the Papers communicated to the Society such as may ap~
pear proper for publication, and superintend the Printing of the Society’s Transactions,
19.—The Committee of Papers shall be authorized to draw upon the Treasurer for any sums re-
quisite to defray the expense of publishing the Transactions, and an order signed by a majority of
the Committee, will be a sufficient warrant to the Treasurer for paying the same.
20.—The Committee of Papers is authorized to defray any small contingent expenses on account
of the Society, which they may deem indispensable. ‘
21,.—Every Subscribing Member of the Society, on application shall be furnished with a Copy
of such Volumes of the Researches as may be published whilst he continues a Member in return for
his contributions, without any further payment.
22.—With a view to the more general circulation of the Asiatic Researches in India, the price of
the 12th and future Volumes to Non-Subscribers, shall be fixed at a Gold Mohur, and if several
Volumes of different years be purchased together they shall be sold at 10 Rupees each.
23.—The Agents of the Society in England shall be desired to purchase, and forward for the
Society’s Library, Books of Science and Oriental Literature published in Europe, taking care that
those purchases at no time exceed the Funds arising from the sale of the Society’s publications,
24,—The Committee of Papers shall be requested to furnish the Agents in Europe with such fur-
ther instructions as may appear requisite for their guidance in the selection of Books proper to be
placed in the Library of the Society.
PHibrarp.
25.—The Library is open from 10 to 4 o’clock, between which hours the Native Librarian is to be
in attendance every day, Sunday excepted.
26.—None but the members of the Society are allowed to borrow Books from the Society’s Li-
brary and no Book is to be lent out of Calcutta, without especial permission from the Committee of
Papers.
27.—Books are to be borrowed by written or personal application to the Secretary ; in either case
the person applying is to furnish a written receipt specifying the name of the Work, and the
time for which it is borrowed, at the expiration of which, he is to return the Book borrowed, or
renew his application for an extended loan of it.
28.—The receipts for the Books shall be filed and a record kept of the Books lent out to whom
and when lent out, and when returned.
29,—A list of the Books in the library, and a Register of those lent out, are to be kept ready
for inspection.
30.—All persons borrowing Books, are to be answerable for their safe return, or are expected
to replace them if injured or lost.
il
HMAusewum.
31.—On the 2nd February 1814, the Society determined upon forming a Museum for the reception
of all articles that may tend to illustrate Oriental manners and History, or to elucidate the particu-
lars of nature or art in the East. The following Resolutions were at the same time passed
upon the subject.
32.—That this intention be made known to the Public, and that contributions be solicited of the
undermentioned nature.
1. Inscriptions on Stone and Brass.
2. Ancient monuments, Mahomedan or Hindoo.
3. Figures of the Hindoo Deities.
4. Ancient Coins.
5. Ancient Manuscripts.
6. Instruments of war peculiar to the East.
7. Instruments of Music.
8. The vessels employed in Religious Ceremonies.
9. Implements of Native Art and Manufacture, &c. &c.
10, Animals peculiar to India, dried or preserved.
11, Skeletons or particular bones of Animals peculiar to India.
12, Birds peculiar to India stuffed or preserved,
13. Dried Plants, Fruits, &c. r
14, Mineral or Vegetable Preparations in Eastern Pharmacy.
15. Ores of Metals.
16. Native Alloys of Metal.
17. Minerals of every description, &c. &c. &c.,
33.—That the Hall on the ground floor of the Society’s House be fitted up for the reception of the
articles that may be procured, The Plan and expenses of so doing to be regulated by the
Committee of Papers and Secretary, and the person under whose superintendence the Museum
may be placed.
34.—That the expense which may be incurred in preparing materials furnished in a state unfit
for preservation be defrayed by the Society within a certain and fixed extent,
35.—All articles presented to the Museum shall be delivered in the first instance to the
Superintendent of the Museum, to enable him to make the acknowledgement directed in the stand-
ing rules of the Society.
36.—A Register of Donations to the Museum, shall be exhibited at each Meeting of
the Society.
37.—The Committee of Papers shall adopt such means as may appear proper for making the
intentions of the Society, in this respect, generally known.
38.—That the names of persons contributing to the Museum or Library of the Society, be here-
after published, at the end of each Volume of the Asiatic Researches.
Bibliotheca Asiatica.
The following Resolutions were passed on the recommendation of the Committee of Papers,
under date the 2nd July 1806, but materials have not yet been received for publishing a Volume
. of the work therein proposed.
59.—That the Society publish from time to time as their Funds will admit of it, Volumes distinct
from the Asiatic Researches, translations of short works in the Sanscrit and other Asiatic
Languages, or Extracts and descriptive accounts of Books of greater length in those Languages,
which may be offered to the Society, and appear deserving of publication.
[No. 133.
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
‘eXeuel
“rheq‘yo
"783
“uesel
“Wy
sel
“ue Sueyg
o1tAos
“fungp
“qu
eS ET
“1e'T
jo pote
Suty
uedeyiyo
qyer
uate
y‘yqory
190} Suey
ueyouod
qernt
joos
wepeq
OseM
e]OS
ueyey} ‘Uereypns
oyfer ‘po
uefns
yeies
osel
yezey “reyxyse]
Gueq
eulins
_oyal
aaepn ‘o10yeul
qemel fgouerem
oAtq
Jemey ‘1ewep
oA1q ‘uno
uoUl “YOM
epes
2oyM
auey
uvilMm ‘oypees
ues ‘pes
"IeG Jo yaTeIG
eprysoyessy
0} ‘aziuddy
MOILY
0} SOATIIY
queedy
addy
puowly
10,91 V
quowesue.y
0} ‘asuelry
qoouIQo1y
0} ‘teoddy
asne[ddy
qo1y
aouesolLy
Away
way
Auownuy
Auy
quy
JaMsUy
Jayouy
Ausuy
PEy
Suowy
uonIquy
shem[y
Ost
Apeoaipy
QoUePMOTLY
yum ‘suoTy
‘ystpsug
“oAIS
*UeUIe]
“u1dde
suey ‘yor
“f‘yew
“ail
*uequoyeyo
‘oifuel
‘und ‘ape
‘ueATyy W1YeU
“opueyy
Ie]
JO 79981
a
wm aveyoed “fed
fep|
oral ‘ourl
dG ge
QIU ages
em
ueyyzet yey
PpPaa?
oprem
JaIeMICYM
1yem rewel
gare ‘ty0WLI0d
Aaretod
tod
unuftap
opeArd ‘uted
uedIp Yyeyes
yeypes ‘vojues
eUlzZ
ysrreq
reyo ‘yor
uety} ppe
peisn
weiquitys
ueiey oTuint
ueyeqiu
ueley
Sh
mey yeyey
ieyq euooy
ueueAuns
ovveqy
ueypueg eirep
qesty “oy xe]
"IeG JO JOITLIG
AUOUWILY
Sat Vi
ouoly
UV
Ny)
0} “PIV
onoy
qusMIIIIS YY
quesy
aoV
ulesy
uoouleyy
IOV
Brea y,
JOOJYV
0} ‘astapy
POLApy:
Axaqpupy
NPV
ssoleq[npy
0} ‘ulofpy
idopy
0} ‘aleypy
0} “ppv
0} ‘ystduio20 y
0} ‘UIOJsnIDy
aATIIY
uol}aYy
ssoloy
aq 0} ‘pojutenboy
PREY:
uolyesnoay
0} ‘esnooy
yunoos0y
—— a eee
“ystpoug
jo yooTeIq
sefpes, 9U0 YIM ‘piod0y
soyeiuey
uvjey salpes
aeareyo
07490
ueXueu
ueleyes
oseut
es
oueys
yes efaq
zoayed
UeMOIzTES
uevyoe “eu
fom!
saryod
“O11,
sorepuoyo
oy fom
URITyLeYG
ueleyypeq
suey}
ueyoes
$ sem
®@ yses
a
; ueley yey
ueynyy
-IM 9ayed oge}ew
‘Suns| uel] oouns
“ueLOyo ueAip eyyo
“eyUeyy| }
ulyS
ek _*4eg JO J0272IG
vo1tdwoo0y
0} ‘Auedmoooy
Ayrarpooy
queprooy
qdeo0y
Donn Tv
asnqy
quepungy
pinsqy
snolute}sq ¥
aouasqy
sso0sq y
peoigy
aaoqy
jnoqy
uol1oqy
0} “YstToqy
apoqy
oq 0} 81Q¥
AWIQY
soualI0yqy
0} fayeqy
0} ‘aseqy
peuopueqy
0} ‘uopueqy
"ystpsug
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
1843.1
“di,
sepuny
-gaued uomes|
oytd ‘ouns
repieqeyy
ueMol
aired
, poy
uoyy asueyo
‘yay osueu |
oseqnus
soXkvpeyq
yey
utd
ted
ueMep
ueIny uequrer
‘naiurys ‘pueys
-esIm = ‘ ueAUn
uey}] asadkvieSo
ajiod ‘ueAryynd
USE]
osuey|
alse ‘ose,
reezeq
Jeyqdel
yeulooes
ueputl ‘aayyeur
pueqfes ‘puey
-ediyy = ‘ueAry}
uem} aieyeury
ouyos
uoyy esueyo
osuryo | naw
Ivyey
verep
“404
-snew ieused
“oe |
“oryns
‘saaneluns
cr | rr i | es ees Seen |
“IVT
jo yorerq | 2S 02°C
Wa
Sita
aTeMog
0} ‘[Iemog
puoseg
1°q
qsoq
aduaTOARUEg
jusoyoueg
soua0yIued
MOlEq
peaojaq
ATTeq
SMOTIOT
0} ‘MOT [eq
a ies
01 ‘aAdI[ag
Wiea
Puree
0} ‘UISeg
IVs5aq
a10J9q
1ezeq
quu opJeoq
ooo
aaq
esd
0} ‘owloveg
esneoeg
[Nynneeg
4soq
yseoq
Ja1eag
pieeq
"ystsug
uewe dra (ptyo e) 07 ‘1eaq
Ieyew
"Wey Teeyqeys
ueany ‘uefny}
uedeinu
yquinys
ouep
o1meyo
ueyluam
opeforerey
sayouleyiyo
oqeyyo ‘se1eyy
opururieys
ousewey
useiViqey
nel
opoyyo
qaeys ‘poy
refoo ‘oreybn
soeu ‘uefey
ep
o[emap
sepuey ‘1eyq
ueiey sopied
oAueA
qi
oyed o033ed
uefesnys
-ey sasurp
‘uel]
‘urley uenys
“OT[ep
‘aafed
-reyyord
*1efoo
‘opueryo ;
‘oreyp : aaqyed oe
99105
*aipues oyfnyq
ee es ee | a
“le'T
jo yoajerq | #8 JO MoT
1eagq
neog
weaq
0} ‘ag
0} ‘pueq
ta!
peog
weg
0} ‘ameg
piejseq
uoseq
joyseq
royyseq
aseq
uated
Aayreg
yareg}
ulesieg
a1eg
Jaqieg
leq
ydniquegq
que
0} ‘Ystueg
uedueg
[njoueg
asepueg
0} ‘e]Zooqueg
, uodi1os
"qug 40 joOTTeg
ooquieg
led
ereq
a cs er a es ee |
"ysI[sugq
ofnes
— yeyzreqg
-e1} ‘aauts| ojuey ‘nze1e}
"ale y | iefeq
ueke] 0372
ulwe f}
sapem
0190}
o10q ‘9a19}08
ueley pownmweu
ory ‘Gong
ueAryynd
yynd
yepeq “req
uesue
0108 ‘nanur
uey ye yea
sayoryo ‘saydnyd
soWeU ‘saSeuI
unyese ‘ied
“eT [eM
“ostqy
“myqes
-oAeYy
-1eyy Sowoys
‘oktd] oyu T1107
uejayo
osel
saTlexyseyy
ojed
st[feur
yeimey
yea ‘pepew
uej0yx ‘oypes
ons ‘oaurns
uelos ‘ueqyond
‘aay fney
“eyqos
“TAM
Pa |
Jo qoorerq | “2S Jo ere
Pea
Auoojeq
aoueleg
sollfeq
0} ‘Jieq
[req
osesseg
sesioy 10} Seq
Seg
0} ‘ayyeg
peg
splemyoeg
ee.
aqeg
ely
epuy
0} ‘ure}sqy
jeureyed Yuiy
Teusayem uny
rey ‘Aemy
wiry yy Ava
kemy
adIeAY
oq 0} ‘olemMYy
, ayeMy
yuepus}y
aINSI9] WV
A[quiessy
JUeISISSY
eouejsissy
ssy
daaisy
0} ‘yYSV
(Sere en ee eee
"ystPsagy
a a a I a ap ae ee ee a
[No. 133.
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
oyaq
*f ‘sise
wes
‘ueulys
e119aq
ueyyeur
aoesey
(sxayore toy) red
"ueyor | ffeyo
fey ‘ure
ueyey
weres
weind
‘y]tu18}3nNgG
‘zeqye |
‘opuep
-eyy ‘uereq
‘uew| -ueyep
poomysnig
omelet
a
oy ‘Ang
: moyNG
Joyng
zeqojng
ing
Aysng
ssauisng
0} “sing
eareyq aolypues
jo) ‘oonyyo
(sodeis | ofns
urfinyy
puep ‘osep
90109
eoeD
wes
“‘depe
‘uepe uesofiel
ored ‘ynouw
jaunes ‘aorynuL
ull “yep
oyyey ‘omyq
salepeiig
oppe “e1q
0104q
ede)
ooyer (‘yeour
Uld
“aodryq
aq} yNoyIIM) OQ yeow YIM ‘q]01g;
"ie
jo ae "eg JO JOaTeIG
"ue fiqyo
‘yew
“Uarey |
‘opus
(oyey ;
-Juq eyeu) Tug}
Surpling}
; “ae ferp
ER fl
( ‘xoqyuus)
FeoySuns] |
ql Ulva, 10 §
gareyog
o1yom
Sem ‘Wesey
JEMYSIL ‘qey
pueg ‘angd
30s
eeIneAUNny
iis
yes
uelau
aoueUur
uedueyq
nqnq
Jemetol
Teqeed
rep ‘01e}
yo} ‘uey ‘yo
opuey
ZySeur
oyuoyeq (‘ste
-mof jo) uesuey
yey
2910
ourynur
WIeUL
reyoyyo
aeTqep ‘aajed
er] UB
snep
ueyem
uewey ‘ous
O12]
se}jnyq ‘oystys
en rs Fe Me ene | eee ne Sere ne,
“eT
"ast sug 7 epia
"IVS JO JOaTVIq
woo1g
peoig
Nt
oq
aspug
WoOoLdaplIg
peg
ON
yyeaig
jsejyeolg
pesig] . “jip ‘osnf
0} ‘yRaig ‘fes
ysvaig ‘gasuip
eAeIgiaapuocoyp |
sselg
yourig
ueig
aTquieig:
uleIig
(123
-oWl jo) JoTSI0RIG:
ddI1 pallog; ‘yop ‘oye1lop
log
UeW}eOg |
qseog;
fog
XOG
s[OMOG
punog
0} ‘MOTG)
MOG}
wW10}]0q
arnog
‘oueuey
“oquieyo
“qs18uq oer
jo yooyeIg
Fe ne ee pe GREER oe | RS
sekeg
oyein
eyed
ues | 800}
-u00} ‘ueIey [es
qeyry ‘oayjod
yelfny
oppey
O1OM
UOMEU
uemeyqn
Sur]
eyny ‘aosur)
sejyureyf ‘aa10q)|
syed ‘oyereyd
oynyo
ynut
eqaray)
yea
oaieyo ef)
ouey ‘opue
lo] ‘oyeyy
quary “YS
(‘ssers jo) aeyd
ores | 1eqoy
o1ey
ueted yey)
yeyo|
2ayny
o1rez ‘Tex x04!
niayye
ueuel)
nieyyed ‘tyexyd
uepueg
“IeQ Jo JOa[eRIG
q0g
wosog
pamoliog
310g
0} ‘a10q
/ Hoog
puog
au0g
PIOd
anid
0} ‘log
.pog
soIpog
yeog
pieog
101g
MOTE
IZe|
poorg
pesy xorg
purlgy
jyoyurlg
ewe”
epelg
qytusyoelg
yorrg
0} ‘Ng
og
youd
NE
3S9U S pig
qNig
Paley
0} ‘pug
‘Yslsugq
atari
Le)
UY)
"aa}Iny
ulyS
©
>
3
= "ee ]
S
3 |
BS ‘ueysunut
sS
8
S “OSSP]
M
= ‘orynyd
~
= ‘efuel
‘o10p
= aaIpunyy
Ss
3
Ss
S
3
S
x “Ins
“a9pou}
*tuewel
m RE Oa seers | es Be
oD “eT
% jo weeq
=!
oppeyy (seq)
oyey
es
Wye] ‘aaiqoy
eappis
uedeip
suney
inf
reyye
sepues o8Sem
eidey!
reiyiy
aarey
opeqry
ueieyey
ueyieyo
073149
uerey ‘yo
[eu ‘oy‘yor
oles
omep
iyeys ‘teseu
ays
reyo}
ueferyqo}
gousaqorep
UeIOTIM
ueins
fx “euem
qaayo
sepeyy
resuriu ‘eq
"IWS JOrjO9TeIG
(pfoo B) plop
sayog
1209)
q"19
yeog
aq 0} ‘pafo[g
PATO
ssaulpno[9
prolo
MOTD
s9qjo[D
POTD
40TD
7e0OTO
0} “dT
0} ‘QUITO
IeITO
0} ‘uRaTD
Ale)
ep
UHIeTO
AWD
VND
UOISIOUINIITO
0} ‘asouIno.Ig
uoweuulg
0} ‘uInyD
0} ‘asooyy
sd10qD
ZyUry CY
bess fs
PIEWO
drysjary
"ysIpsug
o1apea ‘oprey.is Jaryo
oyoeq ofinyny IYO
ueieso (pua 9q}) 0} MaqO
‘UeINY ueqeyo 0} MeO
ueinyo yooyn
outs yooqD
eaTe[9e} ‘[aryeuUL eayO
*99.10UL saesuyes ssoudvayg
oyeIsey osuyes deayg
“reqyyNs ayns ‘xed ayseyy)
qquew
(sayeus Jo) 1eyUeUH wey
uerey ystiedns 0} ‘asreyg
ep10y (aiy
uo you) ‘aedue|(a1g uo) Teooreyg
yea jouueyy
uP}eUL, 0} fadueyg
03490 aoueyg
0}0¥ saqmeyg
‘gop Tsay dou ATeYO
"Japes sefuem Mey
Pa UredD
xerye} qo} yeyo
‘gake[ ues|Ip Ule}1I9
o[aW “yaa. Auouta1ag
ueAIpeyyo 0} ‘astag
“aay Ys iaq ‘oreys Ayaeg
-orep Inyo UIIARD
reyquies uolneg
yqurep| Arayneg
ueIey asneg
1op ‘urayed arneg
ueyem ‘urqel 0} ‘yayeg
‘gesnd aaT[Iq wo
“Ie : F
yo yoorrg | 22S 40 Perea yst[sugq
aaidny wseldejeg
Oe} ‘301 yseg
ysod ‘aa1j03) aseg
aapes weg
infes yOLIeg
ued 0} ‘Aareg
opinw ‘puooyp| _ UOlIeg
‘WITIS yodieg
| oueyerip ‘oypem seyuedieg
syuoyd smomepieg
o1eMiefures [Nyjereg
alepreqeyy aleg
uemapueg eatideg
oreAurd} 0}}09 Jo 1apieg
ueduid U0}}09 0} preg
gazes “eT ye _ uearieg
WARY Ayo yeydeg
vedo} deg
“MYAR]] nuey ‘purwey) iesns ‘aueg
aeyeAIp yonsetpueg
oAtp aTpueg
sopuey} andey arrydureg
‘o10q ‘O1aq| (‘aoRTYaou) 33n jeueg
“opnu iuny 4sey Suiyyeg
uejoy ‘uepes 0} ‘TI2O
ouuny UOIPTegD
yyorm ‘oqes Wego
-ezel, eyeq Aqrueyeg
nppey eyeD
oafurd aseg
wedIp sueqg . OF Sapsaeg
Jeqq) YOO e Jo UI pearg
wesuty 0} ‘Avig
jo ee "IVG JO JOoTRIG “Ysip sug
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
| uemap Yop
garry ‘reyeul
aaz1ey
ziey ‘oreypn
sareA‘d ‘utiid
osuryeu
o.10q
OMNUI
opueywmeyo
( MO110WI0}-10}Je )
‘uaoied §=‘“quiIp
inse ‘yeqquid
aaijloyp
you
| eeuedtu ‘aeyp
[erey (0013) yrey
90}}1UI
| ue1IUI
aeepuoo ‘oleypue
ae[iyy200
uediy} yyNe}
oye
sarefuey
ueyoeu
qulp-Ouuip
2078}
“oyoyp Geys
-utandns
-ugeeyoied
*yertd
o1youw
o10p
*oppeAtd oem ‘010724
0} ‘aAr900q7
31999
10342]
49°
poaoyaq ‘1e98q]
atid Ul 1e9q
Je9q
PEG
Suljzzeq
Aeq
uMeq
pueis ‘1934 5neq|-eyy
MET-Ul-19}YSNeVyo.1g |
rayqsneqd
(Ging) a3eq
yj UOU jo a}eq
0} ‘qneq
zed
0} ‘yseq
0} ‘a1eq
dweq
[11S Suloueq
0} ‘aoueqg
Apreq
iosseq
r
apliq e jo ureyng
IM peypang
[e}9 UL
Io sseiq jo dng
UeYIT] 2q 0} ‘pszisouen
Sueipeq
wey
oynyo
“LET
jo qooqerq | “2eS Jo 290TeI
Jequinong
wang,
bite)
uedey ‘uepem|
| aa14Nns
i998)
euoy “euooyo
zoMied ‘100jsep
oyered
sappes
oLoyp “Ypnp
qxod
‘opunyq
1
oynyyo}
ueyxod
esauto00d “Jpn
ny
ueyny
ueyyeu
ue10yq
Sone
wye1aq ‘opep
(sdooa} jo) ‘opaut
rout | Mey
puny ‘oxy1
saieq ‘vauneq
ueXuem reyqejed
Be Peel
sueu
ATTEG
eae ter
rey}
eye
qsey
osutd
iy
oremuefnp
unes
aaqqo]
eyed
"uUenL
“1eyeH]
funy
“41
‘o1peyy
° *1e
|
"Ieg JO JeTeIG
0} 4ng
snolng
quading
yng
ang
TWOIsSND
asing
uorysng
PEIPIUG
UOTILATIING
0} fayeaty[ng
uItaNngG
Aig
03 ‘AI9
0} ‘Ysnig
04 ‘aTquinig
quinig
jenig
PMOIO
MOLD
SsO1Q
SSO10)
0} ‘daeain
Yooaig
peg
Loyeaig
0} fayeaIg
Weaig
dueig
WeID
aTPeIO
yoeVig
piemog
MOQ
snojaA0g
i
“yst[sug
"UPMIY
‘oueyyurep
Hep
"ueyye]
“ueyng
1EM*S “VdTeI
‘osunyq
"yeu
oreyy ‘opps
-uviof
‘oppn™m
‘oyareyo
“ueseq
*90}0US
*uesel
“UBIeM
“eT
[noy queuaaog
zynes uIsnog
eseinog
so1eyoey NOD
unyq Ayyuno5
ueues 0} 4unog
uesueyy 0} ‘ysnog
ueyeyp 0} “I9A09
ueyeyp I9AOD
aa10y| Jauutds u0}05
yedeyx u0}}09
aapury 252109
opanug) esdiog
yoo} qoo1109
o1eyn Adog
ueyel 0} ‘ayetndog
oreqjueyy yyiusieddog
uowle.Ly raddog
uepuel 0} ‘yooo
oprea qoerjyu0g
(uw) sam qlajiequnog
fueyf, aSeIIeUl
e ye Aueduog
ieyqorm uoT}e1apIsuog
uekeyyes UOTJESIBAUOD
ueAneu 0} ‘WuasuOoD
ureyes sjuewat{du0g
ound aye[durog
yuep qureydu0g
aoyyzes uotuedui0g
uosel ‘ueyqoe 0} ‘aml0g
soueyd quiog
Suei 10JO9
oysos
(sayep Jo) ‘osnyo) sadead jo 1aysnTO
"IG Jo WoTeIC] "ysipsugy
jo yoreq
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
1843.]
‘PH—‘IOSSIG OUT, »
oyel Alaagy qeyn apseq ‘yequ yqeyo ssa.ljsiq]
‘ppey ulypey| _ doaq O13 9Y qoegq ueyey] 0} “yuNOUISIG
aofnes Suuaag soTeyy ‘nyueyp ysiqy
uvyyey 0} ‘ayeWIIsa ‘aafus 9aTe}| 4991] Weysooys 10 ‘uesna| uektyy ysooyyeul| oq 0} ‘poysnSsiqy
ueijoyy 0} ‘aseiq (nsis eisiaqyeq) OULeULIS uoTVIIIIGT
‘ueqedn treyed ayeoIpeiq reydiyd deymoq ‘uesep 0} *JoaIIG,
. ouued pre1ewg nufsyyo 9oz}1ur ‘des WIG
aaifo splenuq (M09 ® jo) prz|(asioye jo) sung werjoyy 0} ‘SIG
2a1eUl Asdaytday 0108 ‘0}}% - Ysnoqg] ueyyey ‘opne oyyne qNoWIG
uejos 0} ‘arinbug URIS ueyiyqa 0} ‘Meg iayqd sdUsIOyIG
*ofef seq ‘ourys ysnougq ‘ueryfo} uedty} vexeayfo 0} ‘ az0q wereu 0} ‘aIq
uewey ‘ieyf, qua} Ueyou uedesuei JUST “InqorA Tle19q
9010M Awouq (q}0]9) ueXey soy (preeq 94) 0;‘akq oAuns poyleasaq
“weIIyS ueyred 0} ‘1aqUuR 991,84 ¥ iaiq yunystu ayUyeqd
yysta Aauy oyyns Aiq yes ‘osey qusloyeaq
"jue ‘olts ouyeur pug ‘ueMNyd UeUIIT} 0} ‘doiq uei0ys 0} ‘aj0A0q,
inyeyq aoRIquiq ‘opueyyo oyeinyo ‘oda} doiq ueyeys 0} ‘asevaloaq
“oTreqy onyyes Aydug “O71 ourq aiqnoq oind eng
uekuem ooeyy 0} ‘ayzzaquiq “rep ofemrep 100q “yet ayeu MOQ
aaqyey queydolq eyeul “eul Iqnog ‘ure, uelynu 0} ‘Auag
ulos MIG 07)ny 50q uesojzezem ofepnyy ynoasqd
“qyuny} yar MOOT “prem prem ‘qaoqe} 10100q “yep ueyreys [149q
ye JaSIG ueley 0} oq] ‘uepry] ‘eesn uepry] 0} 1edeq
oue soy qseur yuniq] ‘iests ‘jane yaya Aepoq
ynow aspq joup unig Ie} daoq
Una] Appa erqeyy youd “oyoreyo oyyey} besctrt Gas)
ueyey “uewUNns puri UOTSIOATG ojye8 * asuaq
‘ous ] unoueqieyo eM Mop pure qqy uefip seqqny 0} ‘AAT oyeq “1eys ued
‘ofneyes oyynes Aseq “oqIomM pued ‘inp aouejysiq eyoudejoy ‘ueiey 1399q
“opueiqo 1eqo qseq ouvsied qJ0114S1q "TAP] yeM 9a10s 2199q
90}}1UL yweq uedid 0} ‘YUNG uetefeyq 0} ‘yeajoq
‘O¥INT| ‘osaytq ‘orpuooq Sullegq uedeiyed| 1cu0yjo ssaiq uefeyq yeajod
“ue y req ‘aa heley soueweq 1OUOYSIq ueXedutm 0} ‘Ava0q
‘aayeyqiid|; gayeyp ‘ajames Ayaeq ueyeiim 0} faynqtysiq o.19qIu UOISIDOCy
set eee Bt | ect | Sensi See ey (eens ee Se | ee cae ie
“1e ° e
jo sta one "IVG JO 499] VIG “Ystpouq jo pt a "Ieg Jo JoTeIG "YstTougy jo pat ane "IWS JO PoTLIG “yst[ouq
[No. 133.
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
io2)
BUS
*nijed
“yeu
“UePM
“ueyey)
ss ees
“ery
jo yoarerq
9aj04¥
ueuepn
eul
ounse tise
feqy ‘uedeyy
ued
jes ‘aales
jooyd ‘jns
oa1eyqg Seyq
ueqem
0378
yey ‘yo
wayp
ueley
seuyed
uekey jeqy
aaleny
JYySOs
eyy eefepueyq
ueyytoqq
uesuocowl
sunur
aahem
peureysnyy
uomes
rey
oiquiep ‘oryed
aeqyoeur
puna
ynyo
-uedtp yeq
ueueyynpueq
“I@Q JO JooTeIG
pasioy
07 ‘ATA
AT
A{LOUWLIO J
poog
0} ‘Plog
weog
IaMOT TJ
ajeun}107
0} ‘MOTT
INOT J
LOOT 7
901 7
0} Georgy
JUTT
0} ‘Aep aq
2194 xoT a
Ustad
2000, q
0} ‘aeTq
Cold
xelq
quo[njzep 7
Aleyep a
Wel
nq
0} Iq
jo pury “qstq
Sta
Aqaty
aoe dairy
qos 0} ‘arty
0} ‘alg
SILT
SIL
‘yst|sugq
‘oral ‘opuef,
yeq
ueley oind
insur
ueygey] ‘ueyiu
ueleqg
UPI
suel ‘orsyf
uelaqiu
IG ze
oyon
Jao fue) °
des
opues
sepeur
soysnyy
ueheieyy
yquiey “gy
daIEMJOMNY
UeSUeT
uey frp
neqq ‘ftp
uvied eyyey
mnqq “yop
opep ‘ouen
o1yos
eAtd foqeq
yeUIsLy
aayepey
goqieyo
OTEeUy
IBIS
(pooj utoiy Sur
-Sv99) OSO0L SOIHe}
yeyes
yyod
—— |
-aid — ‘uepey
uefed| -
ens ‘ueynyo
uet| “you
“o1ec
“OUULY
yfta
-dep
‘ynyo
“ye
-eyeut £07] eur
‘ox ]
“yoqy
“yey
jo yooyeiq
"eg JO Joaleiq
aIl J ueqyeu Tae J
0} ‘Ystury unyese ‘ared Ie
1OSULT usep “eMeg yyvey
0} ‘purgqy teseme ‘yey Teyup oul J
0} ‘Tt “UINj Ny TINY Ayre J
0} YU S,7 | aouesim MOTI? T
WySty somjnt ny asTey
aq 0} ‘paystury ypnseq ‘oury pure y
Ajyeurg ueyouod *
aul eu sy yepeiou 0} ‘[re.7
Siq uedtyy OueuNy 0} fopegq
1OA0,T qunur Soi
PueF
aTeuta 7 Sues UL09 JO 1e5T
Aytotfag ouued Surrey
0} “peaq seurwmos| siafeid Suruaagy
J9q}ea J uefeyy| aq 07 ‘popusdxg
a[N19,7 opej fons yenbay
Aqlag *O1P} aauem TIeqohg
| 0} ‘rea seiquitd ysejakq
189 J uniiyq MOIqoART
| 0} ‘1aq_ne gq ye oA
qney "ofoyy oufry youung
piers ‘ayye7 saquinp ‘aejey4s OMG
MP]-Ul-1oUye J “weyesim ueweln| 0} ‘ysInSuryxg
leyjey yqorey ‘yy esuedxa
oye ueley soley Hy 0} 4sneqxq
Teyey “ueLeyp VOVICM qdaoxny
ssouye q ‘ory ‘qyep jeunst ‘puep aslIIXA
787 -uered ered ul ‘asueyoxg
Sutuajse7 uepea 0} ‘peaox
: uetesnS ‘oueyeq, asnoxgy
(qJ1MS) 4se J unjeu =—s«O} ‘assueyoxq
aU J ueyqyyred 0} ‘ourmexg
UNE pryeys SouoPpIAg
yst[ sug ceo ag, | 2eS 30 10eTere ‘assay
jo yaoqeid |
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
1843.]
*o1NsS
“O1ey
“dey
“18}
‘jaumey =O?
‘ueyuoy} |
‘oyuoyl
‘ueMSe vets
qnaeq
“yonpueq
22122
"097; eq
*qei
‘ueisn
“Jepuns
Ie]
jo yoorerq
uesue} 0} ‘dn Suezy
uedtp oyeyd yoou
ayy Aq ‘oy Suez]
ouyos awlospue Fy
LOOP jo a[pueyRy
oAtprey| Pp1OMs Jo o[pueTZy
yynut [njpue yy
nqweyo ‘yey puey
saleayyey IaWIUTe FY
ape JT?
aa}0yD “1eA Uey
tel wqeH
uviey eqqurer 0} “quNaXD
ueulyet qsenry)
exe ssanxy)
CUES SDUsy
uniep Japmoduns
do} ynquiep uns)
ol[up 191905
aeynoyo pieny
ojyeu ules)
ses tons)
oieu UIOIN)
aapily ‘yos euens)
yeyq ‘qr ers)
alresued 199010)
uereyqyn 0} ‘MOD
sTes w001n)
onuel} = [[twu Surputry
ueygid 0} ‘putin
erp JOH)
es sudain
Tes nous ueeln
"deg Jo yooTerq ‘ysI[sug
‘ueselul
"yyep
yques
oppem
“e°AUeIeyo UeTeYD
sa}nyq ‘o11pey
yes
oquiny
Geeap
oueyo
opueyq
Oley ues 7e1
o1euos
"100q ‘puos|-meyy ‘series ‘aovy
*euey
“uesn
yory
yeytu
‘uey‘qooq
ee + I ee SS
“Ie'T
JO yoorerq
gou| opueyunys
uue ‘ourp
aokesueyo
o1eyoow ‘osueya
uos
yee ‘seueyp
aaryeq ‘opayyo
uejey ‘ueduem
uede}
ouejsep
aarye ‘oystys
oyeins
. uedip
Suey
oyjed
quns
unuweur
qynu
aaaj1oyp
ri Sed
goueu ‘sapep
oueu ‘opep
reg jo JoTeIq,
SSOUISBIAL)
year)
‘u ‘A 0} faze
BAIN
sseiyy
pinoy
aden
wreID
Areweixy
Al0x)
RUMORS)
entD
SullayIpy
ureiy
ssoupoon
poe
PI9D
po)
qyeor
0} ‘oy
0} ‘MOTD
aA0TD)
a1@ MSSPTD)
PRTD
0} ‘@AID)
qurp
STP
Jas uty)
Tnyayesyy
siyein
Joyysneppueiy
uospuei4yy
Jayjoupuesy
Jayyeypueiy
"ys[sug
“‘UddARIP
“30%
“uRpnyq
“TOA
somered
“sauIey
“1qreul
“0974
"op yo atu
“ue yor
‘gapueiod
re es J en ee eee
Ie]
jo yoorerq
umny}|
ofeseq
yseq
eant
epuel
pura
oareyq
ueAunyg
ieyef
wee ftp
ieyeu
ieyquoy
Inyny
Seyq
Jaleo
uepey ‘yo
UeISTA
redey
oyered
1e{
99}}e¥
omout
opuas
gapuoos
028}
opuem ‘ofe
00q s00ueyo
ref
iof
ueyel
gayesued
iad
oareyo “jel
Ie@Q jo JOoTeRIG
atten
JaUspley
ueprery
Ssulyquer)
sep
sd9}s}00 4
ha
0} ‘Aly
asurl gy
0} ‘Uszq SIF
pnei gy
XOJ
[Mou
aun}10 7
Woy
0} SOATSLO FT
0} {4e510,7
peoyoio7
USII10 7
10.9
ud
WNIT
pus
UMOL
ysal J
ae
qUCISeLT
uorjyepuno,t
90104
0} “prqio,y
Paq JO JOO
400.7
[004
“"ysipoug
I
[No. 133.
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
10
yeu
reppis
quep ofaoyyey
*g0eq seleyy
“oqe]ox Jaq ‘aaqeop
Hel
"4900
aa’ ueXeiqed
"J “lay ‘yo
-uesiep yeye[eu
-deyep
pns ‘fefom
-eqyor opel
Leet
*y foyy|-y ‘eyoynd *y ‘ejos
sedny seur
seul
o}ey 0
olyqe
41s “Ypus
rede
‘ueXepem ue1y} oppes
aoAeiaape
olaape
uaAt} uadrf,
yom ‘fnew
ueleysaa.t
"jane oye} ‘OdSIs
‘4100U0 JO9MSE}
"Memes oial
gieq
aaypeyal ‘af
"rey :
jo yo01e1 Ieg Jo yoeIG
rep "UME
Treyor
A1OAT
qi]
BUY Isy
UO]
queyosuy
aqor
@ Yj ‘0} “Jsaauy
uoljdniiequy
MOTAIOU]
poo]
qsoroqUy
uoTjUa}U]
aptsu
knwbas
pueysyuy
yu
pei
WAyUy]
UOTJeUI[IUT
aquyuy
0} ‘eseatouy
aouetjeduy
quotyeduy
jouuew Aue uy
uy
0} ‘a3 ey TUL]
Ajayvelpowutry *2a1snyy
aseury|‘suneu ‘oneu
2918}
“puey
‘Oy yNS
"07723
quetousyz} qe |
ao]
JJ] ‘oauequns
i “1e'T
ysipsug Jo yooqe1q
eu
oyel
oreyd
aainyy
{nes yeuos
oares
yoru
sauliny
sinw
ueXued IexIYS
ueley rexrys
omny} ‘oyny
* Iqny
EOS
Metra
ure
0139}
opey
uadTy
reqs
aoleysa
Oso}
jeu
aint
o10y.s
ysuts
qyquins
aT
meu ‘oo1qe)
soy yeu
ieys
"IeG Jo JOITVIG
I
Soyespozy
1aepsopy
ie
PIs Jo
aINJIUINJ sS10 FY
souojs[te Fy
ela S|
uewpuegsn FT
puegsnyy
08 0} ‘Surjun zy
0} SUN FT
durin Fy
peyoeqduin zy
Ausun yy
19SuUn Fy
Aqipruin Fy
AURU MOF]
S1q MOH
MOF]
asnoyyT
NOP]
1077
Q0YS IS1O FJ
YOO OSLOF]
as1O Fy
UIOF]
as1oy B JO JooFT
sse Ue JO Joory
"ystpoug
‘oyyeu} ‘ojod
“resunp
‘reddeqys
“IUBMES
"oan
“reyqo
any
OLY TU
“ysede}
*poy ‘eipue
‘URUIIS
"T8qp
*OINULIU
‘UIyY Ore yy
‘oes
‘punu
"eT
Jo yoorerdd
ouy yes
iens
oAtprey
TeAYe}
uefkeyt]
vazpry
osneu
reueyp
Ipe
UE Ee
o1eyooM
areppem
oinsem
oimes
games ‘Mey
qiqo Sueur
uepung
Siyp
oreugq ‘osueyo
areqy
opune
sayyynw
oresed
sesoes ‘Oy}eu
Jom
9edo}
olesey
Iayas
opep
oreyny eq}
lepueq
oyeins
"eg JO J09[VIGq
AOT[Oy
Soy
WH
TH
puelqoryy
03 “opty
dnaotzy
JIU19 FF
ULUISpld Fy
a19 ET
20a fy
sso[dopy
WSta zy
ssoTpaa fy
AAt9 FT
yeopy
yea py
0} ‘reo zy
deayy
Ayiyeo py
Wo
SuOTpea Fy
qora}
ueUIpee ph
wewlpes yy
gpd e3
pele
eH
9382} OY} 0} JsIe PT
o1eyy
pes
yoyoze
inoq.te
Ades
eB jo
ee
—
"ysl sug
sp
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
1843.]
-orel
“opedrl’
orquatp
“901008
"URMOTY |
‘ueseAryqn
‘uered
*oAtdi07
“poll
99T}IYO,
a i
"ery
jo yooTeIq
osstyp
orpuol ypny
Jeq
uedifl
orf
deyo
quis
o1puew
opueu ‘o10q}
Sul]
1e}se
Oty
fes ‘ounyo
o1gel,
(fra
urleg
o.ifos
DALES
ueuryy
weuel ‘yes Saal;
NY
ueyeyp
ueyeyo
o(qoqy
yemeyyes
oyiny
oyont
yeqes
uoMeS
yeyy ‘ozind
JOY
UBINOM
ueMep oeypn
UNIT
“IeG JO JOOTRICy
Su0'T
0} Saarry
SUIAV]
dry
worry
UCU O]}II'T
ony
qury
Sululy
ouly
our]
axl
Sumy sir]
0} NSIT]
yrep jou Wyo]
WSVT
0} “YLT
on]
erry
PVT
0} “SOr']
OUT}IIQIT
Ayrperaquy
qery
pmo]
uosse'T
[eae]
19})9'T
Asoidary
yysuay
0} ‘puary
uomery
er ee ee | re re fl ae ee ee
“ysr[sug
-aakepuem)
yooyfsueyl
peorT (gsr WITH) |
-eyf ‘uofoyq
jo yoorerq
aoXezed
Jod
oqeyy
anoyl
uereqo
uepey ‘qo
jeyqou
wey
ueyIs
oury ‘ouqn
onde
ueXuem Ueno
« 10UI8
JeASe UT
ysns ‘oppen)
1ee | he
yesied
Dea
aaT0q
aeT]I5
repuseure lf)
oy Ans
aoheyeq
oAtp
0100}
opuew
oyaeq of ojays
o1ep ‘a9qeeq
ueyep ‘saureyo
qnsey]
1OOZeUL
yeuyou ‘oAtmyod
"leg jo JoaTeIG
ae eee eee
ainstary
(A[uU0 4003) ‘Sarq
(y4S11 you) “yary
yooary
pooy 0} ‘aavary
0} ‘oAvoTT
aAvo]
leyyeary
0} ‘uleaT
uvory
geOrT
0} ‘peary
soa |
asea
Lane
0} ‘ysney
ievak yserq
0} seq
asensuey
ouey
uoe}USMeErT
ped 2 ee tf
puey
*JAOK) 0}
pe e surked puey
dwey
puey & jo oureT
owe'y
Gavery
Apey
teppey
perl
iainoqery
inoqey]
"Yyst[sug
:(patq ay}) Sueyed! (10ded jo) ‘oq
1] easnq Soupry
‘ueinind ueuel 0} ‘MOU
“rey ypues jouy
“dey oyeyo e}TU Sy
ouynys ounut 2ouy
oxfnq yorsdeuy
ueunys 0} ‘SSIyy
yeysped| Sury
ueieq 0} ‘ajpury
ipiu ‘osses ueWISULy
"e AIS aoaytAeur uly
ueyny URIVUL 0} ‘TITS
S032] gree | PIE
ueUuey yey] 0} ‘HOry
"gaqeyo sefuny hoy
uelequies ‘uey yer 0} ‘daay
iyey “reqeq Tepyuy
“1eqo qaT ‘poq uolj}epunuy
“reyor reyorm ‘uveu sorysne
"uepny uedeqy 0} ‘dung
sore qyey “4 10
ee aomne
Teyes Aauinor
oye} ‘oyoieyo aor
oqes sor
oAtref, XITTOMOL,
iyeme lf Jomor
uvuey UdzII 0} “yuo
iemel VdICMEL
IeyNy 9[}}729 10} paddoys
‘yes vo1eMer
aa1e hoy Meer
“30 F :
jo ema Sesh a i Bat ystsug
[No. 133.
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
12
"991
‘orrey}
“1ery
jo yooyer
ieqey
Jou
eyonul
aa1T}
Ij
sefijyeu eu
ses
sapey x00
qooqyeu
nye
iefuey
ynpueg
901njseyy
uooyy
1eyqoeyy
ores ‘des
seasiq ‘oueys
yer
oes
ye
OMnY
Opo]
aoeul
qiseul
JeyyN}
aaeyqns
oppea
ouryeur
OEPESNHO
iIpueyyo
ieurns
oyor ‘osted
"eg Jo Joo[elqd
(patq @) ‘eureyy
as00SU0]{
SOTYIeLISN J]
(ueayds 10) qT
e[OW
MPT-Ul-19Y}OT\;
QJIM JO LOYIO
uns ‘Ley0I
SSO.1}SI Jl
preysn Jy
uBIOISN I
Jaysn
sn
LOpAN
an
pu
yon
[Hq Nop]
LOAM JO YNop'
qIno
punoyw
asno[|
uchOoW
1ayION
anbsow
[aslo
SUIUIOW
810
quo
IST] UOOW
u00oW
Aepuop
Aauoy
“yst Sug
‘ouRyT
“UeINYYOIA
“ypunyp
°SOS|
radey
"yins ‘1es
‘ureyyo
“yqep “emep
‘oury “yoRy
‘uey ‘yory
"TWe
"you
*0104
“qored
“1erT
Jo yoorerq
o1tep
uedeped,
ynyo “nyq
Seyqru
oule ‘aasie
umnys ‘uoXns
[nd
wueyy “304%
eAry
aasse]
(anos) ‘190q 3}
‘oareyy = ‘BOY
yea ype
yor
sapued
odeaou
342} ‘osna
aesof
pus
ueTysid
urles
ourpuly ‘orpts
uelpes
uniep
ose}
uekeul
peiow
oulUey
oyted
9910} ‘UYNU
ode ‘aaueyp
| ES EG NN | RE aS I Sonera I ee cS tc | NS
"IeG JO JooeIC]
Ara}seuoyy
8q 0} “poxlyl
0} ‘XIT
SSOUTISI IA
OyeIsI
OUNJLOJST I]
JOLT
Iasi
Arostyql
aynUl |]
oul
pul
1oyeM PUL ATI
ATTN
SUPA
®TPPTIA
jasuassa yy
odessa
Aja12 TN
jUBOIPUA |
ALOU J]
aly Ul PW
Jayem ul 60} “J[OP
uo]?
0} ‘39907
euTOTpe HA]
UIVAG JO VINSB2 I
0} Sainsee fq
Surues fj
ued I]
uns & Jo 1219
eT
1948e JN]
“ueyedn
ueAtured
unuivd ‘ueqim
rezeq
geueystul
uetipeut ‘aei0y8
quia
yors ‘oueys
epee
que
simul ‘nieuw
oryeyem
xeu
werey
salueMun x
sv) o1Yy9 ‘oareyo
(Sop e
-ofel
-uetof
qos
goreyeyd
aeqyyouey
aeurd
nial
aoided
0) ‘1905jey ‘aa0p
(uoat] yryse
reyew
yoru ‘vafed
ueqjey
yeqeyeu ‘iedid
2 unf
yeyo ‘jo
sabelars
ueloyyo
uessIp
fe
ee) a eee
a
"ystsuy
Ie]
jo yoarerq
‘IeG Jo yoRIq
0} ‘Aire
asele py
qoyre PA
ye
ole
LaUUe TA
Aue
sate
osuey
uel
VPTTRIN
ae
0} ‘axel
Pre
Pen
pury eue
=D: OU)? Peay
xuh'T
gays 10j Spee
ot
IBAV'T
1@9 9} JO aqoT
poo JO o[pe'yT
I9A0'T
ysnoo'T
MO'T
MO'T
aA0'T
asnoT
sso'[T
0} ‘asoT
0} ‘asoo'Ty
0} ‘yoo'T
ee en et
“"yst[suq
a
13
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
1843.]
“oauy yo]
"OLeSIU
‘T?P
-oAeyored
‘uedeynyo
‘oyRULiep
“TeSuUeWeY
ueyer Ue} 9
“W3ynp
“ueJoul
‘putd
“rery
jo yoTeig
new ‘OT
weley
UG
uefeyeur
oyes
uezjzed
ouereys
ue {tp osred
oulyeu
ounweu
neyo
lesey
o10f
uoMmey ‘aoqyeuey
d01e8 Ul
jo) ‘aeity ‘eefeyy
(puey]
aayjed
aqtyqo
uesuel
seqyup
aidans
o1pny
uedeip
®
sjdosg
ua
B00
Ielpnoeg
[eag
usyeog
yaoovedg
asvag
20veg
Layolg-uMeg
uMeg
yeoq-asesseg
asejualeg
03 ‘Aeg
keg
U19}} 8]
joule g
tadeg
eg
ued
aov[ed
wyed
ulnbueyeg
Jayureg
sunuleg
0} “UIeg
[nyure q
ued
uo ‘19T10
0} ‘97381971149
UBIVY, aq 0} ‘8MI0II0BAG
ofued
oaqrys “qiyo
"IeG JO jooTVIq
uMO
I4O
"yst[sug
‘stpueyyjo
‘uehezyyn
“OSINU
oyinw “imu
‘yeoouelul
wyNy
“‘Iapue
“Ole I
“yeu
‘uejaqyn
‘o10d
°30[2}
ehengeiee
ue}
"Ie
jo yoorerq
ieyeq)
goreryeq
uefeyay
Jed
Jooue}
Jey
eeuyeq
zed ‘yyoq
oAtg
yeuyes
oreyqoyyo
ouemied
wapnt
wowes
O1eM
wIseje
ueXaap
uejed
oped
reseq
oryey
Ieyoy
yeqeq
oreiny
we[eUl
aayeyo
193
yup eueys
apIsiIno
sjaedjng
0} ‘UIN}19AGQ
13AQ
U2xAQ
OSTMI9Y}
cypeut sig
ULSLIO
19T1O
quoureui¢C
ueydig
1IPIO
uotssaiddg
aytsoddg
Aytunjioddg
wnidg
uo1uidg
0} ‘uedg
ATUO
uolug,
300
90UGC)
jo junoo0e ug
PIO
qusWUIO
weuI[IO
0
UIsVO
uayued| pioooe UMO STY IQ
Ipunures
oped
o10y}
yedyes ‘uos
+1eg Jo JOoTeRIG
uevadO
uoryedna009
snolAqg
uoTyesITqO
WeO
‘yst[sug
*punureury
-iyed eq
BTING
‘eyoeUes
“eu poy
*gaso1RNd
xe IU
‘oyns ‘puey
Re
i i ee
“rey
JO yoo[ed
uoirjo ‘yyeu*qou
_
"IG Jo Pe2TRIG
1
ieydoorl Sourjn N
9o}ues Sulaquin
auey MON
uedediu 0} ‘YsIInoN
oyns ‘aaqyIYo a10N
yeu asoNT
ieyqn YON
ueeut ‘yxel| Ale} 0} ‘asuasuo Ny
yyel a@suesuo Ny
pur-fnew uoON
aayeu OF auoN
olayyeq ‘ny 3SION
eeyeu ‘eu ON
yeu IYSIN
sofreyq oaiyeqq a00IN
ewes SMO NT
o103 ‘omeu MON
eu soy pey JOAN
(s,19}s1s)] oreyl|(uos] ION
‘ofueyq ‘oXtayeyq|s,104}01q) Moyde N
ored| pooyinoqysien
oyoored INOQYS1a NT
foo1 akSlaoN
™ms aTPIeN
aoulins pooNn
rey ade] JION
asayoe0n YOON
afim3) st qt ‘Aaessaae Ny
soufins Axesso00N
yem ‘ofan 1t9N
o10s MOLICN
oyeu ‘meu oule NY
oreysn poyen
jasuy ‘[l@N
“ystsuq
[No. 133.
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
14
“oes sayos y1qqey
| leyyyeU qong_ ‘ueweryyts|
| oye JONG "yesnt,
qyeur yong
ored LOATISIIING)
eqyond worsen? "Ieye
sIp (uoly ‘qedered
-dalIp) ‘1aqren’y
oyaediaedna & Jo 19}1ene
nia sMOSTa1IeEN’)
“OLayyeq ousy! [orreng
UeIIM 0} ‘jouren?’ “eyeq
“yTey MA pednipenyy "uvlaed
*reqnut
uevvad umnsuag
opuew oy Apereg ‘ouoyp
9018} puey jo weg "UeIe}
Jehas [jews ‘xog
| uood|(uorydnai09) ‘sng
u000}e 4 sopelatg
ooya.ins 1awINnj1ag ‘yoes
suep layed “UeIe}IU
0z0ey iYyIIq
Ie pox exe Yorgporeyo |
“ewes @ JO} UOISIAOIg}-om ‘oueuIU
feq Aouinof] Aig ‘Oppop
ieyeme ssorqyeg
rey esplayleg ‘o10yp
aasic 909} gq}
aakere yeoy AT Hou ‘werefn
‘ueked ueyyel 0} yng
“oqey} yeqp ‘sud yeyey
‘uejeyy| uUeylel ‘uepeys 0} ‘ysng
me I "eG Jo Wo[eIq *Yst[sug we
jo yooyerq,
JO yoo|eIq
sefng ‘soueyl
ojayo
eles
sauey
Cee
uedepny
qe]
md
sepueq
orjnqeya
yelues
yor ‘yuu
ueindiu ‘ueqep
IZey
aa1yyNs
ueyeys
enp
yesues
ieyyea
sea
ueylia ‘uesey
ong
ue})ny
jesuey
nyyez ‘nqed
pari bi Me
oqqnp ‘pueyp
refurm
uejyuoys
o1jnqeyo
yom
rey
| re ee | ee es Be
"IG JO JO9TCICZ
Ayasodin g yeansam Jajeop urelg
tdug “OSIYY 2914}09 yoyorg
JuewIYysiurg : qny ‘qanyd Japuntg
ued ueley pues 0} ‘Aerg
0} ‘[[ng pues Aeld
0} ‘YysI[qng nyueyp padesoo ‘ajetg
eplig “1yed soqeyit aed
Wo1g *uUeqUIl] uedkey 0} ‘layse[ gq
Aang "ule eu day) 1a}selq
IOUS ‘oreyd| aareyd sofataay| ulewIelg
uOsLg yed) = (ataqo) ‘uretg
SUIUIL puey ‘soel 20elg
19) 6 Pe | oyqourjn}| [OSI g
0} ‘ssaig "WeTIYO oyxyny Suryous 10y adig
eouesalg leu edig
quesaig oueyra MOl[Ig
quasolg “azel yeavol aSeWLIs]Ig
0} UdAZIG -aoung} quieyy lelfig
qofeig 23.105 Ud
UMPIg iejngey | uossig
asivig ‘ueyi|jo ‘saueq ‘oyxe} q}OTD Jo adaIg
JOMOg puno.s | leyoe aya
0} ‘nog uepunyo 0} ‘dn yorg
1apMog ‘goyoeys oied yeoot}jag
0} ‘punog}’o29 ‘ure.s | aaz1e ONE
LOOG oy = ‘aaryeU opuep| Sueyq 10 opisag
Auog “UNUSIP a]qeuosiag
pieys}og ‘ourf naiew uosla gq
puog o[or Ayrxetdiag
suns JO 1aYsI[Og *TeyINU ueiey pexe[diag
03 “Ysi[og Teyou UOISSTULId J
aofo sotjog};‘yeys ‘eyeuw ueypey ‘of sdeyieg
uoslogjyeuru] ‘our! poeg
ysnorg un ATirUL yoru reddeg
*ustTS ee | : ,
ystpoug jo qooqerq, | ZPS JO 99°TeIG ystsug
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
1843.]
uvAese.l
outd
o[ney
-Aefem ‘wesed
ue |
jeyeur
we foyy
-yn} ofinsey
rey] unqjyeyqq
aaqoureyy
HN
‘oyney
“NZBIPY
‘1e'T
jo yoorerqy
-Aeyouod ‘ueyyour
ue] UCUYIA
puryl ‘ued
usypey “ueypey
ftq
ueleyiu “uesstp
{ns
punw
urjos
ayn
ipunures
uedjoyy ‘ueleyy
90})e49
nqyorm
1e97e¥
qeyyeu
seqeinyy
0104)
Teyrqyo
da1ye}
ofurs
diy
ueyond ‘uemeyo
ue feyorq
Iesay
sesun]
9018 M
0.108
(eareuou) uny
ourqnut
IS
omelexy
olyey Souney
o10q
"Weg Jo 199[eIG,
0} ‘pulag
0} ‘Iles
J[2S
1
Woplag’
poag
0} ‘vag
J9199G ;
uoseag
0} ‘Wo1eag
Teas}
vag
0} ‘Yo}e1I¢
‘uelop
“uejUOyS
‘Qasel ‘Ape
jaded jo deiog:
uo1di09g ‘pued
S1OSSIOg uesoyy
yooyoo p42 (0).0 (9)
TelOyas |} “9OSbY
ao1e99
ysy e JO sateag
so[eog, “qpep
peoypresg
predqeas
0} ‘Ag!
01 ‘aaeg
uoi1geg
yses
pues ‘urATey
arjadqyeg
(19up Weg) ITes
1OTIVS *ue}0Ul
eS eueles
yeues jo etppeg ‘oyeqqn
e1ppes “URIEMEY
yoeg “Ins
*1e
“Ystpougq | jo emt
seyynd ueins
niees
reyyes
oAedni
Jou “ey
uefeyq ‘uerxerp
ugheard
qeyn
jos
90.10U
red ‘anur
90]0¥
a We i)
jem ‘Aeyp
1oy9o ‘nioyd
ueioqd
qem ‘eArep
uediqyn
oxyed
qyep
(ured op)
90}}eYo saiIpuoout
yaey} ‘oyles
ueyieys 9} e104
eyoegq
“puny
oreMpuny
iemeyo
aaisned
UPICM
wee Yq
odeip
ueyinys
wee
"reg Jo poTeIq
(pag ®) fooy
oAop SUIY
dun 3y
sedniy
qsnyy
oy funy
o} ‘qniy
asovy
punoy
edoy
100%
W00%T
JOO"
peoy
LOM
0} ‘qoy
JOATY
0} “8sty
adray
WIOM SUI
(au0}s
‘OUury
sy
0} “Opry
aoueppry
souony
qore
S21
or
0} ‘UINnjexy
uorjyejnday
yoroiday
0} ‘puewtiidey
asoday
@ WIT)
“ystpsugq
"UereS
“wereyp
sueAeyOu
sel
‘uekeyeyy
‘URIeYY ATU
“Sereyos,
“uesel
“UeIey
‘ueqTOUeM
*uUeSeM
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
ZeMe ‘QdYeM|
99.100UL |
ouelU|
uelequies,
ueUlse
ajyrew ‘Sures)
Sea
wWesNy]
-5e}s ‘Ueyep‘Ue}ey
0} 138 | ures!
ueles
ores ‘oyVe1
uedseyored
eyqures
saXeyors
uedry} satyeyays
uedediu
yered
uekelia
ueUls ‘ueyeM
qeqes
yes
ueiqures
rede}
ueyied
saxyed
OMny,
opefuerey
GAeip|
uereATyyN
uefed yuru
j10de yy
qsipey
ysedery
0} “lequieuie yy
UOISITO ty
wore [ay
op jo wed ‘ute
suloy
0} ‘esnjoxy
U0}}09 £0} [9037
asnjey
ssoupary
poy
0} ‘a[louodax
U0T}D9T[0I0%F
apnyijoexy
(asi0y
0} ‘ea
0} ‘Teer
| UOlyepUsTIUIODE ry
0} ‘eouedul0da 47
0} ‘aATa0e4F
uoseary
; Teey
aq 0} ‘Apeory
Apeaxy
0} ‘peor
1OZe xy
yey
[eose sy
SuISTe xy
0} ‘aster
0} ‘ules
e se)
qurut
a ee
ee
*1erT
jo yoorerq
‘Teg jo yaeIq
|
uresy
_T
"yst[sug
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language. [No. 133.
16
oe eet
"uel |
eueylia ffiq
pif
*"1eUu
‘gauemeyo
“2a O1eq
*12MP}
-lu = ‘aaqyeu
‘ours |
ee
“ley
jo jooleiq
es ee Fe
aauleyo| sIte}g
Teubs
uepep 0} ‘azaanbg
* weeaqinp ssels Adg
uepueyyo 0} ‘aT yuLdg
ueyyod' 0} ‘Mog
ueAeAUIA 0} “WaId¢
JOM aytdg
ueyny! 03 ‘y1dg
ofueyey ayre|jaay 0} ‘Sutuutdg
ueyoreyy 0} ‘puedg
yes yovedg
ozreu ‘oreyq Jeadg
ueMeyo 0} ‘yeads
saya MOLedg
BeWep qimos
oe} inog
uedeyfea| -e a ‘0 ‘Spunog
ueyfem| -u *a ‘03 ‘punog
eye} ‘ooem punog
osSIs uoog
Sel Su0g
olzel M®]-UI-0S
aynd uog
uly ULY Suryjau0g
peyeul usayey soWIaWOS
N1eU OF Apoqautog
oF aul0g
aayedis Jatpjos
OLE MOOY qos
unqes deog
ueyeM seu 0} nus
aaTqnp ‘aeysunp xoq ynug
seu ynug
*1eG JO O9TeIq | “Ystouny
*1yor o1ed
‘uesuls
‘opew
ueueyeyleyy
“OTTe GY
*yereyes
*seye ‘UeuIse
‘aappe
‘uele y aaTes
*uvied
“stp
ojuep
"127
| JO yooleiq
jreq
ueisey P1503
ueMap yUTYO
0199104
yeyeisue ‘saute l|
ueseyy
UBxTYS WET
ueiey Yunp
yqunp
uesuns
seM
ueyqyeu
olpueu
ueueyseynt
eeynl
uaIMeY
ueuns
Iputu
ourgq
yao
jeyy ‘weyo
WEqIq
mend
ueXkes
sepueyo ‘odn1
yed
yyew
werey yyeu
ueylim eye qj}eYG
yesiu
ueyoos
osed
ouyep
es ee ee
"eg Jo JooTeRIG
Moug
‘oreqyns
0} ‘a1ougfuejng ‘uernd
0} ‘azaaug
rapidg
TGS
0} ‘yayeug
edid ul exourg
0} ‘ayoug
ayous
0} ‘Tews
Teas
({t0
WIM) 0} ‘1eaurg
[yeas
0} ‘1eddite
zaddijg
Ay MoTS
0} ‘daats
daa[g
dARTS
AAS
TELS
0} JIS
Ia4sIg
0} “SUIS
HAS
TS
JUSTE
0} SadUaTIS
0} ‘USIS
‘qouey
"orpurq
‘osnd
‘redis
“oyVEYS
‘oryeq 370M
‘yeynyo
*g01e nou
rey]
qqSIGf-eyo “1eyxnou
BAIIG
apis
aPPIS
‘Ystsug
*ddes ‘dats
Ivy
jo yooyerq
osueqoeu
uepueq ‘ueted
= ONIN
ofax ‘aajos
eersqn
o1pulm ‘o1pueu
asapuey
wey
ueuey ynpueq
aaqooul
oiqoou ‘9eqjnf
sapuooyp ‘ae1eq
Teqp
Uereq yp.
OM*L ‘Tepeyo
Je1ep
ypu ‘oyays
ueiny
. ouyy
osueyq
o1pueynuU
ofaru
ueley
uekepoy ‘wepoy
oom
osuey}
ueqqts
uefeynyo
odtjaq
991eq
; sneu
oueuel
iep
"VG Jo Joe
AIS
0} nyg
Jepihogs
JOUS
qsIg
sIeMeIp J104¢
Hous
21079
doys
0} ‘Jooys
layeulaoyg
Sons
digs
PIPS
0} ‘maqG
+8908
piaydeysg
dasyg
0} faaeys
dieys
areys
adeys
ssoTeuIeyS
0} famleyg
0} “axes
MOpeys
(aeyem) ‘moryeys
0} ‘Mag
quetme]}39¢9
JITAIOS
qUeAIIS
quedieg
OI[Se1ae
ayerpdag
ee es
“ysI[sug
17
A Vocabulary of the Scindee Language.
1843.]
"ueINnS
*"jneyo
swe lft qe)
sayureyp ‘dep
"9U}1) “uepay
-uedueyq
*[0}
“Suey
“oyies ‘opel
‘uBpoy
“IB YVUIY
“OUNTTY
ueyony ‘ueyn
* B10s
Pia |
JO pooled
ueles
ueyed
ue depyyon
uow ‘red
sappes Wy ye}
aayov0s
yemeyo
salapuey
uedIp qr}
qe}
pure} osSes
niqeq ‘opuey
apa
ofeXun
edun
ueuel
aaeys
reyys ‘your,
1oya
ony) ‘oyes
apo ‘azn
i Tey que,
a1jaq
uaypey
nqure}
uoyep
oyep
OLE MITEYG
ueqye ‘uemeygo
unfuey
ueleyxyis
uepeya
eyo
of aq
VG JO JOoTeIG,
0} ‘lapunyy,
0} “\sn1y, J,
0} ‘Mor J,
YSsnoiy J,
yeary
(unds) praiyy,
1oyTyD
AYSIU,
aousy ||
“ystsug
, “weIey osos
j uerey nqey
‘garqound
i
‘ueleyq
saejoupe
“pe
Pi |
g9_2007iT
uvyey res
ueye]
uereyl ‘uezem
vafiep
yound
opan
991994
‘o120p
‘oyoureyo
SueICU
UOJT JO}
Ivey
aa1urep
o1aasey
IIe}
(nqzeu) ‘07310
Ney
uepnt
o10puly
oaynya
uefireyssed
reyssed
ueueyy uos
ueyIs
ueuns
uR.IOM
ueleyquies
sn
IeMjT ‘rveyor
{fis
oreyqun
Ipueyy
"IVg Jo ;o]eIG
0} ‘aed aye,
0} ‘UMOP aye T 3
0} ‘aye
q0T1e Ly
He Ly
— Surjumnbe}
M2100)
poom jo uoodg}
Uo UOIp[Ned ef
Sursuey 107 puryg}
erjadyteg)
utod saddoo ]7ew
chase. the road is very good over a level plain.
Naty
‘ Wie WP
AY Wi ay BNA
pe A AS YEN EN Wey.
S) Qe
Ae WM
WONG PME YN ANH sy
INS ee BN
SN WA Ni Bs
.
4. AWG
Bhagyitck Repeaeaeis eid <
WPew—
2) ay y= ye
o Butehusl Shak
5 Wey
Wate se
‘ AN
wh yy AS Fi a
Wsunnice Se
cose
Jullal Khan Bhag Chacha Phoolajec
Mugahercee /
/
Desert [Tohada
Lat 29°
Chucttar SS
% Kyheerves
Tutt.
| |) Cassom Kayoke Ne S25
era \Shahpore
\ umdah 4) ~ MM,
wee
SA GUS
a arcane —
‘ Ay benmitte Of C biol —
82 Nout 1842 Pahae
AEP azll)
See
DO
SSNS ISIN SIR BS
OK es Bie ,
; ar ee EG ees TS sero Sige epas loeSaenSE AEs el CB Or € :
fe = =
bila
Baa
ae
aS
AV?
ES SGC
ae a Dees
SoA =
DS ale see R ee
ate eRe ass OT IN Soy
5 RASS ORIN OMANAS TS:
TP SCLP ES
SHCACIS ERS TERS SEIS
ON,
epWz
Eas
@ 82 [Be
2 se :
] a
CD
ara
SOS sa te GOR ORs Doe ass
a Oe, Oa 15 “i fe A
: ; aii Bs
iter
EDTA a HO ISSR OR OAS DIO CRNA ONY
SSE
OCS
ey
Bes
ee
_ em
Ss
Ewen
: : a Pe
erinatat io tana ee reel) Mga ne
CH | Shu
W the
Marble Void of Sultan JHabmwd
By Tho! Studdert, luut
ee
ie :
—\O>p)
QV
aN DI All 4 i ie Ve
9 Fuel...
%
~s Te nee ora? my -
at ee | 2
4
ee Eee
AVP 1.
Top Star on. the left: leat,
WES.
2 fivm the top on the right leat
24 from the top on the 27 leat From the tet
1843. | The Somnath Gates. : i
Copy in the Suls Character of the Cufic Inscription on the Minaret
(Munarah, ) nearest the village of Rozah.
4 errand png peallys! KL et ls wy aS wrt? own II ‘he
gsjle ahha er 22,2 ah} UI Seek” on lil al eel Bron:
ais lal} lad} Kole Uy pol yabogdynrel .jLell
Translation.
In the name of God the most merciful.
The high and mighty Sultan, the Melic of Islam, the right
arm of State, Trustee of the Faith, the victory-crowned, the patron
of Moslems, the aid of the destitute, the munificence endowed, Mah-
mood,.(may God glorify his Testimony,) son of Subaktageen, the
Champion of Champions, the Emir of Moslems, ordered the construc-
tion of this lofty of loftiest of Monuments: and of a certainty it has
been happily and prosperously completed.
Copy in the Suls Character of the Cufic Inscription on the Minaret,
( Munarah, ) nearest the town of Ghuznee.
Beal) soya rrirogll nrc! OSI yaad adlyslgal ages} Byau
Soho Soo lila 6 SU Gllbe pol iG, silo BU sol
wramhs} che yall, illahw 5 Ko sss sods os", ysl
errr hend Kens 5 4 Pour 3f whJ ye KI bent sy?
78 The Somnath Gates. | No. 134.
Translation.
In the name of God the most merciful.
(Erected.) By order of the mighty Sultan, the Melic of Islam,
the standard of dominion and wealth, the august Maso?od, son of the
supporter of the State, Mahmood, father of Ibrabeem ; defender.of the
Faith, Emir of Moslems, the right arm of dominion, the Trustee of
the Faith, the master of the necks of the nations, the noble and impe-
rial Sultan, Lord of the countries of Arabia and Persia. May the
great God perpetuate his throne and kingdom, commemorated be his
beneficence. May God forgive the sins of himself, his parents, and of
all Moslems.
Extract from the Journal of Lieut. J. A. WELLER, Executive Engineer
and Officiating Junior Assistant Commissioner in Keemaon, on a
trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes with an eye-sketch.
Forwarded by J. H. Batten, Esq. C. S., Keemaon. |
26th May, 1842.—Milum. Up early, and started at 4h. 20m. a. o.
after burral, a herd of which my shikaree had seen the previous evening
on the N. E. side of the hill behind Milum. For some reason, Nagoo and
Dhunsing, who were acquainted with the country, wished me to ascend
the hill behind Milum a little to the West, and then go over the crest
after the burral ; I consented of course, and believe my bad luck in not
killing any thing, was owing to this mistake. For when I did see the
burral, it was late in the morning, and they were ascending the hill
where my shikaree had seen them, after feeding ; whereas had I gone
round to the N. E., I should most probably have seen them feeding
low down early in the morning, and had a fair chance of one or two
good shots. However, at 5h. 5m. I reached the top of hill visible from
Milum, by a dangerous sheep track, thence up a continuous slope
of moderate steepness, affording plentiful grazing to sheep and cattle,
a few of which latter (jooboos) were feeding ; continued ascent till
7h. 5m., when I halted for a cheroot and some biscuits. Dense
clouds, and a heavy drifting haze shut out the surrounding hills from
view ; this I much regretted, as being North of Nundee Devi, and at a
good elevation, I might have seen a magnificent view of that moun-
tain and its neighbouring peaks, had the sky been clear. Possibly
1843.] Trip ta the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. 79
also, I might have seen Oonta Dhura. Small flakes of snow fell now and
then, and the weather was very cold. At 7h. 42m. started again
up the ascent, and on till 9 a. M., when on the side of a hill North of
me, and separated by a rather steep descent, one of my party spied a
herd of sixteen or twenty burral. We all lay down immediately, and
crept back over the crest of the hill, but unfortunately the burral had
seen us, and commenced slowly ascending the hill. I made the best
haste I could up the hill, keeping its crest between me and the burral,
until arriving at a spot opposite to where they were in a snowy
hollow. Now I should have gone still higher to a cragged peak, and
left a man to go below the dburra/, and drive them up when he saw me
at the top. Instead of this, the shikaree thought I could get close to
them by creeping across the intermediate space, covered by the side of
the hollow in which the burral were. I did as he wished, but the space
we had to cross was landslip, from which stones occasionally rolled
down in spite of all our care. The burral must have heard these,
and were ascending the opposite side of the hollow; when getting
sight of me, they made towards the crest of the hill at once.
I saw them pass over, each in turn halting for a second or two
upon a small rock; but a thick haze was drifting between them
and me, and constantly shut them out from my view; owing to this
haze, the distance appeared to me greater than I afterwards found
it to be; and as the burral are seldom to be approached a second time
after once being alarmed, I put up the second sight of my rifle and
took one shot when the haze was rather less dense than usual; missed,
the bullet probably going too high, and almost immediately the haze
shut out every object within ten yards of me, so that I could not get a
second shot. The shikaree ascended the hill as fast as he could, but
was unable to perceive where the herd went ; and after going up to the
crest, I halted at 9h. 30m. for a cheroot, infinitely disgusted with my
bad luck in not getting one decent shot; for firing through a cloud
can hardly be called one. Started at 9h. 48m., made a slight sweep
round to the West for the chance of seeing the burral again, but
in vain, and commenced the descent to Milum. The hill side was not
very steep, and consisted of one immense sheet of loose slate, an inci-
pient landslip in fact. I descended very fast almost at a run, snow
falling and biterly cold, East wind blowing. This changed as I got
80 Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. [No. 134.
lower down, and the sun was intensely hot, so that I was glad to find
myself back at the village at half-past twelve, after nearly_ eight
and a quarter hours’ exertion, seven and a quarter hours of which
were incessant travelling. The sun when it does shine out is very
powerful, or rather it feels so, and my face is now half raw, and the
colour of a beefsteak. The pain and annoyance of this is all the in-
convenience I have yet felt, and my health and strength are (thank
God) first rate, a state hardly to have been expected.
After breakfast, I was much surprised to find that the Lama* had
suddenly made up his mind to start for Tooling, and had left with six
ponies and two servants shortly after I started in the morning ; no per-
son was acquainted with his intentions, or can give any explanation
for his sudden departure. The Lama’s remaining two or three servants,
who were to have followed with some goats, &c., treated themselves to
a jollification upon the happy event of their master’s return, and are
now all dead drunk. In the course of the afternoon, they came to
where I am living, and one man commenced singing by no means
unmelodious songs, accompanying himself with motions of the hands,
feet and body, exactly similar to those of nautch women at Almora, or
in the plains. Another fell down with an awful thump on the hard stones,
- but was picked up unhurt and laughing. I was rather glad when they
were persuaded by me to go to sleep. These people started early |
next morning. Nagoo describes them as wonderful travellers, and
says, they think nothing of ascending Oonta Dhura with a heavy
load.
27th May.—Had a long sleep after yesterday’s fag, and did not get
up till 6h. 30m. a. m. Though if my heel had not been galled and
face so very painful, I should probably have tried the bwrral again.
Morning very mild and pleasant. Ther. 55° and no wind, but about 10
A.M. an East wind sprung up. Seven or eight jooboos reported present,
and the remainder faithfully promised by evening, so that I may start
to-morrow morning. Busied myself during the day in selecting clothes,
&c. for the trip, and in making a plan of the country beyond the Pass,
according to Nagoo’s information. Ther, in the sun at noon, 80°;
* The Lama of Tooling, a refugee to Almora during the invasion of Thibet by
Zorawur Sing and the Sikhs, and after the spoliation of his temple by them.—
Sd. Be
1843. ] Trip to the Bulcha and Oonia Dhoora Passes. 81
about 11 o’clock it was 5 or 6 degrees higher. During the morning,
_I endeavoured to obtain some information as to the country beyond
the Pass, but a number of people being present, I did not like to ask
such minute questions as would enable me to map down places with
any degree of accuracy, and the inattention of the Boteeas with refer-
ence to north and south, renders it difficult to obtain correct ideas of
localities from their information. Nagoo produced a map, of which I
may make something when I can get him quietly alone. At 2h. 50m.
I started to see the Sunchee Koond, a small sheet of water some dis-
tance up the glen of the Goree river, held in great repute as a place of
pilgrimage. I reached it 4h. 45m. travelling slowly along a gentle ascent,
intersected by numerous water-courses from the hill on right, (North,)
and found it to consist of a small triangular-shaped piece of greenish
water, perhaps 100 yards by 80 in its largest dimensions. I had no
means of ascertaining the depth. The mass of desolation, as described
at the source of the Goree, continues thus far up ; and how much farther
no one can, or will, inform me. The fissures hereabouts are narrow, in-
stead of being crater-like ; and the ice where visible is more nearly the
color of snow. On the opposite (South) side, huge accumulations of ice
and gravel are to be seen in the openings between the hills; and gene-
rally, the sides of the hills in this vicinity do not appear so much cut up
by landslips as lower down. The weather was very cloudy, and bitterly
cold, with a few drops of rain occasionally. I had no opportunity
therefore of gaining a view further Westward, or on either side to any
extent, but I consider this glen would amply repay a few days devoted
to its inspection. Once on either side, I had a view of the old ice
high up on the hills; and its light sea-green color, with strongly defined
and fantastical lines of shape (castles, stairs, &c. &c.) formed a very
pleasing and grand appearance. I returned to Milum at 6h. 25m. P.M.,
and found matters progressing ; likely to ensure my departure upwards
to-morrow morning.
The only weighing implement I have seen this side of Munsharee
was a steel-yard at Milum, and I was told that it came from Tibet,
where they are commonly used.
28th May.—Up at 4h. 20m. a. M., ther. 49° in the sleeping room,
morning tolerably clear and mild. Much delay occurred in loading
the jooboos, but at last all was ready, and I started for Doong at 6h.
M
82 Lrip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. [ No. 134.
25m. a. M. I had with me two servants, (a kitmutgur and shikaree
boy,) my bedding, (no bed,) some clothes, powder and ball, a little
wine, &c., and very scant preparations for eating, the whole calculated
for an eight days’ trip. _Nagoo Boora, Dhunsing, Geitsing, a road chup-
rassee, and the Luspa shikaree, with four coolies, (hired at four annas
a day each after much bargaining,) accompanied me. We had fifteen
jooboos ; viz. six for riding on, and nine for three tents, my bedding
and clothes, wood, &c. Two of these were very lightly laden, in order
to bring back any skins or horns I might procure. One of the coolies
carried my wines cheroots, &c., a very light load, and the articles not
packed upon the jooboos. I had a sore heel from the shooting
excursion of 26th, and could not walk without feeling much pain, I
therefore started in the dandee; but the road was so infamously bad,
that I was soon compelled to walk as best Icould. At 7h. 7m. came to
the first snow-bed over the Goonka river ; at 8h. 20m. near Lungon river
saw two burral, but they were some distance up the hill, and saw us
approach, when they immediately ascended and disappeared over the
crest. The sun was powerful, and my heel very sore, so that I did
not incline to follow these burral even had the hill been easy, instead
of being almost inaccessible. At 8h. 55m. reached the Sungon
Nuddee coming down from the East, two magnificent snowy peaks
were visible in the direction of its source. This small: Nuddee has
salt, or something of the kind, on its banks a short way up, and burral
resort there, before the passage of sheep and goats upwards drives
them to more remote places. Probably had I been here early in the
morning, the two burral I saw, would have been feeding near the
Nuddee, and afforded an easy shot. I crossed the Sungon by a small
temporary bridge, and halted at 9h. 5m. for the jooboos to come up,
feeling very tired ; sun unpleasantly warm to the skin, though not high
I fancy in actual temperature I started again at 9h. 30m. and at 10h,
15m. reached Tulla Sulong, a small rather level spot, furnishing a
little grass. Halted here to breakfast, and let the jooboos feed before
moving on to Doong, where there is no pasturage for cattle. Slept
- till half-past twelve, when breakfast was ready. - A strong South wind
blowing, with dust in abundance. Opposite Sulong, on the right bank
of Goonka (West) is a tolerable waterfall, or rather series of cascades
from the top to the bottom of hill. The road thus far, (alternately on
1843. ] Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes, 83
either bank of the Goonka, but chiefly on the left,) infamously bad. The
hills on either side a series of dreary looking landslips or bare sheets
of rock ; and in the rains, when Bhoteeas travel up and down, this road
must be really dangerous from constant landslips and falling in of
the banks. Hardly any snow visible on the hill sides ; and Oonta-Dhura
itself is nearly equally bare, if it is the hill pointed out to me when
about half way. ‘Ther. 77° in tent, at 1h. 30m. Pp. M.
Riding a jooboo is by no means a bad mode of travelling. You sit
comfortably in a high demi-pack saddle,* which affords a capital
hold in front ; a man leads the jooboo by a string passed through its
nose; and the pace though slow is very sure; two or three times during
this trip my jooboo fell, but no harm was done. In general, it is wonder-
ful what difficult ground they will carry a man over. Jooboos laden in
fifty minutes, and we started again at 3 p. mM. Weather had become
cloudy and cold. At 4h. 40m. crossed to right bank of Goonka river
by a natural bridge formed by three rocks, with fissures filled in. by
loose stones where requisite, and at 4h. 45m. halted at Doong, (no
village,) a little West of the junction of the Goonka and Lusher rivers,
which come down from the N. W. and N. E. respectively.. The
Goonka is covered by a huge mass of ice and stones, 4 or 500 yards
higher up; and so doubtless is the Lusher, though not where it is visi-
ble from Doong. Road very bad; hills on either side nothing but
landslips or bare precipices, with very little snow visible. I had one
fine view during the afternoon march of a huge mass of ice in the most
fantastic shapes, behind three peaks West of the Goonka; but with
this exception, the prospect everywhere was most desolate, and above
Doong, it is, if possible, more so. Not a shrub, and hardly a blade of
grass visible any where. One eagle, two or three of the chough birds,
and as many smaller birds, were all the signs of life met with. There
was formerly a shorter road to Chirchun up the Lusher river, but it
has been abandoned as too dangerous from new snow covering fissures
in the old ice, and yielding when trod on, thus instantaneously preci-
pitating man and beast down a narrow fissure, heaven only knows how
deep. Latterly, when men have attempted this route, they did so with
* The pack saddle used for jooboos is an excellent one; and I took one down as a
pattern, in event of one’s requiring to use bullocks or ponies as baggage animals.
84 Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. [No. 134.
a stout long stick tied to the waist, in order to catch the sides of
fissures, and thus afford a chance of getting out again. This might
answer when the stick happened to be transversely to the fissure ; but ~
when lengthwise with it, would be no avail. I suggested an improve- —
ment to Nagoo, (who told me this,) viz. tying two sticks cross-wise to —
the waist, and thus ensuring that one of them would catch the side of :
the fissure whichever way it ran; but these sticks would be a most |
awkward incumbrance to walking in such hills. Just as we reached —
Doong, two or three men were seen in the distance going towards the ~
Pass. They would sleep on the road if unable to cross before dark ;
but the very circumstance of their attempting the Pass at so late an —
hour, would seem to prove, that its difficulties have been much over-
stated. I shall (D. V.) be however more qualified to judge by this
time to-morrow. At dh. 55m. p. Mm. ther. 524° in open air, boiled —
at 1884°, elevation (by Barron*) 14.523. Surely this is too much. ? :
The rate of travelling to-day may have been 2} to 24 miles an hour.
29th May.—Up at 4h. 30m. a. M., after a very bad night’s —
rest. Ther. 35° in sleeping tent; boiled at 189°, which would ©
reduce the elevation, noted from Doong yesterday, to 14,214 feet. ©
Started at 5h. 10m., morning deliciously clear, but very cold with a —
light West wind. Ascent till 6h. 15m. up mass of ice and stones, —
close under hill to N.E., quite bare of snow. The hills to S.W. from
a quarter to half a mile distant being tolerably covered with snow. The q
top of this ascent is where Batten turned back, yesterday twelve
month, on account of snow falling and being thick all round. What ;
a contrast to this year! From 6h. 15m. to 6h. 45m., a slight descent, |
-and then along level snow-beds with the Goonka river, now a very .
small stream, flowing on my left. There had been very hard frost ;
during the night, and every little pool of water was covered with from —
a quarter to half an inch of ice. Snow very firm and crisp. I had walked E
for the three-quarters of an hour, and now halted for the people to come
up. Started again at 6h. 55m. up a steep ascent of loose stones, &c. %
(called Bumras;) reached the top at 7h. 15m. and then turned to the q
right Eastward. Some fine masses of ice on hill to left or West. The soil q
* Mr. Barron of Shahjehanpoor, a great traveller in the hills, gave Lieut. Weller
some table for calculating heights by the boiling temperature, and this is always al-
luded to.—J. H. B.
1843. ] Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. 85
on the top of Bhumras, and in advance, almost black. Oonta Dhura
was visible after turning Eastward, and seemed to be a low black hill,
of moderate steepness, with more soil than snow visible. But-its con-
tinuations East and West were finely covered with snow. Continuous
though not steep ascent till 8 o’clock, when I reached the foot of
Oonta Dbura, (called Oonta ke Jum, ) where people generally halt before
cresting the Pass. A small rill of water goes down to the S. W., and
probably forms the source of the Goonka river. Road (or track) thus
far chiefly over snow-beds, said to cover enormous masses of ice ; these
melt and split into fissures during the rains, causing much inconveni-
ence and danger to travellers.
I resolved on walking over the Pass to ascertain how my breathing
would be affected ; and started without making any halt at the foot.
_ The ascent was longer than I expected, but I walked very slowly, halt-
\
|
|
ing every now and then for a second or two, so as not to lose my wind,
and at 9h. lim. a. m., reached the summit. The hill side was very
wet, but whether from snow recently melted, or from springs below
the surface, I know not. During the ascent, I certainly felt my breath-
ing slightly affected, and had I walked fast the affection would proba-
bly have been severe. In going over the Luspa hill on-the 24th instant,
I felt much greater distress, but there I travelled quickly, and the sun
was more powerful. During my ascent of Oonta, the sun shone out
with great splendour ; and the dazzling brilliancy of the snow on either
side was truly wonderful. I had never seen or imagined any thing
comparable to it, what then must be the effect when nothing but snow
is visible in every direction? The Booteeas all put on thin horse hair
spectacles. I had on a pair, and a green veil also, but my eyes soon
became painful, and I was almost stupid from pain before reaching the
halting place of Topee Doonga. What may be the difficulties of this
Pass after a severe winter, I of course cannot judge ; but it would be
absurd to speak of difficulties this year, (except the minor ones of cold
and glare); and I feel certain that I could walk from Milum to the
summit of Oonta Dhura in one day; the only drawback being the fear-
fully bad road.*
* At the foot of Oonta, snow pheasants (huoneal or huonwal) were calling, but
high up in the snow. Itis hard to imagine what these birds live on, there not being
a berry or particle of vegetation for miles round. Yesterday a man brought me seven
86 Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. (No .134.
On the Pass the ther. when taken from its case was 45°. It rose
in the sun to 61°, and boiled at 182°, or a little under, snow being used
instead of water. The elevation by Barron’s rule would be 18,540
feet ; but this must be greatly in excess. There are five small ridges
of stone in the crest, which look like pillars from below. It is believed
that a ghost kills any one who sleeps near them; but more probably
cold is the agent. There was a bitter cold wind blowing, and it is
described as awful towards the end of the rains. Dhunsing told me,
that in September twenty-five years, ago, he lost 120 sheep swept over
the North face of the Pass by the wind. His servants escaped to
Milum with great difficulty ; and the borax with which the sheep had
been laden, was recovered next season. The south face and crest of
the Pass consist of a black soil, apparently the detritus of a black slate,
which latter is visible here and there below the soil. I was much dis-
appointed with the crest of the Pass. The view South is very limited.
Nundi Devi not visible, North-East and North a few hills are visible,
North-west, is a sea of hills moderately covered with snow, and hard-
ly any of them appearing of great elevation. Indeed, were it not for
the Louka river, (a small stream,) rising at the foot of the North
slope, and flowing due North, I should have been sceptical as to stand-
ing on the crest of one of the few Passes into Tibet, and the highest
one too. North-east are three bare hills, the first called Gentee, with
behind it, not visible, two other hills, which have to be passed on the
direct route to Chirchan. I know not what is the name of the
centre hill, the third is Chingoor. North, in the distance, is the Balcha
ridge, the last range between Hindoostan and Tibet, with intermediately
a high gorge above (south of) Chingoor, connecting the hills East and
West. From North to nearly West, there is a decent assemblage
of hills well ‘covered with snow, (those N. E. and N. having very
little). The highest of these is a conical peak above (North of)
Gertee, where copper* is said to be found. . This peak bears about due
N. W. from the crest of the Pass. Girtee is on the road from Mularee
below the Neetee Pass, but to reach either Gertee, Mularee or Neetee
eggs from the nest of one of these birds, and wanted me to eat them. 1 declined this,
and he enjoyed them for his own dinner, cooked up somehow with ghee. The eggs
were nearly as large as turkey’s eggs, white, with lightish-brown spots all over.
* There are lead mines at Ghentee.—J. H. B.
ot
i,
Ln
‘¥
= - geet A Ye
1843. | Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. 87
from Jawahur, without going round by the South, you must cross
Oonta Dhura, of which I was not before aware. At 10h. 10m. a. M.,
I commenced descending the North slope of Oonta Dhura, one unbro-
ken sheet of steep snow till 10h. 37m. Thence moderate descent,
chiefly over snow-beds cut into most troublesome ridges by the wind,
till 11h. 35m., when I crossed to left bank of Louka river. Continued
along this bank over snow-beds and bare hill sides, till 12h. 45m., then
turned sharp to left (West,) and after the worst descent I have yet had,
through snow and slush, reached Topee Doongah. Halting place (no
village) at 12h. 58m. awfully tired ; face blistered by sun and wind, and
eyes very painful: Topee Doonga is a small level spot on the left
(South) bank of Louka river, which latter turns to the West where I
did, being joined there by the Doldunkur Nuddee coming from East,
between the second and third hills, noted as visible to N. E. from the
crest of the Pass. There isa little herbage at Topee Doonga, and further
West, grass and low brushwood (on the opposite side) are tolerably plen-
tiful. South, the hill sides are covered with snow, and recede gently for a
short distance North; across the river is one bare precipitous sheet of
rock, with landslips along the base. East is the West face of the second
hill mentioned above, equally bare and precipitous, with the Doldunkur
Nuddee coming down between its North, and the South side of Chingoor
hill. West, about three-quarters of a mile down, the united Louka and
Doldunkur streams are joined by the Torgurh Nuddee coming down
from S. E. by S. These united, flow on Westwards, through a wide
gravelly channel to Gertee, where another stream joins, and the whole
flow on to Mularee, Josee Muth, &c., forming I imagine the Geenthee
river, marked in sheet sixty-six of Indian Atlas. The junction of the
Torgurh and Louka is curious.
They flow nearly parallel for some hundred yards before the junc-
tion, the former along the top, and the latter along the base of a
precipice, which may be 150 yards high at its highest point, and dimi-
nishes to nothing at the junction. At 6h. 30m. Pp. m. ther. 48°, boiled
at 1863 or 187°. Next morning at 5h. 30m. a. M. ther. 28°, boiled at
1863° or 1874° ; elevation of Topee Doong (a bitter cold place) from
15,759 to 15,450 feet by Barron’s rule.
30¢h May—Up at 5 a. M. ther. 27°* in my sleeping tent, but as there
* Compare with Calcutta same hour and same date.—J. H. B. Probably not below
_ 80°—Ep.
-
88 Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. [ No. 1384.
was no wind, I did not feel the cold so much as on the top of Oonta
Dhura yesterday, where the ther. was 61°. Saw a large raven (size of
the English raven, or very near it ;) but could not get a shot at him.
Started at Gh. 50m. a. m., descended to river, then turned up East
along it, and at 7h. 8m. a. M. crossed the Louka, just above its junc-
tion with Doldunka, stream rapid, but not above knee-deep, and some
twenty feet wide. An East wind had sprung up about starting time,
and brought intense cold with it. Shortly after the wind lulled, heavy
clouds to N. W. and South, and a light snow falling, and continued
up the Doldunka, chiefly flowing under snow between two steep sheets of
rock, till 7h. 35m., then turned up left (North) to the Kalee Mutteea
Churhai; very steep, covered with loose stones over a black crumbling
slate. The latter part of ascent was less steep, but without holding on
by a jooboo’s tail, the whole of it would have been a most tedious
job. I picked up a few bad fossils by the way; also pieces of a thin
cylindrical slate-coloured stuff, called doda ka puthur, (milk stones)
and used by the Booteas as an application to swelled nipples in women.
Reached top of ascent at 9h. 15m. (This is the intermediate gorge men-
tioned as visible from Oonta Dhura.) Occasional snow beds during the
latter part, hills on either side bare precipitous sheets of sand-stone.
Had a good view of Oonta, and took a rough sketch, to be perfected
hereafter, perhaps.* The crest is composed of small loose stones rising
in a sweep to the top of the hills on either side (East and West) North
beyond a good extent of valley and low hills covered with brush-wood,
rises the Buloha range, beyond which are the plains of Tibet. This
range is here and there streaked with snow. The hills from Oonta,
thus far, seem chiefly of brown sand-stone. The strata mostly dip
_ East, and are very vertical. I observed some strata here and there. On
the crest here I picked up a good sized piece of white alabaster-
looking stone, very soft. The Booteeas consider it of value, call it
huon phool, (snow flower,) and dissolve it in water with two or three
medicines as a lotion for sore eyes, &c. &c. Commenced the descent to
Chingoor, (a halting place only,) at 9h. 40m.; route lay about due
North over alternate snow-beds and loose stones from the hill above
(E.); and was bounded E. and W. by two high ranges of (I think)
* See Sketch.
———
1843. | Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. 89
bare sand-stone, with a small stream flowing North in the hollow
between them, chiefly under snow-beds. The hills on either side are
perpetually crumbling away, thus forming immense heaps of loose
stones all along their bases. There was a good deal of snow on the
North slopes of the ravines (or khunds) and otherwise the prospect was
extremely desolate. At Ilh. 55m. reached Chingnoo, after a most
tiresome and hot descent. Nagoo, &c. wanted to go further, as but
very scanty forage was procurable here for the cattle, (the first vegeta-
tion we had met with since morning) ; but I was quite tired and would
go no further before eating something. Chingnoo is a small level spot
on the right or East bank of the stream noted above; and on the left
or South bank of another stream coming down from the East, and join-
ing the former one here. The united streams turn West a mile or two
in advance, and eventually join the Louka, &c. by a cut through the
hills near Gertee. Just north of Chingnoo, across the stream, a suc-
cession of low hills commence extending northwards to the river
below Lufkhel. These are covered with a low creeping thorn, (called
damah,) which is found to within two or three miles of Milum ; and
the hollows afford very good pasturage. Just as we approached
Chingnoo, the Lama, (who had been encamped somewhere near us
at Topee Doonga yesterday,) was seen starting on his march from
Chingnoo, with his small party, seven or eight men, and half a dozen
ponies. These ponies must be really good ones to have come thus far
without accident; but they were knocked up by the Pass, and com-
pelled the Lama tovhalt yesterday. This was very fortunate, for I can-
not attribute the Lama’s sudden departure from Milum to any thing
but fear of my crossing the Pass; or to a desire of stopping me
by going ahead, and giving information. After breakfast, we shall
move on until we come up with his party; and then by counting his
people morning and evening, all fear of annoyance will be obviated.
Eloquence will also be exerted to convince the Lama, how unjust it
would be to cause me trouble after the kind reception he met with in
our territory ; and he will be threatened with non-admission into our
provinces again, should he cause the Booteeas trouble on my account ;
so I hope we may manage him yet. Altogether though, I do not quite
like the state of affairs, and glad enough shall I be to find myself safe
again at Milum, after a view of Tibet, and a little of the glorious sporting
N
90 Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. [No. 184.
said to abound hereabouts. ‘‘ Rheow is the talismanic word to make —
a jooboo quicken his pace, though a whip has better effect. Safe as —
they are, my jooboo has fallen three times with me; but no where in ;
very dangerous places, and no harm done. |
Snow-beds are always most difficult at the sides, the middle being —
generally firm and hard.
Pace to-day one and half mile an hour, or possibly a little more on ;
the whole. Yesterday one and quarter to one and half mile; and the ©
day before about two and half miles an hour. ;
Booteea tents all blanket, or upper part blanket and lower part —
cloth. A strip of about six inches wide is left open along the top to let —
smoke out, the rains never being heavy enough to cause inconveni-
ence from such an opening. Dhun Sing tells me, that just now it is so
hot below Dhapa, that sealing wax melts if carried on the person
during the day!!!(?) The appearance of hills looking at them from
South and from North is widely different. Looking from the South, —
you see only the South face of ravines, &c., on which hardly a trace of
snow will be visible. But looking from the North, you see only the .
North slopes; and these are generally covered with snow, giving the ©
entire hill the appearance of being so covered. ]
At Topee Doonga this morning, I saw a tolerable number of larks, or
some small bird of this sort ; also one or two of the small purple black ‘
birds, a specimen of which I unfortunately failed to procure. At Ching- ~
noo, several choughs were flying about ; their call exactly like the cat- ~
call used by young blackguards at home. At Chingnoo, were numer-_
ous burrows of the “ pfheaf.” This animal is described as smaller than a_
dog, of a reddish colour, sits up at the mouth of his burrow, and remains
dormant in the winter. It must be a squirrel ; much to my vexation I
failed in even getting a sight of one. At Chingnoo 2h. 30m. pP. M
ther. 68° in shade of tent, boiled at 1864 or 187° elevation (by Barna q
15,759 to 15,450 feet. ,
30th May.—At 3h. 25m. P. M., the servants started for Lufkhel, and 4
I went with Nagoo across the Chingnoo stream, and along its west
bank to look for burral. After some time, I saw three on the hill side, a ‘
long way off and far up; had a long sneak, but found the hill side so
steep, that when within fifty yards of the burral, I could not depress —
my gun sufficiently to fire at them standing under a rock. They q
1843. | Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. 91
immediately got sight of me and rushed off, so I only had one long
running shot, and missed. We then turned down into the bed of the
stream, and walked for some distance along the snow-beds covering it,
between high steep cliffs. No more burral, however, were visible, and it
became time to move on. Turned up East over some low hillocks,
most pleasantly covered with stunted palm trees* in flower. The low
close thorn also in flower, yellow-shaped, like sweet pea flowert. Now
and then the iris of deep or pale blue color, a sort of wild garlic which
the Bhooteeas eat, in appearance just like iris or narcissus shoots;
*‘dooloo,” I think rhubarb,t and most delicious looking emerald
colored young grasses, fringing little rills of water flowing between the
hillocks. Hereabouts I saw a small dry water-course coming from
the top of a low isolated black hill (bare ;) in the bed of this were
numerous salagrams, which had evidently been washed from the soil
during rain. I picked up thirty or forty, and could have found hun-
dreds, but time admitted not. Very few of the specimens were per-
fect, as they get broken when rolled down by the stream; but I
should think perfect specimens could be obtained by digging. Salg-
grams are formed by an incrustation of (probably lime) stone enclosing
the ammonite in a spherical shape, of all sizes, from a marble to a man’s
head nearly. These cases as it were, burst either from some agency
within themselves, or on being set in motion by water falling, &c. and
display the fossils. Yet among the numbers that I broke, (they were
very hard,) I never found a decent specimen inside, and rarely even
the trace of one. In all of these I suppose the originally enclosed
shell must have been decomposed and absorbed by some peculiarity
in the chemical nature of the enclosing mass. After continuing East
for some distance over the same kind of ground, (said to be usually a
favorite resort of burral, though none were visible at the time,) I came
upon the road to Lufkhel; and while descending to the river saw a
little East of the road, a small triangular sheet of deep blue water,
perhaps eighty yards long each side. North (in advance) across the
river about a mile off, another sheet of water was visible, less darkly
colored than this; two or three rills of water flowed down along East
* Probably a kind of willow is here meant.
¢ Tartaric furze and juniper bushes are the thorny plants in the Passes.
£ Yes.—J. H. B.
92 Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. [No. 134,
of road to the river, the bed of which, including debouchements of
these rills, is fully half a mile wide, formed of loose stones and gravel.
At 6h. 55m. Pp. M., reached the river flowing from East nearly due
West, and joining the Chingnoo stream about a mile or less below
Lurkhel, after passing through a magnificently bold cleft in the hill
of solid rock for many hundred feet of perpendicular height. This
river comes from the hill North of Lufkhel in several small streams.
These unite somewhere to the East, and had been swollen, either by
rain or some other cause into a rapid torrent thirty or forty yards wide,
through which the jooboos carried us with very great difficulty. In
fact it was dangerous work, but this rapid rise will probably decrease
very speedily, as the river is usually fordable by sheep. I reached
Lufkhel at 7h. 10m. a. M., much fatigued. This is a pretty halting
place (no village) a few hundred feet above the river, shut in by an
amphitheatre of low hills, which form the base of the last range before
Thibet. The thorn bush (damah) is tolerably abundant, and the
hollows are covered with deliciously emerald-colored young grasses.
The place is a favorite pasturage, and during the rains some of the
nearest Thibet villagers pitch their tents here. Lufkhel and Topee
Doongah were the refuge of numerous Thibetans, when the Seiks ad-
vanced last year.
My servants and jooboos had arrived sometime before me, after two
and three quarter hours’ travelling from Chingnoo.* Their road was
excellent, and lay over a succession of the small hillocks I have de-
scribed. The Lama was encamped at Lufkhel in a great state of alarm,
and very indignant with Nagoo and Dhunsing, (whom he knew well,)
* At and about Chingnoo, there is a little grass for cattle, and I found one salgram
here. I saw also the foot-print of an animal called “chunkoo.’’ This I had sup-
posed to be a small tiger, but from subsequent description of the color, hunting in
packs, and lolling out the tongue when fatigued, it must be the wolf, and judging
from the foot-prints, of large size. The ‘* chunkoo’’ will kill jooboos, also whole
flocks of sheep and goats if left untended. It also hunts the burral, but is said never
to attack aman. The ‘‘ thurwah,’’ is asmaller animal, slightly marked like a tiger, and
hunts singly. (Perhaps Felis macrocelis hitherto supposed to be confined to Sumatra,
but of which a specimen has just been received in our Museum from E. B. Ryan,
Esq. who obtained it at Darjeeling. Eds.) Possibly I may yet see these animals. The
two streams at Chingnoo have rather wide gravel beds, denoting a large body of water
at some period of the year.
Much to my surprise, Nagoo informs me, that the'jooboo will breed, either male or
female, with the cow or bull. The produce is called ‘ toloo,’’ is but little used, and
I fancy but rare. Nagoo could not tell me where one was to be seen.
ee eee
a a SS SL RS
ET
1843. | Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. 93
for having brought me across the Pass. Fortunately, his people were
all present, and Nagoo had no difficulty in persuading him, that I had
come solely for shooting, and did not intend to advance further. Two
men had just arrived from Dhapa or thereabouts in search of the
Lama, bringing ghee and rice for his consumption. Their only news
was, that the Lhassa force of from 5 to 7,000 men had moved on
Ladakh, where the Seiks continued to hold out, and would probably
have reached ere this date. These two men were stupid fellows, and
had not been within many days journey of Lhassa, so that their in-
formation is deserving of but little credit. The general impression is,
that the Lhassa force, even if it has moved, will not be able to cap-
ture the citadel of Ladakh from the 300 Seiks holding it.
3ls¢ May.—After a horrible night’s rest, dreams of wonderful as-
cents and descents, &c., I rose at 5 a. mM. and prepared for a hunt
after burral. Ther. 36° in sleeping tent, boiled at 188°. Elevation
14,523 feet. I crossed the river and ascended a rather steep hill West of
the road, when on the other side, much to my delight, I saw five or six
burral. The first that caught my eye was lying down at about ninety
yards. I took a good aim with the long rifle, and hit him in the
middle of the back. He jumped up and stood, the others running off,
I fired one barrel of my double gun, (I thought I missed,) the bullet of
which entered the jaw a little below the eye, still the burral stood, and
it seemed doubtful whether I should get him, though he was pouring
blood; but my long rifle was now ready again, and after numerous
attempts I was satisfied with the aim, and rolled him over, to my
infinite delight, with a ball in the side. Thinking the others might
not have gone far, I left the fallen bwrral where he lay, and ran along
the crest of the hill, and on the South face I saw four or five more
standing very far down; knowing it would be useless attempting to get
nearer, I put up the second sight of my rifle, and took a long steady
aim at one standing lengthwise from me. He dropped to the shot hit
fairly in the centre of the back, and I do not remember ever to have
been so delighted with my shooting. The distance could not have
been less than 160 yards. The remainder stood for a second or two,
watching this poor brute’s struggles to rise, and then made off.
Two more, and a herd of seven or eight more made off, so that I had
no chance of another shot, and prepared to return, having much
94 Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. [No. 134.
to my delight bagged two burral (my first) by seven o’clock. Re-
turning, I saw a brace of snow pheasants, but could not get near them.
These birds in a mild season must be difficult to kill. They shew
some white along the wings in flying, are of a good size, and have a me-
lancholy sort of note, which they continue at intervals nearly all day.
I got back to Lufkhel at 10h. 30m. much fatigued. Ther. in tent 87°;
at Ilh. 45m. 88°; and 90° at half-past 12; after which it became
rapidly cooler. My success with the durral this morning was doubly
fortunate, as it convinced the Lama I had really come for shooting,
and enabled me to propitiate himself and people by the present of half
of one of the burral, which highly delighted them. The Lama foretold
I should have success in the morning, and was hugely pleased to see
through a small pocket telescope he has, that I had been successful, as
I descended the opposite hill in returning. Both burral were females,
and had consequently only small horns. The second killed was, I fan-
cy, fully above the average size, and measured as follows :—
RE ave:
Height from hoof to centre of shoulders, ..... ...... 2 10
Length from nose to insertion of tail, ...........066. 4 14
Girth behind Tore leas} ree Bi soe oeane esac 38 Ik
Color light brown, and nearly white on the belly. Dark brown stripes
down the front of the legs. Hair, something between hair and quills,
like what I fancy the softer parts of a porcupine’s covering. May
be weight about 14 maund, just as much as a strong man could
carry after the entrails were taken out. But in October, when they
are fat, probably some of the large males would weigh 23, or nearly
three maunds. .
Plenty of salagrams at Lufkhel ; maunds could be collected in a day.
I should have mentioned that the Lama requested me to take some of
his tea this morning. I agreed, and it was served in a quaint copper
tea-pot, exactly like an old fashioned coffee-pot. I drank about
a pint of the decoction, which was chocolate colored, rather greasy,
and of by no means bad flavour, though it had a peculiar twang which
I can liken to nothing I remember to have tasted. The soda mixed
with the tea is said to color it like brickdust or chocolate. When to
be had, both sugar and milk are used with their tea, but this had
neither. One of the Lama’s men was amusing himself by slinging
1843. | Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. 95
stones at ravens and two large vultures during the day, but he did
not project the stones with good aim, or to any considerable distance.
Perhaps he was a bad hand at it. The sling was made of plaited hair.
At 3h. 30m. I started northwards up a gentle ascent or two, (salagram
hillocks, ) and then turned West over a series of most lovely undulations.
Some bare, (salagram hills,) others covered with the thorn bush, and
rills of water, with superb pasturage in the hollows between. This
style of country extends I know not how far, and might be ridden over
at a rapid pace. It is bounded south by the range of hills which I
noticed to the N. W. from Oonta Dhoora, particularly mentioning the
conical hill above Gertee, which is now nearly as far South as it then
appeared N. W. of me. These hills appear very steep and rocky, and
shew much snow on their north side. The breadth of this tract may be
two or three miles at most, and it is bounded north by the last range
before the Thibet plains, rising into bare steep precipices. I was led
here by a report that a wild horse had been seen in the morning, but it
subsequently appeared, that the man sent to look out, had seen only the
hind quarters of a ‘“‘ neaudh,” and returned at once for fear of disturb-
ing the horse, as he thought it to be. The ‘“‘neaudh” is like the burrad,
only much larger, with enormously thick horns and darkish colored
hind quarters. I had a creep of some two hours, after three of them, but
never got nearer than from a quarter to half a mile, and at 6 o’clock was
forced to give up, with these and a herd of 20 or 30 ahead of me. I
believed all along that they were large male burral, but Nagoo and
Dhunsing, who remained behind with my telescope, swore they saw them
to be ‘‘ neaudhs” distinctly, and certainly I observed the dark hind quar-
ters. Though I got no sport, I highly enjoyed this trip, though I suf-
fered from the awful cold wind along the crests in returning. Horse dung
(the people said of the wild animal) was abundant; as were also foot
marks of the “ chankoo,” or some other beast of prey, nearly the size
of a leopard’s foot print, and to the circumstance of these latter,
animals being about, Nagoo and Dhunsing attributed the unusual
scarcity of burral in this favorite resort Occasionally I saw the place
where a burral most probably had been killed. Got back to the
tents at 7h. 15m. very tired. Had some stewed and roasted burral’s
flesh for dinner. The meat brown, and by no means badly flavored,
although this is the worst season. Having lived on dhall and rice
96 Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. (No. 184.
since leaving Melum, I enjoyed this meat greatly; but did not sleep
well after it. Face almost raw and very painful, with the hurt in my
left heel becoming worse daily, I cannot give up the only opportunity
I may ever have for shooting, &c. in this part of the country on ac-
count of this sore heel, so have cut away the back part of my shoes
and boots, and limp along as I best may.
Bun-chour or Wild Yak.—This animal is found hereabout in the
rains, and one of the Lama’s people brought in to-day the horns and
skull of a male, which he had killed when going down last year. The
horns are short and of good thickness. Forehead unusually wide,
and the horns and front part of skull, wanting the lower jaw, are a
good load for a man.*
lsé June.—Up at 4h. 20m. after a miserable night’s rest, Ther.
31° in sleeping tent, and much the same in open air. Boiled at 1884
to 189°; started at 5h. 50m. with Nagoo and Dhunsing, on jooboos,
for the crest of Bulcha ke Dhoora, or last ridge between Oonta Dhoora
and the plains of Thibet. At 6h. 30m. travelling about N. E. by N.
reached the top of ascent visible from Lufkhel; then turned a little
more East, down the gentle descent and along level till 7h. 6m., when
we reached the bed of our branch of the river, passing below Lufkhel.
This is joined by numerous small streams coming down from the hills
East and West, every here and there. Halted from 7h. 6m. to 7h. 15m.,
then along gentle ascent covered with thorn bushes ‘‘ damah” and grass,
till 8h. 4m., when we reached the foot of Bulcha. The spot where
we arrived at the river is called Sungtah, a halting place for sheep,
&c. WHE L gata WM
an “a LPP LTIFO EO
The intermediate Loose Stones rising up to hills on either Sides inumechately ™m front
hills are cuefly Cor ered us the Katee muliee Chinhaie clescent ; looking southwards, which would
with snow bat ther
tops bare
require deep shading to convey any tea of, Probably from where I stocd
to the top of the Fass the direct distance ma i
: xy be 10 miles. Ofew ammonites are
to be found along the Kate multee Chinkate sf :
ij j WG AY Zi a i
Z J ‘ZZ G Gp "a. Se »
am monies “Steep ayffs / e en j.
/\ } 2
= ie / ae es Se Se S aes
= Ss
ee ay peeeee ee é = ee
SS —~— : =
ag
fam monibes
Low hills with w
few furse bushes
Chingnee niet
- Ye
hep OTT TOT
Lcoking north from Crest of Kalee multee Chinhaie , but this
is more of « map than a shelch as beyond the first low hills north of Ching noo
only He Bulcha range is seer
from where I stood om the Ored Xe the inlermideate
river being shud oul from view by the said low hills, the other river also is nol
visible north wards after Junction of Chingnoo stream wilh its
We
Vo
a se
er a a ye | »
beh Se ds eT
” WM hh Eg 4
Ania 2
1843. ] Trip to the Buleha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. ~* 01
some of the snow beds were barely practicable, with no other track
except under great difficulty.
The new detachment of troops gone to Ladhak is only 1,000 instead of
5,000, and they are commanded by the chief who takes credit for having
annihilated Zorawur Sing last year. These troops are from Gurtope
and not Lhassa, though I understand they came from Lhassa some
months ago; and there are perhaps 5,000 more ready to advance from
Gurtope, if this 1,000 fail. They will get a lesson probably, when
Bustee Ram arrives with his Seikhs.*
3d June.—Started at 4h. 40m. after a bad night’s rest, +. Ther. 42°
in sleeping tent, morning very mild with dense clouds and haze. Route
Jay up right bank of Laukon river, and was much easier than that from
Topee Doonga would have been. Ascent gentle, except the first part.
Road over snow~beds and sides of Jandslips. At 6h. 15m. reached
a small stream coming from East, which may be of considerable size at
some time of the year, judging from its bed. At 7h. 26m. at the foot of
Oonta Dhoora, and at 8h. 17m. reached the crest, walking up leisurely.
On the Pass it was unusually mild—no wind—and haze cleared away ;
so that I had a good view of whatever is visible from the top. Ther.
in shade 394°. Boiled at 182°. Halted till 9h. 20m., and during the
interval, I attempted a sketch of views, north and south, which I must
get completed hereafter.{ Ate a good quantity of biscuits, and drank
the health of the Queen and friends.
There is a small sheet of blue water a little west of the foot of the
Pass on the north side, but I believe it dries up at some period of the
year. On the debia,§ two small sticks had been set upright. These
were fringed down the south side with what I really took to be fine
white cloth, but it turned out to be ice, from the congelation of moisture
driven past by the bitter cold north wind. I saw one young swallow
flitting about on the crest ; what on earth was it doing there ?
I have made a mistake I believe regarding the three hills North East
of Oonta Dhoora. The nearest is Gentee, but Saour is Eastward of
* By last account, the Chinese Thibetan forces had been totally routed at Ladhak
by the Seikhs, October 14, 1842.—J. H. B.
+ Probably the rarity of the air may have had a greater effect on our traveller than
(in his note on Manson’s Journal) he seems inclined to admit.—J. H. B.
{ See Plate.
§ Hillock or heap of stones for offerings and worship.
102 Trip to the Bulcha and Oonta Dhoora Passes. {No. 134.
that again, and the name of the second I do not know, (unless it be
‘** Lusher.”) Chingoor may be the name of the third, or merely of the
ridge above Chingoor. Commenced the descent at 9h. 20m., reached
foot at 9h, 55m., Doong at 12h. 15m., breakfasting place of 28th
ultimo 2h. 30m., halted till 3h. 15m., and then on to Melum, where I
arrived at 5h. 40m., quite exhausted by the 13 hours’ travelling. At
the foot of the Pass, the snow was melting rapidly, and large fissures
were forming, snow very soft, sun unpleasantly hot. Goonka river much
swollen since I passed up, and the snow-bed, by which we crossed to
Melum side falling in rapidly. My face and heel were exquisitely pain-
ful, and I was delighted to get back to Melum for my bed. The price
of a yak is from eight to twelve rupees; they carry less than a jooboo,
and sometimes turn upon their drivers, or rush down hill when urged
beyond their patience; a jooboo never does this, carries 14 to 2
maunds well, lives to 30 years or so, and works 12 to 14 years.
Dhan Sing is my authority. In descending the Pass yesterday, I
heard the fall of an avalanche somewhere in the vicinity ; the noise
was that of a loud and continued peal of thunder; the Bhooteas have
stories of men and goats being lost in snow storms and avalanches.
One I heard to-day was of 4 men with 500 sheep and goats lost during a
snow storm of 7 days near Sungon. Three men escaped back to Melum,
and the tribe of Bhooteas who suffered this heavy loss forswore the
Thibetan traffic for ever. Now-a-days, people seem to have become ac-
quainted with the seasons and weather ; for accidents very rarely occur.*
* A short time after Lieut. Weller’s departure from the Bhote Mahals, I received
an official report of two Bhooteas with 8 or 10 loaded jooboos and some sheep being
lost in a snow storm. Accidents of this kind are most frequent during the months of
May and October; in the former month from the fall of avalanches, both of snow and
rocks occurring in the middle of the day when the sun becomes powerful, and the
masses on the peaks become loosened, in the latter month from the first falls of new
snow at the commencement of the winter surprising parties who attempt for the sake
of profit to prolong the season of traffic across the Passes. In October 1837, the
Netee Pass was quite open on the 11th, on the 12th it was entirely closed by a sudden
snow storm of which I was an eye-witness. The village of Macca near Budrinath has
been twice carried away by avalanches since 1815, and the pilgrims who venture to
Keddernath too early in the month of May, are sometimes surprised by avalanches
falling in the three miles between Gowree Koond and the temple ; the only signs of
them left being sticks and shoes scattered about the snow. Common caution as to
choice of season would save all such accidents to the pilgrims; indeed, accidents are
yearly becoming of rarer occurrence.—J. H. B.
103
A perpetual Moon Table, By Capt. Rost. SHortrepe, lst Assist.
G. T. S.; F. R.A. S. &e. With plates.
I now send an account of a Table, which I have constructed for
finding the Moon’s age for any date, past or future, somewhat similar
to that lately published for finding the week days.
_ If the Moon’s course were completed in an even number of days,
and with a uniform motion, its age and the time of any particular
phase would be found as readily and surely as the day of the week ;
but as neither of these conditions holds good, and as two lunations are
scarcely ever completed in equal times, if we wish to be correct, we
must either make a calculation at length, or avail ourselves of those
already made, or else use some other method by which correctness is
made to give way to convenience.
The rule commonly given in books of Astronomy for finding the
Moon’s age is by no means very simple, as it requires us first to know
the Golden Number and the Epact. The rule for finding the Golden
Number is tolerably simple, as also is that for the Epact at present, but
for this, after 1900, a new rule is necessary, which as given in Bar-
low’s Dictionary, runs thus: ‘ Divide the centuries of the given year
by 4, multiply the remainder by 17; then to this product add 43
times the quotient, and also the number 86, and divide the whole
sum by 25, reserving the quotient: next multiply the Golden Number
by 11, and from the product subtract the reserved quotient, so shall the
remainder after rejecting all the 30’s contained in it, be the Epact
sought.’ This rule is such that few persons will be inclined to use it,
except in cases of urgent necessity, and even by means of it the Moon’s
age may fall on the wrong day, as no account is taken of the great
Equations depending on excentricity, which may amount at a maximum
to 14 hours on either side of the mean time given by the Tables.
The Table now given shews at once, without calculation, and with
scarcely any trouble, the mean times of New and Full Moon, &c., as also
the Moon’s age to the nearest day, and by means of another similar
card for the two principal corrections, the true times of New and Full
- Moon may be found within an hour or so of the results, which would
be found by a detailed calculation.
104 A perpetual Moon Table. [ No. 134.
In constructing this Table, I have used methods of approximation
more or less exact, according to the exigency of the case, so as to retain
as much correctness as is consistent with convenience, and also to
allow of the admitted errors being corrected in the least troublesome |
way I could devise.
A mean Junation consists of 29d. 12h. 44m. 03s.* If this be sup-
posed to occupy the circumference of a circle, it will, when divided
into days, have 29 parts each equal to a day, and a space corresponding
to 44m. 03s. more than half a day. It will, however, be vastly more
convenient to divide the circumference into 293 equal parts, each of
which will correspond to 89.593s. or about 1m. 30s. more than a day,
but in ordinary cases of finding the Moon’s age, or time of New Moon,
&ec. the small quantity by which the subdivisions exceed the exact
value of a day, may be disregarded without inconvenience.
The days of the month are written in order from right to left on
the inner card, which of course contains 292 divisions, corresponding to
those of the lunation ; the days beyond 29 being written intermediate-
ly to those at the beginning of the month.
As January contains 31 days, or nearly 13 day more than a lunation,
the next month February is written to the left of January by a cor-
responding quantity. February having only 28 days, falls short of a
lunation by nearly 14 day, and hence March is written to the right of
February, and would fall exactly under January if the lunation con-
tained exactly 294 days. In like manner April falls nearly under
February ; and May near half a day to the left of April; and so on,
each month falling to the left by a quantity corresponding to the
Epact of the preceding month. If the lunation contained exactly 293
days, December would fall 94 days to the left of January, but this
must be diminished by 11 times, 44m. 03s. = 8h. 04m. 33s., leaving 9d.
dh. 55m. 27s., and if this be estimated by the scale of the Table, it
* In most modern works the lunation is stated at 29d. 12h. 44m. 02.8s. This num-
ber is given under Moon in Barlow’s Dictionary, while on the opposite page a dunar
month or lunation is stated at 29d. 12h. 44m. 03s. Lit. This latter quantity agrees best
with the ancient observations, and the former quantity with the modern. The quantity
here used is pretty nearly the mean of the two, and is that usually given in common
works. ‘The difference of 2-10th of a second on each lunation amounts in 4000 years to
about 2h. 44m. 54s., and therefore in a ‘l'able like the present, scarcely requires farther
notice.
1843. ] A perpetual Moon Table. 105
should be farther diminished at the rate of 89.50s. daily, which
amounts to 13m. 40s., giving a result of 9d. 3h. 41m. 47s. It would
simplify the apportionment of this difference, without giving rise to
sensible error on this scale to reckon it at 45m. 1-16th of half a day
on each month. The exact position of the month marks, are in half
days as in the following Table :—-
me WV a0 OOo September, 45°63
February, ; sins Sunes) 52°3 October,.. 44°70
January,
March, .. 00°12 July,... 51°45 November, 41°79
EDIE 245 90°21 August . 48°54 December, 40°86
The outer card contains the years of a century in their order, from
left to right, at intervals, corresponding to the annual Epacts.
A tropical year consists of 365d. 5h. 48m. 51s.* nearly, and in 12
Junations there are 354d. 8h. 48m. 36s., the difference between which
is 10d. 21h. 00m. 15s., which may be called the tropical Epact. If the
Calendar were kept in tropical years, this would be the constant annual
Epact; but in order to correspond with the Calendar years, this tropical
Epact should be diminished by 6h. for 3 years, and in the 4th year
should have a day more than in the three preceding. They would
then consist of 10d. 15h. 00m. lds. and 11d. 15h. 00m. 15s. respec-
tively. To reduce these Epacts to the scale of lunation days, they must
be diminished at the rate of 89s., 50 daily, or 15m. 40.93s. and 17m.
10.44s. or 15m. 58.338. at an average: these become thus 10d. 14h.
44m. 34s. and 11d. 14h. 43m. 04.5s. These would be the quantities
by which the years on the outer card advance to the right of those
preceding them, if it were true that a day is gained in every 4 years ;
but the error on this supposition reduces the average correction as
above to about 4m. 50s. on each year.
The following considerations will, however, somewhat simplify the
mode of writing the years in their order. In 1236 lunations, there are
36,499 days, 19h. 25m. 48s., in a Gregorian Century there are 36,524
:
|
|
I
|
|
|
|
|
days; being in excess of the Junations by 24d. 4h. 34m. 12s. This
_ may be called the Gregorian century Epact. If the years of the century
* This quantity is given with some variation by different Astronomers. The above
is the value towards which Delambre seemed to incline. The difference of a second
or two is of no importance as regards the Table.
YP
106 A perpetual Moon Table. [ No. 184.
be written out on the card at intervals of 10d. 15h. and 11d. 15h. a Gre-
gorian Century will consist of 1236 lunations, 24 days and 12 hours. In
order to compare these results, the 24d. 12h. must be increased at the rate
of 89.593s. daily, or the 24d. 4h. 34m. 12s. must be decreased at the rate
of 89.500 daily, to have them in common or lunation days respectively.
The latter will be the more convenient, as the adjustment is to be
made on the card which has lunation days; the correction to be sub-
tracted from 24d. 4h. 34m. 12s. is 36m. 05s. which leaves 24d. 3h.
58m. 07s. as the Gregorian Century Epact on days of 293 to alunation,
the difference between which and the 24d. 12h. given by the card or
Sh. Olm. 53s. is the error generated in a Gregorian Century by using
the Epacts 10d. 15h. and 1lld. 15h. Now this quantity is as nearly
as may be 2 or 67 p. c. of half a day, and being distributed over the
whole century, becomes 2 p. c. of half a day for each year. The odd
15h. of the Epact is half a day, and 1 or 25 p. c. of halfa day. Hence
counting by the 59 half days, and beginning at 00 the year, 01 will
stand at 21.25=-2—21.24 tothe right of zero: the year 02 at 2 (21.25-2)
=42.49 and the year 03 at 3 (21.252)—63.73=4.73 after rejecting 59
or a whole circumference. In this manner the following Table was
made :—
TABLE I
2 o © o | @ o
e g | @ S os =|
a S = S
oj 9 ° 3 8 3 5 5 ° 3
. oO i oH . oO . oO . Oo . Oe
ma} Re me} A Pao} Aa Plo} a Pa} Ay pay Aa
57.00/19 | 57.62/38 | 58.25957 | 58.87/76 | 0.49|9, ¢| 20.36), BCs ea pone pie
09 1} 00.00! 55 39 | 20,49%58 | 21.11/77 | 21.74 { 22.36 1a iP he M
o1 | 21.24! 21.87] 45 59 | 42.36|78 | 42.98197 | 43.60|Very plainly the Meto-
o2 | 42.4921 | 43.11 43.73Hh 64 79 | 5.22198 | 5.85)mic Cycleof 19 and the
03 4.73/22 | 35.35/41 5.98 6.60) <9 99 | 27.09/Calippian of 76 years.
of 23 | 26.60/42 | 27.29861 | 27.84 28.47], 49 (ee That of Meton is well
27.97| 94 43 | 48.46662 | 49.09/81 | 49.73 50." Nonueaaagetiel Golden
05 | 49.21 49.84 63 | 11.83.82 | 11.93
44 Number.
06 | 11.4625 | 12.08 12.719 83 | 33.20 Godlee ne Te ot
07 | 32.70\26 | 33.33'45 | 33.95 34.57 |, +ycles of II, 6, an
27 | 54.57/46 | 55.19965 | 55.81 56.44 3 years may also be
08 | 55.95 28 47 | 17.44866 | 18.06)85 18.68 observed, and the order
09 18.)9| 18.8) 48 67 39.30|86 39.93 of their succession is
10 39.43 29 40.06 bps 68 ape 87 2.17 worthy of being kept in
eet | 23.s4als0 | 217f6o | 24.7918 | 25.41 mind as helping to find
12 | 24.921,5 51 | 45.41f70 | 46.03/89 | 46.66 readily the place of any ©
13 | 46.16 46.79| 71 8.28/90 8.90 required year on the
14 8.41/33 9.03 9.65975 91 | 30.14] | card. \
15 °| 29.65/34 | 30.27/53 | 30.90 31.52] 99 A little practice will
16 35 | 51.52/54 | 52.14973 pare i Seite shew the value of this
17 | 514i | s5.76l | ssealve | s6-2s|o¢ | 36.87 remark, and besides it,
18 | 36.38/37 | 37.00/°° Xl 37.6876 | 57.49/95 | 58.11) [ no other seems neces-
} sary.
1843. ] A perpetual Moon Table. 107
The middle card has on its inner circle the days of the Moon’s age,
and the known characters for New and Full Moon, and for First and
Last Quarters ; on the outer circles are the full centuries of Old and New
style. The manner of writing the days of the Moon’s age is obvious
enough, and requires no explanation. That of writing the full centu-
ries is now to be shewn. |
The Gregorian Century Epact being 24d. 4h. 34m. 12s., the Julian
Epact is 25d. 4h. 34m. 12s., and by intervals corresponding to these
times will these centuries follow each other towards the right. Butas
these quantitiés are much greater than half a lunation, they may be
subtracted from 29d. 12h. 44m. 08s., and the remainders 5d. 8h. 09m.
5ls. and 4d. 8h. 09.51s. will be the intervals of the successive centu-
ries towards the left. ‘These being in common time are to be reduced
to that of the card at the rate at 89.50s. daily, as formerly shewn,
when they become 5d. 8h. Olm. 538s. and 4d. 8h. 03m. 22.5s. respec-
tively. If these be taken at 5d. 8h. and 4d. 8h. by neglecting the
small excess the error in 400 years will be 9m. 01.7s. and in 4000
years only lh. 30m. 27s. For the last 4000 years this error would be
rather convenient than otherwise, as tending to neutralize that arising
from neglecting the acceleration, which for the same period, as already
stated, would be about 2h. 44m. 54s. the difference between which
and the quantity now omitted being Ih. 14m. 27s.* |
New style centuries may be carried forward at the same rates of
5d. 8h. and 4d. 8h. as far as we please, (though 7 point of fact they
are not required before the full century 15) ; as in the following Table,
to which if thought necessary may be applied corrections for the error
0031 here admitted, as also for the acceleration.
* It is hardly necessary to remark, that we have no recorded observations so far
back as 4000 years, and that many of the earliest recorded are uncertain to half an
hour or more. The Table may therefore be depended on farther back than is likely
ever to be required.
108 A perpetual Moon Table. [No. 134.
TABLE II. This table requires but little explanation. The
p.c. | first column shews full centuries. That marked
EN. YS.) OVS ee j ' |
o “N.S. shews the place in half days on the cireum-
Ae Wanita is.og | Cenenee of the card, of the mark for adjusting the
>) sore) 4-62) euey| N.S. centuries to the mark of @ @ on the outer
3 4420) el aro, card. In like manner the columns headed O. S.
5| 24.96) 28.96) 666° and B. C. or — shew the places of the marks for
5 53.96 "9.96 23.62 adjusting the cards by, in centuries of O. S., or in
5 C e «
P abies re ie those before the Christian era. *
41) 21.96) 35.96} 49.62 ° ffi Q b
12| 13.99| 27.291 5399) Lhese observations may suffice for shewing the
3| 9.62] 18.62) 7.96]. F } ’
ie Stibe 9.96 1080 general construction of this card ; the reason for giv-
15| 40.29} 1.29) 25.29'. : . 348
46} 31.62] 51.62| 3396 |ing the century marks their particular position re-
17| 20.96] 42.96) 42.62
18| 10.29 34.291 51.99 | Mains to be stated.
19| 58.62} 25.621 0.96
20| 49.96| 15.96 9.62/ According to the Synopsis of Astronomy in Bar- —
21i| 39.29} 8 29) 18.29
22| 28.62) 58.62| 26.96 | low’s Tables, (which, and his Dictionary, were the
93| 17.96| 49.96] 35.62
24| 9,29) 41.29} 44.29| only books of reference within my reach when ar-
25| 57.62) 32.62) 52.96
26) 46.96| 23.96 2.62| ranging this Table) the Moon’s mean longitude on the
97| 36.29) 15.29} 14,29
28) 27.62) 6.62} 19.96 | gt of Jan. 1801, was 3s. 21° 36’ 42”, or 111° 36’ 42”
29| 16.96] 56.96) 28.62
30| 6.29! 48.29) 37.29 | that of the sun being 9 10 09.13, or 280 09 13
31| 54.82). 39.62} 45.96 ,
ae bEeisg 30,96) 94-6" | Hence the moon was then — eee
| 26) 150) 1268) from the oun, 191 27 29
30 eel 46.62) as6 [OF 11° 27’ 29" past the full. This at the rate of
38) 43-96) oa9o| 46'o9 | 294 days to a lunation, gives the Moon’s age on the
iy aioe) i Voel a4e2| L8t of January 1801 as 15° 66’ 11”. Barlow’s data
47 ee)! 53991 31.06 | being taken from Laplace’s Systeme du Monde, are
+4) 3o:90| 36.29 49.09 | probably adapted to the meridian of Paris. The dif-
ne ee te woe ference between Paris and Greenwich is 9m. 21.5s.
il oavagiienal 94.96 corresponding in lunation days to .00643. Greenwich
Va Dua c being to the west of Paris, this must be added to
15° 66’ 11”, in order to have the Moon’s mean age at Greenwich on Ist
January 1801. As for the convenience of keeping the same digits
throughout a century, I reckon from 1800, the Epact for a year of
365 days must be deducted; this is 10d. 15h. 11m. 24s. which re-
duced at the rate of 89.50s. daily, becomes 10d. 14h. 55m. 33s. = 10d.
59219, and this taken from 15d. 66 11 +- 00643, leaves 5d. 14 56 as the
Moon’s mean age in Junation days at Greenwich on the Ist January of
1800. In half days this is 10°29, as in the Table.
id years a Cn
od
onthe Outer Grele theese,
those of OS Cnle,
cle 4 tes
as the days re
ana Months jag ale
Oc,
4
0%
9) ayo
en Hef yyy Ms Y)
= 5h pps oad mh? ao
OP hanpun eu
» av 0
b MD TT Sot
oll s Hanquny eee y me
40 a7 09 pal
Pe Ramp tt” eR a
Nn
1843. | A perpetual Moon Table. 109
It is not distinctly stated by Barlow, whether the era given by him
begins at noon or midnight, but as the French Astronomers about that
time attempted to introduce civil reckoning, and as the supposition of
this appears to agree pretty well with some old Tables, like Ferguson’s,
which I have lately got hold of, I adopt it, subject to any correction
which better authority may hereafter shew to be requisite.
Generally the marks on the card are put on the left of the numbers
to which they belong. On the outer card Leap years have two marks,
that beside which the number is written answering for the months
from March onwards, and the other answering for January and
February.
The use of this Table is very much like that of the Table for week
days. The full century mark on the middle card is to be set to that
of the @ @ on the outer. The given month-mark on the inner card is
then to be brought into line with the mark of the current year on the
outer: when opposite the days of the month will be seen those of the
Moon’s age. Opposite @ will be the day of New, and opposite © the
day of full Moon ; and opposite )) and ( the days of the first and
last quarters.
The times thus found are of courge the mean civil times at Green-
wich ; but there is no difficulty in reading the Table in astronomical
time, as any person will perceive.
In order that the Table may serve for dates before the Christian era,
it is to be observed that the year 1 B. C. may be considered as the
year © of the Christian era, or the hundredth of the century — 1.
Hence this rule. Add | to the given century B. C. and reckon it — ;
then to the complement to 100 of the odd year add 1 and reckon
that as the current year of the century. In this way the year 721
B. C. is the 80th of the century—8 ; and may conveniently be written
8 80, the mark — applying to the full century only, like the negative
index of a logarithm.
RoBERYT SHORTREDE.
November, 1841.
The present Table in conjunction with the one for week days will
- give Easter for ever with less trouble than by any other method at
present known. All that needgbe done is, to set the Table to March
in any given year, and if Full Moon falls after the 2]st, find by the
110 | A perpetual Moon Table. [No. 134.
other Table the corresponding week day ; the first Sunday after Easter.
If full Moon in March falls before the 21st, set the Table to April, and
proceed as before.
Professor Gauss has given a formula for finding Easter without
using the Epact, as may be seen in Delambre’s Astronomy. _ It is as
follows :—
Divide the given number of the year by 19, The following Table
and let a be the remainder. gives M and N in the
Divide the given number by 4, and let 6/Gregorian Calendar as
be the remainder. far as 2,500.
Divide the number by 7, and let c be the MN
remainder. From 1582 to 1699 22 3
Divide (19 a + M) by 30, and let d be the 1700 1799 233
remainder. 1800 1899 234
Divide (26+4c+6dad+N) by 7, and 1900 1999 245
let e be the remainder. 2000 2099 24 5
Then Easter-day will be the (22 + d + e) 2100 2199 246
of March or the (d + e — 9) of April. For 2200 2299 25 0
the Julian Calendar, this rule is general, where 2300 2399 26 1
M = 15 and N = 6 alwaysg it requires 2400 2499 25 1
a correction for the Gregorian Calendar. If
the calculation gives the 25th or 26th of
April, take away seven days.
On the Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. By S. G.
ToLLEMACHE Heat ty, Esa.
1. The clothing of purely geometric principles in analytical language
—in other words—the conduct of elementary geometric inquiries by
functional equations is historically connected with the subject of my
former papers. Legendre’s endeavour to prove on functional princi-
ples, that the three angles of a triangle are equal to two right angles,
and thence to deduce the theory of parallels will readily occur to the
memory of those familiar with mathematical records. But the first
step in developing the idea may be traced higher, and I think success-
fully, to a yet more illustrious origin. %
1843. | Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis 111
2. In the 2nd volume of the Memoirs of Turin, there is a demonstra-
tion, purporting to be by M. Daviet de Foncenex, of the parallelogram
of forces. Assuming two forces, each equal to a, acting at an angle 0 and
denoting their resultant by z, he states z to be a determinate func-
tion of a and 9, and that this expression must by the principle of homo-
geneity be of the form
z—af (6)
It follows from thence, that the angle 0 remaining constant, z is always
proportional to a. ‘‘On pourrait,” continues the author, “de meme
demontrer par cette methode d’une maniere directe et fort naturelle
plusieurs theoremes sur la proportionalité des cotés des figures et un
grand nombre d’autres propositions de geometrie et de mecanique.”
This essay, I have said, bears the name of Foncenex, but I am induc-
ed to attribute it to Lagrange, on the foundation of some curious facts
revealed by Delambre in his eloge on that mathematician, (Annals of
Philosophy, vol. 11). It is there stated that Foncenex received the
analytical part of his memoirs from Lagrange, and only performed the
task of developing the reasoning on which the formulas depend.*
Parts of this very memoir were afterwards reclaimed and re-written by
Lagrange, and the beauty and boldness of the portion we are consider-
ing, betray I think undeniable traces of being ex ungue leonem, even
without the collateral evidence. The conclusion of this historiette
is amusing. In recompense for the science displayed in these iden-
tical memoirs, Foncenex was appointed Minister of Marine by the
Sardinian monarch, an honour which separated him from Lagrange,
and he ceased in a short time to take interest in mathematical pursuits,
Too simple minded to discern between cause and effect, Montucla
laments the unaccountable apathy which Foncenex thenceforward dis-
played towards researches which had given him profit, and might have
added honour. Certain it is, the Minister died and made no sign anent
the ‘‘ plusieurs theoremes de geometrie et de mecanique.”
The essay, which we may therefore attribute to Lagrange, is quoted
by Legendre at the foot of his celebrated second note, as doing for me-
* This, by the way, is the manner in which Gothe is said to have accounted for
the fertility and variety of Scott’s pen. Sir Walter was supposed to have sketched
the plot and skeletoned the chief characters, the whole being then worked up by
younger artists at the foot of this Gamaliel! A delicious theory on fertility and variety
by one of the most fertile and varied intellects of the age!
112 Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. [No. 134.
chanics what he had done for geometry. And when we take further
into account, the long and’ early intimacy between the two analysts,
(Legendre having edited the first edition of the Mecanique Analy-
tique), it becomes highly probable that Lagrange was the first who con-
ceived the idea of condensing the scattered truths of geometry into a
few families of formule, as he did those of mechanics: and that Le-
gendre caught the spirit of such peculiar reasoning from his friend, his
own original genius enabling him to apply it with the success he did.
3. Legendre’s mode of procedure may be put in the following man-
ner. If from the ends of a given base we draw two straight lines
making given angles with that base, we have performed definite opera-
tions giving a single fixed result. If this result prove to be a triangle,
then the triangle being sole and invariable, its elements must all be
determinable by calculations founded on the data which produce that
invariability ; viz. the base and the base angles. Both the data and
the quzesita can only appear in these calculations in the shape of num-
bers, and therefore either as ratios zter se, or ratios involving some
constant unit of measurement. Now the angles have such a constant
unit in the right angle, but the sides have not, there being no natural
unit of linearity. The consequence will be, that the sides can only
appear in the calculations as ratios inter se, but the angles may appear
either as ratios inter se, or as fractions of a right angle. Now among
the elements of the triangle which are determined by the base and
base angles is the third angle, it will follow therefore that there is
some form of calculation connecting this third with the data. But of
these four the angles easily enter the calculation, while we do not see
how the side can, since there is no other line necessarily involved in
the matter. We conclude therefore that the side cannot enter, and
therefore that the third angle is determinable only by help of the other
two. Hence, whenever two angles in each of two triangles are iden-
tical, each to each, the third angles are also identical.
The sequel of this demonstration is geometrical. By dropping a per-
pendicular on the hypothenuse from the right angle, we divide a right
angled triangle into two others, each of which has two angles equal to |
two of the primitive triangle. They are consequently equiangular to
. 08") ° e ° ®
the primitive triangle and to each other, whence it is seen, that the two
acute angles of the large triangle are together equal to the right angle,
i i i i a Ml De A
1843. | Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. 113
and hence all three to two right angles. The proof is then extended
to triangles in general, by dividing them into right angled triangles.
4, The publication of this train of reasoning excited a discussion un-
precedented in the cold calm regions of science, and one which assumed
a character of acrimony, that can only be accounted for by the politi-
cal antipathies which extended even to the schools of mathematics.
Ivory, Leslie, Playfair, Brewster, Maurice, Nieuport, and the great
author himself, took prominent parts in the controversy. It is not my
intention to raise, or lay the ghosts of departed objections. Stated in
~ the manner I have done, divested of the appalling formalities of a func-
tional investigation, there are only two points in Legendre’s proof over
which the reader will pause for an instant.
The first is, why will geometric determination afford any grounds
for numerical calculation? This is easily answered. The remaining
elements being geometrically given, their proportions to the data are
given, that is, a series of numbers being assumed for these last, a series
of numbers for the rest are found. Hence the necessity of supposing a
numerical process. connecting the consequent numbers with the as-
sumed ones.
The second is of a graver character. It is suggested at the place
where, having settled that the calculation of the third angle involves
only the magnitudes of the other two, we conclude that two triangles,
having two angles equal each to each, will also have the third angles
equal. This conclusion is evidently founded on the assumption that
there is an invariable formula of calculation for a// triangles, connecting
the third angle with the other two. The question is, having assured
ourselves that the triangle ABC has a formula connecting the angle
C with A and B, what grounds have we to suppose that the same
formula will be applicable to A’B’C’? The fairest mode of meeting
the query I conceive to be this. When a base is laid down and lines
are drawn making given angles with it, we perceive intuitively that the
system is fixed. The magnitude of the base and base angles is not a
constituent of this fixity. They may vary, but the conception of deter-
minaiion remains not the less distinct. To express this fact analyti-
cally, we must say that the magnitudes in the triangular system vary
inter se, but the laws which connect their respective variations are
invariable and universal. Hence we conclude that every geometrical
Q
il4 Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. [No. 134.
figure has its peculiar but invariable formula of calculation. The
geometrical definition prescribes an invariability of form as regards’
Jigure: when we transfer the question into the domains of analysis, we
introduce a consideration equivalent to this, it is the invariability of
form as regards calculation.
Legendre’s own attempt to clear up this point is not even specious,
although while his impregnable positions were hotly attacked, the
weakest escaped all but the practised eye of Sir James Ivory. He had
to prove that the formula by which the third angle is calculated from .
the base and base-angles applies to all triangles. He imagines two
triangles, one constructed with the data a, B, C, and another with a’,
B, C, having if possible different formula, the first say @, the second
¢'. Then considering a’ to vary to a, he obtains a third triangle. But
this third triangle has the same data as the first, and its third angle is
therefore equal to that of the first. Hence it must be calculated by the
same formula. But the formula of the third is that of the second, that
is ¢', hence @ & @ are the same formula. The words in italics beg the
question glaringly : if the variation of an element can make a formula
vary (which is to be disproved,) then the change of a’ into a gives the
third triangle some new formula more or less different from $': the
principle of superposition shews that it is identical with $, hence >
differs from ¢’, and there is no absurdity forced upon the adversary.
5. The geometrical weight of this flaw is of importance and great
interest. It was pointed out by Sir J. Ivory, that to assume a’ to
change to a while the base angles remain B and C as before, is equi-
valent to drawing from the ends of a base a, lines making with it
angles equal to those of a given triangle A’ BC. To assume further
that the formula of A’ B C will apply to the new figure is to assume,
that the new lines will form a triangle with the new base a. The
double assumption amounts therefore to stating, that two lines making
given angles with a third will always meet, the only thing known re-
garding. those given angles being that they are less than two right
angles ; since they are angles of a given triangle. This is nothing more
nor less than Euclid’s axiom, and therefore Legendre’s process involves
the assumption of that axiom. The analytical investigation therefore
rests on an assumption, that of the invariability of formula as dis-
tinguishing a defined geometrical figure, which no skill can do away
1
—e ee
ee
1843. | Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. 115
with, and which must either be the subject of postulate, axiom or de--
monstration.
6. To his striking presentation of the 32d Prop. Legendre added
the “plusieurs theoremes sur la proportionalité des cotes des figures,”
yet notwithstanding the intense interest excited by the publication,
the violent discussions to which it gave rise, and the eminent indivi-
duals who enlisted themselves on one or other side, it has often appear-
ed to me singular, that no attempt should have been made to develope
the whole system of elementary geometry in a concinnous form on the
same principles.* Independent of its utility as an introduction to the
methods of analysis, the young mathematician would be benefited by
seeing grouped together those truths which are nearest related in
affinity : he would, in the language of Decandolle, have those nearest
in books which are nearest in the order of nature.
7. The only principle on which it would be necessary to base such
an attempt would be this: that every defined geometrical figure is the
representation of certain invariable formule of calculation, the numbers
involved in such calculations being represented by the ratios of sides,
angles, areas, and the other concomitants of the figure, either znéer
se, or to any homogeneous natural constants that may exist.
8. A triangle then considered analytically will represent a set of
formule expressing the relation between its sides and angles. If
according to the usual notation these be a, 6, c, A, B, C, we have
F{ a0 4,8, C, Kt sal
The letter K, introduced into the formula, stands for the constants
which may be furnished by nature. There are, however, no linear con-
stants, but there is an angular one—the right angle; it follows there-
fore that K can only bea function of the right angle. When therefore
the formula assumes a numerical shape, it must be written
These are ail the ratios necessary to be taken into account as
BG ee cay ona het och Es. &
ees ee ee ee
* While this has been passing through the press, I have met with in Lacroix an
allusion to ‘‘M. Corancez qui dans un Memoire fondé sur des principes analogues
est parvenu aux theoremes les plus importans de la Geometrie Elementaire.”
116 Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. [No. 1384.
9. The next step is to inquire whether the expression does not
admit of modification, or whether it is essential to the determination of
the triangle that five at least of its elements should be given. A short
process of deduction informs us, that from the data a, B, C, not more
than a single triangle can be constructed, and that therefore those three
elements are sufficient for the complete determination of all the rest. But
it will be quite unwarrantable to say, that even these three are absolute-
ly necessary (every one of them) to calculate any given one of the ele- _
ments. In calculating A it is at once evident, that two will be quite
enough. For the 4 and c being settled to be foreign to the computa-
°
b
Hence the computation of C depends exclusively on A and B; or
C=—F {A B, K
Recurring now to the artifice of Legendre or Leslie, it is easy to prove
A+B+C= 7. This truth embodies Euclid I. 32, 16, 17.
If there be another triangle A’BC on the same base BC and
enveloping ABC; the angles A'BC + A’CB 7 B + C, hence
A’ .,,. (6)
e=acosB +-bcosA a sin B—6 sin A =O
11. We must remember, however, that the functions sin and cos are
only intelligible with regard to acute angles, since from the consideration
of such only they were derived in (10). The formule above apply
therefore only to acute angled triangles, unless we are able to put such
an interpretation on sin and cos in the case of right and obtuse angles, as
will permit us to consider (a) and (3) universal forms.
If (a) and (2) are to apply to all triangles, then if C were a right
angle we should have
6b =a cos 7+ c cos A anda sin'() — ec sin A —O
But examining a triangle right angled at C, we perceive as in (10),
6 =ccos A and a —csin A = 0,
Hence to admit the generality of (a) and (8) we must interpret
cos (a) as O and sin
If the triangle again were obtuse at C, the perpendicular from A
would fall on a produced, hence a would be the difference of c cos B
and 6 cos (r—C) or a = e cos B— 3 cos (7—C). The perpendicular
is also in one case c sin B, in another 6 sin (7w—C) ; Or
e sin B—bsin (tC) — 0
Compare these with (a) and () supposed to be universal, and it
must follow that
cos C = — cos (7—C) and sin C = sin (7—C)
are the only interpretations that can be put on the sin and cos of the
as |,
118 Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. [| No. 1384.
obtuse angle C.. We are now in a position to consider (a) and (3)
universal.
A little further study of the angular functions will contribute to
subsequent condensation. In the triangle right angled at C, we have
a =c sin A and bd = ¢ cos A, dividing one by the other
a sin A
6 ~~ cos A
..a@ = 6 tan A. Now 6 remaining the same, by inspection a will in-
= a function of A ; specify it as tan A
crease as A increases, therefore tan A increases with A. This will make
sin A increase with A. For cos A (being sin B) is related to Bas sin A
to A. When A increases, B diminishes ; if then sin A did not increase,
cos A would not decrease, and tan A their quotient would not increase.
This as relates to acute angles ; with regard to obtuse ones 7 — A de-
creases as A increases, hence the sin will decrease positively, and the
cos increase negatively, the tan of course increasing negatively.
Table of change with angle increasing.
Angle Sin. Cos Tan
acute + increase. ;+ decrease. + increase.
right ] 0 +X
obtuse + decrease.|— increase. — decrease.
It will follow therefore as the sin is a function increasing continuously
from 0 to 1, and then decreasing continuously from | to 0, as the angle
increases continuously from O to 7, that any given value of sin will be
found in two parts of this course on either side of the maximum 1 and
thus belongs to two angles A and m-—A; whence there is an ambiguity in
determining the angle from the sin, unless there is something to tell us
whether it is obtuse or acute. Also if sin B be less than sin A, B
may be an angle less than the angle A; but if A be an acute angle,
B may also be an angle greater than the obtuse 7—-A. The latter
case, however, can never occur when B and A belong to the same
triangle, since B + A are always — 7 and... B= w—A. In a
triangle therefore if sin A 7 sin B; A 7 B, and vice versa.
With the cos there is no ambiguity, the sign + or — immediately
determines whether the angle is acute or obtuse. If we have
cos A = cos B, A= B; if cos A 7 cos B, A = B.
1843. | Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. 119
12. We are now in a condition to discuss the geometrical properties
implicated in equations (a) and (3). The first set can be presented in
amore convenient form by eliminating cos B. and cos C from the first
by the help of the second and third.
It then becomes
a2? = b2 +c? —2beccosA
symmetrically 6? = a2 + c? —2accos B ; - + (y)
and c2= a2 + b2—2ab6cosC
On these two sets of equations, 3 dependent on the sinal and Y
on the cosinal forms of the functions, the entire geometry of triangles
can be raised with little more difficulty than is experienced in the
deduction of a corollary.
Taking the first equation of (3, it can be changed to the proportion
6b: c=sin B: sin C.* Hence if '—c; sinB=sinC. It will
follow that B —C (1. 5) for the ambiguity B —= 7—C cannot take
place, since two angles of a triangle cannot both be obtuse. Similarly,
if B= C;b—c(1.6). If 67 c, sin B7 sin C, and therefore B must
be greater than C (I. 18). The converse evidently follows (I. 19).
Again, by composition the proportion becomes
6+c¢c:c=—sin B + sin C: sin C.
and compounding this with a proportion derived from the 2d of Bs,
4 6+c:a=sin B + sin C: sin A.
Suppose another triangle A’B’C’ on the same base a inclosed within
ABC, so that B 7 B’ and C 7 C’ then also A’ 7 A. This triangle
will also have
6’ +c: a=sin B’ + sin C’: sin A’.
Compounding 6+ce: 6‘ +c'—=(sin B+sin C) sin A’: (sin B’+sinC’)sin A.
But the second antecedent is entirely greater than its consequent ;
Big C.F AWG ASC crashes doin costonsia’ (I. 21)
If A’ fall on the base, 6’ + c’ will equal a
Dig, OTA etches nao ee (I. 20)
13. Consulting the first of y. As A increases while acute, cos A
decreases, hence a less amount is taken from 52 + c? and a@ conse-
quently increases. When A becomes obtuse, cos A is negative, and the
third term therefore additive ; now also then increase of A adds more
to 6? + c* and therefore to a% Always therefore if 6 and ¢ remain
* This notation is German, and very expressive, proportion being the equality of
ratios.
120 Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. [No. 1384.
constant, the increase of A increases a, and vice versa, the increase of a
will increase A, (I. 24, 25).
14. We proceed now to the general determination of triangles. |
We might first fix the conditions necessary to determine them in in-
dividuality, and then in species as Euclid has done; but it will be more
consonant to the spirit of analysis to obtain the most general first.
Dividing the equations (y) by c? and (B) by ¢ and writing = as m and
b
— as 2, we have
c
m2 =n? + 1 —2n cob | nm sinC — sin =o
n2—m? + 1—2m cosB pand msinC— sinA =O
1 = mg + n? — 2mn cos C m sinB—asin A=0O
From these six equations, each involving three quantities, any two
being given, the rest will be determined. The cases will be
First: mand m given or the ratios of the sides. Here the angles
are determined by their cosines, and hence no ambiguity can occur.
The form of the triangle is known, or its species determined (VI. 5).
Second : m and B given or the ratios of two sides (a,c) aud the in-
cluded angle. Still 2 being determined by the 2nd of the first set, the
rest are determined as in the former case, and no ambiguity is in-
volved. (VI. 6.)
Third: A,B and therefore C given; or the three angles. Here m
and 7 are determined by the first two of the 2nd set, and there is no ~
ambiguity. (VI. 4.) | .
Fourth : m and A given or the ratio of two sides (a, c) and, an angle
opposite to one. In this case C is determined by the 2nd of the 2nd set :
the sinal function entering occasions ambiguity. If m be 7 1, ais
greater than c and therefore A than C, whence C cannot be obtuse and
there is no ambiguity ; but if m — 1 or a is less than e¢, there is no
way of avoiding the difficulty, unless the species of C be directly
given. (VI. 7.). |
If now the length of one of the sides be given in addition to the
ratio in which it is involved, the triangle will be determined individually
as well as in species. This can occur in Ist, 2nd and 4th cases, which
produce (Euclid I. 8, 4 and 26) and (Young I. 26). There being no ratio
given in the third case, there is no individual triangle determined by
the three angles. ;
»
1843. | Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. 121
15. With regard to the linear properties of parallels. Ifa straight
line cut the sides of a triangle or these produced, parallel to the base,
a triangle is formed of the same species, and hence the sides are divid-
ed proportionally. The converse is similarly true (VI. 2). The base
of the new triangle will also bear the same proportion to that of the
primitive.
If now the base angles of the primitive triangle increase, so that the
sides approach parallelism, the sides of the two triangles increase with-
out limit, approaching equality as they do so, without limit. Hence
when the sides do become parallel, the ratio is one of equality, and the
frustrum of the triangle having become a parallelogram, it follows that
the opposite sides of a parallelogram are equal (I. 34). If the paral-
lelogram be rectangular, each pair of sides will be the distances between
the other pair, hence parallels are equidistant.
The two very elegant propositions (VI. 3, A,) are fragments of an
entire series relating to the segments of sides by lines drawn from the
opposite angles. It is not the intention of this paper to touch on
supplemental trains of inquiry, but only to sketch those on which the
rest may be scaffolded with ease. The propositions in question may,
however, be simply proved thus: If a line be drawn from A to a and
making with c an angle called 9, the segment on a between this line
and B is mes & that between the line & C is aemaee
Their ratio is consequently always c sin 9: 6 sin (A @ 9), and
will be reduced to that of c: b, when sin? = sin(Ar 0). If the
cutting line fall within the triangle, this gives 9 = A — 0 or 0 = LA;
(VI. 3). If without, 9 = 7 — (0 — A) or 0 =} Cis A);
(VI. A).
16. The area of any plane figure is a function of its sides and angles,
But the sides can be projected on two rectangular axes by help of
what precedes, hence the area is also determinable by means of these
projections and the angles. The simplest area to consider is that of
the rectangle, because if the origin be at one of its angles and the includ-
ing sides be the axes, they are also the projections of the others, The
angles are besides equal, and natural constants. Let the ratio of the
sides to the linear unit be @ and 6, and that of the area to the super-
ficial unit be A, then A = @ (a, 6). Inspection and our previous
R
122 Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. [No. 134.
knowledge inform us at once, that if a@ be increased p times and 8, q
times, the area is increased pg times, hence pgA = 9 (pa, gb).
yote Pade nia roi sae (a, b).
ne |
Hence $ (pa, gb) must be divisible by pg with a quotient inde-
pendent of pg. Symmetrically therefore it must also be divisible by ab
with a quotient independent of a and 0; let the quotient of both divi-
sions be k. Then
$ (pa, gb) = kabpg.
. pgA = habpq or A = kab.
Assuming now as is usual, that the superficial unit is the square on the
linear unit, we find k by making a = 6 = 1] (the linear unit) .. A
== 1 (the superficial unit). Hence = 1 and therefore
A = ab.
17. From this well known theorem, the various properties of rec-
tangular areas flow with the utmost facility. The first ten of Euclid’s
second book are reduced to the results of algebraic multiplication and
division, remembering that area of square on @ equals a x a = a?.
Recurring to equations y in (12), if a perpendicular be dropped on
a from A, the segment between it and B isc cos B; call it s,
ot 620% +e + 2 as
the double sign depending on the species of B. If it be obtuse 2 as
is additive (II. 12); if acute, 2 as is subtractive (IL 13); if it be right
s = Oor 6? = a2 + c%, (1. 47). Similarly if 62 = a? + c?,
cos B = Oand... B = 47 (I. 48.)
18. A triangle is easily shewn to be half a rectangle on the same
base, and with the same altitude, hence a triangle = 4 altitude x
base. The following consequences immediately result. Triangles or
parallelograms on equal bases vary as their altitudes and vice versa
(Young VI. 12). Triangles and parallelograms having equal bases
and equal altitudes are equal, and the contrary (I. 35, 36, 37, 38°
39, 40). If @ be the base of a triangle A, the altitude or perp. from
A=csinB
4 Qype i}ae, sin B.
. A: A’ = gesin.B: a'c' sin B’
If then the triangles (A, A’) are equal and an angle in each (B, B’)
equal, ac = a'c or the sides are reciprocally proportional (VI. 15).
1843. ] Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. 123
If ac =a'c and B=B; A=A‘(VI. 15). If again equal trian-
gles have “ica a pair of sides reciprocally proportional, or A=
and ac = ac’; then sin B = sin B,, or the angles contained by those
sides are satin or supplementary. Also if B only = B’; A: A’=
ac:a'c’. This extended to parallelograms is (VI. 23), as (III. 15)
may be extended into (VI. 14).
Again, since two rectangles are as their products ab: a’ b’, the
truth of (VI. 16 and 17) is evident.
19. Considering the area P of a polygon in the light of a function
of sides and angles, we have
P— ¢ {a Bi 8's sinsccoar Suittipieif Ay Easy ehphall or in a numerical form
a op {-. ben sasie (ut ED Coat , a being taken as linear and a?
a aa
as superficial unit. Hence in all similar polygons P: P’ — a*?: a®
(VI. 19, 20.) If further P’: P’”’ — a’? : a? and it be givena: a’ —
a’: a" then ex equali
| el Saeed ait (VI. 22.)
Likewise if P; P’: P’ = a2: a7: a’? and a? = a’? + a''2; then
Py SeP PY VE ak yore
20. As we have treated areas, we might treat volumes. The right
solid being of three dimensions V = (a, b,c). Increasing a p-fold, 6
g-fold and ¢ r-fold V is increased pqr-fold and ¢ (a, 6, c) is shewn
to be habe. The solid unit then assumed is the cube on the linear
unit, and V = abe = altitude x base. Hence the right prism is also
altitude x triangular base. The oblique parallelopiped is also altitude
x base. By these principles we see at once the truth of (XI. 25, 28,
29, 30, 31, 32, 33, D, 34, 40.)
21. The examination of the circle is divided into the consideration
of angles, of chords, secants, and tangents (which have one general
analytical character, ) and of areas as connected with the circle.
Laying down the angle at the centre double of that at the circum-
ference on the same are, as in Euclid, it will apply even if the former —
be 7 or a reverse angle, (III. 20). One consequence is—all angles at
the circumference on the same arc are equal, (III. 21). Another, that
they will be 4 (72x), 47, ort (3 + a) as the angle at the centre
is less, =, or greater than 7; (III. 31). Lastly, if an angle at centre
124 Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. (No. 1384.
= a, the reverse is 27—«%; hence their halves or the angles at the
circumference on opposite sides of the same chord are $ # and 7—4 a,
their sum is therefore 7 (III. 22.)
If the angle @ at the circumference stand on the chord ce, the radius
being 7, the angle at the centre is 20 and (by y in art. 12) it is seen
e=2rsin 0. Iassume the formule of trigonometry here, as they
are all deducible independently by help of y. Hence if ¢ and x be
constant, 4 is constant; or if 7 and 9 be constant,c is constant, (III. 26,
27, 28, 29), Also ¢ is a maximum with sin 6, i. e when 0 = iw
(IIL. 15).
22. Now as to lines intersecting a circle. Let P be a point whose
distance from the centre is d, and p a secant through it inclined to d at
an angle 8. Then p, d and x (the radius) form a triangle, the two for-
mer including 9 ; hence
Spt Nigh ape cos 6
or p?—2pd cos? = r? — d?
The quadratic form shews that there are two roots only. Hence
the line cuts the circle in two points at most. The solution of the qua-
dratic is
p = dcos 6+ Jr? — d? (sin 0)?
If the point be within the circle, r 7 d; and the roots are both always
possible since sin 9-1. If 8 = 1 a, the two values of p become
equal; which with its converse is (III. 3). The increase of 0, dimi-
nishing d cos 8 and increasing d sin 0, will diminish @; the maximum
of P being when 6 = 0 and the minimum when 0 = gq (III. *y
If 8 be measured negatively and the secant called R, we shall have,
R = d cos (— 0) + J r*? — d? (sin — 6)?
= dcos 9+ J 7 — d? (sin 9)?
which shews an equal secant on the opposite side of the diameter,
(III. 7).
The same is true if the point be beyond the circle, but as d@ is then
7 7, the line @ will only cut the circle while d sin 9 is less than 7,
(III. 8). Whend sin 0 = 7, e@ = d cos 6; since there is only one
value the line @ is a tangent and for that value r? + (tan)? = d? or
the tangent is perpendicular to the radius through the point of contact,
(111.17, 18, 19).
23. By the theory of equations, if s and s’ be the segments of 0
between the point P and the circumference, ss’ — d? — rz. Hence
1843. | Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. 125
when dis constant, or for secants through the same point, the rectangle of
the segments is a constant quantity, (III. 35, 36). If the point be
without the circle, d is greater than r and d? — r? is tan? , therefore
ss’ = tan? (36, 37.)
24. If two radii be drawn including a given angle 9 at the centre,
they determine a certain arc of the circle in length, as well as the
sector corresponding to that arc. Denote the former by /, the latter
by S; then (0 standing for the ratio of Me angle 8 to the right angle)
l
a aah (e) and = ¥ (9)
Take p arcs equal to : we have p bat equal to 0 and p sectors
equal to s;
- o(p0) = = p. ¢(0) andy (p0) = & =p. (0)
The solutions of ia equations are $(0)—m @ and W(0) =e
m and n being certain constants,
i= mr Oand S = nr 0
Hence if r remains the same, /and S are proportional to 9, (VI. 33).
25. We cannot determine m and x without the aid of limits, because
they involve the comparison of curvilinear length with rectilinear
length. If we bisect the are continually and join the points of bisec-
tion, we shall have a series of polygons of chords whose perimeters
approximate to the arc without limit, while the areas between them
and the radii approximate at the same rate to the sector. Denoting
the ratio of the chord of 0 to radius by ¢; that of the chord of 16
by c[3]; that of chord of 1 6 by ¢ [4], and so on we have for the
perimeters of the successive polygons,
er; 2e [Ah]. 732.2 [A] Preece, sates 2% [4].” r
And their areas successively
T rT 2a
eer ater, Ane ele Teg ois oe Pel[s].2r
Ph: r
At the limit, therefore, the sector = 3 X are, and consequently the
. r .
area of the circle = ey X circumference.
Also we calculate the chord of half an arc from that of the whole by
e[J=v{2—vanel
126 Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. [No 134,
2
Commence with the angle 60° or ous Py when c = ], and calcu-
late successively c[ 2], c [4], * &c.; and we shall find the series of perime-
ters given above approach the limit 1.0471975511 .. x 7, which is con-
sequently the length of the are of 60° ; call it = r, then 7 = 3.14159...
and the circumference of the circle is 2 mr, and its area is Tr; prov-
ing circles to be as the squares of their radii, (XII.’).
Now recurring to the general formula for are and sector ; if oe 4,
e
>
the arc becomes 2,77 and the sector zr? ; pene m = sand n=
1A
consequently = zr and S = zr7@
te 4 ‘
26. In conclusion, by freely applying the principle of limits, the
pyramid is treated as the limiting value of a series of inscribed prisms,
Bh _, Bh 1 anes
= .n” aar(n-l)? , = (n-2) yt eeeee = 92 9 id
where B is the base of the pyramid, and fA its altitude, and n the
number of inscribed prisms ; the sum of the ia is
Bh (n+ 1)a 2m—1) =
in ae (+ )@—3)
At the limit z is infinite, and the series sabe the pyramid. Therefore
Pyramid = i base x altitude.
This involves (XII. 3, 4, 5,6, 7, 8,9). The case of similar pyra-
mids, (XII. 8,) is done by transformations into similar parallelopipeds.
Cylinders are the limits of polygonal prisms inscribed in them; and
cones, those of the inscribed pyramids. Their properties are therefore
the same as those of prisms and pyramids, their circular bases permit-
ting a definite reference to the homologous Aa the radii. (XII. 10, 11,
12, 13, 14, 15.)
Lastly, the sphere is determined solely by its radius. Hence the
volume of the sphere bears a determinate ratio to the cube of its radius.
27. Modern authors of the highest repute have concurred in deduc-
ing the theory of Trigonometry from the definitions of sin and cos,
which I have adopted at the commencement of this paper, introducing
the functions tan, sec, &c. as convenient abbreviations, but without any
reference to their geometric meaning. (See Peacock’s Report on Ana-
lysis. Brit. Assoc. 1833, page 291.)
1843. | Treatment of Geometry as a branch of Analysis. 127
The application of a few abstract principles to geometrical ideas of
the simplest character enables us thus to develope the whole mass of
complicated properties founded on them, in a comprehensive and con-
cinnous mode; justifying by the result the. daring paradox of D’Alem-
bert, that the more abstractedly an investigation is carried on, the more
lucid and satisfactory does it become. It must not, however, be for a
moment forgotten that analysis is but the lever; the fulcrum of its
support lies in the ideas peculiar to the subject to which it is applied.
Without a vivid and distinct conception of them our labour is idle.
Professor Whewell in his tractates has done mathematical education
signal service by insisting on this point, and his own works on Mecha-
nies, with those of Professor De Morgan on Algebra and the Differential
Calculus, may be hailed as some of the most valuable gifts which the
thoughtful student has received from the hands of the masters of
science.
Description of a new genus of Falconide. By B. H. Hoveson, Esa.
In the Journal of the Society for April, 1836, p. 227, I described a
species of Eagle as Aquila pernigra, but without noticing its singular
peculiarities of form, as especially the unique foot, of which the outer-
most fore digit is even smaller, in proportion to the innermost, than in
the human hand. There is no such foot heretofore described in the
whole family. The rest of its structure, as the feeble legs and vast
floating wings, agrees with Mzlvus ; and, in sooth, our genus Hefero-
pus should stand znfer Aquilinarum et Milvinarum stirpes, and be
thus characterized :— Bill and head small and undepressed, aquzlo-
milvine. Figure slender, with very ample wings and tail, the former
rather exceeding the latter; their gradation aquiline, having the
greatest quills incurved. ‘farsi short and plumed. ‘Toes nervous,
unequal, the inner and hind highly developed, the inner being
nearly as long as the central and stouter, the outer being much the
shortest and feeblest : talons very acute, and unequal, but not highly
curved. Type, Aquila pernigra, Nobis, loc. cit.
[N. B.—In Mr. Jerdon’s Catalogue of the Birds of Peninsular India (Madr. Jl.
No. XXIV, 68,) that naturalist remarks, that—‘‘ On the summit of the Neilgherries
there is frequently seen a black Eagle, larger than the Wokhab (Aquila Vindhiana,
Franklin), but of which I was unable to procure a specimen. I have heard it is also
128 Description of a new genus of Falconide. [No. 134.
often met with in Coorg.’’—And in the privately circulated Supplement to this cata-
logue, Mr. Jerdon describes the female, and mentions having examined three speci-
mens of this ‘“‘ curious Eagle,’’ which he there classes as Nisdetus ovivorus, but with a
double mark of doubt as to the genus; and he has since transmitted specimens of both
sexe@®to the Society’s Museum by the title of Ictindetus ovivorus, but subsequently to
the arrival of the foregoing paper by Mr. Hodgson, with whose former description of
the species Mr. Jerdon’s specimens accord in every particular. Moreover, with refer-
ence to the specific name bestowed by Mr. Jerdon, Mr. Hodgson had already stated
that—‘‘ This is a shy bird, which adheres exclusively to the wild and mountainous
tracts of the hills. Its body is entirely free from offensive odour and vermin, and its
prey chiefly the Pheasants of the region it frequents, as well as their eggs.’’ .
Mr. Jerdon, on the other hand, did not fail to notice the peculiar structure of the
feet, and I quote the following from his very interesting description: ‘‘ This remark-
able Eagle 1 have placed for the present, though with doubt, under the genus
Nisdetus. It differs from it in superior length of wing and tail—its shorter tarsus,
Shorter toes, and more especially in their comparative size—the outer toe and claw
being remarkably smail, and the inner claw of very great size. The extreme short-
mess of the outer toe is, as far as I can recollect, peculiar to it among the diurnal
Raptores of this country, though common among the Owls. Its habits, too, are, so
far as I know, peculiar, and differ from those of the other Indian Eagles. * * * It
hunts about the edges of the hills more generally than on the higher parts of the
table-land, and most frequently over bushy ground, though I have also seen it over
forest, both on the top of the hills 4nd half way down the Coonoor ghaut. It sails
slowly along with very little motion of the wings, usually very close to the ground,
hunting tolerably regularly, not unlike the Harriers, and like them hardly ever
alights except for the purpose of feeding.
‘‘In the three specimens I have examined, I found that eggs and nestlings had
formed its only food. Among these I recognized the eggs of the Hill Quail ( Coturnix
erythrorhyncha ), of the Malacocercus Somervillez, and of some Doves ( Turtur tigrina
and 7. Cambayensis), beside others I did not know, and several nestlings. I have
seen it, since I procured my specimens, alight for a few seconds on a large bush
over which it had been circling for some time, and apparently devoursomething. I
found in this bush a Dove’s nest empty, which had evidently been robbed. This
Eagle thus appears to be habitually a robber of bird’s nests; and as Doves, as well as
some other birds, breed throughout the whole year, it can probably sustain itself
mostly on its favorite food, though it doubtless occasionally destroys young, feeble, or
sickly birds, and perhaps reptiles.”’
The Limnaétus unicolor is likewise a plunderer of nests, though I cannot say of the
eggs contained in them. A fine specimen, presented by Mr. Frith to the Society,
and shot in Mymunseng, first attracted that gentleman’s attention by the alarm which
was manifested upon its approach to a large banyan tree, upon which were several of
the deep and massive nests of the Sturnus contra, one of which it immediately pro-
ceeded to pull to pieces, to rob of its contents, in which operation it was shot. It is not,
therefore, improbable that the same habit will prove to be more or less prevalent
among various true Eagles, Spizaéti (Nisactus, Hodgson), and Buzzards. The
specimen adverted to agrees perfectly with the description of Spizaétus hastatus,
Lesson, in the ‘Zoologie du voyage de M. Belanger,’ and I believe it also to be the
Falco limnaétus, Horsfield, v. F. unicolor, Temminck, constituting the Limnaétus
unicolor, Vigors. Cur. As. Soc.|—E. B.
hi.
‘nM gra mi
Sis:
Oe
f
oie 4
2 Inside of Foot 5
A
ie fs
ss
re
o
“a
\e
Guundine. Het eropus mihi. H. Per
a
1xe of nature.
te
T Black loth:
.
129
Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.
(Friday Evening, 10th February 1843.)
The monthly meeting of the Society was held on Friday evening, the
10th instant, the Honorable the President in the Chair.
The following gentlemen proposed at the last meeting, were ballotted for
and duly elected :—
The Rev. Cuas. Irvine, of St. Xavier’s College.
Lieut. Barrp Smith, B. E.
Baboo Cossinatu Brose.
Joseru St. Pourcarn, Esa. Chandernagore.
The usual communication was ordered to be made to them.
The following Members were proposed: Professor Mohl, Secretary of the
Asiatic Society of Paris, proposed as an Honorary Member by H. Torrens,
Esq. and seconded by R. Houston, Esq. It was referred, as in like cases, to
the Committee of Papers, to report on the propriety of conferring this
distinction. |
Dr. Tranter, Malwa Contingent, proposed by the Honorable the Presi-
dent, seconded by Mr. Masters.
The Acting Secretary reported to the meeting that he had enquired as
to the state of the account of the transcription of the Veds,* as requested
by Major Troyer’s letter, and that it appeared by reference to the Journal,
vol. VIII. page 531, that the transaction was then taken over from Mr.
_ James Prinsep’s executor, and that a balance was due to the Society of
rupees 233:.7: 15, from the French Government, which would now be
claimed. Instructions had been sent to Benares to Judoonath lundit,
who formerly conducted the transcription, requesting him to continue it.
It farther appeared, as to the copies of the 4th Vol. of the Mahabarata,
that a box containing 56 copies of it, with 56 copies of the Index, had
been sent from the rooms in April 1840, and by an Office Memorandum,
that the case had been shipped on the 9th September 1840, by Government
on the ship Larkins, with aletter from Mr. Torrens ; but no acknowledgment
of the arrival of the case had been received from Europe. The Acting
Secretary stated, that he had written full particulars of the above to
Major Troyer.
The Acting Secretary stated, that under the orders of the President, a
box containing the following works, in all 13 volumes, had been sent to His
Highness the Pacha of Egypt from the Society by Dr. Wise, who had sailed
on the Jndia this morning. No letter could accompany the donation, be-
* Proceedings for January, 1843.
ie)
130 Asiatic Society. [No. 134.
cause it was not possible to procure the proper kind of paper on which
to write it during the Mohurrum.
Books delivered to Dr. Wisk, for the Pasha of Egypt, on the 8th February, 1843.
Fatawa Alemgéri, Vols. | to 6.
Inaya, Vols. 2d, 3d, and 4th.
Jawami ul [lm ul Riazi, one copy.
Anis ul Musharrahin, one ditto.
Sharaya ool Islam, one ditto.
Khazanat ul Im, one ditto.
The Acting Secretary then read the following Minute, relative to the
state of part of the premises.
Minuie.
We, the undersigned, having, at the request of the Hon’ble the President and the
Acting Secretary, examined the screen wall on the North side of the Society’s House,
are of opinion, that it is not in a dangerous state; that the cracks are only due to
slight sinkings of other parts of the building very common in Calcutta; and that it is
well supported by the manner in which the new building and its roof have been carried
up and laid on. We therefore recommend, that the arch of the Eastern door only,
be renewed, as being all that is at present required. (
W.N. Forsss, Lieut.-Col.
Calcutta, Jan. 2, 1843. A. Irving, Major.
He further represented the utility of a Skylight over the Stair-case,
which was ordered to be referred to the Committee of Papers.
The following Books were presented and purchased :—
List of Books received for the Meeting, on the 10th February, 1843.
The Calcutta Literary Gleaner, February 1843, Vol. 1., No. 12. Presented by the
Editors.
The Calcutta Christian Observer, New Series, February 1843, Vol. iv., No. 28.
Presented by the Editor.
The Oriental Christian Spectator, 2nd Series, Bombay, 1842, Vol. iii. No. 12.
Presented by the Editor.
Specimens of the Popular Poetry of Persia, translated by A. Chodzko, London,
1842, 8vo. Purchased.
J. J. Bayer’s, Gemmarum affabre sculptarum thesaurus, 1720, fol. Presented by
H. Torrens, Esq.
Gazophilacium Lingue Persarum, Authore P. AngeloaS. Joseph. Amstelodami,
1684, fol. Presented by H. Torrens, Esq.
Piddington’s Tabular View of the Generic Characters of Roxburgh’s Flora Indica.
Presented by the Author.
Piddington’s English Index to the Plants of India. Calcutta, 1832, 8vo. Presented
by the Author.
Actes de L’Academie Royale des Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts de Bordeaux,
1840, 2eme, Anneé, ler. 4 4e. trimestres, 1841, 3eme. Anneé, ler. 4 4e. trimestre et.
1843. ] Asiatic Society. 13]
1842, deme. Anneé, ler. trimestre. Presented by the Academie Royale de Bor-
deaux.
Meteorological Register for December, 1842, from the Surveyor General’s Office.
A Chinese Wood Engraving and Description of the Porcelain Tower of Nankin.
Presented by J. H. Stocqueler, Esq.
Read the following letter, received through the Private Secretary to the
Right Honourable the Governor General :—
To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Calcutta.
Washington, |st June, 1842.
Dear S1r,—I have the honor to transmit to you copies of the constitution, and list
of Members, of the National Institution for the promotion of Science lately established
in this city, together with the first and second Bulletins of its Proceedings, and to re-
quest you to lay them before your Society, that its Members may become acquainted
with the existence and objects of the National Institution, with a view to future
correspondence. I have the honor to be with great respect,
Approved. Your most obedt. Servant,
J. R. Poinsett, Francis MarkoOg, JUN.
President National Institution. Corresponding Secretary.
To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Calcutta.
Office of American and Foreign Agency,
New York, June 9, 1842.
Sir,—With reference to my respects of the 6th April ultimo, informing you of the
enrolment of your Society among the Correspondents of the National Institution, up-
on my proposal, I have now the honor to transmit you the annexed letter of the Corres-
ponding Secretary thereof of the Ist instant, and am, with great respect, Sir,
Your most obedt. Servant,
Aaron H. PaLMErR,
Corresponding Member of the National Institution.
Ordered.—That upon receipt of the papers referred to, the whole be duly
acknowledged, with expression of the Society’s desire to co-operate with
the National Institution of Washington.
Read the following letter received through Mr. Gladstone of Messrs.
Gillanders and Co. :—
MownsiEvrR, Bordeauz, le 30 Juillet 1842.
L’ Academie Royale de Bordeaux a recu en 1839, de la Societe Asiatique de Calcut-
ta, 24 cahiers comprenant le recueil de les travaux pendant les anneés 1836-1837 ;
en meme temps elle recut 4 volumes publiés par la meme Société sur la recherche des
Antiquités, des Arts, des Sciences, et de la Litterature de |’ Asie.
Elle a cherché plusieurs fois V’occsion de vous adresser |’expression de sa gratitude
pour un don aussi précieux et aussi de vous faire parvenir le recueil des actes qu’elle
publie régulierement depuis plusieurs anneés; comme elle n’a rien regu de la Sociéte
Asiatique depuis 1839, elle a lieu de craindre que ses envois n’aient pas étés fidéle-
ment remis.
3
132 Asiatic Society. [No. 134.
En consequence elle a accepté les offres bienveillantes de Mr. Gautier un des ses
membres, qui dirige un navire sur Calcutta, pour vous adresser ses remerciemens
vous faire don de ses travaux, et vous prier de continuer un échange dout elle sent
tous le prix: elle serait heureuse de former des relatious durables et suivies avec une
Société qui a rendu et rend d’important services aux Sciences, aux Lettres, et aux
Arts, parses lumieres, son zéle et ses belles publications.
J’ai Vhonneur d’etre, Monsieur, votre trés devoué Serviteur,
C. H. Vauat, Secret. Gen. de? Acad.
A M. le Secrétaire de la Société Asiatique de Calcutta.
Ordered.—That the same, with the donation of Books be duly acknow-
ledged.
Read letter from J. Beaufort, Esq., Seory, as follows :—
Last month the Collector of Beerbhom sold by auction a good deal of property be-
longing to the temple at Deoghur, amongst which was aheap of coins. Now, I can-
not pretend to any knowledge of Numismatics, and [ cannot tell whether the Society
would value any of these coins; but as I thought it possible that some few of them
might be curious, I bought some of each kind, and enclose them to you, for the bene-
fit of the Society.
Should they prove to be of no value, I shall not care what becomes of them.
Your’s truly,
J. BEAUFORT.
N. B. The following is a List of the Names under which I bought them.—The
name is written inside of each paper.
The Coins, 68 in number, were found to be as follows :—
Benares Rupee, woes dove ese sees 1 Piece.
Pattiay) Ss. Se nld weet eae Jee ok
Nepal, ose. oes wees cine eoee 1
Benares 2 Annas, Bae wells miei 3)
Jhamnsee, .... ens TEAS eae siete ne
Arcot, ty see eee oe AHMHT-
PIOY. Mr. Prinsep remarks (Asiat. Journ. Vol. 11, p. 32,) with regard to this coin:
This coin of Demetrius is recognised to be Seleucidan, from the figure of Apollo,
sitting upon a peculiar altar, described by Pinkerton as a hamper inverted.
1843. | Asiatie Society. 153
3. Aigyptian Kings.
9. A silver tetradrachm, brought from Egypt by Mr. Drew. Obv. Head of the King
with curled hair, encircled by adiadem. Rev. Jupiter’s eagle, standing on a thun-
derbolt. Lege: TITOAEMAIOY BASIAEQO® IALTH (anno 18.) Mr.
Prinsep observes concerning this coin—A coin of Ptolemy I. or the V, B. C. 204. as
Pinkerton says, his coins have most the letters []A or A, explained to signify
Paphos or Salamis, both cities of Cyprus.
10 Another. Same device AH Anno 8.
11 Another D. D. LIA Anno 14.
12 Another D. D. LIE Anno 15.
13 Another D. D. LIA anno 18.
14 A large copper coin. Head‘of the King with curled hair. Hee An eagle..
AEMAIO... BA... E.
15 Another copper coin.
16 Copper coin of a King unknown.
4, INDO-GRECIAN KINGS.
a. Eukratides.
17 Obv. Square copper coin. Helmeted head of the King, Rev. The two Dioscuri,
as it appears, charging. Owing to this type, which is that of Bukratides, and the
head of the King, it has been appropriated to that prince.
_ 6. Menander.
18 Silver tetradrachma. Obv. BASIAEQS SQTHPOS MENANA-
POY. Head of the King with fillet and part of the bust, with the right hand
throwing a thunderbolt. R. ‘py'qy PAGS PIALY (Moharajara Tadatasa Mi-
nadasa.) Minerva facing the right, in the left the Aigis, with the right throwing a
spear. Monogram.
19. The same Obverse. Rev. The same type and monogram. Legend PAs P44
Pvilu.
20 The same.
21 The same Obverse. Rev. The same legend. Monogram. Minerva facing the
left, the thunderbolt in the right, and the A.gis in the left.
22 The same legend and type. Rev. The same, excepting that the monogram is to
the left of Minerva, instead of to the right. The same legend, well preserved.
23 The same legend. Helmeted head of the King. Rev. The same legend. Minerva
facing the left with monogram on the left.
24 The same.
20 The same with exception of the monogram, which is as in 21.
26 Copper coin, totally effaced ; visible only the letter ME.
c. Hermes (2)
27 Copper head of the King, much effaced. Legend not traceable.
28 Another similar one.
154 Asiatic Society. [No 134.
29 Head of the King effaced. Grecian and Cabulian legend illegible.
30 A Coin of an Indo-Grecian King.
G. Coins of the successors of the Indo-Grecian Kings P. Barbaric Kings of
Caubul. Great King of Kings.
CorPER,
1 Obv. not discernible. Rev. King on horseback to the right. Leg. ...e-
EYZBA2.
2-3 Two more.
4-5 Head of the King with a curly hair and flowing fillets. Rev. .... AG
BACIACAC. .... A horseman mounted with flowing ribbands; before him a
three-pronged symbol, the complete legend is Lwrnpyeyac Bactrktc
Bactrswv Wils A. A. p. 333, remarks: The position of the first of the series, if
there was a succession, or if the individual, if alone, is undoubtedly subsequent to the
Greek Kings of Cabul. The title of great King of Kings connects him with Azes,
and that he was posterior to Azes, is indicated by a peculiar symbol, a trident with
three prongs.
6-9 Four coins more.
2. Coins of the Indo-Scythian Kings of Caubul.
Kadphises.
Copper.
10 Oby. King standing to the front with conical hat. Rev. effaced.
11 Another similar one.
12 Another of smaller size.
13-16 Four more.
i7 Obv. Head of the King with Grecian legend illegible. Rev. Standing Hercules,
Cabulian legend.
18-19. Two similar ones.
20 Castofa gold coin. Figure of the King to the right with cap, the front of which
projects to the right, and fillets, club in his right, carried in a car, drawn by two
horses and driven by a minutive charioteer. _ BACIAEY€E OO HMO KAA
@MICHE. Rev. Naked figure to the front wearing a cap, the right hand rests
on a trident.
21 Head of the King. In other respects the same with the preceding.
22 A similar one.
Kanerkes.
CopPER.
23 Obv. King standing to the right with coat, conical cap, and fillets, his right hand
pointing downwards to an altar.
24-31 Eight coins of Kanerkes, much obliterated.
32 King standing before an altar. Rev. A figure with nimbus. Legend illegible.
1843. | Asiatic Society. 155
33 King in Scythian dress, standing. Rev. Figure of an elephant.
34-37 Four similar coins.
38-41 Four coins more.
Ooerkhi.
GOLD.
42 Obv. Bust of the King with high cap to the left, a club in his right PAO
oo HPKI KOPANO. Rev. Standing figure to the left, halo and rays round
the head, the right extended, the left holding the hilt of the sword. Mon. MIIPO.
Baraora.
43 Oby. Cast of middle size PAO NANO King standing to the left with curi-
ous cap and clad in mail; in the left holding a trident, the right pointing down to an
altar, sword at the side. Leg. Rev. PAONAPAO. Figure of Shiva with hair
hanging down both sides of the head; upper half of the body naked, the lower cover-
ed; behind him the bull, to the left a Monogram.
44-50 Seven more.
51 Obv. A figure of Kenorao seated cross-legged, with fillets andleft hand raised.
Rey. A figure standing. V. W. p. 368.
52-102 Fifty one Indo.-Scythian coins.
D. Parthian or Arsakian Coins.
103 A silver tetradrachma. Head of Arsaces (I.?) facing the right, with broad
diadem and straight hair. R. Victory offering a crown to the King seated. Leg.
BACIAEQC BACIAEON EYEPIETOY ENI®ANOY OIA
EAAHNOY. Asiat. Jour. Vol. II. p. 34.
104 Obv. Silver tetradrachma. Head with mitred cap, and this spsymbol behind it.
Rev. Figure seated, holding a bow. Leg. BASJARQS> EIMI@ANOYS.
METAAOY APZAKOY AIKAIOY @®IAEAAHNOY.
According to the shape of the Greek characters of this coin it must belong to one of the
first Arsaces.
105 Head with mitred cap and aquiline nose, well executed. Rev. Figure seated,
holding a bow, under which there is a kind of altar formed like the letter A.Leg.
BASIAEQOS BASIAEON EYEPTETOY AIKAIOY EHI®-
ANOYS= ®IAEAAHNOY. Character well delineated.
106 Another. Plain head dress; device and character very rude.
107 The same, but more legible.
108-9 Two similar ones.
110 Another, inscription legible, but in rude characters.
111 Another, Head of the King, to its right and left the moon and star. Rev. The
same device, on the left of the figure this sign QL
112 Another, with entirely barbarous character.
113 Head of the King with aquiline nose and pointed beard. Rey. A figure in
156 Asiatic Society. _No. 134.
trowsers, seated with bow. Lege. BASSI AEQS APCAKOY EIMI®AN
OYS PIAEAAH.
114 Obv. Head of the King with deep turban and mitred cap ; bow behind, with
fillets of the rudest fabrication. Rev. The same device. Character quite perverted.
E. Sassanian Coins.
115 Tetradrachm. Head of the King; with a cap or crown and curled hair. Rev.
Sitting Hercules. Leg. in Cabulian character, yyWPPy 44, Asiat. Journ. II, p.
312. Wilson A. A. p. 225.
116 Head of the King, facing the left, with a large tuft of curly hair and a pe-
culiar cap; round it the legend in Cabulian characters almost obliterated. Rev. A
fire altar (mithra) with the head of the King upon it, two priests on both sides with
swords, Asiat, Journ. II. p. 36.
F. Hindoo Coins.
Chandra Gupia series.
117 A Gold Coin. Obv. Figure to the left standing, with a halo round the head, a
bow in the left. Legend imperfectly legible. Rev. A female, sitting cross-legged, the
left hand supported on her hip. Asiat. Journ. Vol. V. p. 648. Asiat. Res. Vol. XVII.
Librarian's Annual Report.
Abstract of the List of Books, received into the Library, from the 21st January to the 31st
December, 1842.
The number of all the Books, large and small, in different Languages, amounts to 259. |
English.
Abstract of the Proceedings of a Committee for investigation of the Coal and Mi-
neral Resources of India. Calcutta, 1842, (two copies. ) 2 vols.
Address at the Anniversary Meeting of the Royal Geographical Society. London,
1841-1842. 2 pamphlets.
Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Nos. 47 to 59,—13 Nos. and Parts.
Annual Report of the Transactions of the Bombay Chamber of Commerce. 1840-41,
1 vol.
Ballantyne’s Elements of Hindi and Braj-Bhaka Grammar. London, 1839, 1 vol.
— Grammar of the Mahratta Language. London, 1839, 1 vol.
Baptist Missionary Magazine. Boston, No. 8.
Busawan Lal’s Memoirs of the Puthan Sodier of Fortune. Calcutta, 1832, 1 vol.
Calcutta Christian Observer. New Series, 1842, vol. iii, 1 vol. .
Calcutta Literary Gleaner, 1842, Nos. 1 to 8 and 10 (Nos. 4 two copies,) 10 Nos.
Calcutta Monthly Journal, 3rd Series, 1842. Nos. 83 and 84.-—2 Nos,
Cantor’s Zoological Sketch of Chusan. M. S. 4 vol.
Catalogue Gallery, London, 1840, vol. v.
1843. | Asiatic Society. 157
Correspondence regarding the Discovery of the Tea Plant of Assam. Calcutta, 1841.
1 Pamphlet.
Cunningham’s Map of the Comparative Geography of Central Asia, 1 No.
Darwin’s Structure and Distribution of Coral Reefs. London, 1842, 1 vol.
Heynen’s Tracts, Historical and Statistical, on India. London, 1814, 1 vol.
Ibraheem’s Grammar of the Persian Language. London, 1841, 1 vol.
Irwine’s Account of the General and Medical Topography of Ajmeer. Calcutta,
1841. 1 pamphlet.
Jameson’s Edinburgh New Philosophical Journal, Nos. 62, and 64, two copies,
and 65, & Nos.
Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society. Nos. 2, 3.
Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland, London, Vol. v.
No. 10. four copies ; Vol. vi. No. 12. 5 Nos.
Journal of the Royal Geographical Society of London. Vol. x, Parts, 1,2,3,; Vol.
xi, Parts, 1, 2° 5 Nos.
Kerr’s Sketch of Upper Assam. 1 vol.
Kittoe’s Illustrations of Indian Architecture. 1 Vol., 4 Nos.
Lane’s Dictionary, English and Burmese. Calcutta, 1841, 3 copies.
Lardner’s Cabinet Cyclopedia—Natural Philosophy, Vol. i.
Laws and Regulations of the Egyptian Society. 1 pamphlet.
List of the Members of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland.
1841, 1 pamphlet.
London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Journal of Science,
3rd Series, Vol. xix, Nos. 122 to 127 ; Vol. xx, Nos, 128 to134; Vol. xxi. Nos.
135, 14 Nos.
Lyell’s Principles of Geology. 6th Edition. London, 1840, 3 vols.
Mackenzie’s (Col.) Plates, (13 pieces,)—13 Nos.
Maepherson’s Report upon the Khonds of the districts of Ganjam and Cuttack.
1842, 2 copies.
McCosh’s Medical Advice to the Indian Stranger. London, 1841, 1 vol.
Memoirs of the Royal Astronomical Society. London, 1840, Vol. xi.
Minutes of the Committee of Council on Education, 1840-41.—1 vol.
Moor’s Notices of the Malayan Archipelago and adjacent Countries. Singapore,
1837, 1 vol,
Naturalist’s Library—Entomology, Vol. vii., Foreign Moths. 1 vol.
Ichthyology, Vol. iii., Fishes of Guiana. 1 vol.
Mammalia, Vol. xi., Marsupials and Vol. xii. Horses, 2 vol.
Ornithology, Vol. xii. British Birds. 1 vol.
—
————
Newbold on the Ipoh or Upas Poison, used by the Jacoons and other Aboriginal
Tribes of the Malay Peninsula. London, 1837, 1 pamphlet.
Pemberton’s Report on Bootan. Calcutta, 1839, 1 vol.
Prinsep’s Runjeet Singh. Calcutta, 1834, (defective, ) 1 vol.
Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society. 1841, Vol. ii,, No. 17.
158 Asiatic Society. — [No. 134.
Proceedings of the Geological Society of London, 1841, Part ii. Nos. 76 to 83, @
Nos.
—— of the London Electrical Society. Session 1841-42. London, Parts i. and
iv, 2 Nos.
of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland. London,
1841, 1 Nos.
of the Zoological Society of London, 1840, parts viii.—1 No. and parts.
Reports of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, London, 1838,
Vol. vii. and 1842, Vol. x, 2 vols.
(Sixth) of the Egyptian Society. 1842, 1 pamphlet.
on Projected Canals in the Delhi Territory, Allahabad. 1 vol.
on the Settlement of the District of Seharunpore, compiled by E. Thornton,
1840, 2 vols.
on the Training of Pauper Children, 1841, 1 vol.
Roget’s Explanation of an optical deception. London, 1835, 1 pamphlet.
Royle on the Production of Isinglass along the Coast of India. London, 1842, two
copies. |
Sabine’s Narrative of an Expedition to the Polar Sea. London, 1840.—1 vol.
Scott and Co’s, Bengal Directory for 1842, 1 vol.
Silurian System, from the Edinburgh Review. 1841, 1 pamphlet.
Sketch in English and Khampti Characters, M. S. (a sheet, )
Society for the Encouragement of Arts, &c. Premiums for 1840-41, 1841-42. London,
1840, (six copies, ) 6 pamphlets.
Sprenger’s E]-Mas’udis’ Historical Encyclopedia. London, 1841, Vol. i. 1 vol.
Spry’s Plants, &c. required for India. Calcutta, 1841, 5 copies.
Sykes’s Fishes of the Dukhun, (pages 349 to 378,) 1 vol.
Notes on the Religious, Moral and Political State of Antient India. Lon-
don, 1841, 1 vol.
Transactions of the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India. Vol. viii., 1 vol.
of the Geological Society of London, 1841, 2nd Series, Vol. vi. 1 vol.
—-—— ofthe London Electrical Society from 1837 to 1840, London. 1841, 1 vol.
———— of the Medical and Physical Society of Bombay, 1841, No. 4, 1 No.
~——--— of the Royal Society of Edinburgh, 1841, Vol. xv., Part 1, 1 No.
————— of the Society for the Encouragement of Arts, &c. Vol. liii. Parti., 1 No.
of the Zoological Society of London, 1841. Vol. ii. part 5, 1 No.
Trials of P. and M. Wallace. London, 1841, 1 vol.
Wight’s Icones Plantarum Indiz Orientalis. Vol. ii. Part 3, 1 No.
Wilson’s Ariana Antiqua. London, 1841, 5 copies.
Sanskrit Grammar. London, 1841, 2 copies,
Translation of the Vishnu Purana. London, 1840, 1 vol.
Wujra Soochi, or Refutation of the Arguments upon which the Brahmanical Insti-
tution of Caste is founded, translated by B. H. Hodgson, 1839, 1 pamphlet.
Yarrell’s History of British Birds. Vol. iii. Parts 26 to 30, 5 Nos.
1843. ] Asiatie Society. 159
French.
Actes de L’ Academie Royale des Sciences, Belles Lettres et Arts de Bordeaux.
1839, 1 vol.
Adam, L’Espagne Artistique et Monumental, planches lithographies. 1 vol.
Annuaire du Bureau de Longitudes. Paris, 1836, 1 vol.
Bulletin de la Société de Géographie. 3me Serie. Paris, tomes, xv et xvi. 2 vols.
Catalogue de la Librairie D’ Ab. Cherbuliez et Cie. 4 Paris et a Genéve, 1 pamphlet.
Cuvier, Histoire Naturelle de Poissons. Paris, 1842, Tome, xvi, ] vol.
Desjardins, Observations Meteorologiques faites a flacq. (a sheet.)
Foucaux, specimen du Gya-tcher-rol-pa, Partie du Chapitre vii, contenant la
naissance de Cakya-Muni. Paris, 1841, 1 pamphlet.
Journal Asiatique, 3me Serie. Paris tome x, Nos. 56 a 58, tome xi, Nos. 59 a 64,
tome xii, Nos, 65 4 69, tome xiii, Nos. 70, 71, 72, 16 Nos.
Journal des Savants. Paris, 1841, Mai 4 Decembre, et 1842, Janvier 4 Juin, 14 Nos.
Macaire et Auguste, Experiences pour servir a l’histoire de |’Acide Muriatique.
Genéve, 1824, 1 vol,
Macarie- Prinsep, Memoire sur cea des Poisons. Geneve, 1825, 2 pamphlets.
Marcel, Contes Arabes du Cheykh El-Mohdy. Paris, 1833, 6e, 7e, 12e Livraisons,
3 Nos.
de |’ Action des Poisons sur le Regne Vegetal. Geneve, 1825, 1 pamphlet.
Mémoire de la Société de Physique et d’Histoire Naturelle de Geneve. Tome viii,
lere et 2me parties, (two copies each, ) tome ix, ire partie, 5 Nos.
Programme de la Société Royale D’ Agriculture et de Commerce de Caen. 1 pam-
phiet.
Reponse de M. de Paraveya |’ Article de M. Riamburgh sur I’ Antiquités Chinoisas.
Paris, 1836, 1 pamphlet.
Voyage Autour du Monde par les Mers de L’Inde et de Chine de M. Laplace. Pa-
ris, 1839, tome v, 1 vol.
Latin.
Callery, Systema Phoneticum Scripture Sinice. pars 1a and 2da, 2 Nos.
Hesychii Glossographi Discipulus. Edidit B. Kopitar. Vindobone, 1840, 1 pamphlet.
Glossarium Archailogicum. Authore H. Spelmanno. London, 1687, 1 vol-
German.
Bopp, iiber die Verwandtschaft der Malayisch Polynessischen, Sprachen, &c. Berlin,
1841, 1 vol-
Geschichte der Ilichane, dast ist, der Mongolen in Persien, Von Hammer. Easter-
Band, 1 vol.
Hammer, Gamachscharis Goldene Halsbander. Wien, 1835, 1 pamphlet.
Jahrbiicher der Literatur, Nos. 93 to 96, 4 Nos.
Lassen, Zeitschrift fur die Kunde des Morgenlandes, iv. Bd. i. Hept, 1 No.
Dutch.
Vosmaer’s Baai of Kendari, Trigonometrisch Opgenomen, Outdekt, 1831 (Map,)
1 No.
160 Asiatic Society. [No. 1384. ,
Tialian.
Di un Vaso Greco Dipinto che si Conserva nel real Museo Horbonico Discorso del
Cavalier Bernardo Quaranta, 1 pamphlet.
Sula Figura et L’Iscrizione egizia in cise in uno smeraldo Quaranta. Napoli, 1826,
1 pamphlet.
Arabic.
Diwani Mootanubee. Hooghly, 1841, 1 vol.
Aafhatul Yaman. Hooghly, 1841, 1 vol.
Merrat-ul-Janaun, Maroof Tarikh-ia-phai, 1 vol,
Persian.
Tarikh Ferishta, 2 vols.
Hindee.
Naphasil, Lagawd, 1 vol.
Masnabee, Kanoor, 1 vol.
Raja Bolee, written in Bengalee Characters (Potee, ) 1 vol.
Sanscrit.
Sahitya Derpana, 1828, 2 copies, Potee.
Burmese.
The Holy Bible, containing the Old and New Testament, 2d Edition. Moulmain,
1840, 1 vol.
Amount of Books in each Language.
English, - - = - - - 179
French, ~ - - - - - 54
Latin, - - - - .- iengen:
German, - - - : - - 8
Dutch, - - - - - ~ wf dl
Italian, - - = 2 - aie
re Arabic, - - - pews = 8
Persian, - - ~ - - - |g
Hindee, - - - - - = (8
Sanscrit, - - - - - ee
Burmese, - - - - - a
Total, - - 259
Oriental Publications, &c. sold from the 10th January up to the 27th December,
1842.
Mahabharata, Vol. 1. 8 copies; il. 7 do.; iii. 9do,;iv.9do. .. Rs. 330 0 g
Index to do. Vol. i. 4 copies ; ii. 3 do. iii. 3 do. iv. 3 do. ee oo te Se O
Raja Taringini. one copy. .. ats i Po oma
4 | 0°33| 2°32| 34°68} 94 | 26:99| 3°92] 33°08. - RAMEE a ;
5 | 28°65| 32°65} 4°35) 951 0°95] 34°25| 2°75! wee as aed pile pre
6
7
§
9
10 7'30| 19°30| 17°70; 30 | 33°90] 20°90| 16°10:
11 | 35°63) 49°63) 42°37; 31 7°23) 51°23! 40°77
12 | 10°96} 24°96] 12°04) 32 | 37°56) 26°56! 10°44
4 39:29 eo 29 ale: 33 | 10°89 Peli 35°14) 9. “76 ;
4 | 12°62) 30°62 °38; 34 | 39°22) 32°22) 4°78 9. 3 :
15 | 40:95} 5°95| 31°05) 35 | 12°55] 7°55| 29°45 BAS ee ee
16 | 16°28] 36.28} 0°72 36 | 42°88] 37°88] 54°12
17 | 44°61] 11°61) 25°39, 37 | 16-21] 13°21] 23°79.
18 | 17:94] 41°94) 50°06 38 | 44°54) 43°54) 48°46
19 | 46:27) 17°27} 19°73. 39 | 17°87| 18°87| 18°13
20 | 21°60] 47°60| 44°40 40 | 46°20) 49,20) 42°80
|
234 A Companion to the Moon Table. [No. 135.
The division lines and marks on the three cards being not continu-
ous in these as in the week-day table, a silk thread is attached to
them, in order to facilitate the bringing of the proper marks on the
eards correctly into line. With the same view, the month marks
have been projected on the circle separating the months and days.
These marks are so small, as not to attract attention unless particular-
ly looked for.
The method of using and manipulating these moon tables is so
perfectly analogous to that formerly detailed 4. month marks on the inner
for the week-day table, that beyond the piece elt
directions on the face of the cards, nothing
February, ...| 48°12 50°12
more seems necessary. An example or two j0ua"%y ~ Gta
; . April, .........| 40°36
may suffice. Required true time of full jp0) ~~ 45-48
moon in October 1841, the 18 on the outer JUN s-~| 5300
: : AUGUST, “css ee> 16°84
circle of the middle card being set to @@ on September, bs leg
CODER ean cas 0)
the outer, and the mark for October brought xoveater”| 5-20
December,..| 42°32 |
in line with that for the current year 41 ;
the full moon mark © falls almost exactly on the line between 29 and
30, hence the time of mean full moon is on the 30th at Oh. a.m. For
this date, the back of the Companion gives 4.18h. to be subtracted :
then for 1841 October, 29d. 8h. Pp. m. the face of the Companion gives
9.47h. to be added : the time of ¢rwe full moon is thus the 30th at
5h. 29m. a. m. To which adding 5h. 54m. as the diff. of longitude
between Greenwich and Calcutta, we get 30d. Ilh. 23m. a. m. as
the time at Calcutta. I have not at present the means of comparing
with the Nautical Almanac, but the old tables, supposed to be
Ferguson’s, give 30d. Oh. 03m. 31s.* the difference being about
40 minutes.
An Eclipse of the sun is said to have been seen at Babylon in
March 721, B. C.=8.80 O.S.Now 8, being set to @@, and March in line
to 80, mean new moon was about 20d. 2h. a. m. — = 24.5, to which
add 12 days for diff. of styles and 20th March+36 is 5th April, for
which date the first Equation is+-4.08m. and this applied to 20d.
6h. gives 20d. 6h, 08m. a.m. and for this date year 8.80, the Companion
gives the 2d Equation+9h. 30m., and this gives the true time 20d. 3h.,
30m. Pp. M., and adding 3h. for diff. of longitude, the time of new moon
* The Almanac in Rushton’s work gives a day earlier by some mistake, which
(or 12 hours) appears to run through every month of the year.
,emb ey,
oer
re) 9
ONS
> “ta,
ey
~.
ee 9
“0
@
°Pts aye 08® x
. * 1quL 0°
109g ax092%
: puns
92°
SS ra ai
mm ah
pea
%,
SG
z
F/ wp ee aly, e
A ie
Q-
a ue
@ 6
~
wv
”
1843. ] A Companion to the Moon Table. 235
at Babylon in March 701, B. C. becomes 20d. 6h. 38m.; hence, to
have been visible, the Eclipse must have happened at sun-set.
Required the day of full moon in March 1720, B. C.? The moon
table gives at once 24d. 10h. a. m., and applying the Equations from
the Companion, we find 24d. 7h. p. m. and 3h. for diff. of long. gives
at Babylon 24d. 10h. p. m. It is therefore altogether a mistake to
say, as is said in Rushton’s work, that an Eclipse of the moon could
have occurred on the 19th of March, 1720 B. C. Even had the date
been correct, the moon was upwards of 65° from the node when full
in March 1720 B. C., when of course an Eclipse was out of all
possibility.
It is obvious that these tables may be useful in many cases to
nautical men, who have occasion to know the time of high water
at a port. They may be useful also to the traveller, who wishes to
know when he will have moonlight. Europeans, who have occasion
to know the common native date may find them of good use.
Perhaps also the Joshis may find them useful in making their
Almanacs, as the Companion with its principal will shew what
alfgy are wa and what are =yqfeyaqRmore correctly, and with vastly
less trouble than the methods now in use. |
November, 1841.
Account of a luminous Meteor seen at Charka, lat. 24° 06’, long. 81° 02.
on the morning of the \\th April 1842, By Capr. SHORTREDE,
lst Assistant G. T. Survey.
A little before 4 o’clock this morning, I saw a meteor of a singular
appearance, of which the following is an account :—
I was lying awake outside my tent, and about a minute or two be-
fore had closed my eyes, intending to have a short sleep before marching,
when my attention was roused by some brilliant light before me. On
opening my eyes, I saw a meteor having very much the appearance of
a rocket: it was situated in the constellation Scorpio, having its mid-
dle about 10° to the westward of Antares, and pointing towards the
constellation Corvus, the lower star of which was about 4° above the
horizon. The meteor was about 10° or 20° long, and equally bright
236 Account of a luminous Meteor seen at Charka. [No. 135.
throughout, except at the upper end, where it was rather faint. It
continued in the same position, and of the same brightness for between
2 and 3 minutes as well as I could judge, and then gradually became
fainter and fainter, til] it lost its brilliancy altogether : and as it began to
fade, it began also to become crooked, and to move towards the west.
It became gradually more crooked, and continued to fade till it became
like a thin smoke, and at last vanished away at about 3° or 4° from the
place where I first saw it. I listened attentively, but heard no noise.
From the time I first saw it till its brilliancy ceased, was probably about
5 minutes, and in about 3 minutes more it ceased to be any longer
remarkable.
I was then at Charka, in lat. 24° 06’ and long. 81° 20’.
Dewra, 11th April, 1842.
Analysis of Iron Ores from Tavoy and Mergui, and of Limestone
from Mergui. By Dr. A. Urn, London. Communicated for the
Museum Economic Geology of India, by E. A. BiunpeE.y, Fsq.
Commissioner, Tenasserim. Provinces.
On the right bank of the Tavoy river, opposite the town of Tavoy,
runs a range of low hills at a distance from the river varying from
one and a half to three miles, formed apparently of magnetic iron ore.
The range extends a distance of five or six miles. At about its Northern
extremity, on the summit of a hill about 150 feet in height, is found
the large projecting rock mentioned in page 28 of Dr. Helfer’s Second
Report. This rock is about one and a half mile distant in a direct
line to the bank of the river, to a spot itself distant about three miles
North of the town of Tavoy. This large rock is highly magnetic on its
Northern side. (According to the expression of the natives, it is alive
on its Northern and dead on its Southern side). The hill appears
entirely formed of this ore, and at the bottom of it are to be found the
rolled masses of from two to twenty tbs mentioned by Dr. Helfer. Be-
tween the hill and the river are rice fields, through which runs a small
nullah, and having between the hill and the fields about quarter of a
mile of high ground well adapted for buildings, and on which high
ground are found the rolled masses or boulders above alluded to.
1843.] Analysis of Iron Ores from Tavoy and Mergui, &c. 237
The nullah can convey boats of three to four tons, half way through
the rice fields. The same description answers for the whole extent of
the range of low iron hills, having here and there small nullahs, com-
municating with the river. This ore was once worked by the Burmese
during the time of an expedition against Siam, for iron to make swords,
knives, spears, and other weapons. People were sent from Ava to
smelt it, but the process appears unknown to the Tavoyers. There
are still to be seen the pits in which it was smelted, with the scoriz
around the edges. The quantity of the ore appears inexhaustible.
Limestone is procurable in the province, and no doubt many locali-
ties of it will be discovered. The only one yet properly ascertained
exists about fifteen miles to the Eastward of Tavoy, accessible by
water to within a distance of two miles by small boats of half ton
burthen. Between the locality and the stream, the land is level
and high, affording facility for aroad. The quantity is abundant.
Charcoal may be made with ease, owing to the abundance of excel-
lent wood in the country adapted to it.
No. 1.—Pieces of ore knocked off the large rock mentioned by Dr.
Helfer, in page 28 of his Report.
No. 2.—Pieces of ore dug up in the neighbourhood of the above
large rock.
No. 3.—Rolled masses of iron ore picked up on the high ground,
between the hill and the rice field.
Mergui.—About 10 miles S. W. of the town of Mergui, is an
island, corhprising a hill about 200 feet in height, formed apparently
of iron ore. The island is perfectly accessible to boats of every
description, and you land on large masses of rock, which prove to be
the iron ore from which the soil has been washed away. The hill
rising abruptly from the water, may be about a mile in circumference,
and is wholly formed of the ore, having a rich bed of soil. A similar
island, equally accessible, is formed about four miles to the Southward
of the one above mentioned. It is not known that this ore has ever
been worked, and the process seems unknown to the people of Mergui.
Limestene is found in several accessible localities on the main branch
of the Tenasserim river, not far above the old town of that name.
Specimens accompany the iron ore.
238 Ananlysis of Iron Ores from Tavoy and Mergui, [No. 135.
No. 1.—Boulders of iron ore picked up at the landing place of the
island above mentioned.
No. 2.—Pieces knocked off large masses at landing place.
No. 3.—Pieces dug up on the hill.
No. 4.—Specimens of limestone.
eed
London, 13, Charlotte Street, Bedford, Square, 26th Nov. 1842.
I have now the pleasure of handing you the details of my examina-
tion and analysis of the several ores of iron and the limestones from
Tavoy and Mergui, with which I have been almost constantly occupied
during the last fortnight.
Ist. Compact magnetic iron ore..—Tavoy, No. 1.
Colour iron black with a metallic glimmer, fracture fine grained,
6,
3.511, compared to water
possesses magnetic polarity, specific gravity
== 1,000;
It yields in analysis the following constituents :
Peroxide of iron... «-- 86°5 equivalent to 60°55 metal.
Silica with a trace of 3 phowphat
3°5
of lime, ...
WY GSI peiditn’e: Mints eh cia OO)
ae
100.0
It contains no manganese or titanium.
2d. Compact magnetic iron ore.—Tavoy, No. 4.
External and Magnetic characters as above.
Specific gravity, 3°462.
It yields in analysis :
Peroxide of iron... 0. «+ ++. 86°0 equal to 60:2 metal.
Silica with a trace of phosphate
0-9
of tiie? PO? ONE Tr -
bi) AAA A Re |
100°0
It contains neither manganese nor titanium.
3d. Tavoy ore, No. 2.—External characters as above.
Specific gravity, owsidigest ise oe (41869,
4th. Tavoy ore, No. 3.—Characters as above, as to aspect and
magnetism.
1843.] and of Limestone form Mergui. | | 239
Specific gravity, 4:100.
The two latter samples are even richer than the former, as is
evinced by the specific gravity, but they are all quite rich enough and
pure enough for making the best quality of bar-iron and steel.
I instituted two elaborate sets of experiments in search of titanium,
which when present in any notable quantity in iron ores, renders the
iron made from them red-short, but I found none in the above ores.
In the first set of experiments I treated the ore as follows: I added
to its solution in nitro-muriatic acid, so much tartaric acid as to
render all the oxides unprecipitable by ammonia. I next added am-
monia in excess, and afterwards hydro-sulphuret of ammonia, which
throws down all the metals except titanium. The whole being thrown
upon a filter, afforded a colourless liquid which evaporated to dryness,
and carefully ignited in a platinum cup, left no trace of titanic acid,
which it would have done, had any of that metal existed in the ore.
The second set of experiments for titanium consisted in trans-
mitting sulphuretted hydrogen in excess through the nitro-muriatic
solution of the ore, in then adding ammonia in excess, the effect of
which is to precipitate both the iron and titanium. LBut the preci-
pitate when digested with sulpburous acid, has its iron dissolved, while
the titanic acid will remain undissolved as a white powder. By this
means also no distinct evidence of titanium could be obtained.
5th.—The limestone from Tavoy has a specific gravity of 2-7, and
is a perfectly pure, semi-crystalline carbonate of lime, akin to statuary
marble. It is well adapted to act as a flux in the smelting of iron.
The three samples of iron ores from Mergui, are brown hematites,
and from their density, will afford good iron in the smelting furnace.
6—Mergui iron stone No. 1 specific gravity 3.37.
7 Ditto. Ditto. 2 Ditto. 3.18.
8 Ditto. Ditto. 3 Ditto. 3.32.
The limestone of Mergui has a specific gravity of 2.7; it is a pure
calcareous carbonate. I analyzed both the limestones.
I am, dear Sir, |
Yours truly,
( Signed ) ANDREW Unkre.
240
Supplement to the Monograph of the Indian and Malayan species of
Cuculide, or Birds of the Cuckoo family, published in Vol. XJ,
pp. 898, 1095, et seg. By Epwarp Buiytu, Curator of the Asiatic
Society.
Having received some annotations on my paper on Cuculide from
Mr. Jerdon, and been favoured by Dr. McClelland with the loan of the
Zoologie du Voyage de M. Bélanger, which has set me right with
regard to the names of certain species, besides furnishing some other
information concerning them, and having likewise learned one or two
other facts worthy of publication, I shall not longer postpone the pre-
paration of an Appendix to that paper, but proceed at once to its
revision. }
Acciritring Cuckoo; Cuculus sparverioides, Vigors and Gould.
In Southern India, writes Mr. Jerdon, this species is “only found in
the dense woods of the summit of the Neilgherries. It is seldom seen
except when the woods are beaten for Woodcocks, and quits the shel-
ter of the wood with reluctance. I never heard its note. Flight
rapid. Stomach filled with caterpillars.” :
Wuistiinc Cuckoo; C. fugax, Horsfield. The same observer
continues — ‘‘ Besides the Hindustani name given in my catalogue, its
name in Teloogoo is Kuttee pitta, i. e. ‘Sword-bird,’ given, it is said,
from its peculiar and rapid flight. It is stated by the Shikarees to
deposit its eggs in the nest of the Shikra! ( Astur Dussumieri ), which
it so much resembles in colour. In the Deccan it is sometimes named
Zuk-kat or ‘Custom-house bird’.” In Bengal, the young of this bird
are far more numerous in open jungles than the Hawk mentioned, but
I have not yet observed any particular species feeding them.*
C. Sonneratii. “Only found in dense forest-jungle.” Jerdon.
C. niger. “‘ Dispersed over all the peninsula wherever there is much
shelter. At Hydrabad I saw one of this kind in the grey plumage sit-
ting on a trellis work in a garden expanding its wings continually, and
close to the spot where it sat and within view was a nest of Prinia
socialis containing two eggs, which I recognised to be those of that
bird. It struck me at the time that the little Cuckoo had made the
discovery of the nest, and was meditating the substitution of her own
* A young specimen of apparently this bird from Macao is very much deeper-colour-
ed than usual, and may possibly be of a different species.
:
|
|
1843.] Monograph of the Indian and Malayan, Cuculide. 241
egg. I suspect, therefore, that the rufous specimens are young, and
that the female does not differ so materially from her mate. Besides
the usual plaintive note, this species has also a cry almost exactly like
that of the C. fugaz, though of course much subdued and repeated
faster. It is certainly the C. flavus apud Lesson ( Traité/, said to be
from Bengal.”—Jbid.
C. flavus. In the Zoologie du Voyage de M. Bélanger, M. Lesson
confounds, I am much inclined to suspect, at least three species under
this name; viz. the Indian niger, the Malayan flavus, and the Austra-
lian cineraceus (figured by Messrs. Jardine and Selby, dl. Orn., pl.
LXVII), stating that it appears to inhabit all the isles of Sunda, Ben-
gal, the Phillipines, Port Jackson, and Van-Diemen’s Land. ‘A veri-
table Proteus,” he remarks, “this little Cuckoo seems indifferently to
assume several phases of plumage, according to what island of the
Indian Ocean it inhabits; at least unless a plurality of species be
confounded under the same name, which differ from each other only by
very indistinct and uncharacteristic shades of diversity. Buffon, or
rather Daubenton, has figured by the name of le Petit Coucou de I’Isle
de Panay, Enluminure 814, one type corresponding to the bird which
M. Bélanger has brought from Java, where it had previously been met
with by MM. Labillardiére and Leschenault. Sr Raffles mentions it
in his catalogue as occurring in Pulo Penang, and Dr. Horsfield in-
forms us that it is the Gedasse of the Javanese.” This Malayan bird
(which alone I apprehend to be the true flavus) is described as fol-
lows :—
_“ Le Coucou a téte grise, de Java, here described, is seven inches and
a half (French) long. Its bill is blackish; the tarsi yellow. The
head, cheeks, throat, and sides of the neck, are frosty-grey (gris
glacé); a lustrous and silky bronze-brown, with tolerably bright
(doux) reflections, prevails on the back and wings, a dark ashy tint
on the croup, and russet on the quills. All the lower-parts of the
body are russet (or ferruginous, roux), or tolerably vivid blonde.
The middle tail-feathers are uniformly bronzed brown above; the
lateral ones are brown marked (frangées) with white: underneath all
of them are brown rayed with white, purer and more distinctly on the
margins. A similar individual exists in the Paris museum, brought,
according to Leseur, from the Straits of Entrecasteaux.”
242 Monograph of the Indian and [No. 135.
Others from the various localities before cited “ offer, upon examin-
ation, altogether the same characters, though we are compelled to
recognise varieties of race, both according to size and the disposition
of the colours of the plumage.”
The Australian race (C. cineraceus, Vigors and Horsfield, Zin.
Trans. XV, 298; Barred-tailed Cuckoo of Latham, Gen. Hist. ITI,
310;), if the figure of it in Messrs. Jardine and Selby’s Illustrations
of Ornithology (pl. LX VII) be correctly coloured, would seem to have
the under-parts much deeper rufous than I have ever seen in Indian spe-
cimens, and the tail-feathers more broadly and conspicuously margined _
laterally with white. The following description is attached : — “ The
length of most specimens seems to be from nine to eleven inches.
The upper-part of the plumage is a dull bluish-grey, on the wings
tinged with brown, upon the.tail nearly black; the throat is pale
blue-grey, the rest of the under-parts reddish ochre-yellow, palest on
the belly and vent; the inner webs of the quills are marked with
white, which forms a diagonal bar across the under surface ; the tail,
with the exception of the centre-feathers, is deeply dentated with
narrow white markings, which gives it nearly a barred appearance
when expanded. The feet and legs appear to have been yellow.
The females are generally duller in their colourings, and have the un-
der-parts transversely barred with dull bluish-black. The young of
the first year are dull umbre brown, with transverse darker markings.”
The Indian bird appears to be typically dark grey without any
rufous, at least the old male, and according to Mr. Jerdon’s obser-
vation cited, some perhaps of the old females; but the ordinary dress
of the adult female is, I suspect, as I have described it, namely, a
garb corresponding to that so generally assumed by C. polocephalus
( Himalayanus of Vigors and Gould), and constituting the hepaticus
variety of C. canorus: upon the first moult, the males appear gene-
rally to have the lower parts from the breast rufous, but rarely the
upper part of the breast and fore-neck (as in the figure cited of the
Australian C. cineraceus), indeed I have only seen one specimen thus
characterized, and in this the colours of the entire under-parts are
unusually dull and have some faint cross-strize, indicative probably of a
weakly individual. These states of plumage, together with the first
or nestling dress, I have before minutely described.
Ne ee es
—= 2
1843. ] Malayan species of Cuculide. 243
It should be remarked, that I have seen no Indian specimen corres-
ponding to the original description of C. flavus by Sonnerat and
Daubenton, which would seem to have been unusually pale, having
the ‘upper part of the head and throat light grey; the nape, back,
and wings, pale umbre-brown; and the belly, thighs, and lower tail-
coverts, pale yellow tinged with russet.” The C. rufivittatus, Drapiez,
may be presumed to refer to C. flavus in one or rather two of its
phases; and his C. pyrogaster to one of these three species, if they
be different. The latter point can only be decided by actual com-
parison of a number of specimens of each of them, and which way the
probability lies cannot be suggested, as the Malayan C. lugubris
is certainly distinct from the Indian C. dicruroides, though most
closely allied to it, while C. ( Budynamys) orientalis spreads from
India and China* through the countries of the Indian Ocean into
Australia,—C. ( Chrysococcyx) lucidus is common to the two latter
regions,—various other species to India and the Malay countries, and
others again to India and Africa. C. canorus extends over Europe,
Asia, and Africa, spreading southward (according to Dr. Horsfield)
into Java, where however it would appear to be rare, and it is not
quite clear that C. micropterus has not there been mistaken for it:
certainly, however, I believe, (so far as has been yet observed,) its
distribution does not reach into Australia.
The present group of small Cuckoos with naked tarsi, and further
characterized by a particular type of colouring in all its varieties,
appears to me to be fully as much entitled to subgeneric distinction,
if not more so, than those of the Metalline Cuckoo ( Chrysococcyx )
and the Drongo Cuckoos ( Pseudornis, Hodgson); and I suspect
that C. honoratus should be referred to it. M. Lesson assigns the
C. flavus to his Surniculus, which he founds upon C. lugubrist ;
thus mingling two very distinct subgenera, which must be acknow-
ledged separately if either be systematically distinguished from the
* The Society has just received specimens of both sexes from Macao.
+ In Mr. G. R. Gray’s List of the Genera of Birds, Ist edit. p. 07, Surniculus of
Lesson is put as asynonym of Eudynamys ; but erroneously, according to M. Lesson
in the work here cited, where he remarks— ‘“‘ Le Coucoul ugubre est pour nous le
type d’un petit sous-genre qui semble confiné dans les fles de l’ Est,” &e.—Zoologie
du Voyage de M. Bélanger, p. 236.
944 Monograph of the Indian and [No. 1385.
other subgenera of restricted Cuculus: and if he had not so expressly
selected C. lugubris as the type of his Surniculus, it would have been
convenient to have reserved this name for the present form, retaining
Mr. Hodgson’s Pseudornis for the Drongo Cuckoos; but such an
arrangement would not be sanctioned by Zoologists, and it remains,
therefore, to propose a distinctive appellation for the subgenus under
consideration, which accordingly may be termed Polyphasia, allusive
to the numerous variations of plumage assumed by the species.
Subgenus Surniculus; Lesson, 1834; Pseudornis, Hodgson: the
Droneco Cuckoos. According to Mr. Hodgson, the sexes of C. di-
cruroides are similar; and such I believe also to be the case with those
of C. lugubris, and that the Javanese specimen described by M. Lesson
as the female of the latter must therefore be the young. ‘ Length
nine inches (French), of which the tail occupies five inches : bill black,
and tarsi brown. The feathers around the beak tinged with rufous ;
those of the upper-parts are brown, with a steel-blue reflection deeper
on the wings and tail; a number of small and round white specks,
encircled with black, are sprinkled over the head, shoulders, and
wings; all the under-parts of the body are brown, tinged with rufous
on the fore-part of the neck, and sprinkled with small whitish round
spots; the posterior tibial feathers incline to be whitish; wings brown,
varied with white internally about the shoulder, and elsewhere on
their under-surface they are brown, having a white ray; tail brown
underneath, barred with whitish on its small feathers only.”
Since the publication of my Monograph of Eastern Cuculide, I have
received a second Singapore specimen of C. dugubris, which resembles
that which I formerly described in its dimensions, and is merely some-
what brighter black, with no white specks whatever on its upper sur-
face, and very few (and those but faint and confined to the abdo-
men) below; the exterior short pair of tail feathers are rather longer.
It is not improbably a male, while the other may be presumed to be a
female; and it may be added, that the conspicuous white occipital spot
of the other specimen does not occur. The same difference is ob-
servable in two very fine specimens of C. dicrurotdes with which
I have also been kindly favoured ; and it is remarkable that these have
the tail no more furcate than in C. dugubris, while their dimensions
correspond with those of Mr. Hodgson’s Nepalese examples. The
ee a a
1843.] Malayan species of Cuculide. 245
length of the wing affords a ready distinction between these two close-
ly allied species, being in both specimens of /ugubris but four inches
and three-quarters, while in six specimens of dicrurozdes before me it
averages five inches and a half (a mere trifle more or less).
Subgenus Chrysococcyx.. There is a Iampromorpha’ amethystna
described by Vigor sin P. Z. S. 1831, p. 98, from Manilla; but it
does not appear in what it differs from Chr. xanclorhynchos.
Eudynamys orientalis: the Cori. I am indebted to Mr. Frith for
an egg of this species, found in the nest of Corvus macrorhynchos, to-
gether with one egg of that species. As the egg of Cuculus canorus
bears a general resemblance in colour to those of the small ground-
building birds in the nests of which it is most frequently deposited, so
does the Coél’s egg bear a marvellous resemblance to that of the Crow,
being, however, much smaller. The specimen measures an inch and a
half in lengh, and its colour is slightly bluish olive-green, rather pale
than otherwise, with numerous reddish-brown spots (much as in some
Blackbirds’ eggs), and an indistinct zone of these near the large end.
Mr. Frith has never found more than one Coél’s egg in a nest, and has
only met with it in those of the two Indian Crows. He has repeated-
ly seen the common Crow (Corvus splendens) attack and drive off
the female Coél from its neighbourhood, and in one instance observed
the latter, while trying to escape the pursuit, dash itself against a pane
of glass in an out-house with so much force as to fall dead from the
injury it received, the bill and fore-part of the head being quite smash-
ed. I may add that the young nestling Coél, more especially the male,
bears no small resemblance to a young Crow, 7. e. a black one.
Oxylophus Coromandus: Rep-winceD CrEsTED Cuckoo. Mr.
Jerdon has seen specimens of this bird from the forests of Malabar.
O. edolius: Przp Crestep Cuckoo. Of this species, the same
naturalist has ‘‘ obtained one young bird in the nest of Malacocercus
griseus, in a thick hedge in Coimbatoor. It has a loud peculiar call,
which it only appears to utter when on the wing. In Telegoo it is
called Gollee kokeelah, or ‘Milkman Cuckoo,’ it being said to call
‘ Gollee Gollee,’ and when pronounced gutturally, these words have not
at all a distant resemblance to its cry.” Dr. Buchanan Hamilton also
obtained the egg of this species in the nest of a Malacocercus, and
figures it of a spotless blue colour, as is also the egg of its dupe; and
246 Monograph of the Indian and | [No. 135.
he states that this bird only visits Bengal during the rainy season, in
which he appears to be correct.
Genus Rhinortha, Vigors; Anadenus, Swainson; also Bubutus,
Lesson. In the Zoology of M. Bélanger’s Voyage, M. Lesson has
figured the Rh. rufescens of my monograph as B. Isidori, whilst his
descripion of the latter refers to Rh. chlorophea (Cuculus chloro-
pheus, Raffles, &c.); and by the name B. Duvaucelii, citing his Orni-
thologie, p. 148, (or Cuculus Sumatrensis of the Paris Museum, not
C. Sumatranus, Raffles,) he has given a description which probably
refers to my rufescens, though I cannot understand what is meant by
the italicised portion of the following quotation, which alone does not
apply — “Cet Oiseau, de la taille du Coucou Edolio, a le bec jaune, la
téte d’un cendré blanchatre, le plumage gris cendré, \es ailles rousses,
Yabdomen et la region anale d’un rouge ochreux,” &c. If it be intend-
ed that the back is coloured ash-grey, then probably M. Lesson’s spe-
cies is distinct. But it must be remembered that his description and
plate of B. Isidorz refer to different species, as before mentioned.
The Phenicopheus longicaudatus of my monograph is M. Lesson’s
Melias tristis, and may rank therefore as Ph. tristis, unless it be
considered worth while to separate the small-billed species from the
others: and my Ph. tristis appears to be M. Lesson’s M. Diardi, of
which he states that it resembles the former species in its form and
colouring, but is only half the size, and presents some other differences ;
this bird is the Cuculus Sumatranus of Raffles, and must rank, I
therefore presume, as Ph. Sumatranus. 1 am assured by Mr. Frith
that this latter species occurs in the Soonderbuns of Bengal, and that
the other is common on the hill ranges of Assam.
Ph. Jerdoni is ‘‘termed in Hindustani Kuppra Popya, and in
Teloogoo Wamaneh okee.”—Jerdon.
Zanclostomus Sirkee is “called Jungle Parrot, both in Hindustani
and Teloogoo, from its red bill.” —Jbid.
Centropus Phillipensis “builds a very large nest in some thick
bush or hedge, and lays two or three greenish-blue eggs. This I have
on the authority of an excellent Shikaree. It occasionally pilfers eggs
from the nests of other birds.” — /bzd. When running up the bough
of a tree, which it does with remarkable celerity, it often throws
the tail up over the back.
1843.] Malayan species of Cuculide. 247
C. Sinensis : Polophilus Sinensis, Shaw’s Zoology, 1X, 51. In my
Monograph I referred this, with a note of doubt, to C. Phallipensis,
but have since received the species from Chinghai, and it is closely
allied to C. lepidus, but as large as C. Phillipensis, being very obvi-
ously distinct from both. Length about nineteen inches, of which the
tail measures eleven inches, its outermost feathers four inches and a
half less; wing seven inches and a half; and beak, which is much
curved and robust, an inch and five-eighths to gape. | Colouring much
as in C. lepidus, but the head, neck, interscapularies, and under- parts,
are considerably darker: the nape and interscapularies are dusky
with whitish shafts, terminating in yellowish-white rigid and almost
prickly tips; head browner, with shining dark shafts to the frontal
plumes: the under-parts dingy-whitish, with dusky cross-bars on each
feather, and also rigid yellowish-white tips, more particularly to the
feathers of the throat and breast: scapularies dingy rufous; the wings
brighter rufous, with nearly obsolete dark bars on their smaller co-
verts; the greater coverts, with the primaries, secondaries, and terti-
aries, being in course of renewal, and those newly put forth are
spotless rufous, whilst the unshed are barred with dusky: rump black-
ish; the tail and its upper coverts the same, barred with numerous
whitish cross-rays: beak dusky-black, whitish along the edges of the
mandibles and towards the tip of the under one; feet also blackish;
and irides stated to be light horn, or coloured like the wings, though
in the fully mature birds I presume they would be crimson.
“C, Bengalensis of my Supplement may be C. lepidus.”—Jerdon.
2K
248
Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.
(Friday Evening, 30th March, 1843.)
The usual monthly Meeting was held on Friday evening the 3rd March
1843, the Hon’ble Sir J. P. Grant, V. P. in the Chair.
Read the following memorandum circulated to the Committee of Papers
by the Acting Secretary, with the usual reference respecting the proposed
admission of Professor Jutes Mout of Paris, as an Honorary Member.
‘“‘This honour is solicited for Professor Mont, by our associate and most
zealous Agent at Paris, Major Troyer.
The Professor is well known as one of the most distinguished Oriental
Scholars in Europe, and as Secretary to the Societé Asiatique de Paris.
He has also been for years a steady correspondent and a liberal contri-
butor to our Library, and the warm friend of every Oriental Scholar
visiting Paris; as well as, with Major Troyer, an active friend to our
interests whenever they could serve them.”
H. Pippineton,
Acting Secretary Asiatic Society.
The report of the Committee being unanimously in favour of Professor
Mohl’s nomination, he was therefore duly elected.
Dr. Tranter, Nizam’s Contingent, was also duly elected, and the usual
communications were ordered to be made to these gentlemen. The fol-
lowing gentlemen were proposed as Members :—
The Hon’ble Sir Lawrence Peet, Chief Justice of Bengal, and W.
Seton Karr, Esq. B. C. S. both proposed by Sir J. P. Grant, and seconded
by Sir H. Seton.
Read, extract from the Proceedings of February, announcing the inten-
tion of the Hon’ble H. T. Prinser, to vacate the Chair of the Society in
consequence of his departure for Europe.
Read the following letter from him, addressed to the Acting Secretary.
H. Pippinerton, Esa.
Offg. Secretary Asiatic Society.
Sir,—As the period is now just approaching for my departure from
India, I think it necessary to place in your hands my resignation of the
office of President of the Asiatic Society, and to request that you will lay
it before the Committee of Papers, to be by them communicated to the
General Meeting of next month.
I have the honor to be, Sir,
Your very obedient humble servant,
Calcutta, Friday, 18th February, 1843. . H. T. Prinsep.
Read the following Minutes of a Special Meeting of the Committee of
Papers, held at the Society’s Rooms, on Thursday, 23rd February.
1843.} Asiatic Society. 249
Thursday, 23d February, 1843.
At a Special Meeting of the Committee of Papers,
PRESENT.
The Honorable Sir H. Seton,
Lieut. Colonel Forsss,
Cuartes Hurrnacte, Esq., and
The Acting Secretary,
Read the letter of the Honorable H. T. Prinsep, resigning the chair of the
Society.
ie Debi ed that it be recommended to the Society, that a letter be
addressed to the Honorable H. T. Prinsep, expressing the deep regret of
its members for the loss of his valuable aid, and their hope, that he would
continue to forward the interests of the Society in Europe.
2. That it be farther recommended to the Society to request that its late
President do oblige us by sitting for his Portrait (of Kit-Cat size,) and that
a subscription be opened to defray the expence.
3. That it be farther recommended to the Society to request, that the
Right Honorable W. W. Birp, will be pleased to accept the President’s chair.
The Honorable W. W. Birp was unanimously elected President of the
Society.
Read the following draft of a letter to be addressed to the Honourable
H. T. Prinser :—
Honovuraste Sir,—The Asiatic Society of Bengal has learnt with deep
regret your resignation of its chair; a loss to its interests and to those
of Oriental science and literature which it feels will not be easily repaired.
For its members fail not to recollect, Sir, at such a time, with how much
zeal and perseverance, and for how many years, and even when pressed
with the weight of official duties of the highest responsibility, you have
devoted yourself, with untiring energy, to the pursuits of the scholar,
the patient researches of the antiquary, and the minute and laborious
investigations of the geographer and the historian, and what the fruits
of these constant labours have been. Nor can they omit to mention, Sir,
that you have ever been found the strenuous and able advocate of oriental
literature, the generous and worthy associate and emulator of many of the
great men whose labours adorn its annals and the records of their Society,
and the kind and discerning patron of the humblest labourer in these and
in many other fields: adding thus a lustre to the honoured name which
you bear, and leaving to their Society the grateful duty of again enrolling
that name amongst those of which it is so truly and so justly proud.
Deeply then, Sir, must the Asiatic Society regret the loss of one who has
so much contributed to its advancement and to its reputation; but this
regret is tempered by the confident hope which it now ventures to express,
that, as the field which awaits you in Europe is not less a great, a noble,
and an eminently useful one, you will still continue the same steady
friend to the interests of Indian literature and science, which you have
heretofore been.
Anxious, Sir, to possess some memorial of you, they now request that
you will be pleased on your arrival to sit for your Portrait, which they
are desirous of placing by the side of those of your predecessors in the
Presidentship of the Society.
In conclusion. They beg to assure you, Sir, of their unfeigned respect,
and to offer to you their best wishes for your future health and prosperity.
By order of the Society,
Asiatic Society’s Rooms, 4th February, 1843. (Signed) H. Pippineron,
Acting Secretary Asiatic Society.
250 Asiatic Society. [No. 135.
It was ordered—That the letter be signed by the Acting Secretary on
the part of the Society, as had been done in former cases, (Presidents Cote-
BrooKE and Harrineton,) and agreed upon, that a deputation consisting
of the Committee of Papers, and of such members as might please to at-
tend, should meet at the Rooms, at ten o’clock the following morning, for
the purpose of waiting on the Honourable Mr. Prinyser with the letter,
and from thence proceed to Government House, to notify to the Honour-
able Mr. Birp, his election as President.
The following list of Books presented and purchased was read :—
LIBRARY.
Books recewed for the Meeting of the Asiatic Society, on the 3rd March, 1848.
The Calcutta Christian Observer, March, 1848, new series, vol. iv.
No. 39.—Presented by the Editor.
Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, No. 4,
April, 1842.
Journal des Savans. Paris, Aout, 1842.
Journal Asiatique, 3me serie. Paris. Avril, Mai, Juin, 1842, Nos. 73, 74,
and 75, tome xiii.— Presented by the Society.
Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society, 1841-42, vol. ii,
Nos. 18 to 22,
Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, new series. Phila-
delphia, 1841, vol. viii, part ii—Presented by the Society.
The London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Jour-
nal of Science, 3rd series. London, September, 1842, vol. xxi, No.
137.
Report of a Committee of the British Association for the advancement
of Science, pamphlet.—Presented by the Society.
Meteorological Register kept at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,
_ for the month of January, 1843.—From the Surveyor General’s Office.
Fonceux, Discours prononcé a l’ouverture du cours de Langue et de
Literature Tibetaine, prés la Bibliotheque Royale. Paris, 1842, pamph-
let.—Presented by the Author.
Fonceux, (Le sage et le fou.) Extrait du Kan — Jour. Paris, 1842.
pamphlet.—Presented by the Editor.
Julien, Exerciées pratiques d’Analyse de Syntaxe et de Lexicographie
Chinoise. Paris, 1842, 8vo.
Darwin’s Journal of Researches into the Geology and Natural History
of the various countries visited by H. M. S. Beagle. London, 1839,
8vo.—Purchased.
Offrande au Dieu de L’Univers, par A. Fabius. Lyon, 1842, pamphlet.
The Oriental Christian Spectator, 2nd series. Bombay, August, 1842,
vol. ii, No. 8.-—Presented by the Editor.
Royle on the Production of Isinglass along the Coasts of India, with
a Notice of its Fisheries. London, 1842, pamphlets, two copies. Pre-
sented by the Author.
a ee
1843.) Asiatic Society. 251
The Acting Secretary informed the Meeting, that the sum of Rs. 76: 10:3
having been paid as import duty on Professor Mill’s Bust, (to clear it
from the Custom House pending the application) he had applied to the Col-
lector of Customs for a refund of this amount, which upon his favour-
able report to Government, was duly ordered and paid.
Read the following letter from the Officiating Secretary to Government
of India, Military Department :—
No. 285.
To the Secretary to the Asiatic Society.
Military Department.
Sir,—I am directed to acknowledge the receipt of your letter of the
24th November last, and in reply to transmit to you, for the information
of the Asiatic Society, a Copy of the Surveyor General’s Despatch, No. 36,
dated 13th August 1842, the original of which was recalled by an Office
Memo. of the 5th December last. .
2. The Surveyor General of India, with whom it may be expedient
you should communicate on the subject of printing the Report upon
the operations for measuring an Arc of the Meridian carried through
the centre of the Peninsula to the Northern confines of Hindoostan,
has received instructions to take the necessary steps to ensure the pro-
per publication of the Report in the Researches of the Asiatic Society.
I am, Sir,
Your most obedient servant,
W.M.N. Sturt, Major,
Officiating Secretary to the Government
of India, Military Department.
Council Chamber, \7th February 1848.
And from the Secretary to Government, General Department.
No. 21, or 1843.
From G. A. Bususy, Ese., Officiating Secretary to the Government of India, to
H. Pippineton, Ese., Acting Secretary to the Asiatic Society, Fort William,
the 15th February, 1843.
Political Department
Six,—In acknowledging the receipt of your letter dated 22nd ultimo,
I am directed to inform you, that His Honor the President in Council
will be glad to have from the Asiatic Society, a few lithographed copies
of the Inscription received from Aden, for the use of the Hon’ble the
Court of Directors.
I have the honor to be, Sir,
Your most obedient Servant,
G. A. Busuey,
Officiating Secretary to the Ggvernment of India.
Fort William, 15th February, 1843.
2952 Asiatic Society. [No. 135.
From Secretary to the Government India.
From Officiating Secretary to the Government of India, to H. Pippineron,
Ese., Acting Secretary Asiatic Society, dated Council Chamber, 17th Fe-
bruary, 1843.
Revenue Department.
Sir,—The Hon’ble the President in Council having reason to believe, that
the attention of the Asiatic Society of Bengal has been directed to the
subject of the Nurmah Cotton, I am desired by His Honor in Council
to transmit to you, for the information of the Society, and for publication
in its Journal, the accompanying copy of a dispatch, No. 4013, dated the
3lst December last, from the Secretary to the Government, North-west
Provinces, containing particulars on the subject.*
I have the honor to be, Sir,
Your most obedient Servant,
Frep. Jas. Hauuipay,
Officiating Secretary to the Government of India.
Read letter from the Secretary to the American Philosophical Society,
acknowledging the receipt of the Journal of the Society, No. 22 to 29,
new series. .
Read the following extracts from a private letter from M. Evcene
Burnour, of Paris, to the address of the late Secretary, which as testifying
the high degree of estimation in which the Society’s Transactions and
Journal are held at home, will be found of interest to its friends and
supporters in India.
“Ce sera une chose bien honourable pour la Société dont vous etes
le digne organe, d’ajouter un volume nouveau aux nombreux et beau-
volumes qu’élle 4 déja publiés, les derniers, notamment, ont oté particulieres
ment distingués entre tous, a cause de la richesse et de la nouveauté dex
matieres qu’ils renferment. It est 4 regretter que votre Société ait perdu
par la mort prématureé de M. Csoma de Cords le moyen de donner
a l’Europe accés a la littérature Tibétaine qu’il connaissait si bien ; mais
vous avez autour de vous un si grand nombre d’hommes éclairés, qn’il
ne vous sera pas difficile de combler cette lacune en portant la lumiere
sur d’autres points non moins intéressants. Votre Société est dans une
admirable situation dont elle a déja scu profiter glorieusement pour elle
et utilement pour la science, et dont elle profitera certainment encore.
Je ne veux pas ter miner, Monsieur, sans vous remercier trés vivement de
l’envoi que vous avez bien voulu me faire d’un certain nombre de numeros
_de votre Journal; ce présent extremement précieux pour moi m’a prouvé
que votre Journal, se soutenait 4 la hauteur ou l’avait porté votre eminent
predécesseur J. Prinsep. C’est une chose capitale que ce Journal, et tons
ceux qui en Europe le connaissent sont d’avis qu'il mérite que l’on fasse
pour conserver son existence tous les sacrifices qui seront necessaires.”’
The following articles were presented to the Society by Dr. Hurcuinson,
B. M. S. and were upon the table :—
1. A Tartar Bow, Arrows and Quiver.
2. A Tartar Cross Bow and Helmet.
* This valuable Paper was handed over for publication in the Journal.
1843. ] Asiatic Society.
ho
Or
(au)
3. A 3-barrelled Pistol.
4 A Hat, worn by Malay Fishermen in the Straits.
And through S. G. T. Hearty, Esq., from W. Marine, Esq., Baugundee,
the following :—
1. An Oil-Nut, known familiarly as the Nepaul walnut, the kernel strong-
ly savouring of the walnut, and very oleaginous. These specimens were
procured from the garden of Mr. Maurine at Baugundee, where the tree
flourishes luxuriantly. It was said to be originally brought there by Mr.
Becuer, formerly Salt Agent, and to be a Nepaulese plant.
2. A kind of lac obtained from the Gaub, supposed to contain a red
dye of value.
Zootocy or Nipat.
A Portfolio of 31 Specimen Drawings, being a few of the illustrations of
this proposed splendid publication, for particulars of which see advertise-
ment, and specimen drawing, was exhibited, and excited the highest interest
by the beauty of the drawings, and their remarkable fidelity.
Report of the Curator Museum Economic Geology for the month of February.
During the past month, we have received from Captain Goodwyn, Bengal
Museum Economic Engineers a Model ofa Terrace with a coating of half
Geology, an inch of Asphaltum. The following letter accom-
panied it :—
No. 6504.
Mr. PippinerTon,
Curator to the Asiatic Museum.
Sir,—I am directed by the Military Board, to annex copy of a letter
No. 943 of the 8th instant, from Captain Goodwyn, and also to enclose a
note from that officer of the same date.
2nd. The specimen of the native Asphaltum Rock mentioned in the note,
accompanies this communication.
3rd. You will observe, that Captain Goodwyn is desirous of receiving
an acknowledgment from you of the receipt of the specimens herewith
forwarded.
I have the honor to be, Sir,
Fort William, Military Board Your obedient Servant,
Office, 14th February, 1848. \ H. DeBups,
Secretary, Military Board.
No. 948.
To Major H. DeBups,
Secretary, Military Board.
Sir,—I have the honor to forward a section of prepared terrace with
Concrete (which in this country can be well made with Jamma and
Hydraulic Cement,) and half an inch of Asphaltic Mastic. The section
shews the different strata, and I have sent it to the Military Board as a
specimen of the solidity and toughness of the material after remelting,
for the purpose of being floated on to a terrace.
2nd. I have communicated with Capt. Tremenhere on the subject of the
probability of discovering, in the Tenasserim provinces, a Geological bitu-
254 Asiatic Society. [No. 135.
minous formation, from which something valuable might be obtained, and
I at the same time sent him specimens of the raw material; but am sorry
to learn from him in reply, that there is not any formatiom approaching
that to which the mineral belongs.
I am now about to direct my enquiries in Arracan, as Petroleum wells
and Naptha springs occur on the Irawaddy, and thence extend to the
Arracan district. .
I have, &c.
(Signed) H. Goopwyy,
Executive Engineer, 1st Division.
Barrackpore, 8th February, 1848.
(True Copy,) H. DeBupe,
é Secretary, Military Board.
My pear DeBupz,—I have already deposited in the Economic Geologic
Museum, a specimen of the native Asphaltum Rock, so if the Board after
examination of the accompanying are not desirous of keeping it in the
Office, pray send it to Mr. Piddington with this note, that he may un-
derstand it is to be placed in juxta-position with the rock I gave him before.
I send also aspecimen of the Mineral Tar, an exudation from the crevices
of the rock, which will complete the whole history, as the powder of the
rock mixed with the Tar forms the Mastic which is on the prepared
section of flooring in the box.
If it goes to the Museum, I shall be glad of a line from Piddington.
Your’s truly,
’ H. Goopwyn.
In a private reply to Captain Goodwyn, the proximity of the Petroleum
wells of Cheduba, as detailed in Captain Halstead’s report, was pointed
out to him, and the probability, that if the Asphaltum itself was not found
there, the residue of the Petroleum might furnish a mineral Pitch, which
mixed with lime would make a good Asphaltum. Experiments will be
made on this highly interesting subject.
From Duncan, Esq., we have received a highly curious contribution
of a piece of the Porcelain Tower of Nankin.
Captain Newsoxp has sent us, at my request, a specimen of the best Cotton
Soil from Kurnool. He is good enough to promise us a complete series of
soils from that quarter, which will be a great addition to our Museum,
The following are extracts from his letter :—
Camp Pialcoorty, Kurnool, February 13, 1843.
My pear Sir,—lI have this day forwarded by banghy, a specimen of
our first class cotton soil in Kurnool. Let me know whether it is enough,
and whether I shall send specimens of the various sorts of cotton soil for
the Society.
I have not yet been able to visit the first class Tobacco field yet, and
I would rather defer sending specimens until personal examination of
the field, lest any error should occur. The cotton soil. now sent is from
a field in the vicinity of which my tents are pitched.
I shall be very glad if you will favour me with an analysis at your
early convenience.
A specimen of some of the cotton soil of the Ceded Districts, which I
sent to the Royal Society is in the hands of Mr. Solly, who has promised
1843.] Asiatic Society. 255
an analysis, I believe, to one of the Societies at home; but it had not been
published at the time of my hurried departure from England. Professor
Royle placed it in Mr. Solly’s hands.
I was very much struck with the resemblance which the Regur soil that
covers the plateaux of the Deccan bears to specimens of the “ Choraa
Zem,” which Mr. Murchison brought with him from Russia, and which
covers the Steppes of that country in a precisely similar manner.
The similarity also struck Mr. Lonsdale, the late talented Secretary
of the Geological Society, who was also present at the Meeting when Mr.
Murchison read his paper on the Geology of Russia in the last year.
Believe me,
Your’s very truly,
T. J. Newsoup.
We have here to announce the recovery of the Catalogue of Captain
Pemberton’s Bootan specimens, which it will be re-
Mineralogy and
Geology. collected from my reports, had been sent to us by
General McLeod, but without any Catalogue; this I have at length succeed-
ed by his assistance in tracing out. The following is an extract from his
private letter :—
** London, 5, Manchester Square, Christmas Day, 1842.
My pear Pippineton,—I had the pleasure of writing to you on the
30th ultimo, and then promised that I should write again, after Mrs.
Pemberton and I should have an opportunity of looking into poor Pem-
berton’s Journals, and IT am happy to say, that we then discovered what
we hope may prove useful in enabling you to carry out your views, regard-
ing the collection I sent you, although the information appears rather
meagre.
«« As Mrs. Pemberton was so much better acquainted with his hand-writing
than I am, she undertook to copy out all that we could discover on the
subject, and when we were doubtful of the words, from our ignorance
of Geology, she has underlined them; but she believes she made out
almost all correctly. At all events, I have nodoubt you will be able to
clear up what may have appeared doubtful to us. We could discover
nothing further than No. 138, nor could we find any Geological notes
separate from this list. Enclosed you have Mrs. Pemberton’s copy of
the list, and it will afford us much pleasure to hear that it proves in any
degree useful.”
We have thus restored this very valuable collection to our Museum,
and I have the pleasure to add, that we have also a complete set of
duplicates of it, which will be packed for dispatch to the Honorable the Court
__ of Directors.
In the course of my correspondence on the subject of Storms, during
the past month I received from Mr. Howe, Marine Assistant to the
Commissioner at Akyab, the following curious account of an eruption
of one of their little voleanoes :—
a ks
256. Asiatic Society. [No. 135.
Khyouck Phyoo, Feb. 7, 1843.
“We, however, had last night a most magnificent volcanic eruption.
The mountain, which is of moderate height, and shaped somewhat like
a pyramid, is about 3 or 4 miles from the station which was rendered as
light as noon-day, though midnight at the time. The eruption commenced
at about 11 pe. m., unaccompanied by any rumbling, but throwing up
masses and particles of lava to an immense height, and presenting a
most magnificent spectacle, visible all round the country. The weather
had been for some evenings previous, close and threatening, though the
glass kept up, varying from 30° 12’ to 29° 98 for the last 5 or 6 days.
“The fire gradually went out, and all was still again by about half
an hour after midnight.
“This eruption takes place, from what I hear, generally once in two
years, sometimes annually.”
We give with the present number, a specimen plate of the Chira
of Thibet, reduced from a folio-sized drawing, to accompany the Adver-
tisement of the Illustrations of the Zoology of Nepal, to be published
by Mr. Howard of London, which will be found at the end of the num-
ber ; and it is but justice to the extraordinary native talent which
has been thus developed amongst the Nipalese, by the means and pa-
tronage which have been so liberally afforded to them, by our talented
associate to say, that judging from a port folio of the drawings lately
exhibited at the Society’s Meetings, nothing can surpass the truth and
beauty of these Illustrations, which in the hands of Mr. Howard give
every promise of being in the very highest degree worthy of the pa-
tronage of the Indian and European public. ,
Bodlin vOo-lLith.
¢ Tibet
ae
TOE Lo)
eo on
vrieenet Aas
we
»
alee C
AL
oO
, a
oO
ce)
ro)
aa
d
xs
a STIG Ene Py ay
re
A
Ww
SE
(@)
ey
oO 4
a
yet es
F4
2 e 25
:
‘s
ao
7 My
i i
*
a >
: as?
>
. a
= a
‘
A
\otkcaala ta
aa
,
¥
JOURNAL
OF THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY.
Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. By Lieut. R. Barro Surry,
Bengal Engineers.
Among the various Committees established by the British Associa-
tion for the investigation of subjects of general scientific interest, one
has been appointed to register Earthquake shocks in Great Britain,
and its labours have already been made public in several Reports to the
parent body. From the discussions consequent on the presentation of
these Reports, it appears, that in the opinion of well qualified judges,
results of but little comparative importance can be anticipated from ob-
servation made in localities, where the disturbing forces act with such
feeble intensity as in those brought under the notice of the Committee,
and it is therefore considered desirable, that similar observations should
be made abroad, in tracts of country where greater energy characterises
the disturbing powers, and where the effects of these are exhibited
on a larger and more important scale. Several such tracts are to be
found in India, and a few of the most remarkable convulsions ex-
perienced throughout them, are already familiar to scientific men.
But no systematic effort has yet been made to record and analyse the
various phenomena of Indian Earthquakes, and the narratives of these
are scattered throughout the pages of various works, without connec-
tion and without method. To collect from every available source, all
No. 136. New Series, No. 52, 2M
258 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 136.
the information connected with Earthquake shocks in India and its
frontier countries, both in regard to those that have already occurred,
and those that in future may occur, is the principal object proposed in
this investigation. In regard to the historical portion of the subject,
I cannot but feel conscious of its imperfections, since accounts of Indian
Earthquakes are in general so meagre in important details, and must
always be sought for under so many different sources, that to make
the enquiry perfect, would require an amount of leisure and literary
resources that very few, if indeed any, in this country, can command.
In tracing the history of our Earthquakes, I have, however, done all
I could with the materials at my disposal, and perhaps I may yet be
able to complete what I now feel to be so imperfect.
More sanguine hopes of interesting results may, however, I think,
be entertained in regard to Earthquakes that may be experienced after
this time, since a general interest has been awakened in the subject,
and the attention of many intelligent and well qualified observers
attracted to it. Observations will moreover in future be centralised, and
the unsatisfactory labour of gleaning information from many detached
sources will be saved. Earthquakes are almost invariably observed
when the feelings are excited, and emotions adverse to a calm, deliberate
judgment on accompanying phenomena have sway. The greater the
scale on which the disturbing forces are exhibited, the more intense
will such feelings and emotions usually be, and in those very cases where
minute and careful observations would be of the greatest value, observers
are generally in a state the most unfavourable for making them. The
sensible and permanent effects of Earthquake shocks are frequently
detailed with painful minuteness, but those more temporary and evanes.,
cent, but at the same time, more immediately connected with the causes
to which such convulsions are due, are allowed to pass by unob-
served. The tendency to exaggerations induced by this state of mind
requires constant allowances to be made for the statements of obser-
vers, and we shall be able to estimate the amount of this allowance |
only after the phenomena of Earthquakes have been brought to the
test of actual measurement by the use of appropriate recording instru-
ments. Such instruments have been brought into use by the Commit-
tee of the British Association, but they are yet far from being perfect ;
and before their full utility can be felt, their sensibility must be increas-
1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 259
ed considerably beyond the point to which it has yet been carried.
This will no doubt ere long be accomplished, and the details of the
phenomena of Earthquake shocks be removed from the ill-defined pro-
vince of feeling, and brought under that of measured space and number.
The chief obstacle to the introduction of such recording instruments
as are alluded to above, throughout the Earthquake tracts of India,
will probably be found in the incessant fluctuations of society, and the
consequent impossibility of obtaining consecutive series of observa-
tions. In reflecting on this point, it has appeared to me, that the most
permanent local establishments in the country are the mission stations,
and that if Missionaries residing in favourable localities, could be in-
duced to receive and record observations with our instruments, they
would confer a boon upon science at a very trifling sacrifice of time
or labour in the cause. Earthquakes usually occur at distant intervals,
and the observations required upon them, are neither complicated
nor laborious. I would therefore hope to obtain in course of time
the co-operation of those members of favourably situated mission
establishments, who may not be unwilling to devote a limited por-
tion of their time and talents to the elucidation of what is certainly
one of the most interesting chapters of the physical history of India.
Meanwhile, however, until arrangements can be matured for supply-
ing instruments to those willing to receive them, I trust I shall con-
tinue to receive the interesting communications of those observers who
have so zealously assisted me during the past year, and for whose aid
I feel most grateful. Their individual labour will come more appro-
priately under notice in another page; but I am desirous of expressing
to one and all, my acknowledgment of their valuable assistance, since
to it must be traced all the interest that this investigation may
_ possess.
To the gentlemen connected with the public press of India, espe-
cially to Messrs. Stocqueler and Place, Editors respectively of the Cal-
cutta Englishman and Delhi Gazette, 1 am indebted for essential aid,
and I trust I may continue to receive from them such notices of
Earthquake shocks, as from time to time, may be made public in their
papers. .
My information relative to Earthquakes in the presidencies of Ma-
dras and Bombay is, I regret to say, extremely limited. In both there
260 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 136.
are tracts occasionally subject to such shocks, and I would solicit the
co-operation of observers under whose notice they may come.*
This Memoir will be divided into the four following parts :—
I. Register of Indian Earthquakes for the year 1842.
II. Historical Summary of Indian Earthquakes, with some remarks
on the general distribution of subterranean disturbing forces through-
out India and its frontier countries.
ITI. Analysis of the phenomena of Indian deans: as exhibited
in the two preceding parts.
IV. Remarks on the points to be observed during Earthquake
shocks, and on the means of making the requisite observations.
Part. I.—Register of Indian Earthquakes, during the year 1842.
1. JELLALABAD EarTAQUAKE OF THE 19TH FEBRUARY, 1842.
My attention was first prominently attracted to the subject of
Earthquakes in India, by the occurrence of that of the 19th of Febru-
ary last. A few brief and imperfect notes founded upon the details
I was able to collect, were published in the Journal of the Asiatic
Scciety and my object then was, more to direct attention to the sub-
ject of Earthquakes in general, than to furnish rigidly accurate conclu-
sioas on this case in particular. Such conclusions were indeed
incompatible with the nature of the information furnished me, and
I have subsequently ascertained, that many corrections of these are re-
quisite. Yet the notes have fully answered their design, and have led
to my procuring much information, which, had they not been published
even with all their imperfections, would certainly have been lost to
science. From the date of the Earthquake my register was com-
menced, and it is my intention to continue it regulariy, publishing it at
yearly intervals. I have some recollection of two Earthquakes having
been experienced in Delhi during the month of January 1842, but
unfortunately I did not record them at the time, my register not being
then commenced, and I have been unable since to verify this im-
* All communications on the subject of Earthquakes in India may be addressed to
the author at Seharunpore, North-western Provinces, Bengal, orif preferred, to the
Secretary to the Asiatic Society, Calcutta, or to any of the public papers.
1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 261
pression. The Jellalabad Harthquake therefore comes first in order,
in the year 1842.
In tracing the progress of this Earthquake, I purpose commencing at
its most westerly limit, and following it to the Eastward. According
to this plan, the first place where its effects are to be noticed is Cabool,
(lat. 34° 30’ 380”; long. 69° 7’ E.) The intelligence from Cabool is,
however, extremely limited, being confined to the following short ex-
tract from a narrative of the events of the captivity at that city, by Dr.
Berwick and his party of sick and wounded, left behind, when the
British force attempted to retreat to Jellalabad,
‘¢ On the 19th of February,” it is remarked, ‘ they were visited by
a most awful Earthquake. It continued for some minutes, and rocked
the fort in a frightful manner. All the men able to move rushed out
into the open air, every moment expecting the walls to fall in and
bury them ; but God was good, and after three minutes’ duration, each
shock succeeding the other in rapid succession, it ceased. The walls
were dreadfully shaken, especially the side wall of the European ward,
which came down a few days afterwards.” From the effect of the
shock, as detailed in this extract, it may safely be inferred, that Caboo}
did not form its extreme westerly limit, but we have no authentic in-
telligence of its progress beyond that place, and its would therefore be
vain to speculate upon the point.
Proceeding Eastward over a tract of country more rugged and in-
hospitable than can well be conceived, and descending from a, height
of about 7,000 to a little more than 2,000 above the level of the sea,
we enter the valley of Jellalabad, where the devastating effects of the
Earthquake were exhibited on a larger scale than at any other place.
The whole line of the Cabool river from Cabool to Jellalabad, experi-
enced, however, the effects of the shock, and many of the forts of the
chiefs were laid in ruins, or seriously injured. Among others, that of
Budiabad, in which the English prisoners were then confined was, I
am informed, much shaken, although not destroyed.
The valley of Jellalabad is thus briefly described by Lieut. Wood
of the Indian Navy :—*“ A ridge of hills called Deh Koh, or the black
mountain, rises about Jugdulluck and running East by North till it meets
the Cabool river, bounds the plain of Jellalabad on the North; to the
South it has the high hill of Nungnihar; East it has the hills of Alee
262 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 1386.
Baghan and desert of Buttee Kote; while its Western limit is marked
by ridges, which here project into the valley of the Soorkh Rood.
The length of the Jellalabad plain is 25 miles, and its width does not
exceed four miles.”
The town of Jellalabad (lat. 34° 25’; long. 70° 30'*) was garrisoned
at the period of the Earthquake by General Sir Robert Sale’s Brigade,
and hence our information as to the effects of the shock is in consi-
derable detail. The following extract from the Englishman, gives the
most graphic account of the Earthquake I have yet seen.
Extract from a letter published in the Calcutta Englishman of the 16th
May 1842, dated Jellalabad, 28th April, 1842.
“‘On the 19th February, we had one of the most awful Earthquakes
I have ever experienced ; it occurred at mid-day, being very stormy at
the time, with clouds of dust floating through the atmosphere. The
shock lasted about a minute and a half, and commenced with a sound
like the rolling of a heavy waggon over a wooden bridgethe earth
swung to and fro like the rocking of a cradle; not a man could keep
his legs ; every one fell prostrate, and a sensation of sickness and gid-
diness affected all. Bastions and houses came tumbling down with a
dreadful crash, and we verily believed we were about to be swallowed
up in some yawning chasm. The earth did open in several
places, and water appeared on the surface of the ground. The
river was thrown into the most violent commotion, and _ the
water dashed over its bank with frightful violence. I was standing
on a bastion at the time, it split in two places and crumbled
down ; I was precipitated to some distance, where I lay stunned and
stupified with horror. No one could utter a word, and every face was
blanched with terror and apprehension ; here was death in a new form,
for which we were totally unprepared. Providentially for us, not a
man of our party was killed ; many were injured by the falling of the
houses, but none dangerously: a few of the inhabitants of the town
were killed, where the fall of the high houses choked up the street, and
left no room for escape ; but on the whole the accidents were few, compa-
red to the nature and extent of the mischief. From this period until the
* The positions of places in Affghanistan, are taken from Walker’s New Map.
1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 263
middle of March, we had frequent slight shocks, sometimes so many as
six or seven during the twenty-four hours. Our fortifications were
seriously damaged by this awful visitation, and we fully expected the
enemy would have made a rush upon us, for there were gaps enough,
but every precaution was taken to repel them. They hovered about
us, however, like birds of prey, trying to ascertain the extent of our
damage ; whether they learnt it or not I cannot say, but seemingly they
thought it better to let us alone. We fell to work again with renew-
ed energy, and ina short time repaired much of the injury the works
had sustained, labouring night and day without. intermission, until we
were once more able to set the enemy at defiance.”
The appearance of water at the Earth’s surface through fissures
made by Earthquake shocks having been connected with theoretical
considerations on the causes of the events,* I felt desirous of verifying
the statement made in the above extract, that this phenomena was
observed at Jellalabad, and I therefore wrote to my friend Major
Broadfoot, C. B., requesting him to give me any information on the
point he might possess. In reply, under date Jellalabad, 13th July
1842, he thus writes: ‘“‘ You ask where the water came from that issu-
ed from the cracks in the earth. I saw no water issue from the
cracks which opened where I was, nor signs of any in others, and I saw
more of the effects and sooner than perhaps any one else; nor do I
remember hearing of water issuing from the earth at the time. Still
it may have happened.” And the nature of Major Broadfoot’s duties
gave him the best possible opportunities of observation, it is probable
that had water actually been ejected from the earth, the circumstance
would not have escaped his notice, and the statement that it did do so,
must be considered as very doubtful.
A few further particulars of the Earthquake at Jellalabad are given
in the following extract from Sir Robert Sale’s official dispatch, dated
Jellalabad, 16th April 1842: “‘ But it pleased Providence, on the 19th of
February, to remove in an instant this ground of confidence (alluding to
the defensive works executed by Major Broadfoot for. the protection of
the city.) A tremendous Earthquake shook down all our parapets built
* On Hydrostatic Pressure as a cause of Earthquakes, by the Rev. John Toplis,
B. D. Jameson’s Journal, No. 59, p. 84.
264 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 136.
up with so much labour, injured several of our bastions, demolished a
third of the town, made a considerable breach in the rampart of a
curtain in the Peshawur face, and reduced the Cabool gate to a shape-
less mass of ruins. It savours of romance, but it is a sober fact, that the
city was thrown into alarm, within the space of little more than one
month by the repetition of full one hundred shocks of this terrific
phenomenon of nature.”
The Jellalabad Earthquake is here considered solely in its relations
to science ; but it may be permitted me to turn for a moment from the
cold record of physical phenomena, and to express the admiration
all must feel at the noble conduct of that gallant band, whose moral
courage rose superior to the depressing influence of such a series of
convulsions at such a crisis, and whose physical exertions so rapidly
obliterated their devastating effects, that their wondering foes could
attribute the result only to some supernatural agency, to some English
witchcraft.
The superior intensity of the Earthquake in the immediate vicinity
of Jellalabad, and the incessant state of ‘ ¢remblement’ into which the
earth there was thrown for so long a period after the great shock,
appear to me to render it almost certain, that the focus of disturbing
force was situated in that valley, and that the undulations generated
were propagated East and West from some point in it as a centre.
Most of the shocks subsequent to the great one of the 19th February
were local, and a very few only were felt at Peshawur to the Eastward,
and none in so far as I know to the Westward. The disturbing force
to which the series was due, must therefore have been confined in its
action to the valley of Jellalabad, and the effects would indicate, that its
focus was at no very great depth beneath the surface of the earth, and
that farther, a large amount of its power was expended on the 19th,
since the other shocks were feeble in comparison with the one expe-
rienced on that day.
From the best information I can procure, the time at which the
Earthquake was felt at Jellalabad was 11h. 40m. a. Mm. All the times
subsequently stated, will be reduced to Jellalabad time, so as to shew
correctly the progress of the shock. This correction was neglected in
my notes formerly published, in consequence of the very great discre-
1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 265
pancies among the periods stated by different observers, and the impos-
sibility of their knowing which were correct. Information subsequentiy
obtained, has, however, admitted of greater certainty as to time, and
greater care is therefore requisite in combining the observations.
From Jellalabad, the shock affecting a portion of the Suffeid Koh
range of mountains, with the numerous subordinate ranges that diverge
from it, reached the town of Peshawur, (lat. 34° 06’; long. 71° 42,
E). From the circumstance of General Pollock’s force having been
encamped at Kawulsur, about eight miles from Peshawur, and the
communication being uninterrupted, the details relative to the effects
of the shock there, are fuller and more satisfactory than would other-
wise have been the case.
The following extracts from letters published in the Delhi Gazette,
give the most complete accounts of the effects of the Earthquake I
have been able to find :—
Extract from a letter, dated Kawulsur, 20th February, 1842.
““ Yesterday a fearful Earthquake visited this part of the world.
»* was long continued, and men,
The shock which came on
horses, tents, even the ground under us, and the hills in the distance,
appeared to be moving. It was an awful visitation, and made every
heart quake. In the direction of Peshawur, (eight miles distant,)
clouds of dust appeared, which proved to have been caused by the
falling of very many houses and buildings. A salute was fired from
the battery at Jumrood, for the purpose of announcing the safety of
Rajah Pertaub Sing, son of Maharajah Shere Sing, who is now at
Peshawur, and of whom it is said he narrowly escaped death: the
building in which he had been sitting came down almost immediately
after he quitted it. The natives say a tenth of the city is down, and
a number of the inhabitants killed.”
Extract from a letter, dated Kawulsur, 19th February, 1848.
“Tt is now about 12 o’clock mid-day, and we have just experienced
a most awful Earthquake in Camp. The natives say that nothing so
severe of the kind has been experienced in India for the last fifty
* The time stated being erroneous, is omitted. The times generally are still by no
means so satisfactory as is desirable.
oN
266 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 186.
years. The earth literally trembled like an aspen leaf, and rocked to
and fro as an infant’s cradle, or like a ship at sea. Many of the camels
that were carrying the baggage of the troops to Col. Wild’s camp were
thrown down, and so great was the shock, which lasted fully five
minutes, that I was obliged to support myself by holding on to the
camp furniture, and many of the officers fancied themselves suddenly
taken ill. I expected every moment to have seen the earth open and
swallow us up, and it is only by God’s great and merciful providence
that we have escaped through such an awful convulsion of nature.
*“‘ Every one complains of nausea. We have just been observing im-.
mense volumes of dust, that completely darken the atmosphere in the
direction of the old ricketty town of Peshawur, which is supposed to
be nearly levelled with the ground, as the houses are but weakly
built, being merely propped up by the beams of wood which may
be observed placed in different spots under large walls and corners of
the houses, and are even dangerous to passers-by at all times. [1
doubt not but to-morrow’s dawn will bring us dreadful intelligence, and
produce a fearful account of lives lost.—20¢h February. Reports say,
that only from 40 to 50 persons at Peshawur were crushed and killed
among ruins of the falling houses. General Avitabili’s large dwelling
house, which had recently been built, and was being finished, fell in,
but luckily did no injury to any one in the house.”
The period of the shock at Peshawur was 11h. 41m. 12s. Jellalabad
time, the observed time at the former place being 11h. 46m. and the
difference of longitude 4m. 48s.* 3
The course of the Earthquake hitherto has been through a tract of
country rugged and mountainous in the extreme. The geology of the
district extending from Cabool to Peshawur has never been satisfac-
torily described, and very little, I might indeed say nothing, whatever
is yet known about it. Dr. Lord gives the following general remarks
on the great features of the country, and some of the points alluded to
by him, as indicating severe disruptive action, are interesting in con-
* Captain Lawrence, late Political Agent at Peshawur, assures me, he feels quite
certain as to the period of the Earthquake at that place; he having been led to watch
the time narrowly, in consequence of a meeting between General Pollock and Rajah
Pertaub Sing being to take place at noon exactly, arrangements for which were in pro-
gress under his superintendence.
a
1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 267
nection with the frequent occurrence of Earthquake shocks throughout
the tract. The facts embodied in Dr. Lord’s remarks, must be
separated from the theoretical views with which they are associated,
the latter being open to serious objections; but as there is reason to
believe they are now under discussion by a very competent authority,
it is unnecessary to allude farther to them here.
“ A parallel of latitude,” Dr. Lord remarks, “drawn through Kalabigh
and west of the Indus would present a remarkable difference in the
course of the mountain chains as observed to its north and south sides.
In the latter direction, the Soliman and Kala ranges, the one of which
may be looked upon as a continuation of the other, generally preserve
an almost perfect parallelism with the course of the Indus; while on
the other side every range, and they are numerous from the Himalaya
and Hindu Kosh to the Salt range inclusive, are at right angles with
the direction of the stream. In other words, the general line of the
former is North and South, of the latter East and West. It is of the
latter, and the country they include, that I would more particularly
speak at present.
‘‘In addition to the general course of the chains thus laid down, there
is another fact, subordinate, yet of no less importance towards deter-
mining the physical formation of this part of the country. When the
two mountain ranges have for some time preserved their parallel East
and West course, the Northern is observed to deflect, or send off a
branch towards the South, while a corresponding deflection or ramifica-
tion of the Southern chain comes to meet it, and the plain which other-
wise would have been one continued expanse from East to West, is
thus cut into a number of valleys, the longitudinal axis of which,
however, is still in general to be found in the same direction. If
we conceive these valleys to be few, spacious, and well marked to-
wards the North and South, while in the central or Cabul region they
become small, numerous and crowded, so as to resemble a tangled maze
or net-work, we shall have a just general conception of the tract of
country west of the Indus, which may be familiarly described as lying
between Cabul and Kalabagh.
** Unquestionable geological facts, such as the structure of igneous
rocks poured out under strong pressure, the presence of fossil shells
268 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 136.
&c. lead me to the belief that several, if not all of these valleys, were at
some former time the receptacles of a series of inland lakes, and the
natures of the shells found (principally planorbes and paludinz) seem
to indicate that the waters of these lakes had been fresh. In this
manner three grand sheets of water, separated by the mountain deflec-
tions before alluded to, would appear to have occupied the entire
country from Kabul to the Indus, and their basins may now be distin-
guished as the plains which afford sites to the three cities of Kabul,
Jellalabad, and Peshawur.
“« The draining of these basins is tranquilly carried on by the Kabul
river, which runs along the northern edge of each, conveying their
united waters to the Indus: but in former times when more energetic
means were necessary, the mountain barriers burst, and the shattered
fragments and rolled blocks that now strew the Kyber Pass, bear testi-
mony to its once having afforded exit to a mighty rush of waters,
while the Gidur-Gulla (or Jackall’s neck,) a long defile east of the
plains of Peshawur, clearly points out the further course of the torrent
towards the bed of the Indus, whence its passage to the ocean was easy
and natural.” _
The questions in pure geology involved in these remarks I do not
concern myself with, but I have quoted them to shew, that indications
of powerful disruptive forces prevail throughout the whole of the course
of the Earthquake of the 19th February hitherto described, and this
point is all that circumstances admit of being established. Of the
nature of the rocks composing the mountain masses between Cabool
and Jellalabad, I have seen no account. Major Broadfoot states, that
the rocks in the immediate vicinity of Jellalabad are gniess, and Sir
A. Burnes mentions, that mica slate and granite are also found there.
Relative to the rocks in the Kyber Pass, my friend Lieut. Goodwyn of
Engineers, writes thus: ‘The Kyber rocks are of flinty slate, varying in
all degrees of hardness from flint to slate. Sometimes the rock is nearly
one solid mass, the strata are so slightly defined, and they cannot be sepa-
rated with a crow-bar—at other places, a blow of a pickaxe is sufficient
to shiver it into fifty little cubes of slate; a considerable quantity of earth
lying between the strata, which falls down in dust. Sir Alexander
Burnes says, ‘‘ The formation is a flinty slate overlying conglomerate, but
ee
1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 269
I have also frequently found the conglomerate overlying the slate, and
they are frequently united in the same rock. The conglomerate is
very hard, and we could not progress more than four inches an hour,
with two-inch jumpers, in boring holes for blasting. The stones seem
cemented with a sort of iron cement.”
After leaving Peshawur, the shock traversing the alluvial plains of
the Punjaub reached Ferozepore, (lat. 830° 56’ 50” ; long. 74° 35’,) where
its force was still felt to be severe, though no longer destructive. No
accounts have been made public of the effects of the shock at any
place intermediate between Peshawur and Ferozepore. The latter
place was reached at 11h. 48m. 40s. a. M. Jellalabad time.
The city of Delhi, (lat. 28° 40’; long. 77° 16’,) is the next place from
which we have authentic intelligence of the effects of the Earthquake.
The intensity of the shock was, however, very much diminished here, and
beyond the motion of the ground no other effects are alluded to. The
period of the Earthquake at Delhi, as stated in my notes formerly
published, I find to be erroneous, and the proper time from the best
information I have been able to procure, is 11h. 538m. 56s. a. M. Jel-
lalabad time. Relative to the nature of the shock at Delhi, Mr. Sub-
Conductor Bingham of the Sappers and Miners thus writes : “ The total
duration of the shock, which appeared to me to consist of several
distinct undulations of the earth, but without perceptible intervals
between them, could not have been less than five or six minutes. But
of this I cannot speak definitely, as I had no reference to a time-piece
during the shock.”
About twenty miles to the South-west of the city of Delhi, at a
village called Sonub, is situated a hot spring, of which the following
description is given anonymously in the second volume of the Glean-
ings in Science, p. 34 :—
«At Sonub near Delhi, there is a hot spring (sulphureous) which
attracts from the surrounding country myriads of people for the pur-
pose of bathing; the bath is constantly filled with as many people
as it can hold, (except perhaps for a few hours during the night,) in
the day time by men, and the night time by women ; most of the inhabi-
tants of the town itself are in the habit of bathing in it daily, and it is
perhaps to this habit, that they are indebted for the cadaverous and
270 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [ No. 136.
unhealthy appearance so common among them. The temperature of
the spring in January last, (1829,) was 103°; but it varies, for in July,
1826, I observed it as high as 110°. The flow of water also varies
considerably.”
Dr. Malcomson of Bombay, having made enquiries of Dr. Falconer,
late Superintendent of the Botanic Garden, Seharanpore, as to whether
this spring was affected by the Earthquake of the 19th February, the
latter referred the question to me, and I availed myself of the assistance
of my intelligent and indefatigable correspondent, Mr. Bingham, in
instituting enquiries on the spot. Mr. Bingham applied first to the
Deputy Collector of the district of Goorgaon, in which district the
spring is situated, but so little interest was taken by him in the matter,
that he did not even reply to Mr. Bingham’s letter. This indifference,
on the part of the Deputy Collector, was, however, compensated for by
the interest and activity, shewn by Mr..H. Martin, the Superintendent
of Roads in the same district, who so soon as applied to by Mr.
Bingham, visited the spring, and addressed the following interesting
letter to me, giving the results of his enquiries :—
Letter from Mr. H. Martin to my address, dated 15th October, 1842.
Srr,—Having been requested by Mr. Bingham, to obtain for you
what information I could on the subject of the alterations which took
place in the hot wells of Sonub. I yesterday visited them, and have
much pleasure in transmitting to you the results of my enquiries,
which I trust will prove of utility to the object you have in view.
“On the 19th February last, (the day of the Earthquake,) the water
in the wells became as cold as that of the ordinary wells of this country
—the issue of the spring was observed to flow much slower, and in less
quantities than formerly, and at times the spring would be completely
dry. No disturbance of any kind was visible, nor any other change
than what I have noticed. The above appearances continued for twenty-
five days, when the wells resumed their former state.
“IT would remark, that this statement may be credited, as all to
whom I applied answered with readiness, and from the length of time
which the appearances lasted, there could hardly be a mistake.
‘Should you wish for any more detailed particulars, or if I could be
of any assistance to you in any way on any other subject that may
1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 271
relate to this district, I shall be most happy in furnishing you with all
the information I can procure.” Iam, &c. &c.
H. Martin.
In continuation on the same subject, Mr. Bingham writes under date
Ist Nov. 1842 :—
‘I wrote some time ago to Mr. Martin, for information regarding the
locality of the springs, and it appears from his reply, that they are situ-
ated within 200 yards, (but he does not state whether on the East or
West side, ) of a range of low hills, which I have myself formerly traced
from where they cross the Jumna, about two miles to the north of
Delhi, running in a southerly direction beyond Muttra.* There are
no rocks in the immediate neighbourhood of the hot springs, but the
hills are principally composed of a very hard stratified quartz stone,
the strata dipping at an angle of 70° or 75°, with numerous vertical
cracks and fissures through them, as if they had been suddenly and
violently heaved up.
‘“‘ There is also here and there a stone of different formation found
lying upon the quartz; in some places, it is merely ‘ bujree’ (red
sand,) in others a soft red sandstone. The city of Delhi is mostly
built upon these rocks, and some years ago when employed in blasting
to form a ditch for one of the bastions on the south side of the city,
I had often occasion to remark the impressions of the roots and fibres
of vegetablest in the same stone; but in the quartz rock, I never met
with any foreign substances, except some slight traces of a metallic
nature, which appeared to me to be zinc or copper.”
As the Sonub hot spring in all probability rises through one of those
fissures so common in the vicinity, the effect of the earthquake seems to
have been to close this exit of the waters temporarily, as the supply
diminished so much immediately afterwards. And the diminution of
the supply would lead to the water becoming colder in consequence of
its exposing a lesser bulk to the cooling influences of the strata
* These are the Aravulli range of hills, which abutting on the Western termina-
tion of the Vindyas, run up through Rajpootana, and are lost at some little dis-
tance to the Northward of Delhi.
+ The nature and relations of this sandstone render it probable, that these vege-
table forms were not the remains of actual vegetables, but were those dendritic forms
of doubtful origin so common in similar circumstances.
272 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [ No. 136.
through which it passed. The obstacle in the path of the waters,
whatever its nature may have been, appears to have been wholly
removed at the end of twenty-five days, as then the temperature and
quantity of the water returned to its usual standard.
Continuing to the Eastward of Delhi, the next place from which
intelligence was received relative to the effects of.the shock, was
Poojnah, a station on the Doab Canal, (lat. 29° 32’, long. 77° 27’ ?)
where Sergeant and Assistant Overseer Renny observed and com-
municated to me the following detail :—
Extract of a letter from Sergt. Renny, dated Poojnah, 19th Feb. 1842.
“‘T also beg leave to inform you, that we felt a very severe shock of
an Earthquake here at — *. It lasted about three minutes with in-
tervals. My whole family felt it as well as the people about my place,
who came running to me much alarmed. It was first noticed I be-
lieve by myself, as I was then sitting writing, and found a heavy table
on which my desk was laid, much agitated, which I thought was
caused by some one moving; but I soon found my chair in motion
also, and on looking about, I perceived every thing moveable in the
room in a state of agitation. A few hours before this, I observed the
water in the canal was unusually muddy, and after the shock was over,
I went to look and found it much disturbed by a high swell, whether
occasioned by the shock or not, I cannot say.”
Sergt. Renny is entitled to my best thanks for these interesting de-
tails. The unusual muddiness of the canal could not possibly have
been due to the influence of the Earthquake, since the direction in
which the shock travelled was against, not coincident with that of the
current in the canal, hence the disturbance of the silt in the bed of the
canal could not precede the shock; but it is quite possible, that the high
swell observed after the shock: had passed, may have been occasioned
by it. The time of the shock at Poojnah was, as nearly as I can
estimate it, Oh. 0Om. 12s. Pp. m. Jellalabad time.
From Poojnah, the shock travelled to Saharanpore, where it was
just felt, but attracted no particular attention.. It was next ex- —
perienced at Kulsea, another station on the Doab Canal, about twelve
or fourteen miles to the Northward of Saharanpore, where its effects
* The time stated being erroneous, is omitted.
1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 273
were very perceptible. The motion here, as described to me by Mr.
Sub-Conductor Pigott, was of the same undulating character as ob-
served throughout, but its duration was certainly not greater than one
minute. Immediately on perceiving the shock, Mr. Pigott examined
the sun-dial, and making a slight allowance for the error of the dial,
and that for the longitude of the spot which has not been determined,
the true period appears to have been very nearly Oh. O3m. 44s. Pp. M.
Jellalabad time.
My camp was pitched about two miles North-west of Kulsea on the
South bank of the Nowgong Row, (or stream,) but so feeble was the
intensity of the shock, that although I was conscious of some peculiar
motion at the time, it never occurred to me that it arose from an
Earthquake, and it had passed from my mind till recalled by Mr.
Pigott’s account of what had been felt at the same time at Kulsea.
Mussoorie, in lat. 30° 30', long. 78° 10'*, forms the most easterly
limit of the Earthquake of the 19th February, in so far as my informa-
tion extends: A merely incidental notice, in a Meteorological Register
kept by Major Aitchison at Mussoorie, informs me of its having been
experienced there. The shock, however, appears to have traversed a
large portion of the Himalayan chain, since I am informed by Capt.
Hutton, that it was felt at Shalkur on the borders of little Thibet, by
Lieut. D. Cunningham of Engineers.
It therefore appears from the preceding details, that the tract affect-
ed by this Earthquake is, so far as determined by authentic intelligence,
extended from the 69th to a little beyond the 78th meridian of East
longitude, and from between the 34th and 35th to between the 28th
and 29th parallels of North latitude. The superficial area thus affected,
amounts to nearly 216,000 square miles, and within it are included
mountain masses of great extent, varying from 2 or 3,000 to 10 and
12,000 feet in height above the level of the sea.
The general course of the shock was from East to West, parallel
with that of the range of the Himalayas. Its mode of propagation
appears to have been analogous to that of the waves generated when a
flexible piece of metal or other substance is seized at one extremity
* The geographical positions of places in India are taken from the table of lati-
tudes and longitudes published in Rushton’s Gazetteer. They are not always
strictly correct.
20
274 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 136.
and shaken violently. A succession of waves flow along the course of
the disturbed body, following each other rapidly until the moving force
is withdrawn, and thus it appears to have been with the Earthquake
under review. A series of great waves were generated on the 19th,
and propagated, with an undulatory motion toa great distance, and series
of smaller ones continued for upwards of a month afterwards to be con-
tinually formed, but propagated only to a very limited extent, but all in
the same direction with the first mentioned.
As some remarkable instances of disturbance of the magnetism of
the earth are recorded to have occurred during Earthquake shocks, it
struck me that similar phenomena might possibly have been observed
on the present occasion at the Simla Magnetic Observatory, and I there-
fore wrote to Major Boileau of Engineers, the Superintendent, on the
subject, and he was kind enough to reply as follows, under date Sth
November, 1842 :—
‘‘The magnetometers have been watched with great care during
(z. e. on and after) the occurrence of Earthquakes, and there never has
been any disturbance in their mean readings, though the mechanical
effect has been apparent by the vibrating motion communicated to the
instruments. The delicacy of our magnetic instruments is such, that
a movement equal to two seconds of arc would be detected immediately,
and I hold the total absence of any such indications, as almost amecunt-
ing to proof, that Karthquakes are not magnetic phenomena.”
If the observations at the Simla Observatory are to be held as
decisive on the point, then certainly it is a just inference, that no con-
nection exists between Earthquakes and disturbances of terrestrial
magnetism; but as these observations may be opposed by numerous
others indicating distinetly I think, such a connection, although the
precise nature of it is yet mysterious, Major Boileau’s inference must be
looked upon as premature, and his observations prove, it appears to
me, nothing more than, that at Simla, the Earthquakes have hitherto
produced effects only mechanical, but it by no means thence follows,
that Earthquakes generally are not in any respect magnetic pheno-
mena. The question is still an obscure one, and the observations
which have led to the impression that the causes of Earthquakes are
connected with terrestrial magnetism have been made chiefly in dis-
tricts where volcanic forces are in actual operation, and where the
1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 275
causes of Harthquakes, whether of terrestrial or atmospheric origin, are
in full activity, circumstances to which no analogy is presented at
Simla, since I am not aware of there being in the vicinity of that
place, one single proof of active volcanic agency. The question will
_ doubtless be farther elucidated ere the labours of the various magnetic
observatories are closed, but it is unnecessary to dwell longer upon it
now, as it will again come under notice at a subsequent period.
The following table presents a general view of the course and phe-
nomena of the Jellalabad Earthquake, and with it, the account of this
remarkable event will be closed :—.
TABLE.
3 Geographical Posi- 3 “3 8 bo « cha
= eet Bau cj 4.2 + on
DD ht
= oe Sw Doo
© 23 ae mi He Remarks.
mn “2, a ‘al vo & o
= Te ° 3 os) Dey (3)
g at. Long. “ot % o Bb OB
a Oo & & ao g &
a ee & oc oye
S A&G
Cabool, ..|34° 30’ 30” |69° 7’ ea ae Ags Shock very severe.
Jellalabad, |34 25 70 30 [11h 40m 0°s|_ 2 eee greatest
Peshawur,..|34 06 7142 |11 41 12/0 112 112 ~ |Shock, very severe.
Ferozepore,|30 56 50 |7435 |11 48 40/0 840 | 405 |Shock, smart.
Delhi, ..../28 40 7716 |11 53 861013 56 | 646 {Ditto do.
Poojnah, ../29 32 77277 0 00 12101912 | 657 _ | Ditto do.
Saharan- 2 ag |Not speci- S] ;
pore,.. § al aoe fied. ee 7 02 10ck, slight.
Kulsea, .. ../30 08 7734 | 0 3 441093 44 | 7 04 Shock, very slight.
Mussoorie, .!30 30 \78 10 — a ate 7 40 Shock, smart.
2, EARTHQUAKE OF THE 5TH Marca, 1842.
On the evening of the 5th March, 1842, a very severe shock of an
Earthquake was experienced at several stations in the North Western
Provinces, about 9 o'clock p.m. Judging from its effects, it appears
to have emanated from the interior of the Himalaya, since the stations
in and near the hills were much more seriously affected than those at a
distance from them. Thus the effects of the Earthquake at Mussoorie,
(lat. 30° 30’, long. 78° 10’), about 7,200 feet above the level of the
sea, were much more severe than at Saharanpore. In Major Aitchi-
276 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 136.
son’s Meteorological Journal, the following details of the shock are
given :—
‘*5th March. Thermometer at sunrise 62°, wind East. Thermo-
meter at sunset 58°, wind as in the morning, weather clear. At ten
minutes past 9 Pp, M. a most violent shock of an Earthquake, which
lasted about a minute Colonel Young’s house at Deyrah was much
injured, also. Major Thompson’s at Mussoorie, and Lord Henry Gor-
don’s at Landour was rent from top to bottom,” venetian blinds also
rattled strongly, lamp glasses were violently shaken, and the oscilla-
tions causing these effects appear to have come from North to South.
The motion of the Earth from all accounts appears to have been
horizontal, and the nature of the shock was wholly distinct from that of
the preceding Earthquake; all who experienced both assuring me, the
difference was perceptible to them at once. The effect in the present
instance, instead of being like the rounded swell of a fluid or viscid
mass, was sharp and sudden, like the effect of a concussion than of an
undulation, and seemed indeed to be a much magnified “ jarr,” similar
in kind to that experienced by the hand when a hammer held by it is
struck on a hard unyielding body. One intelligent friend who was in
his study when the shock occurred, described his sensations to be, as if
he and his chair had received a sudden and severe blow from behind,
and been both; impelled forward, and this appears to have been the
characteristic of the shock. 3
The following interesting details of the Earthquake as experienced
at Berkeri on the Doab Canal, were communicated to me by Sergt. and
Overseer J. Petrie, to whom I feel much obliged for his trouble in
preparing them :—
Letter from Sergt. J. Petrie to my address, dated 5th March, 1842.
Sir,—We had a very smart shock of an Earthquake here this
evening at about 9 o’clock : so much so indeed, that every thing in this
bungalow shook and rattled again. I had just laid down to rest with
a book in my hand when it came on, and I started up and called out
for assistance, thinking the house was coming down. Every one about
the place felt it, and came running to me. I found the South door of
the inner room, which I had bolted before I went to bed, had been
forced open by the bolt falling down. Indeed every thing in the house
1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. pu 6
shock, and I was very much afraid of its falling, after having read the
accounts from our Army near Peshawur. At that place a number of
houses have been destroyed, and many lives lost from the last Earth-
quake.
“ Although this shock did not last so long as the one of the 19th of
last month, in my opinion it was much more severe for the time.
Iam, &c. &c.
J. Petrir.”
The rate of propagation of this shock appears to have been very
rapid, as no perceptible difference in its period of arrival was observed
at any of the following stations; namely, Simla and Mussoorie in the
Himalayas, Deyrah in the Deyrah Dhoon, Saharanpore and Berkeri.
The nature of the shock would indicate that the seat of’ the disturbing
force must have been within the rocky crust of the earth, or at a very
small distance indeed beyond it, as such a supposition accounts best
for the peculiar ‘“‘ jarring” sensation characteristic of the shock. All
who experienced the Earthquakes of the 19th of February and Sth of
March, concurred in opinion, that they came from opposite directions,
and as the former was from West to East, the latter must have been,
as before stated, from Northto South, and this is in some measure con-
firmed by the fact stated in Sergt. Petrie’s letter, that the Southern
door of the inner room of the Berkeri canal bungalow was driven open
by the shock, as it would receive the first impulse.
3. EARTHQUAKE OF THE 21ST oF May, 1842.
The Earthquake of the 21st of May, experienced in the Lower Pro-
vinces, appears to have been only a slight shock, and its direction, in so
far as this can be determined from the facts communicated, was from
South-west to North-east. The most Westerly point from which I
have received any intelligence of its effects is Juanpore, a station about
forty miles to the North-west of Benares, the latter being in lat. 25°
30’ N., long. 83° 1’ E.
The following letter from Vincent Tregear, Esq. furnishes an ac-
count of the shock as felt at Juanpore :—
278 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 136.
Juanpore, 29th May, 1842.
“Dear Sir,—I have to-day received the Journal of the Asiatic
Society, No. 123; and as you invite communications regarding Earth-
quakes, I hasten to inform you, that a slight shock was felt here on the
21st inst. between the hours of 8 and 9 a. m. I did not, I regret to say,
note the time, because I found that no one else in the house noticed
the shock. In the evening I met Mr. Tulloh, who asked me if I had
‘felt the Earthquake ?’ shewing that it was not mere imagination on
my part. The motion seemed to be North and South. It was in
reality nearly vice versa,” but without reference to some standard in-
dicator of direction, it is impossible from mere sensations to tell the
direction of a shock correctly.
‘“‘ The weather,” Mr. Tregear continues ‘‘ here is exceedingly oppres-
sive, and if such a state of the atmosphere can be considered as pro-
phetic, I think we have more natural or unnatural convulsions at hand.
It is more than possible that chemical or mechanical changes in the
interior of the earth have great electrical influence on the surface ; and
these changes may be accompanied by perceptible vibrations.* * * * *
Faithfully yours,
Vincent TREGEAR.”
I shall have occasion in another part of this memoir to allude to
some interesting atmospherical phenomena which have been found to
accompany Harthquake shocks, but as this Register is intended to be
simply narrative, I do not at present make any comment on Mr. Tre-
gear’s remarks. .
The next place from which we have any record of this Earthquake
having been felt is the city of Patna, in lat. 25° 37’ N. long. 85° 15’ BE,
Our information is limited to the following extract from the Caleutta
Englishman of the 28th of May :— |
‘‘A letter from Patna,” the Editor states, ‘“‘ mentions that a smart
shock of an Earthquake was felt there at 8h. 36m. a. Mm. on the 21st
instant.”
The shock travelled next to Darjeeling, in lat. 27° 00’ N. and long.
88° 25’ E., and situated at a height of about 7,000 feet above the level
of the sea. The following letter from Arch. Campbell, Esq. Superin-
tendent of Darjeeling, gives details of the shock as experienced at
that place :—
1843. | Memoir on Indian Harthquakes. 279
Darjeeling, June Ath, 1842.
My prar Sir,—I have seen your account of the Earthquake of the
19th of February last in the last number of the Journal of the Asiatic
Society, and in compliance with your desire therein expressed to be
furnished with notices of Earthquake shocks occurring in all parts of
India, I have to inform you, that a slight shock was experienced at this
place on the morning of Saturday, the 21st of May last, at or nearly about
10 minutes past 9 o’clock a. m. I call the shoek a slight one, because it
was not sensible to every person at the station, and because there was
no damage done to houses or other property. It was experienced by
a person in my house, although I was not aware of its occurrence. I was
engaged dressing at the time, and standing, while the other person was
sitting in another room reading. The sensation is thus described: “I
was seated on a chair opposite to the fire when I felt a hitching motion
sideways. This was repeated two or three times, and was not accom-
panied by any noise.” The chair was placed East and West, so that
the course of the shock would appear to be North and South; but
whether from the South to the North, or vice versa, the person describ-
ing it cannot say. A gentleman at the Hotel, one mile North from
my house, describes the shock as having been more severe. He was
also dressing at the time, and staggered into his bearer’s arms, after
which he had a feeling of nausea which continued for some hours. At
Mr. Maddock’s house, one and half mile to the South of mine, the shock
is described as having been more violent than it was felt at my house, or
to the North side of it.* * * * * * Your sincerely,
To R. Baird Smith, Esq. A. CAMPBELL,
I have had frequent cause to be indebted to Dr. Campbell for de-
tails of Earthquakes experienced at Darjeeling, and I take this oppor-
tunity of acknowledging my obligations to him, not only for the
assistance he has afforded me, but also for the general interest he has
taken in the subject.
Correcting the time at Patna for difference of longitude, and assum-
ing that observed at Darjeeling to be, have
h..m.! ..8.
Time of shock at Patna, .. ...8 48 40
Pimieiske > 2; at Darjeeling, 9 10 00
—————_—-_-—_. —
Difference, O: 2120
280 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 1386.
4, EARTHQUAKE OF THE 4TH JULY, 1842.
A report of an Earthquake on the 4th July, was communicated to
me by Sergt. Buttress, Overseer on the Delhi Canal, through Capt.
Baker of Engineers. No other notice of this Earthquake has reached
me, but Sergt. Buttress gives the details so circumstantially, that I can
‘scarcely think he was mistaken, and the fact of his being the only one
to communicate an account of it, is in no degree remarkable, since
the interest in natural phenomena generally is in this country confined
to a very limited circle, and numbers of these pass without any record
at all. On the authority of Sergt. Buttress’ letter, I therefore include
this Earthquake in the Register.
Letter from Sergt. Buttress to Capt. Baker, Engineers, without date.
Sir,—As some gentleman of Engineers, whose name and address I
have forgotten, has solicited information of any Earthquake that may
take place, I beg leave through you, Sir, should you be acquainted
with the name and address of the gentleman, to forward the following
notice of one that took place at Chotah Thannah, on Monday the 4th
of July, at 10 minutes to 3 o’clock p. m. by my watch, which I have
since ascertained by the mid-day gun at Delhi, to be five minutes too
slow, so that the time was five minutes to 3 o'clock.
It lasted about thirty seconds, and was accompanied by a rumbling
noise, exactly like one of the water mills in Delhi. The motion was
a violent trembling, and the direction seemed to me to be from West
to East. The whole day had been dreadfully close, and scarcely a
breeze blowing ; but in the evening the wind rose, and has been very
fresh. From yesterday up to the present moment, a dust storm has
been blowing from the North-west. I have, &c. &c.,
W. Burrress, Sergt.
Ovr. C. D.
5. EaRTHQUAKE OF THE 2Ist JuLy, 1842.
The Earthquake of the 21st July was experienced at Jellalabad, and
the following extract from the Agra Ukbar of the 4th August, gives
the only notice of it that has appeared. ‘A severe shock of an Earth-
quake was experienced at Jellalabad on the 21st July 1842, at a little
1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 281
_past 9 p. mM. A reduction of temperature followed it.” I am not
aware whether or not this shock extended beyond the valley of Jellala-
bad. The perceptible reduction of temperature which followed it, is
the only point of interest connected with this shock.
6. EARTHQAUKE OF THE 25TH JULY, 1842.
The immediate vicinity of Delhi alone, appears to have been affected
by the shock of the 25th July. How far its effects may have extended,
there are no precise data for determining, but it was evidently a mere-
ly local convulsion, and probably was felt only within fifteen or twenty
miles around the city. The following Extract from the Delhi Gazette
of the 27th July, gives an account of the phenomenon :
‘© A smart shock of an Earthquake, accompanied by a loud rum-
bling noise, woke the inhabitants of Delhi from their sleep at about
a quarter to four on the morning of the 25th. It did no damage that
we have heard of.”
7. EarRTHQUAKE OF THE 7TH SEPTEMBER, 1842.
This Earthquake was experienced at Mussoorie in the Himalayas.
The shock was very slight, and occurred during a severe storm at lh.
58m. p. M. The nature of the Earth’s motion was vertical, and the
vibration single. The direction appeared to be from West to East,
the duration of the shock was estimated at five seconds. It was not,
to the best of my knowledge experienced in the Deyrah Dhoon, or any
where in the Plains, as might have been anticipated from the slight-
ness of the shock at Mussoorie.
. Having been informed that at the moment of the occurrence of this
Earthquake, Dr. Anderson of the Horse Artillery, had experienced sen-
sations precisely similar to those accompanying an electric shock, I
felt anxious to verify this interesting fact, and accordingly wrote to Dr.
Anderson on the subject, who obligingly favoured me with the follow-
ing reply :—
Pe
282 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [ No. 136.
Letter from F. Anperson, Esq. tomy address, dated Mussoorie, 21st
November, 1842.
My pear Smita,—lI certainly thought that at the time of that
slight Earthquake, with the movement, that I also experienced a slight
electric shock extending from the left elbow to the fingers. I was then
up at “ Rochville,” at the very extremity (Kast end) of Landour. I
was in the room with Mundy and two ladies, one of whom I was seated
close to, she and [ felt the movement distinctly, the others did not. J
alone was conscious of the electric feeling. * * * * * *
Yours very sincerely,
F. ANDERSON.
Electric shocks frequently have been felt during Earthquake shocks,
and it is interesting to find this phenomenon accompanying such event
in India, as well as elsewhere.
8. EARTHQUAKE OF THE 18TH SEPTEMBER, 1842,
The Earthquake of the 18th September was experienced at Darjeel-
ing, and from that station only has any notice of it reached to me.
The following extract from a letter from Dr. Campbell, furnishes de-
tails of the shock as experienced at Darjeeling :—
‘On the morning of the 18th September, 1842, at half-past 4 o’clock,
as nearly as I can determine from the comparison of watch times given
by three gentlemen with the time by sun-dial and their watches on the
following day, there was a smart shock of Earthquake felt at Darjeeling.
Two of those gentlemen, who have given me particulars of their sensa-
tions, say, that it appeared to them to have come from the North-west
and passed under them to South-east. The third says, he felt it as an
“up and down” shock, and that the movement of the earth was
sensible for some seconds after it was evident that the shock had
passed.” |
Assuming the direction stated to be correct, it is not improbable
that this shock emanated from the valley of Nepaul, the seat of the
great Earthquake of 1833. But this of course is merely a conjecture,
as evidence is wanting to warrant more.
1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 283
9, EARTHQUAKE OF THE 26TH SEPTEMBER, 1842.
This shock was experienced at Delhi, and like that of the 25th July,
appears to have been strictly local in its character. It is described as
“‘a very smart shock of an Earthquake, accompanied by a tremendous
rumbling, and lasted not less than two or three minutes.” It occur-
red about 9 a. m., and Mr. Bingham informs me, its direction was
apparently from W. to E.
10. EARTHQUAKE OF THE 27TH SEPTEMBER, 1842.
The vicinity of Delhi was the seat of this Earthquake also, which
was slight in’ its character, and came in the same direction as the
preceding. Beyond the movement of the Earth, no other effects were
perceptible,
The repeated local shocks to which the neighbourhood of Delhi is
subject, prove distinctly, that a focus of active Earthquaking force is
situated close by it. And in looking for the locality of this, I have no
hesitation in fixing it in the Aravulli range of hills which skirt Delhi,
and run in a South-westerly direction from it. The occurrence of the
hot springs at Loweah, the disrupted state of the racks composing the
range, the occurrence of secondary trap in abundance, all shew that
disturbing forces have existed, and still do exist there. I am confirmed
in this opinion, by the result of Mr. Bingham’s observations, who has
informed me, that all the different local shocks of Earthquake ex-
perienced in Delhi, appeared to him to emanate from this range of
hills. The limited extent over which the shocks are felt, shews, that the
seat of the disturbing force cannot be far from the surface of the earth,
while their comparatively feeble intensity proves, that the force itself can-
not be of a very energetic character. I shall have occasion in a subse-
quent part of this memoir to shew grounds for inferring, that its effects
being the standard of comparison, the disturbing force has diminished
perceptibly in energy within the last few centuries. To say whether
the force emanates from a central point, or whether it acts on a line of
some extent is impracticable, with observations indefinite as those
hitherto furnished ; but if instruments for recording Earthquake shocks
are ever employed in India, Delhi ought to be one of the places
284 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 136.
selected for establishing them at, and from their indications these and
other points of interest may be determined.
a ee
11. EARTHQUAKE OF THE 23D oF OcToBerr, 1842.
This Earthquake was experienced at Gowahatty, Assam, in lat. 26°
00’ N. and long. 90° 40’ E., and at Chittagong in lat. 22° 22’ N. and
long. 91° 42’ EK. At the former place its effects are thus described by
a correspondent of the Friend of India: “Oct. 23. Between 8 and 9
o'clock a. M. there was a shock of an Earthquake; the motion was
tremulous, and lasted about half a minute.” From Chittagong another
correspondent of the same paper writes: “we had another Earthquake
here ; not so severe as the last on the 23d ultimo. The motion was
in the opposite direction (7. e. from East to West) and stopped one of ©
the above-mentioned clocks which vibrate N. and S. at 9h. 42m. a. m.”
It is stated that most, if not all, of the Earthquakes experienced in
Assam came from the Eastward. It is therefore probable, that a centre
of active force is situated somewhere here in the Singhpho or Eastern
extremity of the Naga hills, which bound the province on the East. I
am too imperfectly acquainted with the localities in question to be able
to say whether there are any physical or geological facts that throw
light upon this idea, and it is suggested only by the uniform regularity
of the direction of the shocks.
ee ED
12. KARTHQUAKE OF THE 25TH OF OCTOBER, 1842.
This was experienced at Jellalabad at half-past 1 a.m. Itis cha-
racterised as severe, but it appears to have been one of the local shocks
so frequently felt throughout the valley in which that city stands.
ee
13. EARTHQUAKE OF THE 29TH OF OCTOBER, 1842.
The Earthquake of the 29th of October was felt at Gowahatty, —
Assam, and forms an exception to the general rule as regards direc-
tion before stated, since the vibrations travelled from North to South.
The correspondent of the Friend of India, before quoted, thus describes
1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 285
the shock: “‘ October 29th. At half past 7 pe. m. a second shock occur-
red. The motion was from North to South, as appeared by the liquids
in decanters on the dinner table. The shock was gentle, and the
motion lasted about half a minute, when it was gently repeated.”
14. EarTHQUAKE OF THE 6TH OF NovemBer, 1842.
This was another of the local Delhi shocks, and was experienced at lh.
30m. Pp. M., on the 6th November. Mr Bingham in communicating its
occurrence to me remarks, that it makes the eighth shock experienced in
Delhi during the year. Five of these are recorded in this Register,
two occurred before it was commenced, and the eighth was probably
that of the 5th of March, although no notice of its having been felt
there has reached me. Out of these eight, six were local and primary
shocks, emanating from a focal tract in the immediate vicinity of the
place, while the remaining two were secondary, and transmitted from
distant and distinct centres.
ee
15. EarTHQUAKE OF THE 11TH oF NovEMBER, 1842.
The Earthquake of the 11th of November, one of the severest that
had been felt for years, was confined in its influence to the Lower Pro-
vinces. Its effects at Calcutta will first be detailed, and its course then
traced Eastward and Westward from that place.
I place the following Extract from a letter from H. Piddington,
Esq. first among the notices of the shock at Calcutta, because it furnish-
es the most accurate and trust-worthy information relative to the period
and direction of the shock as experienced there. The time, as given
by Mr. Gray, namely 9h. 38m. Pp. m. will be assumed for comparison
with the times at other places, and these will all be reduced to Calcutta
time.
Extract from a letter from H. Pippinaton, Esq. to my address, dated
24th November, 1842.
“‘T learn from the watchmakers (Mr. E. Gray, the first in his pro-
fession here,) that the true time of the shock was 9h. 38m. Its direc-
286 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. { No. 136.
tion, from the swinging of pendulums, was from about E. N. E. to W.
S. W. If Ihearany thing more, I shall not fail to note it for you, and
I add at bottom a copy of our note made at the meeting. I was acting
as Secretary for Mr. Torrens, and it did not occur to me to examine
the Barometer; but I found no difference afterwards at home, and a
friend who has an excellent simpiesometer assures me, that no effect
was produced upon it, he having examined it immediately afterwards,
so that in slight shocks the atmosphere seems to have no share.
Yours very faithfully,
H. Pippineron.
The note alluded to above by Mr. Piddington, as having been made
* the
proceedings of the Society were interrupted by two or three slight ver-
at the meeting of the Asiatic Society, is as follows: ‘ At
tical shakes or heaves of the Earth, with a noise like the rumbling of a
passing carriage, and one strong horizontal shake from East to West, or
from N. E. to S. W. The whole took place within about a minute of
time.” (Signed) H. T. Prinsep, President.
The following extract from a letter from J. McClelland, Esq., gives
some further details of interest, and shews that the Barometer was
seriously affected during the shock: ‘ With regard to the Earthquake
of the 11th November, the only information I am able to give you that
has not appeared in the Calcutta papers is, that the mercury rose and
fell repeatedly, to the extent of seven or eight tenths of an inch during
the shocks in a Barometer on the second floor of St. Xavier’s College,
a house in Chowringhee. The inmates of which house also describe
the water in a large pond, of about three hundred yards in length and
seventy in breadth, extending lengthways North and South, to have
risen into considerable waves. This was also the case with the River,
which appeared agitated, as if a steamer had passed. This refers to
the river at the Botanic Gardens, where it is not half so broad as it is
at Calcutta. A clock in the house of the Superintendent of the
Garden, which had gone regularly for years, stopped suddenly during
the shock. I observed three distinct shocks, they seemed to me to be
rather a tremulous motion than a waving in any one direction ; but
* Time omitted as erroneous.
1843. | Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. - 287
others observed a distinct direction of the shock ; however, people
are not all agreed as to what this exactly was. Probably the form of
different masses of building, such as our houses in Calcutta, might
occasion some little difference in the effects of the Earthquake on
the sensations of different persons.”
A remarkable luminous appearance of the water in the river, as
observed on board the ship Southampton, is thus described by a: cor-
respondent of the Englishman of November 14th.
« Several gentlemen had just before the time been conversing upon
the poop, when one pointed out the very singular luminous appearance
of a portion of the river water: its Southern limit setting from N. W.
towards Chaudpaul Ghaut. It was thought at first to be merely the
first ebb of the tide setting down, or from the reflection of the moon,
but it proved in the sequel not to be the first, and the moon was just
then densely obscured by clouds, proving that also not to be the cause.
On this brightness closing upon the ship, a general and severe tremor
was felt throughout, as if a taut chain cable was grinding under the keel,
or that a sudden squall had struck the ship. The Barometer had
slightly fallen previous to this, whether from the preceding rain or caus-
ed by the Earthquake it is for others more capable to judge: I am
inclined to think from the latter. From enquiries amongst several
commanders, it appears, that amongst the northermost ships it was
more severely felt, even to the shaking of the chain cables and cabin
furniture. ;
‘* At Howrah also, we find the shock was violent in the extreme. We
may therefore infer that the direction of the Earthquake must have
been from N. W. to S, E.”
It is stated by a correspondent of the Englishman of the 14th Nov.,
the night of the 11th was particularly close and oppressive in Calcutta.
The meteorological registers kept at the Surveyor General’s Office and
the Honorable Company’s Dispensary, present nothing remarkable far-
ther than that rain fell on the evening of the 11th to the amount in
the lower gauge of 0.14, and in the upper of 0.19 inches, none having
fallen for sometime before.
The effects of the Earthquake at Serampore, about fourteen miles
above Calcutta, (lat. 22° 45’ N. long. 88° 26’ E.) are described in the
following extracts :—
288 - Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 136.
In the Friend of India of the 17th Nov., it is stated in the weekly
summary of events, that on the evening of the 11th Nov. at about
9h. 50m. or 9h. 45m. by the town-clock, a very severe shock of an
Earthquake was experienced at Serampore. ‘It was accompanied by
a noise which at first resembled some “mighty rushing wind,” and then
the loud rattling of carriages over a stony street. The shock came from
the Eastward: the clocks of which the pendulums vibrated from North
to South were stopped, while those which stood East and West con-
tinued going. So violent a shock has not been experienced in this
part of the country for the last twenty-five years. There was an un-
pleasant stillness in the air previous to this occurrence, but the wind
rose strongly from the Eastward almost immediately afterwards.”
In the Bengal Hurkaru of the 14th of Nov. the following details
are given: ‘On Friday the 11th instant, at about a quarter before 10
Pp. M. two severe shocks of an Earthquake were felt at Serampore.
They were preceded by a rumbling noise from the N. E. towards S.
W.; the undulation was very great: all the houses at the place were
shaken, and those persons who had retired were obliged to jump out of
their beds, and some even quitted their houses, but through the mercy
of Providence, no injury was done. The Brahmans as usual were busy
with their shauncks and drums. The Earthquake lasted about four or
five seconds.”
In the other notices of the shock at Serampore which I have receiv-
ed, there are no new facts, so that I do not insert them. The time
stated above is, I believe, incorrect, and considerable difference of
opinion exists as to the duration of the shock. | Such difference always
will exist, so long as mere sensation is made the measure of duration,
and proper instruments alone can remedy this imperfection.
Darjeeling is situated within one minute Eastward of the meridian
of Calcutta, and I therefore give next, a notice of the shock as felt
there. For this I am indebted to Dr. A. Campbell.
Letter from Dr. CamPpBELL to my address, dated Darjeeling, 18th
November, 1842.
“On the night of Friday the 11th instant, we had a shock of an
Earthquake at this place. Although not in bed or asleep at the time
it occurred, I was not conscious of it. Still it was, a smart shock, accord-
+
1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 289
ing to the accounts of those who experienced it. The ghurree at the
Treasury Guard struck 10 o'clock, as the shock was felt by many
persons, and one gentleman looked at his watch and found it was ten
minutes past 10 Pp. M.—suppose, as there is no way of getting the exact
time of the shock’s occurrence, that it happened at 5 minutes past 10
pr. M. It was sosevere as to bring down pieces of plaster from the walls
of ‘‘ Caroline Villa” and ‘“‘ Mount Pleasant ;” and the shock was succeed-
ed soon after by a slighter one, or perhaps it was but one shock with
a remission in the vibration. One person thought it came from the
South and passed on to the North. I account for the shock not hav-
ing been felt at my house where there was a party of seven at the time,
from its being constructed of wood, which from its greater elasticity is
not to be shaken to the same extent as a pile of bricks or stone.
Yours, &c. A. CAMPBELL.
The following extract from the Englishman of the 16th Nov. de-
tails the effects of the Earthquake as experienced at B
five miles East of Calcutta.
* Arrived at B (fifty-five miles East of Caleutta on the Isa-
mutta or Jaboona) at half-past 5 a. m. 12th Nov. and found Mr.
and his family still in great alarm from the Earthquake, which they
had experienced there on the previous night. Mr. told me that
immediately his family had retired at half-past 9, his dogs and those of
the neighbouring village began howling, and shortly after was a loud
rumbling, similar to that of carriages going over a draw-bridge. The
commencement of this was followed by a violent undulation of the
ground from North to South which actually rocked the house, and
ended by three or four hard shocks which threw open all the doors and
windows previously shut in for the night. The house (a puckah-built
upper-roomed one) cracked, and the plaister from several of the walls
and ceilings was thrown down. On examining the house by daylight
we found rents in several of the walls and arches of the house, and the
verandah to the Kast separated from it. Mr. considered the
Earthquake, from the first hearing of the rumbling noise to the last
shock, to have occupied about one minute of time.
I was on the road to B
, a place fifty -
in my palkee, in the first stage from
Barraset, and did not feel the Earthquake, but I noticed at 8 Pp. m. to
2
290 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [No. 136.
my wifé who was with me, that the weather was unusually warm,
cloudy and threatening heavy rain: she called out to me about half
past 9, that it thundered, and we had heavy rain on the road from half
past 8 Pp. M. to 2 a. M.
It did not rain at B during the Earthquake, but it did so the
preceding afternoon from 3 to 5 o'clock, and the weather all day had
been sultry ; the same was experienced in Calcutta.
Mr. ’s Pundit arrived at B at 10 a. M. on Saturday - the
12th. He was in a boat in the Soonderbuns, and stated that the
waters were much agitated, and his boat was tossed about as if by
waves in a squall of wind.”
The Editor of the Englishman appends to the above the following
note :—
‘“‘ We learn from another quarter, that the shock of the Earthquake
was severely felt on board the Agincourt, about fifty miles South-east
of the Floating Light at 9h. 30m. a. mM.”
At Acra on the bank of the Hooghly, about five or six miles be-
low Calcutta, the shock seems to have been very severe. The house
of Mr. Greenfield there is represented as having been rent from top
to bottom in twenty different places. He states, “it was so severe
that the doors rattled so that you could not hear yourself speak, and
the mortar from one end of the house to the other was flying down in
handfulls. We had four shocks, three first and one about a quarter of
an hour afterwards : empty bottles were broken at the mill, and the pigs
and fowls, ducks, geese, dogs and horses made a most hideous noise. A
little more and all would have been down, as the beams began to start.”
At Pubnah (lat. 24° 32’ N. long. 89° 12’ KE.) the shock was experienc-
ed at 9h. 47m. Calcutta time. Another slight shock occurred at 10h.
30m. C. T. The direction here was from S. W. Two indigo boiler
chimneys and that of a rum distillery were thrown down, and the banks
of the river in front of the distillery are said to have been fissured.
The correspondent of the Englishman, however, who gives these details
of the effects of the shock, is so remarkably facetious, that suspicions
of exaggeration are excited.
At Barrisaul (lat. 22° 45’ N. long 90° 11’ E.) the shock appears to
have been felt at very nearly the same time as at Calcutta, the period
being 9h. 38m. 12s. C. T.
1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 291
The following letter published in the Bengal Hurkaru, gives an
account of the Earthquake as experienced at Barrisaul :-—
«‘ As I dare say that the shock of Earthquake which was felt here
will have been likewise experienced at other stations with more or less
severity, accounts of which will doubtless be communicated to you, I
lose no time in telling you now, that a very severe shock was felt at
a quarter to 10 Pp. m. at this station yesterday (Nov. 11th); although no
accident occurred, considerable anxiety was caused by the length of
time the Earthquake lasted. The heaving of the ground appeared to
travel from E. to W. and continued with violence for about one minute.
The river was greatly agitated, so much so, that the serangs of several
pinnaces came on shore, unable to account for the extraordinary
motion of the water.
*¢ T send down this account, because I imagine that an Earthquake of
such severity having been felt at a place where its occurrence is so
unusual must have extended elsewhere, and all information on the sub-
ject may prove interesting.
‘** P.S.—The weather for the last few days has been remarkably warm
for the season of the year; the variation in the Barometer has not
been great. The Karthquake was accompanied by a rumbling noise,
similar to that caused by heavy ordnance passing over the ground.”
At Gowahatti, Assam, (lat. 26° 00’, long. 90° 40’ E.) the shock was
felt very slightly. Its period there was 10h. 00m. 56s. C. T. A cor-
respondent of the Friend of India describes the motion as merely
tremulous, but sufficient to attract the attention of four persons who
were seated together at the time. |
The shock was felt more severely at Chittagong, (lat. 22° 22’ N.
long. 91° 42’ E.) probably because it had to traverse only alluvial
lands, and had no mountainous tracts, as in Assam, to decrease its force.
The period as given by two tolerably correct clocks, was 9h. 42m. 48s.
C. T. The direction of the oscillation was from North to South, as
determined by the motion of hanging lamps, &c.
The only place at any distance to the westward of Calcutta, whence
any notice of the shock having been felt has reached me, was Monghyr
(lat. 25° 02’ N. long. 86° 29’ E.) where a portion of the fort wall
is said to have been brought down. No farther particulars have come
under my observation, and Iam unable to state either the time or direc-
292 Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. [ No. 136.
tion of the shock at that place. At Baughulpore (lat. 25° 13’ N.
long. 86° 58’ E.) Iam informed by Mr. Piddington, that the shock
was not felt.
It therefore appears that, in so far as the facts collected extend, the
tract. affected by the Earthquake of the 11th November 1842, was
bounded on the North by Darjeeling, on the East by Chittagong, on
the West by Monghyr, and on the South by the position of the ship
Agincourt, thus including about five degrees of longitude and five
of latitude. That to the Eastward and Southward, and probably to
the Northward also, the shock extended beyond the limit here assign-
ed, can scarcely be doubted, from its intensity at the places specified
as the bounding points of the tract in these directions, but there is no
information available to prove that it did do so, and Iam _ unwilling to
venture upon conjecture.
It will have been observed, that at different places the shock appear-
ed to travel in every different direction, Thus :—
At Calcutta, the direction was from E. N. E. to W. S. W.
At Pubna, sj from S. W. to N. E.
At Darjeeling 99 from S. to N.
At Chittagong is from N. to S.
Now, it appears to me, that the only way in which these statements
can be connected and rendered consistent, is to conceive the undula-
tions of which the shock was composed, to have been propagated in a
manner analogous to waves formed in water when a stone is thrown
into it. Proceeding thus in all directions from a central point, the.
undulations would seem to observe to come from different directions,
dependent on their position, relative to the centre whence the undula-
tions had emanated. Of course waves propagated through the crust
of the earth could retain but little of that perfect symmetry character-
istic of waves in a homogenous fluid like water, since their forms would
necessarily be modified by the variable nature of the strata through
which they were being transmitted, and hence departures from strict
theoretical accuracy of direction are to be anticipated. Assigning
therefore a certain degree of circularity to the undulations of the
Earthquake of the 11th Nov. and conceiving the centre of ema-
nation to have been some little distance tothe N. E. of Calcutta,
it will be found that the observations on direction become to some
1843. ] Memoir on Indian Earthquakes. 293
extent, consistent. At Calcutta the course would appear to be from
N. E. to S. W.; at Pubna from S. E. to N. W. instead of from S. W.,
as stated before; at Darjeeling from South to North; and at Chittagong
from the opposite direction. Some of the observations made, as at
Barrisaul, do not correspond strictly with this view, but many sources
of error exist when sensations are taken as the only guides, and by these
it is possible the observations may have been affected. The idea of the
circular propagation of the undulations is suggested only as a method
of connecting the facts, and farther than it does so, I have no wish to
claim any authority for it, the observations on which it is founded
being too indefinite generally, to warrant this being done.
16. EARTHQUAKE AT Baropa, 1842.
I regret that I have been unable to ascertain more regarding this
Earthquake than that it occurred during the year 1842. _I am there-
fore able only to record it, a circumstance I regret the more, as Baroda
lies in the usual track of the Earthquakes of the Delta of the Indus,
and it would have been interesting to ascertain, whether this shock had
emanated from that focus, or was independent of it.
The Register is now completed, and I defer all comment upon the
phenomena of the Earthquakes recorded in it, until the completion of
the second part of this Memoir, when the phenomena of Indian Earth-
quakes generally, will be analysed.
Remarks on some of the disturbing causes in Barometric Observa-
tions. By Captain SHortREDE, First Assistant, G. T. Survey.
If the barometric oscillations were perfectly uniform in different
situations, it would obviously be a matter of indifference, theoretically,
at what times of the day the observations might be made, provided
they were simultaneous. But it is well known to those who have
examined the subject, that the oscillations though tolerably uniform
in low latitudes, are subject to particular variations, the causes of
which are often not easily assigned. | Whatever these causes may be,
it is by no means likely that their effect will be transmitted in-
294 Remarks on some of the disturbing causes [No. 136.
stantaneously through a long column of air, and hence it appears
desirable, that the comparative observations should be made about
the times of maximum and minimum of the atmospheric tide, when,
the variations for a considerable time being almost insensible, it may
be supposed that the causes will act with least disturbance. Another
practical reason for selecting the times of maximum and minimum
is, that perfect simultaneousness being seldom to be expected, it
is evidently of advantage to select for observation those times at
which the want of this condition will produce the least effect. About
the middle of the tide, the barometer generally will vary as much
in the course of five minutes, as it will in half an hour from the
time of maximum or minimum.
Though these remarks seem true as far as they go, yet in particular
cases, the atmospheric tides may be so affected by circumstances of
locality, as to present anomalous results. I am unable at present to
quote ‘the documents containing the observations which gave occasion
to what I am now about to state, but the results were so uniformly
and repeatedly observed, that beyond settling the precise numerical
amount of discrepancy, the possession of the original observations
would add little to the evidence.
When I was in charge of the Bombay Trigonometrical Survey, I
made many barometric observations in the Dekhan and along the
Sea Coast. These were compared sometimes with those made at the
Engineer Institution in Bombay ; sometimes with the observations
made by Colonel (then Major) Sykes at Puna; and sometimes with
those of a barometer left in Puna for the purpose. All the observa-
tions on the Sea Coast compared with those made inland from the
face of the Ghats, as at Puna agreed in one result, but I shall confine
myself more particularly to the results of a special comparison for de-
termining the height of Puna above the Sea.
One of my barometers had been repeatedly boiled, I believe up-
wards of twenty times, and it was so perfectly free from air, that when
set up, the mercury used to adhere to the top of the tube six inches
above the level at which it stood when shaken. The tube was full
32 inches long, and the mercury adhered to the top at a station up-
wards of 4000 feet above the Sea, where the proper height of the mer-
cury was about 25.05m. This barometer was compared for several
1843. | tn Barometric Observations. 295
days with one of Major Sykes’ barometers, which I had filled and
boiled, in which also the mercury used to adhere to the top of the
tube. These two barometers used always to stand at the same
height within a thousandth of an inch about the middle of the tide,
but at the times of maximum and minimum, one of them used to range
about two-thousands above and below the other. The difference to
maximum and minimum being never less than ‘001, nor more than
‘003. We considered them to be the most perfectly comparable of
any two barometers we had ever seen. Major Sykes’ barometer
remained on the spot where the comparisons had been made, while
mine was carried to Bombay, and as the mercury still continued
to adhere to the top of the tube, it plainly had not been deteri-
orated by the journey. Our observations were made simultane-
ously at 10 a. m. and 4 p. m. for several days successively, but
on calculating them, I found that the 10 o’clock observations
always gave the height of Puna about 100 feet more than
was given by the 4 o’clock observations. I ascertained beyond doubt,
that there had been no mistake of a tenth of an inch in registering
the observed heights. The like discrepancy continued at several
other stations along the Sea Coast. This discordance of result being
unvaried, naturally set me to consider what might be its probable
cause: and the only cause I have ever been able to discover at all
likely to account for the fact, is in the effect of the Sea breeze, which
at that season of the year begins to blow about 8 or 9 a. m. along the
coast, while towards Puna it is not felt till about 2 p. wm. After
blowing over the low lands in the Konkan, it is intercepted about
midway by the Seihadri Ghats, which presenting an almost perpendi-
cular scarp of from 2000 to 3000 feet, cause the air to accumulate
over the low land, thereby increasing its barometric pressure to an
amount equivalent apparently to about a tenth of an inch of mercury,
corresponding to a column of about 100 feet of air, somewhat similar
to the head of water produced by an obstacle placed in its current.
I am aware that some persons may be disposed to treat this state-
ment as of little authority, for want of the actual observations on
which it is founded. The fact, however, is tangible, and may be
submitted to proof or disproof by any one who chuses to make the
necessary observations.
296 Rendee on some of the disturbing causes _LNo. 136.
The purpose for which I have made the statement, is to call atten-
tion to the influence of locality as affecting the results of barometric
measurements. Different places may have particular times, at which
it is unsafe to trust to barometric observations for correct results.
As there seems reason to suppose, that the principal deranging
causes in barometric measurements are connected with the sun and
wind, I have often thought that probably the results by night observa-
tion may be found to be more consistent than those by day obser-
vations. Unless experience should shew a more favorable time, I
should prefer observations made about the time of the morning
minimum of the tide, because so far as I have observed, the air is then
more generally calm than at any other time. This, however, is a
matter of fact, on which every one may judge for himself according to
his means of knowledge.
I have been led to the same conclusion by endeavouring to trace
the causes of the atmospheric tides, which I am disposed to refer
entirely to the direct or remote action of the sun. The following
is offered as an attempt to trace this action, and though perhaps not
altogether satisfactory, it may lead to something better.
When the sun rises over China, the atmosphere there getting heat-
ed, expands and begins to flow off towards the west, where the sun is
exerting no heating power. As the solar heat increases, the western
efflux of atmospheric air increases, and goes on increasing till the sun
is past the meridian. When the sun rises over India, a similar
western efflux is occasioned, but for some considerable time the influx
from the eastward being greater than the efflux towards the west, the
atmospheric pressure goes on increasing, till by and by, the direct
heating effect over India causes.a western efflux at first equal to, and
then greater than, the influx from the eastward. ‘The atmospheric
pressure thenceforward decreases, and it goes on to decrease so long as
the heating power of the sun causes the air to expand. At the sur-
face of the earth, this effect is greatest about 2 or 3 Pp. m., but it is not
till the heated atmosphere has had time to ascend and dislodge colder
air that the total effect is greatest. The atmospheric pressure is then
a minimum. When the sun is exerting its greatest power over India,
it has ceased to heat the countries to the eastward: the air over these
countries being colder, presses on that over the countries to the west-
1843. | in Barometric Observations. 297
ward, which is specifically lighter, until the air here being similarly
“cooled in like manner, proceeds to press on and displace the warmer
air to the westward. When the influx balances the efflux, there is the
evening maximum: after which the accumulated air gradually dis-
perses itself till towards morning, when it is again pressed on before
sunrise by the air heated in the east.
If this be a true account of the atmospheric tides, it is plain, that
supposing the air to be calm, we may expect the disturbing causes
will be least about the time of the morning minimum; and that at
any time during the night if the air be calm, these are likely to be
much less influential than during the day, for then they are entirely
free from the direct action of the sun, which evidently has a great
effect on barometric heights by the inequalities of temperatures which
it occasions in different places. We know that even in the hottest
weather, the temperature on the Sea Coast is tolerably uniform when
compared with that of places inland, particularly when these inland
places are on elevated plains. In such cases we cannot safely assume
that the mean of the temperatures at the two stations will truly re-
present that of the intermediate column of air: or perhaps, to speak
more properly, it cannot be assumed that the temperature and mois-
ture at the upper station will approximate to those of a place on the
same level immediately over the lower station; besides which, the
barometric pressure at the inland station may be very different from
that at the supposed station on the same level if, as is most likely, the
state of the wind should be different in the two places. In short, any
thing analogous to wind or current which would affect the correctness
of water-levelling may be expected in a still greater degree to affect
the correctness of barometric-levelling: and we may infer as a gene-
ral conclusion that, besides the goodness of the instruments employed,
the trustworthiness of barometric measurements will greatly depend
on the care and skill with which the observers avoid the influence of
disturbing causes.
llth April, 1842.
On Barometric Heights. By Captain R. Suortrene, First Assistant
Grand. Trigonometrical Survey.
If I remember rightly, your correspondent D has given a formula
for computing Barometric heights, which to me appears to be neither
so simple nor easy of recollection as that given by Professor Leslie,
at the end of his Geometry; which is “‘ As the sum of the mercurial
columns is to their difference, so is the constant number 52,000 to
the approximate height” in feet. This rule is easily remembered,
and is not far from the truth; but a more correct result may be ob-
tained by using 52,200 as the 8rd term. At the height of a mile
the height thus found differs only nine feet in defect from that obtain-
ed by a logarithmic calculation, whereas by Leslie’s rule the defect
is ‘twenty-nine feet. When the height does not exceed 4,000 feet,
52,200 gives within two feet of the logarithmic calculation. At ele-
vations above a mile, the difference increases rapidly: it then becomes
necessary, as Leslie recommends, to subdivide the interval into smaller
portions.
The following Table shews the results of the several Rules.
At 3700 feet by using
52,200 we get exactly the
Approximate Height by
ee
. 4 Ss be
bes 52,200. | 52,000. ame result as by logarithms.
Barometers.
——
Leslie’s rule is then in
30 and 29.5| 488.0 | 438.7 | 487.0 | defect about 15 feet.
Se AG IO wi SR 4 | BRA Ay, Beg. 8
» 28.5| 1336.6 | 1338.0 | 1333.3
» 28.0} 1798.0 | 1800.0 | 1793.1 This rule may be thus
» 27.5 | 2267.3 | 2269.1 | 2260.4 ; aac
” 97.:0| 2745.4 | 2747.4 | 2736.8 | CxPressed in words: “The
» 26.5} 3232.5 | 3233.6 | 3221.2 | sum of the barometric co-
26.0| 3728.9 | 3728.6 | 3714.3 :
955| 49349 | 49394 | 42169 as at the two stations
», 25.0] 4750.9 | 4745.5 | 4727.3 | is to their difference, as
» 24.0} 5814.6 | 5800.0 | 5777.8 ;
1 230| 62a) gagee | ese7.o | oCl te! ee
,, 22.0| 8081.9 8030.8 | 8000.0 | height in feet,” and alge-
» 21.0| 9294.1 | 9211.8 | 9176.5 ;
” 20.0 | 10565.5 | 10440.0 | 10400.0 | Praically (B and b being the
barometers at the 2 stations)
B—b
Bae) 52200= Approximate height (A).
1843. | On Barometric Heights. 299
- On the reduction of mean temperature by elevation, Professor Leslie
has given the following formula as the result of his experiments on the
cold produced by diminution of barometric pressure. If B and b
denote the barometric pressure at the lower and upper stations; then
will (= - 5) 25 express on the Centigrade scale, the diminution of heat
in ascent (B). This formula cannot be universally true, though it
is known to give results agreeing very well with observation in mode-
rate elevations. For if we suppose three stations A, B, C, in the same
vertical line at which the barometer stands respectively at 30, 20, and
10 inches, it is obvious that the reduction of temperature between
A and B together with that between B and C must be the same as
the whole reduction from A to C. The formula gives (5 —3)
25—20.83 as the diminution from A to B; and ( — 3%) 25=37.5 as
that from B to C: the sum of which is 58.33. But we have also
10 30) 25=66.67 as the reduction from A to C. This differs so
much from the former result, that we may without any hesitation con-
clude that the formula cannot be strictly true. In order that the
diminution from A to C may be equal to the sum of the diminutions
from A to B and from B to C, it seems necessary to make it pro-
portional to the ratio of the densities, or as the logarithm of oe ; that
is, as the difference of the logarithms of the barometers at the
two stations; and if we assume that Leslie’s formula gives results not
sensibly differing from the truth, at first, we shall have 115 log.
to be marked (C) as the expression for the diminution of temperature
on the Centigrade scale, or 207 log. + to be marked (D) on Fahren-
heit, which will give consistent results in all cases.* The diminution
of temperature is thus proportional to the approximate height in
barometric calculations, and if we calculate the approximate height
corresponding to a reduction of 1 degree in temperature, we shall
have 521.738 feet for 1° cent. and 289.86 feet for 1° Fahr., or in
round numbers 522 for 1° cent. and 290 for 1° Fahr. at the tempera-
ture of freezing. The numbers 522 and 290 will require a correction
for mean temperature, as in barometric measurements: This may be
done very simply. The expansion on a column of air of 522 feet for
1° cent. is just about 2 feet, and on 290 feet for 1° Fahr. the expansion
is 6 feet very nearly. Hence the corrected numbers may be found
* If necessary the co-efficient may by corrected so as to agree with observation,
300 On Barometric Heights. [No. 136.
as follows: To 522 add twice the number expressing the mean tem-
perature in degrees cent., and we have the correct height corresponding
to a difference of 1° cent. and on Fahr. multiply the mean tempera-
ture above 32 by 0.6 and add it to 290, the sum is the correct height
giving a difference of 1° Fahr.
The following Table may be convenient for reference.
Mean ; Mean :
Temp. atic Pe Temp. ace
Cent. : Fahr. By
0 522 30 289 I may perhaps have occasion
5 532 32 290 to refer again to this subject.
10 542 40 295
15 552 50 301
20 562 60 307
25 572 70 313
30 582 80 319
There is a formula for finding the approximate height in barometric
operations of the same general form as that of Leslie, for diminution
of temperature. The formula is (~—3) 13050—Approx. Ht.* (E)
The co-efficient in this formula is half the height of the equiponderant
column. The co-efficient of formula (A) before given is 52,200, being
double the height of the equiponderant column, or just 4 times the co-
efficient of formula (KE). Now as in Leslie’s formula the co-efficient is
25 cent. or just 1 of the interval from freezing to boiling, we may
therefore transform it into another of the form (A) and it becomes
=) 100—diminution in degrees cent. or (FR) 180—= diminution
in deg. Fahr. which may be thus expressed : «The sum of the baro-
meters at the two stations is to their differences, as the No. of degrees
in the interval from boiling to freezing is to the diminution of mean
temperature by ascent.” This rule will give results not sensibly
differing from those of the logarithmic formula (C and D) at intervals
of 4000 feet, or even at a mile.
* The formula, (>—-5§ =_2) 13,000 and es 52, 200, for the approximate height, are
only close aptirodintations to the truth, and are not absolutely identical: the former errs
in excess, and the latter a little in defect. If they were absolutely identical, we should
have © 2/24 pbs or BaP B?—pb? (B-+b) | (B—b), from which by transposition and
b B B-+-b B+b 4Bb 4Bb
division we get 4 B b=,B+b,2—B*+2Bb-+b? hence 2 Bb—B?+b?, which however
do not differ much from the truth when B and b are nearly equal.
|
301
Catalogue of Nepalese Birds presented to the Asiatic Society, duly
named and classified by the Donor, Mr. Henesem, [and revised by
the Society’s Curator |.*
1. [ Spizaétus (Vieillot, as recognised by Messrs. Jardine and Selby,
Ill. Orn. pl. UXV1) grandis :} | Nisaétus grandis, Hodgson, [ J. A. S.
V, 230;] (aberrant species :) [ Nisaétus niveus ? Jerdon, ‘ Madras Jour-
nal,’ No. XXIV, 69, (as identified from a specimen presented to the
Society by that gentleman ;) but not Falco niveus, Temminck, which is
Nisaétus Nipalensis, Hodgson, J. A. S. V, 229, and apparently also
the F’. caligatus, Raffles, Lin. Trans. XIII, 278, wherein the state-
ment that it measures ‘“‘more than three feet across the wings” would
seem to be a misprint for five feet: the latter species, 7. e. niveus (aut
potids caligatus ?) is not uncommon in Lower Bengal, adults having
the under-parts very handsomely streaked with deep brown or brown-
ish-black, of which but slight or sometimes no traces occur in the
young ; one adult female which I have obtained, that was paired with
a mate of the ordinary colour, being wholly dusky-black, with an ashy
tinge on the upper-parts; its brilliant golden irides contrasting finely
with the blackish hue of the plumage.
The Sp. grandis varies much in colouring according to age, and
somewhat even at the same age; wherefore, as Mr. Hodgson’s des-
* Vide XI, 778.—It was the wish of Mr. Hodgson that this Catalogue should have
been published immediately, but this could only have been done in a very crude and
imperfect manner, and the delay is more than compensated by the suppression of a
host of unpublished synonyms, which would otherwise have required to be subse-
quently reduced. I have also had to find up the various scattered descriptions by Mr.
Hodgson, and to collate the synonymy of many of the species, besides drawing up des-
criptions of several new species, — altogether no inconsiderable labour. Moreover,
the delay has enabled Mr. Hodgson to improve the nomenclature considerably, both
as regards the institution of some necessary new genera, and the specific appellations
of certain of the new species.—E. B.
¢ Since writing the above, I have strongly inclined to the opinion that this is the
Aquila Bonelli, of which I have no good description to refer to. A. Bonelli is included
‘in Mr. Vigue’s list of birds procured in Kashmir and little Tibet, P. Z. S. 1841, p. 6,
the present species, besides being quite crestless, has the cere of an Aguila, and not of
a Spizaétus ; but its irides are bright yellow, as in the latter group, and the general
form also inclines more to the latter.
t Vide also Elliot, in No. XXV, p. 234, of the same publication.
302 Catalogue of Nepdlese Birds. [No. 136.
cription of this fine species was drawn up from a single specimen,
being the only one that he had then obtained, it is quite necessary to
describe it anew, in its different phases.
Length of an adult male twenty-seven inches, by sixty inches in spread
of wing (Hodgson) ; of a female, eighteen inches (Elliot). The closed
wing, in a series of seven specimens before me, varies from seventeen
inches and a. half to twenty inches and a quarter, and the tail from
eleven inches to twelve inches and a half; but the greater number
approach to the respective former of these dimensions: from point
of upper mandible to gape measures about two inches, more
or less; tarse about three inches and a half: the talons large and
formidable.
This bird approaches somewhat in form to the true Aguile, and
is distinguished from its congeners by the absence of all trace of the
usual occipital crest. Adults deep aquiline-brown above, the some-
what lanceolated feathers about the nape laterally margined with
whitish, or, in some, with pale brown: tail more or less greyish, and
crossed with about seven narrow dark bars, in addition to the subter-
minal one which varies much in breadth: under-parts pure white,
with a narrow dark brown mesial streak to each feather; the tibial
plumes chiefly deep brown, freckled with whitish; and the under-
coverts of the wings dark brown. Bill plumbeous, its tip and the
talons black; cere and toes pale waxy-yellow; irides bright yellow.
The mesial stripes on the feathers of the under-parts incline to be
broader in the female, and are more developed on the belly, where in
some the dark brown colour predominates, spreading in bars over the
feathers ; under tail-coverts also more or less distinctly banded: some
specimens shew the white bases of the feathers very conspicuously
about the nape: the inner webs of the tail-feathers are prettily mot-
tled, more especially in adults, as also those of the primaries anterior
to their emargination; underneath, the tail is albescent, and its bars
are more or less obliterated, with the exception of the terminal one
when broad. The young have the lower parts deeply stained with
ferruginous (more or less so), and the mesial stripes to the feathers
narrow and inconspicuous, scarcely occupying more than their shafts ;
tibial plumes the same, though in some there are traces of the marking
on those of the adult; and the fore-part of the under-surface of the
es ee eee
1843. ] Catalogue of Nepélese Birds. 303
wing is also similar, or nearly so, having at most a dark patch on the
under-coverts of the primaries: above, the general cast of colour is
merely paler than in the adult, the deeper hue of the latter being
confined to near the tip of each feather and along the shaft, whereas
in adults it spreads nearly to the edge: and the tail appears more
closely barred, with blackish or deep brown upon a pale ground-
hue.
The Crestless Eagle-hawk (as this species may be appropriately
termed) appears to be generally, though sparingly, diffused over the
wooded districts of the mountainous parts of India, while on the Hima-
laya it would seem to be not unfrequent. It hunts more on the wing
than its congeners, in conformity with its structural approximation
to the true Eagles. Mr. Jerdon observes, that it is certainly a rare
bird in Southern India; and Mr. Elliot, that it “is the noblest of the
Indian Eagles, being seldom seen, and then generally at a great height
in the air, in wild and savage places. It preys on the Hare — I
once saw a pair of them hunting in company, which nearly surprised a
Peacock, pouncing on him on the ground.” This gentleman re-
marked its distinctness from the Falco niveus of Temminck, to which
Mr. Jerdon dubiously referred it. The latter does not hitherto appear
to have been met with in Southern India, though tolerably common
in Bengal, and also in Nepal.
2. | Hematornis undulatus, Vigors, P. Z. S. 1831, p. 170; Gould’s
Century, pl. I.| Ciredetus Nipalensis, Hodgson [ As. Res. XVIII, pt.
II, p. 17 (published 1833)], this bird being clearly a Circaétus. | Falco
bido (?), Horsfield, Zin. Trans. XIII, 137 (1821!) : Buteo bacha (?),
apud Franklin, P. Z. §. 1831, p. 114; and Hematornis bacha (?),
Sykes, Zbid. 1832, p. 79. When this species was characterized by
Mr. Vigors, “the three species of the group ( Hematornis, Vigors,)
were exhibited ; their general similarity in colour and markings pointed
out; and their specific differences explained. These consist chiefly
in size; the Hl. holospilus” (P. Z. S. 1831, p. 96, from Manilla,)
“being one third smaller than” (the African) “ H. bacha; while
H. undulatus considerably exceeds the latter. The first is spotted all
over the body, the second only on the abdomen; while the third is
marked by spots on the wing-coverts, and by ocelli bearing an undu-
lated appearance on the abdomen, the breast also being crossed by
‘
304 Catalogue of Nepélese Birds. [No. 136.
undulating fascie.” A common species in Bengal, as in India ge-
nerally. } : .
3. Pandion [haliaétus: diffused in suitable situations throughout
India.
4. Icthyaétus Horsfieldi: Falco icthyaétus, Horsfield:] Haliaétus
plumbeus, Hodgson [mentioned in J. A. §. VI, 367. Not uncommon in
Bengal. The spotted first plumage of this bird much resembles the cor-
responding garb of the common Indian Kite ( Milvus cheela} ; and in its
next dress the basal portion of the tail is brown, more or less barred
above.
A second species presenting the same characters is the Z. nanus,
Nobis, J. A. S. XI, 202. It is distinguished by its very inferior size,
the closed wing measuring but fourteen inches in length. The only
specimen I have seen was received from Singapore, being clad in worn
nestling plumage, whereof the terminal pale spots had almost disap-
peared; and there is a considerable admixture of white on the new
feathers growing on the under-parts, forming central streaks on the
plumage of the abdomen. The fully adult garb would probably
much resemble that of the preceding species. It appears to me that
the term IJcthyaétus should be restricted to these birds with smooth
talons, like those of an Osprey; and that the Icthyaétus leucogaster
of Gould’s magnificent ‘ Birds of Australia’ (the Faleo leucogaster,
Latham), which scarcely, if at all, differs from the Indian Haliaétus
blagrus except in its much superior size, should be retained in Haliaé-
tus, wherein Mr. Gould had already classed the young as HZ. sphenurus
P. Z. §. 1837, p. 138), as I formerly arranged a specimen of H.
blagrus (in second plumage), by the appellation Jcthyaétus cultrunguis,
J. A. §. XI, 110.
The truth is, that after Haliaétus has been dismembered by the
detachment of Icthyaétus, Lafresnoy, there still remain three marked
natural divisions of the genus, which are as follow :—
A. The typical form, as exemplified by the European albdicilla and
North American leucocephalus, and to which the Indian H. Macez and
some others likewise appertain. This last mentioned bird is the H.
albipes, Hodgson, J, A. S. V, 228; and the young in first plumage is
the H. lineatus, Gray, and in second plumage the H. wnicolor, Gray,
of Hardwicke’s Illustrations.
1843. | Catalogue of Nepalese Birds. 305
B. The wedge-tailed group, exemplified by H. leucogaster and H.
blagrus ; referred by Gould and since by myself to Icthyaétus, but, as
I now think, erroneously.
C. The diminutive group with comparatively feeble talons, exempli-
fied by H. Pondicerianus (the Brahminee Cheele or Sunkur Cheele of
India), and the Australian Hf, leucosternus, Gould, P. Z. S. 1837, p. 138.
To this division Mr. Gould has since applied the term Haliastur.
Ornithologists in this country should seek to obtain the Jcthyaétus
nanus, which most probably will be found to occur.
5. Spizaétus pulcher ;| Nisaétus pulcher, Hodgson, [mentioned in
J. A. §. V1, 361, and now regarded by him as typical of that group.
It devolves on me to furnish a description of this showy species, which
may readily be distinguished from its congeners by its longer and hand-
somely banded tail, whereon are five dark bars, as broad as or broader
than the interspaces of pale ground-tint, whereas in the other species
the dark caudal bars are much narrower than the intervening spaces.
The occipital crest is fully developed, measuring four inches in length.
Plumage of the upper-parts deep aquiline-brown, very dark on the
interscapularies, and verging upon black on the crown and occipital
crest, which is slightly tipped with whitish; nuchal feathers conspicu-
ously margined with tawny-brown, and their pale basal colour more
or less shewing about the nape: under-parts whitish, more or less
deeply tinged with fulvous, and marked on the breast with longitudi-
nal broad mesial dark streaks to the feathers; the chin is blackish,
continued as a median line to the breast, and two similar lateral streaks,
at first very broad, proceed from the corners of the gape; belly and
flanks more or less distinctly banded with brown and white, the latter
narrower, and the brown darker towards the white, — the belly especi-
ally having a confusedly mottled appearance, and the under tail-coverts
are similar; the lengthened tibial plumes are more distinctly banded,
and the tarsal less so, becoming whitish towards the toes: tail as des-
cribed, having five broad dark bands, with interspaces of a mottled
light brown, becoming greyish with age; its larger upper coverts also
banded brown and white, the latter narrower: primaries and secon-
daries dark brown, banded with blackish; their under surface and that
of the tail albescent, with the bars anterior to the emargination of the
primaries, and those of the outermost tail-feathers, semi-obsolete.
2s
306 Catalogue of Nepalese Birds. [No. 136.
Length twenty-nine to above thirty-two inches, of which the tail
measures thirteen to fourteen inches and a half; wing eighteen to
nineteen inches; tarse four inches and a half, and in one specimen
before me very densely feathered, in another much less densely. Bill
two inches from point to gape, in a straight line: the talons large and
powerful. Both these specimens are evidently adults, and probably
male and female.
Three Indian species of this group have now been noticed; viz.
grandis, niveus (aut caligatus ?), and pulcher ; and there remain the
following: Sp. cristatellus (Tem.), Jardine and Selby. Jil. Orn. pl.
LXVI; Elliot, in Madras Jl., No. XXV, 234; Sp. Kienerii ;
Astur Kienerit, Magasin de Zoologie, Guérin, 1837, pl. 35; Sp.
albogularis, Tickell (Nobis), J. A. S. XI, 456, pallidus, men-
tioned only by Mr. Hodgson in J. A. S. VI, 361, which I do not
know; — and rufitinctus, McClelland and Horsfield, P. Z. S. 1839,
p. 1538, which would scarcely seem to belong strictly to this genus.* |
6. Limnaétus [unicolor, Vigors; Falco limnaétus, Horsfield; F’
unicolor, Temminck; Morphnus hastatus (2), Lesson, Zoologie du
* Since the above was written, the Society has received two fine specimens of a
member of this genus, which, from Mr, Elliot’s description, I am disposed to refer to Sp.
cristatellus. Length about twenty-six inches, of wing from bend sixteen inches, and
tail twelve inches; bill, from point to gape, an inch and three-quarters; and tarse four
inches and a half anteriorly: occipital crest four inches. Colour of the upper-parts
light fulvescent-brown towards the edges of the feathers, their central portion dark
aquiline brown, which Jatter is confined to a mesial streak on the feathers of the nape;
prolonged occipital crest dull black: under-parts white at base, and for the greater
portion of each feather, their terminal part having a mesial dusky streak, edged with
light brown; a dusky streak more or less developed from each corner of the lower
mandible, and a central one on the throat well developed in one specimen, indistinctly
so on the other; a brownish bar across the abdomen more or less distinct; and posterior
to this the abdominal feathers and lower tail-coverts are banded with light fulvous-
brown, and broadly tipped with the same, the tibial and short tarsal plumes being
similarly coloured: volar feathers of the wings dusky externally, their inner webs
brown with dusky bars, and the pale portion passing into white internally, anterior to’
the emargination of the primaries; underneath the volar plumes are white anterior to
their emargination, and barred with dusky beyond it; the fore-part of the under surface
of the wing being also white, mottled with dusky-brown, and the axillaries and sides
marked with rufescent-brown: tail also brown above, with five dusky bands on the
older specimen, the basal one indistinct, and the last or subterminal band broadest; in
the other marked with six dark bands, and the rudiment of a seventh at base; under-
neath albescent, the dark bands partially obsolete. This species is not improbably
Mr. Hodgson’s pallidus; and can only doubtfully, I think, be referred to that figured
by Messrs. Jardine and Selby.
.
1843. | Catalogue of Nepalese Birds. 307
Voyage de M. Bélanger, p. 217. A second species of this division
exists in the Z. (olim Buteo) punctatus, Jerdon, Supplement. |
7. Falco (shaheen, Jerdon, Madr. Jl. No. XXIV, 81.]
8. Pernis { Elliott, apud Jerdon, to whom the specimens were trans-
mitted for examination. I must confess, however, that I am by no
means satisfied of the distinctions pointed out between this and the
P. cristata, Cuvier, vel Falco ptilorhynehus, Tem. ; specimens of both
being before me so labelled by Mr. Jerdon; and one of the latter
minutely agrees with the description of P. maculosa, Lesson, in the
Zoologie du Voyage de M. Bélanger, except in possessing a distinct
crest. Now I am unaware that any good distinction has hitherto been
remarked between the P. cristata and P. apivora, further than that
the European bird is never crested, both being alike variable in
plumage; and I see that the latter is enumerated among Dr. Royle’s
birds procured at Saharunpore. In reference to the value of the
character derivable from the presence of a crest, it may be remarked
that Mr. Hodgson describes a variety of Spizaétus niveus (his Nisaétus
Nipalensis, J. A. S. V, 229), having “‘a drooping Egret-like crest of
two long, narrow, composed plumes”; whereas in general, and in all
cases observed by me, this species has merely a very slight indication
of such a crest at any age. Nevertheless, the prevalence of the crest
in Indian Perns, and its invariable absence in those of Europe, are
sufficiently remarkable; and probably indicate an aboriginal distinct-
ness of species, though perhaps sufficiently allied to breed and merge
together where they inhabit the same localities. M. Lesson also speaks
of a P. torquata, P. rujicollis, and a P. albogularis, referring to his
Traité d Ornithologie ; but if reposing only on differences of colour,
I should be very slow to accept such diversities as specific].
9. Milvine. Genus [ Haliastur, Gould.| Haliaétus !! Pondicerianus,
Auct. type. [ Miluus Pondicerianus, apud Jerdon.| Leads from Eagles
to Buzzards. [It is curious to remark the difference of opinion ex-
pressed with regard to the systematic position of this well known
species. Thus Mr. Hodgson writes :— ‘ Those who have classed the
Brahminee Cheel of India with the fishing Eagles, may be safely said
to know as little of the structure, as of the habits, of that paltry
Milvine bird,” &c. (J. A. S. VI, 368.) And Mr. Jerdon “nearly
agrees” with him in opinion; even ranging it, as we have seen, in
308 Catalogue of Nepélese Birds. [No. 136.
Milvus ( Madr. Jl. No. XXIV, 72.) Dr. Jameson, on the other hand,
avers that ‘“‘no person who has ever studied this bird in its native
haunts on the Hoogly or the Ganges, where it occurs in vast numbers,
in company with other Haliaétt (/), would for a moment doubt
where its proper position ought to be in the Ornithological system.”
(Cale. Journ. Nat. Hist. No. III, 318.) Mr. Gould, again, on
referring a new Australian species to Haliaétus (P. Z. S. 1837, p.
138), remarks that it is “nearly allied to Hal. Pondicerianus,” thus
doubly acknowledging the current arrangement of the latter, though he
has since formed a particular section for these two species. For my
own part, I have long regarded the true Milvi as being closely related
by affinity to the Halaéti or Ernes, and therefore find no difficulty in
agreeing with Messrs. Hodgson and Jerdon as regards the proximity of
the Brahminee Cheel to the Kites, while I still prefer to retain it as a
subgenus of Haliaétus, of which group I have already indicated three
marked natural divisions, the present bird being characteristic of one
of them. |
10. Astur (2?) Dussumieri: at least this species appears closely
allied to two Australian Hawks (approximans and cruentus) recently
referred to this genus by Mr. Gould, having the toes very much shorter
than in restricted Accipiter*; but it would be better perhaps to in-
stitute a separate division for this intermediate form : Accipiter Duk-
hunensis, Sykes; and] A. scutarius, Hodgson, [ Bengal Sporting Ma-
gazine, for 1836, p. 180; the young: noticed also in As. Res. XIX,
note to p. 175, together with an J. affinis which, from the context,
I much suspect is merely the adult.| N. B. Mr. Jerdon agrees with
me in referring the specimens marked seutartus by Mr. Hodgson to
the young A. Dussumieri. |
11. Buteo canescens, Hodgson, (‘ Bengt Sporting Magazine’ for
1836, p. 180.) As few naturalists, but especially foreign naturalists,
have the opportunity of consulting the work referred to, I deem it
proper to quote the description, and shall offer some further remarks
on the species.
It is a perfectly typical Buzzard, nearly allied to the European B.
* Vide P. Z. S. 1837, p. 98.
¢ The Noctua Tarayensis there mentioned is Athene brama, or N. Indica, Frank-
lin; and the N. tubiger identical with N. Brodiei, Burton, P. Z. S. 1835, p. 152.
1843.] Catalogue of Nepdlese Birds. 309
vulgaris. ‘‘ Mature female twenty-three to twenty-four inches long,
by fifty-four to fifty-six inches in extent of wings, and three lbs.
and three-quarters in weight:” wing from bend sixteen inches and
three-quarters to eighteen inches and a quarter, and tail ten to
eleven inches: point of upper mandible to gape one inch and seven-
eighths; and tarse three inches and a quarter, being plumed for
the upper inch and a half. The male is considerably smaller, with
wings fourteen and three-quarters to sixteen inches, and tail nine
inches and a half to ten and a half.
The following is Mr. Hodgson’s description of the plumage:
‘** Female: — head, neck, and body below, white; dashed here and
there with beauteous buff, and streaked narrowly and lengthwise on
the cap and thighs with brown: tail, whitey-brown, with four to six
narrow bars towards the end: back and wing-coverts, medial brown,
the larger picked out with rufous: quills immaculate externally, and
the great ones darker or black-brown; all the quills blanched inter-
nally except near their tips; but the primaries, immaculate; the rest,
and especially the secondaries, shewing six brown bars across the inner
vanes of the plumes: legs and cere dirty-yellow; bill blue, its hook
and the talons black : iris hoary. |
** Male smaller and less blanched. Young greatly more coloured
than the mature female; above and the thighs saturate-brown, edged
with rufous; below sordidly rufescent, or luteous, with large longitudi-
nal dashes of brownish-red, changing to herring-bones on the thighs:
tail brown, with deeper cross-bands prevailing throughout, and amount-
ing to ten in number: iris brown; legs and cere, greenish.”
From a series of specimens before me, however, it is quite clear that
the brightly rufous-edged specimens are adults, while the young have
but little trace of this colour, which is more or less confined to the
scapularies and wing-coverts, and is besides comparatively very faint
and pale; and that such ave the young is demonstrated, not only by
the less acuminate form of the nuchal plumes, but from the fact that
one of them was killed while beginning to moult, and shews a few of
the new bright rufous-edged feathers among its scapularies, which con-
trast strongly with the dull hair-brown colour of the rest of the upper-
parts. A particularly fine female, received from Mr. Hodgson, may
be described as having the dorsal plumage and smaller wing-feathers
310 Catalogue of Nepdlese Birds. [No. 136.
slightly empurpled dusky, laterally somewhat broadly margined with
bright rufous, which fades considerably as the feathers become old ;
head dull rufescent-brown, margined paler, with a vague whitish streak
over the eyes, enlarging beyond them; feathers of the nape pointed
and slender, white at base, with dusky terminal thirds edged laterally
with rufous; those of the sides of the neck rufescent with dusky shafts,
and edged laterally with whitish or hoary; throat white, with narrow
dusky shafts, and the rest of the under-parts fulvous-white, with mot-
tled dusky-and-rufous blotches on the feathers, inclining to form a
sort of gorget on the breast, and always presenting a broad dark
abdominal band, more or less developed (as in B. lagopus): length-
ened tibial plumes dusky, tipped with dark rufous, or in some speci-
mens of the latter hue, with merely dusky shafts: tertiaries and greater
wing-coverts hair-brown, the former more or less distinctly barred on
their inner webs, upon a whitish ground in some; the tips of the pri-
maries and secondaries empurpled dusky, and the outer webs of the
exterior primaries greyish to near the end; underneath, the wings dis-
play a very large white patch, constituted chiefly by the inner vanes of
the primaries as far as their emargination, and the fore-part of the
wing is dusky, broadly edged with rufous, of which colour are also the
axillaries: tail rather faint rufous, with a nearly obsolete subterminal
dark bar, its basal portion, and the exterior webs of all the outer fea-
thers, dashed with cinereous. Other specimens have merely narrow
mesial streaks of rufous, with dusky shafts, to most of the feathers of
the under-parts, and the abdominal band paler and chiefly rufous; tail
with little or no ashy tinge, indicating that such are less advanced in age.
The immature plumage is of a generally more dingy cast, with no
rufous below, even on the tibial plumes; the dorsal feathers are scarcely,
when at all, margined with faint rufous ; and the primaries and tail are
minutely mottled and numerously banded: but these also vary in the
amount of developement of their markings, both as regards the extent
and depth of colouring.
According to Mr. Hodgson — ‘‘ These birds are very common in
the central and northern hilly regions of Nep&l; but I never,” he
remarks, “procured one from below. The species appears to be an
oriental analogue of B. vulgaris. It adheres to the woods when the
crops are up; but, after harvest, comes into the open country, and is
‘7. ee ee
. Se ea
1843. ] Catalogue of Nepalese Birds. 311,
perpetually seen in the fields perched on a clod, and looking out for
Snakes, which constitute its chief food. It also preys on Rats and
Mice, and on Quails, Snipes, and Partridges; but is reduced to take
the divds on the ground. I have seen it, however, make a splendid
stoop at a Quail, which, after being flushed, chanced to alight on a
bare spot, so as to be visible to the bird as he followed it with his
eye on the wing and marked it settle. Teal and even Ducks are
frequently slain by our bird in the same way. If he can perceive
them take wing, even at half a mile’s distance, he is up with them
in an instant, and is sure to capture them, unless they are under cover in
a moment after they touch the earth. I have carefully compared
specimens of vulgaris and canescens, and cannot help thinking that the
species are distinct; the breadth of the head and of the bill near it
being so much more striking in the latter than in the former. Authors
suppose that Buteo vulgaris is never found east of the Cape. Our
bird is its representative.”
Its representative no doubt on the Himalaya, but in Southern India
there are two true Buzzards, the B. longipes and B. rufiventer,
Jerdon, and in the Tenasserim provinces another, B. pygmeus,
Nobis. |
12. Elanus melanopierus: | Petite Buse Criarde of Sonnerat, upon
which are founded Falco vociferus, Latham, and F. clamosus, Shaw. |
13. Accipiter [nisosimilis, Tickell, J. A. S. II, 571: A. nisus vel
fringillartus of Jerdon and others. It differs from the European spe-
cies in its larger size, and in having constantly a long superciliary
white line ; the markings of the under-parts are also somewhat different.
14. Milwus |cheela; Falco cheela, Gmelin: M. govinda, Sykes ;
M. etolius, Lesson. N. B. I thought at first that the specimens sent
of this bird presented certain differences from the common Indian
Kite, but subsequent comparison of them with numerous examples of
the latter has convinced me of their identity. |
15. Falco peregrinus: | F. calidus, Latham. |
16. Falco [juggur, Hardwicke and Gray; F. luggur, Jerdon]
( Lagger, Jhagger, Indicé, Maset, foem.)
17. Falco tinnunculus.
18. Buteonine. Genus Butastur, Hodgson. Buteo teesa, Auct., type.
| Cireus teesa, Franklin; Astur Hyder, Sykes.| It differs from the true
312 Catalogue of Nepdlese Birds. [No. 136.
Buzzards in its less corpulent form, and general adaptation for more
active habits: the tarsi are longer and more prominently scutellated
in front, the toes also being scutellated above nearly to their base, and
the talons are comparatively powerful. The markings also are some-
what peculiar, and recal to mind those of various South American
Raptores ; but still manifest a relationship to the true Buzzards, which
is further conspicuously shewn by the rufous tail. .
19. Falconine. Genus Hyptiopus (Hodgson, olim Baza, H. [lo-
photes ; Falco lophotes, Temminck: Lophotes Indicus, Lesson; Buteo
cristatus, Vieillot; Colvy Falcon of Latham; Falco Lathami, J. E.
Gray, and since Lepidogenys Lathami. G. R. Gray; Baza syama,
Hodgson, J. A. S. V, 777, which latter generic name has precedence
of Lepidogenys, while Lophotes is pre-occupied in Ichthyology. More-
over, I do not consider this form to appertain to the Falcon group,
but decidedly to that of the Perns and Elans. | Type.
20. Falco chicquera.
21. Lerax | Bengalensis: Little Black and Orange-coloured Hawk.
of Edwards, erroneously regarded as the female of J. cwrulescens by
various authors. Vide p. 180,* ante.
22. Ketupa Leschenaulti, Lesson: Strix Hardwickit, Gray: cul-
trungris nigripes, Hodgson, J. A. S. V. 364, and mentioned in VI,
363. Identical with specimens from Southern India and the Tenasserim
provinces. |
23. Mesomorpha (Hodgson, olim Urrua, H.) [ Bengalensis ; Otus
Bengalensis, Franklin, Gould: Bubo ? caveareus, Hodgson, As. Res.
XIX, 169, and since Urrua cavearea, H., J. A. S. VI, 372; altered
to Mesomorpha, Ibid. X, 28, where various other prior appellations
are similarly changed and classicized; Urrua Bengalensis, Jerdon. |
Type.
24. Meseidus (Hodgson, olim Bulaca, H.) Newarensis [ Ulula ?
Newarensis, Hodgson, As. Res. XIX, 168; Bulaca—Id. J. A. S.
VI, 372; B. monticola, Jerdon, Supplement.| Type.
25. Strix flammea : | Str. Javanica, apud Jerdon. |
56. Genus Ninox, Hodgson: type. NV. [scutulatus ; Strix scutulata,
Raffles, Lin. Trans. XIII, pt. I], 280: Str. hirsuta, Tem.; Str. lugu-
bris, Tickell, J. A. S. 1], 572; Minox Nipalensis, Hodgson, Madr. J1.
No. XIV, 23, with figure; J. A. S. VI, 364, where the singular paral-
1843. ] Catalogue of Nepalese Birds. 313
lelism of proportions manifested by this species and the Hawk Hyptio-
pus lophotes is noticed in minute detail.
27. Athene cuculoides;| Noctua cuculoides, Vigors and Gould.
[This bird* is found in Southern India and in the Tenasserim pro-
vinces |.
28. Scops lettia, Hodgson [ As. Res. XIX, 176: Scops Lempyi (?/,
Horsfield, vel Se. Javanicus, Lesson, to which an Assamese specimen
is referred by Dr. Horsfield. I incline to suspect that the Se. Sumnza,
Hodgson, Ibid., will prove to be merely the young, as the “ Red Owl”
of Wilson’s ‘ American Ornithology’ is of his “ Mottled Owl”, (Se.
Asio ). |
29. Athene radiatus; Strix radiata, Tickell, J. A. S. II, 572;
_ Athene erythropterus, Gould, P. Z. S., 1837, p. 136; ] Noctua per-
lineata, Hodgson [mentioned in J. A. S. VI, 369].
30. Lophophorus Impeyanus.
31. Tragopan satyrus.
32. Euplocomus leucomelas.
33. [Ithaginis (Wagler;) Plectrophorus, J. E. Gray; Ptilopachus,
Swanson ; | eruentata.
34. Gallophasis (Hodgson, type,) pucrasia. [Phasianus pucrasia,
Vigors and Gould. This bird certainly does not rank well in any of
the divisions hitherto established among the Pheasants. Its distinctive
traits consisting in the absence of any nude crimson space around the
eyes, in the similarity of the sexes, the peculiar character of the plum-
age, and the short straight tail; but it approximates the restricted Pha-
siani more than it does any other group, and it is remarkable that the
only Indian species of true Pheasant (Ph. Wallichit vel Stacei) differs
from the rest in being crested, though much less heavily than the pre-
sent bird, which latter is known to sportsmen by the names Plass,
Pucrass, and Koklass.
* The Society has just been presented with a specimen from Chusan.
314
Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.
(Wednesday Evening, 12th April, 1843.)
Present.
Sir J. P. Grant, Knight,
Sir W. H. Seton, Knight,
Lieutenant Colonel, W. N. Forbes, C. B.
H. Torrens, Esq.
R. Houstoun, Esq.
Captain A. Broome,
N. B. E. Baillie,
S. G. T. Heatly, Esq., and others.
The Honorable W. W. Birp, President, in the chair.
The President opened the business of the evening by expressing his
thanks to the Society for electing him as its President. He observed, that
he was one of the oldest, if not the oldest, member in India; that he
felt both pride and gratification in the honor conferred upon him, and
would use his best exertions to uphold the credit of the Society, which had
attained so much celebrity in the estimation of the scientific world. The
President observed, that although he could not promise much, individually,
to the Society in scientific matters, yet from his position in Society, he was
satisfied that he could influence largely valuable contributions. That he
had been in some measure successful in this hope, in as much as he had
prevailed upon Mr. H. Torrens, the late Honorary Secretary, to continue
his labors as such for the Society, aided by a stipendiary Sub-Secretary.
This point was not of immaterial importance when the difficulty of pro-
curing men of scientific attainments, and with the other qualifications
requisite to fit them for the multifarious duties of Secretary to the Society
was considered; and this was feelingly illustrated by the President in the
case of their late illustrious Secretary, Mr. J. Prinsep, who sacrificed his
life in the ardour of his scientific researches to benefit the Society. The
President concluded by referring to a memorandum which had been prepar-
ed at his request, for the future conduct of the business of the Society by
the Honorary Secretary, and which was read as follows :—
]
1843.] Asiatic Society. 815
At a Meeting of the Committee of Papers held at Government House,
on the Ist April, 1843 :-—
Present
The Honorable the President.
Sir H. W. Seton, Knight,
Lieutenant Colonel W. N. Forbes, C. B.
Lieutenant A. Broome.
H. Torrens, Esq. Officiating as Secretary to the Committee.
Read the following Memorandum.
Resolved.—That its substance be generally approved, and that it be submitted to the
Society at the ordinary Annual Meeting for the appointment of Officers of the Society,
to be held on the 12th April. H. Torrens,
Officiating as Secy. to the Committee.
The Honorable the President has expressed a wish, that I should lay before him a
Memorandum of the course expedient to be taken with reference to the conduct
of the business of our Society by an Honorary Secretary.
The Honorable the President desires, that the office of Secretary should continue to
be held as an honorary appointment. Itis the wish of the Society generally.
But I have explained to him the impossibility of procuring the entire services of
any honorary holder of the office, and he has acquiesced in the expediency of engag-
ing a Sub-Secretary to conduct ordinary correspondence with current business, and
to assist, under the Secretary, in the editing of the Journal lately my property, which
the Society desire to take over, and make their own.
I have now to suggest the mode in which the Sub-Secretary may be remunerated,
without inducing extra charge to any serious extent upon the Society. And here
let me observe, that I intend submitting to the Society, with the sanction of the Ho-
norable the President, the nomination of Mr. Henry Piddington, our Geological Curator,
to the duty. His general acquaintance with the principles of science ; his long experi-
ence of this country, its usages, and its people; his literary qualifications; his habits of
business ; and last not least, his well-known zeal for science, his mental powers and his
energetic use of them; render him more eligible for the very miscellaneous and peculiar
duties which he could be called upon to perform as Sub-Secretary than any person with
whom I am acquainted in Calcutta or in India. I have had good reason to know how
well he could perform those duties by my experience of the manner in which he has
already assisted me in my attempts to perform the work of Secretary.
Having thus premised, I proceed to note my scheme.
1. That there be an Honorary Secretary to the Society, charged either alone, or as
associated with other Honorary Secretaries, with the special duty of ert the
department of Oriental Literature.
2. That he be answerable to the Society for the proper disposition of their funds,
under the immediate instructions of the President.
3. That he be further answerable to the Society, for the due and proper conduct of
316 Asiatic Society. [ No. 136.
their correspondence, foreign and internal, and that he have the supervision of the
publication of the Journal.
4. That he be assisted by a Sub-Secretary, whose duty will be to act under the
Secretary for the purposes noted in No. 3, as also for the general charge of the pre-
mises, and property of the Society; to check all petty charges and disbursements
in the departments of Curator and the Museum, and the Curator of the Museum Eco-
nomical Geology, before submitting them to the Secretary, and to assist in editing the
Journal of the Society under that officer.
d. That he be paid for these services, 200 rupees a month.
And here is the supposed difficulty, the procuring of funds for this salary.
Now the interest of our funded monies—Rupees 13,000, Csoma de Koros’ legacy (Rs.
4000) not included; gives about 60 (sixty) rupees a month.
The appointment of a Sub-Secretary will render superfluous that of the Museum
Clerk employed under the Librarian on 60 (sixty) rupees a month. The demand from
Government of the payment of the contingent charges of the Museum Economic Geo-
logy, averaging avout 40 (forty) rupees a month will save the Society this sum,* and
render it so much available for general purposes.
Thus we should have :—
Interest, . a ia ae He,
Salary saved, .. oe ae re 60+ Rs. per Mensem.
Charges saved, ee as sae
Total Rs. ae es -- 160
The residue necessary for the complement of 200 rupees, may be easily spared
out of the sum (about 4,000 rupees, ) which used to be spent annually by the Society in
the purchase of the Journal for their members, and I can safely say, that the expense
will be more than trebly covered by the saving which close supervision and better
management must induce in the cost and charges of editing the Journal as the pro-
perty of the Society.
I would have suggested the re-organization of our Accountant’s Office and Assign-
ment to the Sub-Secretary of the duties belonging to it, but I cannot recommend that
scheme. a
The Sub-Secretary should be relieved from all financial responsibility, and be left
to devote himself to the active duties of his peculiar position. Mr. PipDINGTON, with
his other work, will have, as I see he has now, more than ample occupation for all his
time in the Sub-Secretariat, the duties of which he is indeed experimentally per-
forming.
Sub-Secretary’s Salary.
Interest, te 4 Ax 60
Salary saved, ae 162 26. 41691 OF
/ te) / oO
‘OY | eq [a “uory) Nn yey
** TayjJVoM SUIMI}VIIY} Flep
‘Atpenbs pur yysiupryq 0 “A QN|°***
“oul
eetee eeeve eeoee
** aTqeuea
pue Suiseatoul "AN ‘Wd “GaN
ysiuprpy 0} Surua | ***
-Ysod} ‘AN WO1j 0Z901q ‘Wd |
‘syrenbs "oy N YseazyStuplyy Op) **°
esee esee
‘YON Woy JY StUpT |
0} SUISeaIOUT WOON ‘o}eLopoT]
‘Aqyenbs “AAQN pue “N
‘ayes Aaeoy "AN
‘our
“dN 9} “HNN
— ee
"1OYJEI AA PUL SPUT AA
‘ALLOA FT
‘SVUaVI LV
°° GIeT[eIS
eeee ‘yeieg
** ‘uopuo'yT
reese COROJO UUW
**ueysiaaa 7. Apey
-' 9 OOT1AIV AA SIG
“GP8T
‘PO PZZ
"U00NT
“SVUaV~y LV
eres Oolaye A SUG
“diqg 10 aoe, g jo samen
“CPB
‘PO 4816
“‘UOON
‘ayeq
‘OPSI *4990JIO PSG fo mors SDAPD IT 9Y7 A0f 40Y709 44 pun spur ay} fo NatA ADINGDT
‘
gS Lang as 530 o [ oe [°°** ‘WyStuprpy 07 Sutseoso
= AN Wo. [joms Aavay “UL ‘YJIONT Woy az0a1q Suog|’*** ‘speoy pue SYHAVN
|
} eoeee @eeee ee “M NN
HSA caer date] Oi 8G ‘08) EE []/aueowmMpP, ‘Wd OT Sutseas
| | | “Ul “ANN Soles plefzy *w cviteee CEO WeyTeS
“payreut jou aul} 30g "aN | oe ae a | ‘0
oy eu Ge ae AG ate eee ce “eg! GF 11/240y-qqN “wa £078 Suons
‘spua ureeq 1ey UO GI-O1 IV) | | UOON 32 "NQAN % “HNN/**"" ine OHIOAG
y 09'6% *g ye £QC'6% e200 eoes eece "AN |
S . ‘pre 'zg6z ‘e318 *G96z | °° | | 8462 TZ 'F8) 20 PI|"N ‘dQ “oped Sutseasour ‘oy
Ss We ye £0L°63 Ned [ "Ie q aAoy UOON IN d “ANN 0} “AN eee eee eene eres)
~ |
| 0L°6% ‘N'd B eee eeecn oe NG
& 0L°6Z YON] GC “E8) 9C ZI|'N'd b AN ‘W'd ‘sysns Savoy
2 09°63 W¥ 9 pue ‘ANN ‘eles duoijs u00N|'*** OIC ‘uopuory
= | 016% ltd | eeee ‘oueolwin Fy ‘yynog "Nd
B | 08°8G Noon] 08 G8) G ZI|PATTNT WooNy ‘premyyION oy
Ss | epee Take WOIf AUBITIIN FT pueales ‘W'v Plies eee CoreojaT, UY
S : pies "ASW 9}e19pout
bh] ‘pojsewsip wiv FL IV] °° Sle aie "°° | £0 ZIJMOON “W'¥ g 0} 44SrUpITA
WOAJ PULITAIN FY snotiny ‘yynog|**** ‘areysiaaa,y AperyT
‘GP8I
"jas [res [Je uooN Aq} °° Bs os CG 88} GP P1i"°** «= “UINOG Yop “Wed ourg)**** ‘ooTtaye AA SIG] “390 P1gz
LON DS ‘U0O NT
ala
3) “SyAeUlo Y ‘duig| ‘ray y| ‘tojauoreg a = "19q}9 AA PUL SPUT AA ‘diyg 10 de, gq jo someny 2}eq
x : & A
ioe) . .
aq
384
Eighth Memoir on the
“UOISN[OUOD JY} 4% SHIVULOI SY} UI Tojor [[EYS [ YOIYA 03 “GUAaIANO UII0}$ 10 aavm wos ayy Aq APaed pure ‘svaued Jo yULA TOY
a10Ys UO paytp YAY) | Apred aso sdrys poyoorm ayy, *arjUad 9y} YIM j99UT 0} YING aU} 0} Ysnoue ivy Suroq Way} Jo suo pue ‘Suyjo ay} Ul *‘|@g 0} sproy oy} Ur
“M4N 10 YJION Wor ATTenpesd Suloaa Pulm oy [Te peY ‘W10}S BY} JO J[VY UOYAON oY} UT [Te BuTaq YOryA ‘speoy seIpey{ WOI UCON pu “Ww *V g UeeM30q paddrs
yorym sdiys ay} (asodind yey) 40g eyep ou 10 91331] tayo Aay} TO) O10Y UAATS Jou eAeY J UIIO}S OY} Jo YORI, oY} 90eI} 0} Buteq aQuE siyy Jo yoalqo ay,——“a70Nr
""~AS : , | esse ee ‘speoy SPIpt I
24} 0} poo}s ‘e $yseq BE eI Ks we ee ti A i eh "°°" WOIy vag o} Sujnd sdiqg
qno pooj}s pue uoou “sea a igs + ‘dn Sur
07.6 32 poddrys Kiysoyy ) | 18°62 — 6 "IBID OT “AS ‘838 “ASA pue
| L6G “Wd Z "Sqdq °2°978 “ANG ANN
8L°6% WOON] °° < pue “ANN “Wd @ “HIN
— 0 0} ‘N pura, vooN ‘Aavoy
‘W'V Q | pue yoru) ees “ANN ‘W
‘vg ‘s[jenbs yews JYSIN Jy\°°°° me ‘svyuavly
| | | seer ween ‘ouy J4SIUpIpl
| | ns ‘Gynog sayed Suoys ‘Ww cd
Te 18 | S€ Tl |Suneropom uooN “ASM
OT ‘eyes snoliny ysoAy “W'V Q)t*s> oes Ae q]eIS
Le ce 6g | ec il seee ee “Sans "Wd ‘Sut |
-ye1opoul WOON “BAS WsITAeq\|*::- “oe. ‘aIIOAC T
1 6G = 8) “SS W'd ‘sayes Suo1js UOON
€9°6Z ‘WV F EG e8 PEEL hy -cag of ‘MQQN {Suttaa,|eees suse ere TeIeEG
OG'6R 3 "ASW Wd ‘UOON
ee ge: re nes * ** ‘ayelapoul UOON, |
nee wp OF FB | 9 al ‘JUSIUpIy Woay Surseaioaq|+::- cere foyeojay UY
es a -Gt98 |orer (°c: — ‘styenbs yjrm ajzerapoyy|**** ‘ureysiaAay Apery
“OPst
| ve .. (898 | ff PR lt Bee pee peeks g CUNT es ‘oopayemy St1g] 190 WIpZ
5 eee | | ec) i_C
*SyARWI ‘duig| ‘1eyy,| sajaworeg *q ‘UuOT!*N “ye7T "1eyyea AA pue SPU AA ‘diyg pure soe, g jo somen a]eq
BY. iit ails. Shs Jnemelatoe abl
ES
385
n India.
4
v
Law of Storms
1843.)
"YINOg WYSIuply We “AAS
|
| 1é Ul peitys Wd 9“ AAN Sayes Ysorq| "°° ‘OAON OW0g |
aed | "AS W'd GI “INOS 0} “AS |
“UPS OU) WOIJ pamMetet useyM wWyed
jo Surusowr oy} uo ssor avg) ** | *° oe uo 6¢ Il pue “ANA 0} ‘MN 'W ‘d |
G ‘aueoTLINF_ JUSTOIA ‘W “df :
‘sqvenbs "A NAA OV MN NV OT) T° ‘A1LaYOIpuog
"ysiy 00} Arqeq : mh
SON “WStUpl NL Ve 06°63 ++ | ++ | gg:qe¢ uo0N GG 08 | 0% GI “3PIIN{ *** a 5 ame ANS ANG: fay eee oO Pea, Oe __Gtsl
pur’ wd C4e'0/'6Z UOON | N! Of 08 | 6 I BOON |pUue preArjsa AA OY} WO, E]eH)|-PN FO PLOPO Apey! *390 UIbz
Ye + 00'0E 97 06°66 WOLS “eg | pe) 1 0
| ‘lajomoieg |W ‘uoT) “N ‘37 "19yVeI AA PUR SPUT AL
‘digg 10 aoeig Josomeny 27eq
386 Eighth Memoir on the [No. 137.
Summary.
It is evident enough, that this storm was one coming in upon the
Coromandel coast from the Eastward and it will be observed by
our charts, that we have secured, through Captain Biden’s zealous
assistance, a chain of vessels, (which almost appear as if stationed
there ) from the Andamans to Madras ; every one of which experienced
the commencement of the storm before it terminated with the vessel
to the Eastward of her; and every one of which had the winds and
shifts of wind exactly as they should have them upon the supposition
of a great whirlwind, rotating from left to right, or by S. E., N. W.*
and moving at the same time forward, and these winds, and shifts of
wind, and successive storms can be explained by no other theory! If
the Law of Storms for the Northern hemisphere was yet to be demon-
strated, it could scarcely be so more completely than it has here been:
I begin of course with the vessel farthest to the Eastward.
This is the Waterloo, which on the 20th October at noon was passing
the Southern extremity of the Andamans with fine weather, and from
thence steering to the N. W., with fresh N. N. E. breezes. On the
22nd October, we find her at noon in lat. 13° 27’ N. and long.
90° 03’ E., being then three degrees to the Westward of the Andamans,
and ten degrees to the East of Madras, with heavy gales from the
N. E. which had increased from the midnight preceding ; and by mid-
night of 22nd to 23rd, when she had made about a degree to the North-
ward and Westward ; and when the storm, if it then existed as a cir-
cular one, had also travelled to the Westward: the wind wasat Eastward
moderating. We have no Barometer marked, but this change is that
which a rotatory storm would give, and which a mere monsoon gale
would scarcely do. I take it therefore, that at noon on the 22nd, the
centre of this storm was about 120 miles to the S. E. of the Waterloo’s
position. I have carried the line marking the track from the direction
of the Andamans, and if we take the increasing breeze of the 2lst to
have been part of the storm, the centre will for that day fall to the
Eastward of these Islands; but we have too little authority I think,
to assign it any place for the 2lst.
* This is Professor Dove’s description of the rotation, and as it is better than ours
I use it here, and shall use it in future,
1843.] Law of Storms in India. 387
On the 23rd, the Waferioo had fine weather, having stood to the N.
W., and the wind at’noon South and S. Easterly, being altogether
out of the reach of the storm; another proof also, that her gale of the
preceding day was part of a rotatory, and not a monsoon gale.
’ The Lady Feversham, which is the next ship to the Waterloo,
was at midnight on the 22d-23rd about 220 miles to the S. W.
by W. of her, and about on the latitude of the track of the storm ;
she had the wind increasing so rapidly from the North and N. by W.
from noon to that time, that at 11 p. m. 22nd, it was blowing a gale,
and at 1-30 a.m. of 23rd, a complete hurricane, so that she was just
enveloped in the hurricane when it had entirely left the Waterloo.
At 1-45 a. m. of the 23rd she was dismasted, and at 2-45, the calm
centre reached her. At 3.30, the hurricane is stated to be with her at its
greatest force; her Barometer being at 28.80, from which time it
moderated, till at noon it is called a strong wind at E. S. E.
The Ann Metcalfe is the next vessel, and with her it is not
called a hurricane till 8 a. ™m., or about 8 hours later than with
the Lady Feversham: and with the Metcalfe the calm took place
at noon, giving thus pretty nearly the centre for noon that day, which
also agrees with the log of the London, which had “a strong gale”
at N. N. E. at this time, and generally with those of the Favorite,
Sarah, and Stalkart.
These data are all good for the centre of the storm for the 28rd
in about lat. 12° N. long. 85° 30’ E. which is also given (evidently
in such weather an estimated one) as the position of the Ann Metcalfe
at noon.
There are, in adopting it as the centre, two slight discrepancies to
be noticed ; the first, that though it is only 45 miles to the Westward
of the Feversham’s position, that vessel at noon had the weather mo-
derating fast, and wind from E. S. E.; the second, that the direction of
the wind with the Favorite (N. N. E.) if her position is right, would
place the centre further to the Southward, and the last, that though al-
most fine with the Feversham, it was beginning to be felt as a gale
by the Sarah, which was at 145 miles of distance from this centre.
We cannot, however, take upon ourselves to alter the estimate of a
vessel’s position, though the storm wave and storm currents must have
carried some of the vessels much beyond or within their estimated
| 2 E
388 Eighth Memotr on the [No. 137. -
drifts. It is probable, that as the Feversham had no observation, she
may have been in error.* ‘he whole differehce which these con-
siderations make is not much, but I note them to shew that nothing
is overlooked. Are they to be accounted for by the theory that the pro-
gressive motion of a rotatory storm, particularly when as in this case
it is a rapidly moving one (12 or 13 miles an hour) tends to gene-
rate the rotatory motion farther before it? We know s0 little of how
they act, that this supposition is at least worth mentioning. Most ac-
counts of storms seem to agree in this, that the force of storms and the
rise of the Barometer are greater and more rapid than their increase or
its fall. J have marked on the chart, the spot where the Washington
foundered on the 25th. As she had the hurricane from the Eastward,
she was to the Northward of its track, and must have drifted up after
it was over with the S. Easterly winds, which we see the Lady Fever-
sham had, and which indeed seem usually to follow the N. E. qua-
drants of the storms, and sometimes their S. E. quadrants also. The
ship seen by the Washington was probably the Lady Feversham,
which had only a foremast left standing, though this last vessel’s log
does not mention any other vessel in sight; but when all hands are
busy rigging jury masts and pumping, the look out is rarely attended
to. The Washington in her sinking state, was no doubt most anxi-
ously looking for ships. |
We have now to consider the probable place of the centre at Noon
on the 24th, which day it will be recollected is that of the storm’s
reaching Madras and Pondicherry. At Madras the veering of the
wind N. N. E. by N. E. and East to S. E., with fine weather, shews
clearly enough, that the centre passed to the South of that place, while
the veering of the wind at Pondicherry from N. W. by the West to
S. W., shews also, that it passed close to the Northward of that set.
tlement ; the short calm interval noted in the reports being the time
of the passage of the centre. This is stated to have been at 20 minutes’
past 5.T
* See concluding remarks.
+ The lowest depression of the Barometer at Madras is stated to have been at 4 p. M.
29.704; it seems to have been 4.45, p.m. before the wind was at East, but asI have al-
ready -explained before, the direction of the wind varies much on approaching the
land.
1843.] Law of Storms in India. 309
Now from Noon 28rd to half-past 5 of the 24th is 293 hours, and
the distance between the place of the centre on the 23rd and Pondi-
cherry is 385 miles, which divided by 293, gives about 12.4 miles
per hour. In the 53 hours from Noon, the centre would at this
rate have made 68.2 miles, which gives the distance of the centre,
bearing about West from Pondicherry at Noon on the 24th or in lat.
12° 2' N. long. 81° E.
We have now to trace the storm inland, and for this purpose our
materials are the letters and reports from Ryacottah, Bangalore, Bel-
lary, Salem, Madura, Paumban, &c., and from Cochin and Telli-
chery, on the Western coast. For these we are indebted to Capi.
Campbell, of the Revenue Survey; to Capt. Newbold, Assistant
Commissioner of Kurnool, whose able remarks I have placed in the
Summary; to Mr. Crozier, Sub-collector of Madura; Mr. Bruin,
Magistrate of Mangalore, and Mr. Bourgoin, Governor of Mahé,
and my readers will now please to refer to Chart. II. Ryacottah
_ is in Lat. 12° 312’ N. Long. 78° 5’ E., and its bearing and distance
from our centre of the 24th is about W. b. N. 184 miles, and we
find that by 4 p. m. of the 24th it was blowing strong at North.
By 9, it was blowing in doors and windows, so that we may take
it fairly to have begun as a gale at North at 6 p. m. on the 24th;
and as by 33 a. Mm. on the 25th, the wind was at East with the Baro-
meter at 29.636, its lowest depression, we may assume that the cen-
tre was now on or near the meridian of this place, at say 60 or 80
miles distance; for we see by Capt. Newbold’s letter, that it was
felt severely at Salem from the N. E. (time not mentioned,) which
shews that its centre, taking it to be then a ,circular storm, was
yet to the South of that station, and that it was mo¢ felt at Madura,
104 miles South of Salem, or 154 of Ryacottah. In estimating the
position of it, we may take this spot to be also at the same distance
from our centre of the 24th (already laid down) as Ryacottah itself, or
184 miles, or about in the latitude of Porto Novo; so that we have
the storm travelling from Noon 24th to 33 a. m. on the 25th, or in
152 hours, 184 miles, or 11.9 per hour, our former rates being 12.4
miles per hour, a less retardative rate than we have hitherto found in
former storms.
* Salem is about 50 miles S. by E. of Ryacottah.
ae Eighth Memoir on the ' ENo. 137.
Taking this rate, we may carry it farther on from 33 a. m. to Noon of the
25th May, which will give us, taking it to have passed on a nearly W. S.
W. course, but curving as it passed Pondicherry, so as to form an are,
83 hours at 11.9 per hour, or about 100 miles beyond the meridian of
Ryacottah, if it still moved at the same rate, though of this we are not
certain. This calculation would place the centre at Noon 25th in lat.
about 10° 30’ long. 77° 00’ E. or about the head of the Paulgatcherry
Pass on its South side, as supposed by Captain Newbold in the extract
which follows in the next page.
We next find that according to the extract from the Bombay
paper, the Seaforth, Ceylon steamer, encountered the storm at 10
p. mM. on the 25th off Cochin. I have only this brief notice of this
vessel’s log, and thus we cannot say if she encountered its Northern or
Southern half, or its centre; but as the track of the storm certainly
trends to the N. Westward in the Arabian sea, as we shall see by
the subsequent logs of the Luty Wright, Futtay Salam, &c. we may
say that it was in all probability the centre or the Southern half of
the vortex, which the Seaforth met with. If we take her to have been
60 miles from the coast, which in the dangerous month of October
is not an excessive offing, this would give, from our centre before
mentioned a distance of 110 miles in 10 hours, or 11 miles an hour, or
nearly its former rate. It must be recollected, that if the Seaforth
might have been much closer in shore, the storm also might have been
much retarded by the steep escarpments of the pass; and all we wish
to shew is, that there is connection enough between its rates of tra-
velling, and the times at which it was felt in various places, to enable
us to pronounce, on fair and reasonable, if not on positive grounds,
that it was fhe same storm throughout.
Before tracking it farther at sea, I shall give here Capt. Newbold’s
highly interesting views as to the passage of the storm over the
peninsula. :
-“ From the physical configuration of the country to the North, West,
and South of Madras, it strikes me that any aerial current coming from
the Eastward, would be directed from its progress in a direct Westerly
direction by the high line of the Eastern Ghauts, and turned in a
South-Westerly direction by the break of Salem, whence sweeping
across the plains of Coimbatore at the Southern base of the Koonda and
Nilgherry escarpments, it would be concentrated on that singular gap
i
7
A,
i)
a“
a.
+h
’
va
‘
Oa
7
ry.
Al
‘9
ts
1843.) Law of Storms in India. 39]
in the Western Ghauts—the Paulghautcherry pass, whence it would
make its escape Westerly to the Indian Ocean in the direct latitude
of the Laccadives. I enclose you a small map, of which I beg your
acceptance, on which I have marked by arrows, the probable direc-
tion of the Madras storm,* which if it be the identical one that visited
the Laccadives, must have pursued this course, and have been felt
at Arcot, Vellore, Salem, Darapooram, Coimbatore, Paulghautcherry
and Paniani, on the Western coast, the appropriate situation of which
I have marked in ink on the map. It will be also seen, that currents
of air, blowing Easterly across the peninsula about the latitude of
Madura, and winds blowing Westerly about the latitude of Cochin
or Alleppie, must be diverted Southerly by the Western Ghaut ridge
to Cape Comorin, a circumstance which may account for the gusts expe-
rienced off this Cape during dot monsoons. Winds blowing from the
W. in the latitude of Paniani and N. of it, Calicut, Tellicherry, and
Cannanore perhaps, would be deflected by the Ghaut barrier Southerly,
in the direction of the arrows on the map marked B. to the great gap
of Paulghautcherry, and thence rush through it Easterly on the plains
of Coimbatore and Salem.
*« The exact points where the winds are thus deflected, their minute
variations of current, with their various minor influencing causes, are
still matiers of interesting research and a meteorological desideratum :
but that they are deflected as I have described on the grand scale
by the Ghaut lines of elevation which constitute the main features
of the physical contour of Southern India, there can be little doubt. It
is a well known fact, that where these ridges attain a certain height,
neither the North-East nor South-West Monsoons usually ascend |
above them. I was crossing the Eastern Ghauts at the time of the
’ storm at Madras a little S. of the latitude of Nellore, and observed
an enormous mass of irregular clouds rise from the Eastward, and
advance rapidly on the mountain ; here the great bulk was arrested,
and (collected by electric attraction?) into a long, horizontal, wall-like
bank, of solid aspect and of a deep bluish hue, varied at the edges by
flocculent curves and zones of sombre grey, which appeared in vivid
distinctness, as ever and anon coruscations of lightning shot up and
illumined portions of the gloomy mass. In height and contour, they
assimilated the mural barrier opposed to them. They remained in
this sullen form apparently motionless for a day or two, when they
gradually dispersed. There was little wind in the sheltered valley
along which I travelled, and that little variable. A few detached
higher clouds escaped and passed slowly to the Westward, while por-
tions of the upper edge of the cloudbank would sometimes curl over
the top of the ridge, like the falling crest of a wave dispersing in
spray, and descend in a transient shower on the Western slopes. An
almost similar phenomenon is presented on the table lands on the
* I have copied in my Chart No, II, as much of the chain of Mountains as relates
to our present subject.
392 Eighth Memoir on the [No. 137.
West flanks of the Eastern Ghauts on the commencement of the N. E.
Monsoon.* .
“The almost effectual barrier presented by the Eastern Ghauts
to the force of the N. E. monsoon is a proof, that this great aerial
current is confined, generally speaking, to the lower strata of the
atmosphere. The same may be perhaps said of the Madras storms,
which generally travel from the East. Though often commencing from
the N. and N. W., the current from the East first striking the Ghaut
line to the N. of Madras, that city thus receives this deflected South-
erly current previous to the arrival directly of the main body from
the East. The foregoing remark, of course, you must apply with
much modification to the ¢rue whirlwind storm, which owes its vor-
tical movement to far different causes. The average height of the
Eastern Ghauts N. of Madras is about 1,500 feet.
** Places situate on the table lands East of the Western Ghauts ex-
perience still less of the S. W. Monsoon (the heavier of the two,)
than the tracts sheltered by the Eastern Ghauts from the N. E.
Monsoon. This is ascribable to the greater average height of the former,
(3,000 feet above the sea,) and to their more continuous character as
_ a mountain chain. The almost only exception to this remark arises
from a remarkable opening in them ; viz. the gap of Paulghautchery,
which I have already alluded to as the probable route by which
the Madras storm found its way across the peninsula to the Lacca-
dives. It may be as well here to state in corroboration of this supposi-
tion, that it is well known (Madras Almanac 1840) that ships navi-
gating the Malabar coast during the V. E. Monsoon, commonly
experience a stronger gale in the neighbourhood of Paniani than
elsewhere ; and this break in the Ghauts appears to be the cause
of this effect.+
‘During the S. W. Monsoon, the Westerly wind, which sweeps
‘through this pass from the beginning of June until about Sep-
tember, is extremely violent at Darapooram and other places to
the Eastward in a line with its longitudinal axis, as its influence
is felt even farther East than Trichinopoly ; but at other places
a little N. or S. of the line of the pass, the current is hardly perceived.
The pass is from 16 to 20 feet wide, narrower at the E. than at
the W. extremity: lofty rocks of the Koondah and Nilgherry chains
on its Northern, and the Palghaut groups on its South flank—its sur-
face is pretty level ; the slope from the plains of Coimbatore to those on
the coast so gradual as to be almost imperceptible ; the height of the
pass above the sea about the centre (roughly approximated by means
of the boiling point of water) is 900 feet.
‘“* I will write to Salem for such information as I can procure.”
* We are forcibly reminded here of the Devil’s Table Cloth preceding a S. H.
gale in Table Bay.—H. P.
¢ This is confirmed by Horsburgh, and the experience of all navigators in that sea
1843. ] Law of Storms in India. 393
The foregoing views it will be seen, by those who have followed
the series of these memoirs, are exactly analogous to those advanced
in my first memoir, where I have given a chart illustrative of the
deflection of the S. W. Monsoon, by the mountains on the coast
of Arracan, from Cape Negrais Northwards, by the Cachar and
Bootan ranges, till, by those of the Himalaya, the S. W. Monsoon
for a part of its duration is converted into a stream of Easterly winds.
There can also be little doubt, that as Capt. Newbold remarks, the
winds and hurricanes rarely extend to any great perpendicular height,
and are thus constantly subjected to all the deflections and interrup-
tions which hill and mountain ranges occasion.
We have now, having I think, shewn satisfactorily that the storm
was identically the same with that of Madras (?) to follow it in its
course in the Arabian Sea ; and our next document is, (not neglect-
ing to note the fall of the Barometer at Bombay, from the 25th to
the 29th as we proceed,) the notice of the dismasting of the Lucy
Wright.
This vessel was on the 27th, when the height of the storm occurred
with her, in lat. 13° 2’ N. long. 71° 39' E. This spot is distant
340 miles from that at which we have placed (by estimation only) the
centre of the storm on the 25th at Noon at the head of the Paulghaut-
cherry Pass, and we know that while it was raging at sea with the
Seaforth ten hours later, it was not felt, though there were clear
indications of it, to the experienced native craft and fishermen, and
these would doubtless have been much more distinct with the assi&t-
ance of a Barometer and Sympiesometer, at Tellicherry and Mount
Dilly, 100 miles to the North of the Seaforth’s position. Our reports
from Mahé and Karical also confirm this ; but again at Mangalore we
find on the 25th, strong gusts of wind from the N. W., as if there was
then a commencement of a storm hereabouts, the original one having
separated into two by the various obstacles it met with. It is, however,
just possible, that these N. W. gusts were nothing but parts of the
storm pouring over the Western Ghauts. The Hzgginson, 75 miles
West of the Lucy Wright, had a heavy gale for 6 hours from West
to South on the 28th, and must have been therefore in the S. E.
quadrant of it ; the centre being thus to the N. W. of her, and having
passed nearest to her, and to the Northward, at 6 a.m. of the 28th,
394 Eighth Memoir on the [No. 187.
as would appear by the fall of her Barometer. We do not know
how the Lucy Wright had the wind, so that we must take the
Higginson’s datum as the nearest and most detailed, and her account,
with what we have already remarked of the limited extent of the
storm off Cochin with the Seaforth, which excludes the supposi-
tion of these storms being the same, may allow us to assume, for we
can do no more, that at 6 a. m. on the 28th, the centre of a storm
was, say 40 miles or less to the North of her, and that her Easterly
and N. Easterly drift with a Westerly and South-Westerly gale
brought the wind to South, which it might quickly do when on such
a small circle.
We know only of the Lucy Wright, that she was dismasted the
day preceding, but in what part of the storm, or where she may have
drifted to by this time, 6 a. m. 28th, we are quite ignorant. I have
therefore not marked any circle for her on the 27th,* and though it
is certain that, as we shall presently see there were two storms, we do
not know their tracks hereabouts.
But we now find by the Futtay Salam’s log and track, that she had
been running to the N. by E. from about lat. 8° to lat. 12°, and between
68° and 69° E. till midnight of the 26th, when she evidently plunged
into the circle of a storm on its S. E. quadrant, as she had then a gale
from S. W. which increased to a hurricane ‘from S. S. W., South, and.
S. East, moderating again a little by midnight of the 27th-28th ; so
that she may be taken, from midnight of the 26th to midnight of the
27th, or for 24 hours, to have been drifting, and pretty close to the
centre, across the S. E. quadrant of a storm, of which the centre was
of course brought successively to the N. W., West, and S. W. of her, as
it progressed and the vessel drifted.
Now if we consider this with the chart and log before us, we may
fairly allow, that at Noon of the 27th, the centre of the Futtay Salam’s
hurricane bore from her about West, 30 or 40 miles, or was in lat.
12° 00’ N. lon. 68° 20' or 30° E., and I have from that point struck a
circle to shew it. This circle will also shew, that this storm and the
* There is aconsiderable degree of uncertainty about all newspaper extracts relating to
storms, on account of the errors with which, even in the best printed ones, these accounts
always abound. Mr. Redfield think alludes to the same circumstance, as much dimi-
nishing the value of newspaper notices.
1843. ] Law of Storms in India. 395
Higginson’s could not have been the same, for the Higginson being
bound zo Bombay, must have been on the 27th, (unless she lost ground
between that and the 28th,)-semewhere to the Eastward of her posi-
tion on the 28th, which would place her on, or not far from the me-
ridian of the Futtay Salam’s storm, where she would first have had
the wind from N. E. East or S. E., being in its Northern half ; whereas
she had it “from West to South,” or was in its S. Eastern quadrant
like the Futtay Salam on the 26th; and if on the 27th at Noon, the
Futtay Salam’s hurricane be supposed to reach to the Lucy Wright’s
position, and have been there violent enough to dismast her, (at a
distance of 180/miles from its centre,) which is very improbable, this
would a fortior? have given the Higginson an Easterly or E. S.
Easterly hurricane on the 27th ; when it is apparent that she had fine
weather ; for it was evidently not then even threatening enough to be
mentioned in her log. She was, as I before said, bound ¢o Bombay, and
must therefore have been coming from some point between S. and N. W.,
and this would always have given her bad weather from some quar-
ter on the 27th, as would also any track we can suppose for the storm.
Hence it is clear, that the Futtay Salam’s hurricane and the Higgin-
son’s storms could not be the same ; as the Lucy Wright's and Higgin-
son’s might have been so, the one being dismasted on the 27th, and the
other meeting a storm as she came from the Eastward on the 28th.
In the absence of further information then, 1 suppose that there
were here, as we have found before where the track of a storm crosses,
or makes a considerable angle with the prevailing Monsoon, two
storms.* Of these I take the Lucy Wright’s and Higginson’s to have
been the smaller one, and the Futtay Salam’s and Seaton’s, which
We must now consider, to have been the greater and more direct one.
The Seafon’s storm it is clear from the shift of wind was a severe
hurricane travelling from the E. by S, or E. E. S. to the W. N. West-
ward. I have marked the Lat. and Long. at which it first struck her,
and that to which she might have drifted between, say 6 a. m. on
the 3lst and 6 a. m. on the Ist with a N. N. Westerly gale, drifting
* The probability of two storms is much increased, as far at least as mere dynamical
forces and interruptions go, by considering how many currents our storm must have
created in its passage over the Ghauts, and the interval of threatening weather only
along the coast under the line of the Ghauts,
oF
396 Eighth Memoir on the [ No. 137.
before it at the rate of 34 miles per hour, the least which we can allow
for a disabled ship. This brings her to lat. 12° 36’, long. 60° 38’ E
as the spot where the centre passed her.
We have from this point then, which is tolerably well ascertained,
and which the storm reached at. 8 a.m. on the Ist November, the
following data in time and distance.
Distance. Time.
miles. days. hours.
To the centre of the Futtay Salam’s l 420 ogy
hurricane, Noon 27th October, ...... j aeaianaiia
or 4.2 per h.
To the centre of the 25th at ee 990 6 18
near the Palghautcherry Pass, ...... or 162 h.
or 6.1 per h.
To the centre of the 24th to the
Eastward of Madras. ............- t ol 7 ie 186 h.
or 6.6 per h.
The mean of this is 5.6 per hour, or only one-half of what we allow-
ed it to have in crossing the peninsula, and less than half of what we
have proved it to have had in the Bay of Bengal; but then we
must not forget, first, that it had to forée its way over the peninsula,
and through 900 miles of distance in the Arabian Sea against the
S. W. Monsoon; next that these sort of calculations and allow-
ances always assume some initial force or rate of motion ; and lastly,
that we know absolutely nothing at all of the cause either of the
rotatory or progressive forces, or of their opposing resistances and
retardation, or if they acquire, or have under any, or what, cir-
cumstances, the power of increasing the velocity of either of their
motions.
Of all these things, and of much more which will readily occur
to men of science, we are profoundly ignorant, and as I have before said,
all we can now do is to register accurately, and deduce—when we
must deduce—doubtingly.
The log of the Chzeftain is the only one which now remains for us to
remark upon, and it will be evident that she was on the 2nd Novem-
ber just far enough within the verge of the vortex to feel the sea, and
have the threatening appearances with the wind veering as it would
ee ee
ae “ee, ee Ae eS
1843. ] Law of Storms in India. 397
do on the southern half of a storm, as the vortex passed on ahead, and
to the Northward of her. Her position when compared with that of
the Seaton at 6 a. m. on the Ist, shews that the track of the storm was
now tending to the N. W., and we find accordingly by Dr. Mal-
colmson’s account, that it was severely felt on the Arabian Coast, and
that there were some indications of a storm at Aden. We cannot,
however, upon such vague accounts, pretend to track it any farther.
I grieve to add that; to the disgrace of those who may deserve the
blame; neither the log of the Cleopatra or of the Semdramis, both
Government steamers, have been obtainable ; I have strong suspicions
that both ran headlong into the storm circles. Is the Government of
Bombay aware that a mistake of this kind might cost it a steamer,
or at Jeast half of a lac of rupees of damages ?
Conclusion.
I mention with some satisfaction here, not only that this is the first
storm which we have tracked in what must soon be the great high-
way between England and India, the Arabian Sea, but also that we
again find confirmed the law which my previous researches have shewn
to hold good for the China Sea and Bay of Bengal, z. e. that the storms
always come from the Eastward, and travel to the Westward, and
it is gratifying to have now ascertained this, with some trifling inter-
vals over 60 degrees of longitude, or one-sixth of the circumference of
the globe. As public attention is gradually drawn to this important
subject, we may hope that, ere long we shall at least be able to trace
the storms of this great, and to us most important division of the Ocean,
with as much accuracy as those of other parts of the Eastern Seas.
I must not omit also to point out an important practical lesson for
the navigator on the Coromandel Coast, which should not be omit-
ted, and it is this. Those who have studied this subject, and are
acquainted with the publications of Reid and Redfield relative to
the storms of the Western hemisphere, and with my own relative
to those of the Eastern hemisphere, are well aware of the abundant
evidence which exists (and there is much more yet unpublished,)
to prove the existence of ‘storm waves” and “ storm currents.”
398 Eighth Memoir on the [ No. 137.
To those, however, who are not fully acquainted with the subject, I
may say, that the “ storm wave” is a mass of water of greater or less dia-
meter according to the storm, raised above the usual level of the ocean
by the diminished atmospheric pressure and perhaps other causes, and
driven bodily along with the storm or before it, and when it reaches
bays or river mouths, or other confined situations, causing by its fur.
ther rise when contracting, dreadful inundations ; but upon open coasts
rarely so, or not in so great a degree, as it can there spread out quickly
and find its level.* The “‘ storm current” may be briefly described as
circular streams on the circumferences of rotatory storms, and of
this also we have evidence enough for the mariner at all times to
admit, and be on his guard against the possdbality of, or even the great
probability of, them.
We have thus in every storm two sets of forces (currents) independ-
ent of that of the wind, acting upon a ship; the one carrying her
bodily onward on the track of the storm, and the other drifting her
round the periphery of that part of the storm circle in which she
may be.
Taking, as the simplest case, and one nearly that of Madras Roads,
a storm travelling from East to West, and striking upon a Coast
running North and South, its centre passing over Pondicherry, we
should have then, for all ships in the offing, one current, “the storm
wave” carrying them directly on shore, with greater or less velocity,
as they were nearer or farther from the centre ; and other currents,
“the storm currents” varying in their direction according to the situ-
ation of each ship in the storm circle, but always agreeing pretty nearly
with the direction of the wind.
The current of the storm save then is setting due West, but that
of the storm current West on the North side of the storm circle,
and due East at its South side; South at its Western edge, and
North at its Eastern side, and so on in all the intermediate directions ;
and a ship putting to sea from Madras roads in our supposed case,
will be carried right towards the shore by the storm wave, and to
the S. Westward also by the storm current ; but if putting to sea from
* The deep sea wave also, (the flot de fond of the French writers) no doubt assists
the inundation ; but as this is not a surface cause, I do not allude to it.
LE ——
Af Secrton 6AM. 51 "08e
Chart Ne «11. \
— Huggins
to the . | ~* 3 Da < athe Prey Wrephe
| 1 Bellary
|
Ercuru MEMOIR ON THE
Sars: Tana PTA oS
the 244 October ISA?
over the
Peninsula of India
and in the
“e ARABIAN SEA. =)
ae ee s
&% Hiddiny!
dla Dowe Monti Glombe
T Back Anansi Prove Sara Glin HM Sith
the inundation ; but as this is not a surface cause, I do not allude to it.
Coringra
P* Diy
Woon 24%
Trangutbar
Wagere
PY! Calimere
Chart
To ray Fiewria Ve worn
on the.
a torms = )
IN- Twork
Bewe
oo 1% .
Ched Hadras Murvicane
of 2L th October
1842.
Tul
SA Wishing tore
alice Wh
Probable track of the Storm 224 w 24%
|
LY! Nears
3 Preparis
fs Etaneiters
)
fA
f Andaman It
UI ae
J
Gntink Q
him
et hee esi :
A rnp tel miei Cs Ui aaah
Dh
i
WW
i
bei ?
\ a oot Maas rr N ‘fy iy x r .
re ee ee aaa | i oi adds wees Jee niin! es SG
a ee eee a hs Weiser |
at } 2 viaktc} if ‘ WA dha b ea nd ode Mar : rf, ; :
n¥ae pray
1843. ] Law of Storms in India. 399
any place to the Southward of Pondicherry, she would be carried one —
way by the storm wave, and the opposite one, or partly so, say to
the S. E., East, or N. E.: by the storm current ; so that as to mere
Westing, the effect of the one would probably neutralise that of the
other. The case of ships on the Northern half of the storm, where
both forces are against him, should however be borne seriously in
mind by the seaman. It was probably the cause of the indraught which
wrecked the ships which were lost in this storm, and of some of the
others finding themselves in much shoaler water than from their run,
they might reasonably have supposed. Captain Biden’s suggestion in
the port orders, to keep a due attention to the lead in these cases is then
founded not only on merely sound nautical experience, but upon good
scientific grounds also. To neglect the lead is a positive act of barratry
or folly, for in these storms it is impossible to estimate the true distance
from the coast by any other means, and the three forces, the “ storm
wave,” “storm current,” and the drift occasioned by the wind, would
form a complex problem in fine weather. The seaman will not fail
to recollect how much influence the storm wave may have upon his
position in places where, as in the British Channel,* a storm coming
from the Westward, brings with it a vast mass of water from a great
Ocean like the Atlantic, so that with a Southerly or South-westerly
gale, he finds himself set far to the Eastward by some hitherto un-
known but fatal current: and I trust that when I say that, if we can
obtain documents, we may trace out accurately the laws of these dan-
gerous complications, I shall add another claim to the assistance of every
right minded seaman, and of every friend to humanity.
* [ allude here, it will be perceived, to the two recent and harrowing catastrophes of
the Reliance and Conqueror. In both these cases the gale being Westerly, the vessels
were on the Southern half of the storm circle, and had thus both the storm wave and
storm current carrying them far to the Eastward of their reckoning.
400
Translation of the Naipaliya Devata Kalyana, with Notes, By B. H.
Hopeson, Esq. Resident at Kathmandoo.
1. May the first born, the holy Swayambhu, Amitaruchi, Am4gha,
Akshobhya, the splendid Vairo Chana, Manibhava, and the supreme
spiritual preceptor Vajra Satwa preserve us in all our journeyings and
in all our abidings: May Prajna, Vajradhatwi, the all-bountiful Arya
Tara, and the rest be propitious to us. I adore them.
I. Fully to explain the substance of the stanzas comprised in this little manual,
would require a comment ten times as large as the text: I must therefore content my-
self with simply announcing a few of the general principles of Buddhism, which
may serve to connect the sense of the stanzas, leaving the exposition and proof of
those principles to a future occasion, if not, to more competent ability. Buddhism, as
it is to be found not only in the recent writings and present practise, but also in the
very ancient Bouddha scriptures of Nipal, recognises atheistic, as well as an atheistic,
system of the universe. According to the former, from an eternal, infinite and im-
material Adi Buddha proceeded, divinely and not generatively, five lesser Buddhas,
who are considered the immediate sources (Adi Buddha being the ultimate source) of
the five elements of matter, and of the five organs and five faculties of sensation. The
moulding of these materials into the shape of an actual world is not, however, the
business of the five Buddhas, but is devolved by them upon lesser emanations from
themselves denominated Bodhisatwas, who are thus the tertiary and active agents of
the creation and government of the world, by virtue of powers derived, immediately
from the five Buddhas, ultimately from the one supreme Buddha. This system of five
Buddhas provides for the origin of the material world, and for that of immaterial
existences, a sixth Buddha is declared to have emanated divinely from Adi Buddha,
and to this sixth Buddha, (Vajra Satwa by name, ) is assigned the immediate originiza-
tion of mind, and its powers of thought and feeling. The five, as well as the six
Buddhas, are constantly invoked collectively under the names of the Paneha and
Shata, Buddha and Ratna. All these Buddhas are often styled Ripopadaka, Manasi
and Dhyani, titles which would seem necessarily to distinguish them, not only from
the mere mortal Buddhas of the Swobhavika sect, but also from any generatively
produced beings. Nevertheless in the first stanza of this manual (no very good
authority) a sakti or spouse is assigned not only to each of the five Buddhas, but also to
Adi Buddha himself: and I suppose therefore that with respect to these Bouddha
goddesses of the Aishwarik, as we must adopt the fantastic theory of the Vedantika
Brahmanists, and consider them mere nominal deities ; until we can assert (as I think
we shall soon be able to do) that the theory of Sakties is a modern corruption of Bud-
dhism derived from Brahmanism. I am aware that the Swobhavika Saugatas typify
the innate powers of matter by a Goddess, but this is a notion totally different from
the assignation of a female medium of activity to creators working declaredly by voli-
tions, or (as the Bouddhas phrase it) by Dhyanas: and such is the statement which I
have found in respect to the ‘* Pancha Buddha”’ of the Aishwarikas in works of higher
1843.] Translation of the Netpatiya Devata Kalyana. 401
authority than the Kalyana. But to return to my text, from which I have unwittingly
too far deviated; the invocation of the first stanza is first, to the supreme Buddha,
next to the six Buddhas, (whose more familiar names will be found below, ) then to the
Sakti of Adi Buddha, and lastly to the Sakties of each of the six Buddhas. The names
of these ladies are as follow: Adi Buddha’s Prajna, Vairo Chana’s Vajradhatweswari,
Akshobhya’s Lochana, Ratna Sambhava’s Mamukhi, Amitabha’s Pandara, Amogha
Siddha’s Tara, Vajra Satwa’s Vajrasatwatmika,
2. May the Goddesses Sampatproda, Ganapatihridaydé, Vajravidra-
vini, Ushnisha, Parna, Kitivaravadana, Grahamatrikda, Kotilékshi, and
the Pancharaksha be propitious to us. I adore them.
2. The distinction of Swobhavika and Aishwarika Buddhists has already been
alluded to. There is another division into exoteric and esoteric doctrines. The god-
desses invoked in this stanza belong to the esoteric system, and to the Swobhavika
school : for they are all said to have been produced from Swobhava ‘‘each with her
own Vija Mantra.’ It may be proper here to observe that the Swobhavikas do not
deny intelligence, but immaterial entity. They insist that those powers which others
say were impressed on nature by the God who created nature are proper to matter
itself which alone is; and which is eternal, not in its palpable individual forms, but in
its impressable elements. They add that nature produces not only man but superior
beings, (though none with such a plenitude of power as man is capable of attaining, )
and amongst these beings are the goddesses invoked in this stanza. The more familiar,
and (as it were) proper name of Sampatproda is Vasundhara, of Kitivaravadana is
Marichi, of Kotilakshi is Pratingira, and the names of the five Rakshas are Pratesara,
Mahasahasrapramurdini, Maha Mayari, Maha Setavati and Maha Mantranusarini.
3. May Ratna Garbha, Dipdnkara, the Jina Manikusama, Vipasyi,
Sikhi, Viswabhi, Kakutsat, Kanaka Muni, Kasyapa, and Sakya Sinha:
may all the past, present and future Buddhas, whose excellence ex-
ceeds the bounds of the ten faculties be propitious to us. I adore them.
3. The objects of invocation in this stanza are ten Manushi Buddhas. The seven
last are the famous ‘‘Sapta Buddha,” and I doubt the propriety of associating any
other tothem. 1am told that the Karana Pundarika assigns these 10 Buddhas to the
four yugas, giving the three first named to the Satya, an idle story, or at least a legend
contradicted by higher authority, such as that of the Sambhu Purana, which makes
Vipasyi and Sikhi the Buddhas of the satya yuga.
4, May the first of the Bodhisatwas named Avalokeswara, may
Maitreya, Anauta Ganja, Samantbhadra, Kshitijathara, Khagarbha,
Sarvadyonevarakhya, Kulisvaradhara, and the great Manja Natha be
propitious to us. I adore them.
402 Translation of the Naipaliya Devata Kalyana. [.No. 187.
4. Nine Bodhisatwas are invoked in this stanza, for all of whom the commentator
claims a celestial origin and parentage, as follows :—
Aryavalokeswar, .. oe -» Son of Amitabha.
Maitreya, .. ale ee «» ditto ,, Vairo Chana.
Gagan Ganja, oul ederd 4 sei b ditto i} A Akshobihya:
Vajra Pani, .. aid ut of iditton,, sditios
Manja Natha,.. “5 oe -» ditto ,, ditto.
Samanta Bhadra, oe se es ditto ,, Vairo Chana.
Kshiti garbha, ee bi? ». ditto ,, Ratna Sambhava.
Kha Garbha,.. cas ie ee ditto ,, Amitabha.
Sarvani Varana Viskambhi, «- ditto ,, Amogha.
In this enumeration the more familiar names of the Bodhisatwas are preferred to
those of the text. This commentator was doubtless an Aishwarika Bauddha, and a
recent one who, according to the prevalent modern fashion has resolutely assigned a
heavenly origin to Bodhisatwas of mortal mould, The first (who is the same with
Padma Pani, ) fourth and sixth are notoriously celestial sons of the Divine Buddhas
to whom they are assigned, but the others, and especially Manjnath, are doubtless
of mortal origin, and historical personages.
5. May that light which, a proportion of himself, the supreme Bud-
dha caused to issue from the lotus that sprang from the seed planted
in Nagavasa by Vipasyi, and which, (light,) itself one, became five-fold
in the five Buddhas for the preservation of mankind, be propitious to
us. I adore it.
D. Here the object of invocation is to the Jyoti-rup-adi Buddha of Sambhu Nath
mountain, a portion of the supreme Buddha revealed in Nipal in the form of flame.
The legend is to be found in the Sambhu Puran, but is too long for insertion here.
It is said by the Bouddhas of Nipal, that the ever-during flame still burns in
the centre of the hemisphere of Sambhu Chaitya.
6. May that mysterious portion of Prajna, born of the lotus with
three leaves in the form of Guhyeswari, made manifest by Manja Deva,
void of form, the personification of desire, favourable to many, the
giver of boons to her worshippers, praised by Brahma, Vishnu and
Siva, revealed on the 9th day of the dark half of Marg in the fathom-
less waters (of Nagavasa), be propitious to us. I adore her. (Qy. z¢ ?)
6. The Jal-surupa-Prajna of Nipal is here invoked, a portion of Prajna (the Sakti of
Adi Buddha) in the form of water. This legend is a part of the foregoing, and is to be
found in the Sambhu Puran. When Manja Nath had let off the waters, Jyoti-rup-
Buddha was revealed: Manja resolved to raise a chaitya over the sacred flame,
but when he essayed it, water bubbled up so strongly on the spot that he could not lay
a single stone: perplexed, he resorted to prayer, when Guhyis-wari or Tal-rup-Prajna
revealed herself for a moment; so immediately the water subsided, and Manja completed
1843.] Translation of the Natpdliya Devata Kalyana. 403
the chaitya. I have translated ‘ nairatmya’”’ without form, and ‘‘ agadhe’’ in fathom-
less water, in obedience to two comments, and to the opinion of a learned Buddha,
to whom the words and meaning of these stanzas are as familiar as household terms.
7. May Ratna Singeswara, who was produced out of the union of a
portion of Maitreya and of the light of the jewel of Manichura, who
issued in the form of Srivatsa out of the riven rock on mount Mani-
chur ; whom the other seven Vitaragas reverence as their chief; and
who is the raft by which the ocean of life may be crossed ; be propi-
tious to us all. I adore him.
7. In this and the seven following stanzas the eight Vitaragas of Nipal are invoked.
Vitaraga is a portion of a Bodhisatwa, revealed under some non-human form.
In stanza 4, we have seen that there are nine famous Bodhisatwas, Of these the first, or
Aryavalokeswara, never individuated a portion of himself, nor has he any manifestation
but under a human form.
The individuated portions of the remaining Bodhisatwas are styled Vitaragas.
Maitrégas is the first, under the name of Manisingeswar, and form of a waving
flame called Srivatsa. The forms of the remaining Vitaragas are severally, alotus, a
flag, a kalas, a chowry, a fish, an umbrella, and a conch. Some say that the singa
is also a form common to all the Vitaragas, whilst others insist that singa here applied
to them means merely sign-symbol. The symbols of the eight Vitaragas are often called
collectively the ‘‘ eight mangalas.”? Manichura was a Raja of Saketa Nagar or
Ayodhya, in the crown of whose head grew an inestimable jewel, which he offered
to the gods to avert their wrath in a general calamity. The legends of the
Vitaragas are to be found in the Sambhu Puran. They are too long to be inserted
here.
8. May that portion of the Bodhisatwa Gaganganja, which at the
command of Padmapani assumed the form of a lotus, in order to relieve
the cruel Raja Gokarna after he (the Raja) had, in atonement for his
sins, become a penitent and worshipper of Padmapani on the banks of
the Vachmati, and which, as Gokarneswara Vitaraga, still remains at
the confluence of the Vachmati and Amoghvati for the purpose of
delivering the ancestors of those who pay their devotions there, be
propitious to us all. I adore zt. (Qy. him ?)
8. Invocation to the second Vitaraga under the name of Gokarneswara. Gokarna
was a Raja of Pancha Des in the East of Hindoostan, says the comment.
9. May the mighty Vitaraga named Kileswara, who is a portion of
Samanta Bhadra, and who took the form of a flag in order to frighten
the furious serpent Kulika, when he secured it with the flag-staff on
3G
404 Translation of the Naipaliya Devata Kalyana. [No. 137
the mountain of Charugiri for the preservation of mankind, be propi-
tious to us all. I adore him.
10. May Sarveswara Vitaraga, who is the portion of the Bodhisatwa
Vajra Pani, left on earth, in the form of a kalas, for the preservation
of mankind by that Deity when himself descended for the purpose of
relieving the Vajra Acharya named Sarva Pada, be propitious to us all.
I adore him.
11. May Gattesa Vitaraga, the form assumed by Manja Deva for a
portion of himself in order to awaken the ignorant and idle and sensual
Manja Gartho, and convert him into a profoundly learned sage, be pro-
pitious to us all. I adore him.
12. May Phanindreswara Vitaraga, the form assumed for a portion
of himself by Sarvani Varana Viskambhi Bodhisatwa, that Bodhisatwa
desirous of the form of a fish, the wearer of huge serpents as ornaments,
and who, having fulfilled the desires of Oriya Acharya, took the form
of a fish, be propitious to us. 1 adore him.
12. The address here (as in the other instances) is chiefly, if not solely, to the Vita-
raga: yet it is hardly possible to give unity to it: and the sense and grammar would
be improved by putting a ‘‘ may”’ before the words ‘‘ that Bodhisatwa,’’ and so making
the address both to the Bodhisatwa and to his individuated portion.
13. As Oriyana covered by his umbrella was performing penance
on the banks of the Vachmati, the Bodhisatwa Prithwigarbha suddenly
appeared, and established a portion of himself as Gandhesa Vitaraga,
the friend of all, and standing in the presence of Lokanatha, may
Gandhesa he propitious to us. I adore him.
14. Oriya, delighted at having obtained perfection by his severe
ascetic exercises, began, whilst he contemplated the son of Amitabha,
to blow the shell. At its sound Khagarbha Bodhisatwa became mani-
fest; that Khagarbha whose heart is obedient to the will of Loknatha,
and who having, in obedience to his will, issued from the conch and
established a portion of himself as Vakrameswara Vitaraga, departed
to his own abode. May Vikrameswara be propitious to us. I adore him.
14, The rendering of this stanza was a matter of some difficulty. Two or three com-
ments were referred to, and the mention of Oriya reintroduced in obedience to the best
of them, and to the living authority already alluded to. The ‘son of Amitabha,
mentioned in this stanzais Padma Pani: and the Lokanatha, Avalokeswara, and
Abjapani of preceding and succeeding stanzas are different names for the same Deity.
He is considered the Lord and Master, in an especial manner, of the eight Vitaragas.
—— ee ee ee a
1843.] Translation of the Naipaliya Devata Kalyana. 405
15. May the holy Tirtha Panya where the Saga obtained rest from
Tarkshya: may the holy Tirtha Santa where Parvati performed
penance to allay her domestic broils: may the holy Tirtha Sankaru
where Rudra went through severe austerities to obtain Durga, be pro-
pitious to us all. I adore them.
15, In this and the subsequent stanzas the fourteen greater Tirthas of Nipal are
particularized, and at stanza 20, the four lesser ones are mentioned generally.
They are all frequented at this day, and the legends are to be found in the Sambhu
Puran. They are too prolix for extraction.
Panya tirtha is at Gokarna, where the Vachmati and Amagh-Phula-Dayini rivers
unite.
Santa tirtha at Guhgeswari ghat, where the Maradarika joins the Vachmati.
Sankara tirtha immediately below the town of Patan, at the confluence of the Vach-
mati and Manimati.
16. May the holy Raja tirtha where Virupa obtained the sovereign-
ty of the whole earth: may the holy Kama tirtha where the gamekeeper
and the deer went to Indra’s heaven: may the holy tirtha Mimala-
khya, where the Vajra Acharya performed his ablutions, be propitious
to us all. I adore them. |
16. Raja tirtha at a place called in Newari, Dhantila, where the Raj-manjari runs
into the Vachmati. It is just below the Sankara tirtha Kama tirtha called, in Newari,
Phisinkhel, at junction of the Kesavati and Vimlavati. The former is the river which
the Goorkhas have taught us to call the Vishnumati, and so for Vachmati we say with
them Vagmati. Besides those two, all the other rivers mentioned are mere mountain
streamlets. Nirmalatirtha at a place called, in Newari, Biji Soko, junction of Kesavati
and Bhadravati.
17. May the holy tirtha Akara, where treasure is obtained by the
despairing poor : may the holy Juyana tirtha where the true wisdom is
got by the ignorant solely by reverencing the stream: may the holy
tirtha Chintamani, where every desire is attained by those duly per-
forming their ablutions there, be propitious to us all. I adore them.
17. Akara tirtha at a spot called in Newari, Kahang, where the Kesavati and Suvar-
navati join.
Jugana tirtha at Kadokhu at junction of Kesavati and Papanasini.
Chintamani tirtha at Pachilihvaivi where the Kesavati and Vachmati joia. his is
the great Sangam of Nipal, where its two chief rivers (they are but puny ones) unite
below the present capital.
18. May Pramoda tirtha where ablution secures pleasure : may Sat-
Jakshana tirtha whose waters engender auspicious attributes: may
406 Translation of the Naipaliya Devata Kalyana. (No. 137.
Sujaya tirtha, by bathing in the stream of which Balasura subdued the
three worlds, be propitious to us all. I adore them..
18. Pramoda tirtha at Danaga (I need hardly repeat that these names of places are
Newari,) junction of Vachmati and Ratnavati. Satlakshana tirtha at Pagakhucha,
where the Vachmati and Charumati flow together. Jaya tirtha at Nakhupoa junction of
Vachmati and Prabhavati.
19. May the Goddesses Vidyadhari, Akasyogini, Vajrayogini and
Hariti: may Hanuman, Ganesa, Mahukala, and Chura Bhikshani: may
Brahmani and the rest with Sinhini, Vyagrihini and Skanda be propi-
tious to us all. I adore them.
19, The four first Deities are esoteric Goddesses of the Swobhavika sect. A comment
says, ‘‘ Above the region of air is fire, above fire water, above water earth, above
earth Sumér mountain, above it Surya Mandal. In Surya Mandal is a lotus, out
of which, by virtue of Swabhava, Vidyadhari and Akasyogiai were reveaied, each with
her own Vija Mantra.’? The Swobhavikas usually symbolise these elements or
vijas by the letters of the alphabet. The forms of these Goddesses are very much
alike, all strictly resembling those of the terrific Goddesses of Brahmanism: and they
are all said to be givers of the powers of witchcraft and sorcery to their adorers.
The two first are said to be ranked by Amera Sinha with an inferior order of Celes-
tials, and to such an order Hariti must be referred, since she is a Yakshini; but
Vajrayogini is a Maha Devi or Goddess of the first order. Hariti’s legend resembles
that of Sitala, as whom Hariti is constantly worshipped by Brahmanical Hindoos,
though her temple is within the very precincts of Sambhu Nath.
Hanuman, Ganesa and Mahakal are names sufficiently familiar to us. Amongst
the Deities adopted by Buddhism from Brahmanism, these three are peculiar favour-
ites, because the Bouddha legends justifying their adoption are popular and clever.
The proper sentiment of the Saugatas in regard to all these imported Deities is, that
they are servants of the Buddhas, and entitled only to ‘‘ chakar-puja,”’ as a specimen of
the legends in virtue of which the gods of Brahmanism have been converted into
Bouddha Deities take the following relative to Hanuman. In the Lankavatar it is
written that when Rama sent Hanuman to destroy Ravan, Ravan oppressed by the
monkey, sought refuge from Sakya in a Vihar. Hanuman unable to violate the
sanctuary, went to Rama and told him that he could no farther press his advantage
against Ravan, because of Sakya’s protection, whose follower Ravan had become.
Rama replied ‘Go you also and serve Sakya.’ In all Sakya’s Vihars are to be found
the images of Hanuman, Ravan, Mahakala and Hariti. The Swobhavikas invoke
Mahakala, under the name of Vajra Vira, as self-existent, whereas the Aishwarikas
adopt him with his pedigree as the son of Siva and Parvati. Chara Bhikshani, is as
her name imports, a female of the mendicant order of Bouddhas, Upon the interest-
ing subject of the classification of their followers by the genuine Bouddha institutes I
can only here observe, that though Buddhism is a free and equal association of asceti-
cal saints who know no disparity of rank, save such as each may derive from his own
1843.] Translation of the Naipdaliya Devata Kalyana. 407
superior efforts of bodily mortification and mental abstraction, yet it has a technical
fourfold division of its followers (very similar to that which distinguished the old
Monachism of Europe) into Arhans or perfect saints, Sravakas or studious saints,
Chailakas or naked saints, and Bhikshus or mendicant saints,
Brahmani and the Matrikas call for no remark. Sinhini and Vyagripini are their
servants. The Aishwarika Skanda is in all respects similar to the Brahmanical
Skanda: but the Swobhavikas (move suo) make him self-existent.
20. May the two great tirthas, the source and exit of the Vachmati:
may the four lesser trithas: may the Kesa Chaitya on the Sankhocha
hill, the Salita Chaitya on the Jatochha hill: may the Devi of Phul-
lochha hill, and the Bhagavati of Dhyana prochha hill, be propitious to
us all. J] adore them.
20. The four lesser tirthas are named Tara tirtha, Agastya tirtha, Apsara tirtha, and
Ananta tirtha. They are four kunds, situate at Vachdwara.
Saukhocha hill is that which the Goorkhas have taught us to call Sivapura. In
Newari, it is Shiphucho. The legend of Kesa Chaitya says, that Krakut Chand Bud-
dha cut off the forelocks (and so made Bouddhas) of 700 Brahmans and Kshetriyas on
the spot. Half the hair rose to Heaven, and gave origin to the Kesavati (Vishnumati)
river: the other half fell to the ground, whence arose numberless Chaityas in the form
of Singas, a small mass of hair becoming in each the ‘‘palus’’ of the Lingakar
Chaitya. Lalita Chaitya, says the Sambhu Puran, was founded by the disciples of
Vipasya.
Jatachha hill on which it still stands, is the Arjun of the Goorkhas, called in Newari,
Jamacho.
The Devi of Phullochha is Vasundhara, under the form of a conical piece of rock :
the hill we call, after the Gorkhas, Phulchok. The Bhagavati of Dhyana Prochha is
a portion of Gukyeswari or Prajna, under the form of a conical stone, the hill the
Goorkhas have taught us to call Chandragiri.
21. May the Chaitya of Sri Manja on Sri Manja hill, erected by his
disciples: may the five deities established in five separate places by
Santasri: may the Puchagra Chaitya, where Sakya expounded the
unequalled Purana, be propitious to us. I adore them. *
21. Sri Manja Hill is the Western part of mount Sambhu, between which Sri
Manja there is a hollow, but no separation. The Chaitya still stands.
The five Deities established by Sata Sri are Vasundhara Devi in Vasupur: Agni
Deva in Agnipur: Vayu Deva in Vayupur: Naga Deva in Nagpur: and Gakya Devi
in Santipur. All are on mount Sambhu around the great Temple. ‘The legend in
the Sambhu Puran says, that Santasri was a Kehstriya Raja of Gour Des, named Pra-
chanda Deva, who abandoned his kingdom, and coming to Nipal was made a Boud-
dha by Gunakar Bhikshu, with the name of Santasri.
Pachagra Chitya is on the hollow level of mount Sambhu.
408 Translation of the Naipdliya Devata Kalyana. [No. 137.
22. May the King of Serpents residing with his train in the Adhara
lake: may Vighnantaka: may the five Lords of the three worlds
named, Ananda Lokeswara, Haribari-hari-vahana lokeswara, Yaksha
malla lokeswara, Amoghapasa lokeswara, and Trilokavasankara lo-
keswara, be propitious to us all. I adore them.
22. The Iegend is the same with that alluded to in stanzas 6,7, and 24. The ser-
pent King is named Karkotaka, his realm formerly extended all over the valley whilst
it was submerged in water. Now he dwells in a tank near the town of Cathmandu
assigned to him by Manja Nath, when Manja, let off the waters that covered Nipal.
The Adhara lake or tank is called in Newari, Ta Dahong.
The five Lokeswaras are Bodhisatwas. Ananta is called in Newari, Chobha Deo,
and Yaksha Malla, Tuyu Khwa.
23. May the esoteric deities named Hevajra, Samvara, Chandavira,
Trilokivira, Yogambara, with their several attendants: may Yaman-
taka and the other nine Kings of wrath, be propitious to us: may the
exoteric divinities Aparimitayu and the rest, Namsangiti and the rest,
be propitious to us. I adore them.
23. The esoteric deities enumerated first, belong to the Swobhavika sect. Aparimi-
tayu is in Buddha, and his associates as follows :—
1. Aparimita Gun, Buddha. Oo. Suryottama Prabhasa, Buddha.
2. Guna Ratna Sri, ditto. 6. Vahuvihita Teja, ditto.
3. Aparimita Parti, ditto. 7. Asaukheya Kalpa, ditto.
4. Sahasreswara Megha, ditto. 8. Subha Kanaka, ditto.
Namsangiti is also a Buddha, and Ais associates as follows :—
1. Dridha Surya, Buddha. 3. Supuspita, Buddah.
2. Bhaishajna Guru, ditto. 4. Ratna Keta, ditto.
24, May Manja Deva, who having come from mount Sirsha with
his wives and two Devis divided the southern mountain with his
scimitar, built the town of Manja Pattan for the pleasant abode of the
human race, and worshipped the deity sitting on the lotus, be propi-
tious to us all. JI adore him.
24, The language, physiognomy, architecture, manners and customs of the Newars
clearly prove their Northern extraction, and in the Sambhu Puran, a person called
Manja Ghok is distinctly related to have led a colony into Nipal from China: for
Sirsha Parvata is said to be situated in China, meaning probably Bhote. The making
Manja a Dhyani or Celestial Bodhisatwa is a mere trick of modern superstition. The
town of Manj Pattan founded by Manja has perished, but tradition still gives it
a locality half way between mount Sambhu and the Paspati wood, and tradition
is countenanced by the fact, that at this day quantities of building materials are often
dug up on the assumed site of the town.
!
as
1843.] Translation of the Natpaliya Devata Kalyana. 409
25. May -Abjapani, the chief followed by Hayagriva, Jatadhari
lokeswara, and the rest, who came from Sukhavati Bhavan, then pro-
ceeded to the mountain Putala, and being thence called by the Raja
Deva Huta to remove accumulated evils, was established with many
rites in Lalitapur, be propitious to us all. I adore him.
23. Hayagriva (said to be the same with Bhairava) Jatadhari and the rest rea
Abjapanis (Padma Pani) warders and menials. The names of the rest are
1. Sudhana Kamara. 6. Akalmritya.
2. Ajita, 7. Jaya.
3. Aparajita. 8. Vijaya.
4. Marsainya. 9. Abhaya Prada.
5. Varada. 10. Dhanada
The Buddhmargy legend here alluded to is not supported by the authority of any of
the Bouddha scriptures of Nipal, but rests on mere tradition. Abjapani is universally
identified with Padma Pani, the fourth Dhyani Bodhisatwa. The application of
the name and attributes of the Yogeswara Matsgendra Nath to this Deity is a
corruption introduced by the Siva Margi Newars, and scouted by the Bouddhas in whose
hands exclusively is the ministry of Abjapani’s idol. The Bouddhas, however, have
no objection tothe Siva Margi Newars, and even Brahmanical Goorkhas making offer-
ings to Padma Pani under any name they please, and in fact, all orders and sects
unite in swelling the Yatra or procession of this Deity. The Bouddha tradition says,
that upon the occurrence of a dreadful famine, Narendra Deva,a Raja of Bhatgong and
Bandhudatta, a Vajra Acharya of Pattan, invited Padma Pani to N ipal. A quaint
distich familiar to the learned Bouddhas fixed the date of Padma Pani’s arrival at 1382
years from the present time. This subject is worthy of more attention than 1 have
yet given it. By due pains (and they shall not be wanting) I hope to procure
hereafter some written account of this event.
Notice of two Marmots inhabiting respectively the plains of Tibet and
the Himalayan Slopes near to the Snows, and also of a Rhinolophus
of the central region of Nepal. By B. H. Hopeson, Esq.
1. Arctomys Himalayanus of Catalogue. Potitis, 7ibetensis hodie.
Mihi. Structure typical. Tail not exceeding in length one-fourth of
the body and head. Mbolars five-four, first above unicuspide and
cylindrical in its body and tuberculous on the crown: the rest double,
low, flat and rather hollow crowned, but with a slight heel on the inner
extremity (towards the tongue,) and a groove between two transverse
ridges towards the cheek. Pelage of two sorts; hair and wool: hair
the more copious, straight, elastic, adpressed, rather harsh, an inch one-
410 Notice of two Marmots. [No. 137.
eighth to one and a quarter long: wool wavy, a third less long, not
found on the body below, or tail, or head, or limbs, Hair triannulate.
from the base, with dusky brown and yellow (of a canescent rather
than rufescent cast) and black, the last ring much the shortest, and
found only on the upper surface of the body : the woolly fur biannulate
only, wanting the dark tips of the hairs. General external hue, a sub-
rufescent cat-grey: beneath from chin to vent yellow : limbs and
cheeks the same, but deeper toned and inclining to rufous: bridge of
nose and last two inches of tail, dark brown. Twenty-two to twenty-
four inches from snout to vent: tail with the hair, five and a half to
six and a quarter. Palm and digits (exclusive of the nails) three and
a quarter: Planta, ditto ditto, three and six-sixteenths. Sexes alike,
and of nearly equal size.
Habitat Tibet. Social and gregarious.
2. Arctomys Hemachalanus, Mihi, Structure typical, but the digits
furnished with a basal membrane. Tail exceeding a third of the length
of the animal. Mbolars five-four, the firs tin upper jaw as in the last:
the rest transverse and having their broad crowns sulcated round a
horse-shoe ridge, in lower jaw cupped between four tubercles placed at
the angles of each tooth. Pelage softer and fuller than in the above,
of two sorts, or hair and wool, and nearly in equal quantities. Hairs
straight, fine, elastic, and about one inch long: wool wavy and two-
thirds only the length of the hair. Both hair and wool triannulate
from the base with dusky, rufescent, and black, and nearly in equal pro-
portions, the dark tips being ample wherever they exist, that is, on all
the superior surface of the body and head, but not on the belly, nor
limbs, nor sides of the head, nor ears; general colour dark grey with a
full rufous tinge which is rusty and almost ocherous red on the sides
of the head, ears, and limbs, especially in summer. Bridge of nose and
last inch of the tail dusky brown. Head and body above strongly
mixed with black, which hue equals or exceeds the pale one on those
parts. From snout to rump twelve to thirteen inches. Tail five and
a quarter to five and a half. Palma, less than the nails, two and three-
sixteenths. Planta, ditto ditto, two and fifteen-sixteenths. Sexes alike,
and of nearly equal size.
Habitat the Himalaya with the Ehote pergannahs or Cachar in the
immediate vicinity of the snows. Social and gregarious.
1843. ] Notice of two Marmots. All
-Remarks.—I cannot doubt that the above two species are distinct,
because the Trans-Hemalayan animal is nearly twice as large as the
Hemalayan, and possesses a proportionately much shorter tail, not to
dwell on the difference of habitat, which however seems to be invaria-
ble. In structure and in manners the two species, for the most part,
correspond entirely, and the difference of colours is chiefly in intensity
of hue.
Many years ago I possessed, alive, a specimen of the larger or Tibe-
tan species of Marmot, which was as tame as a rabbit, and lived at large
in the house. I have lost my notes on it, but recur to the fact, lest any
one should tax me with multiplying species incautiously. I cannot
now doubt, on full consideration, that the larger and lesser species are
distinct ; and I may add, that in my old specimen of the larger one, the
crowns of the cheek teeth are nearly levelled by attrition. I have
recently had two or three of the lesser species alive for months in my
garden. The last lived above a year and quarter with me, when it died
of an accidental wound. ‘These individuals dwelt together in amity,
were very somnolent by day, more active towards night and in warm
weather, but did not fall into a permanent sleep in the cold season,
perhaps because they were regularly exposed to the sun in the day
time. They were fed on dry grains and on fruits, such as pears, pome-
granates, and plantains. They slept rolled into a ball and buried in
the straw, with which their case was amply supplied. Over their meals
they would frequently chatter a good deal in a very audible tone, but
were usually quite silent. They were very tame and gentle for the
most part, but would sometimes bite and scratch like rabbits, uttering
a somewhat similar cry. On foot they are by no means active, though
more so than the Rhizomys. Nor are they very prone to digging, but
will slowly excavate a subterrene abode for themselves if permitted.
Their structure is plantigrade, but of the ambulatory, not fossorial or
scansorial modification of that type; and, whilst their massive heads
and jaws and powerful incisors indicate immense power in reaching, as
well as masticating their food, their talons exhibit no development of
the pre-eminent digging type. The following particulars of the external
and internal organization of the lesser species will probably prove
acceptable to the real students of Zoologyg Head large, massive,
conico-depressed, with eyes and ears equally and considerably remote
oH
4}2 Notice of two Marmots. LNo. 137
(12 inch). Culminal line of the head considerably arched along the
nasal bridge, at the end of which the curve is lost in the prominence
of the orbits, and subsequently in the fatness of all the cerebral part of
the head, muzzle nude in front only, and not grooved. Upper lip not
cleft, but full and incurved to the sides, so that the inside or palate is
partially hairy. Lower lip very short and adpressed, nares short,
ovoid, scarcely angulated or turned to the sides. Incisors very strong,
white, rounded anteally, the upper pair directed nearly downwards, the
lower pair forwards in a small crescented curve from the bases, where
a large mass of gland is found on dissection, but no cheek pouch.
Molars five-fourths, the first above unicuspide, and furnished with one
tubercle on the subconic crown: the rest with broad transverse crowns,
either cupped between four tubercles at the corners, or sunk within a
horse-shoe ridge, the ends of which point to the cheek. Mustachios
longish reaching to ears, not rigid, but very elastic. A similar but
smaller tuft on each cheek, and above and before each eye, and others
still smaller on the chin and behind the carpus, as well as before it or
in front of the arm. Eyes medial, midway from snout to ear, pupil
oblong. Ears small, erect, rounded, as broad at top almost as below,
and very simple in structure, or devoid of all membranous processes.
‘Helix inflected anteally, but not fissured posteally, and moderately
clad, inside and out, as far down as the conch, the longest hairs forming
a ‘fringe along the upper margin, but no¢ so that the ears can be called
tufted. Body full, moderately elongated: limbs medial, plantigrade,
ambulatory, of moderate subequal strength before and behind. Fore-
arm about as long as the hand, including the wrist and nails. Palm
wholly nude, soft, pretty full with two large subtrigonal basal or carpal
pads, the inner of which supports and envelopes the rudimentary thumb,
which has however its tip free and furnished with an andromorphous
nail. There are three round terminodigital balls for the four fingers
which are gradated as in man’s hand, but have their bases connected
by a distinct crescented membrane. Behind the digits are about as long
and as stout as before, and are similarly connected by membrane, but
the fifth digit or thumb is here fully developed and free, as long
proportionately as in our hand, but rather feebler than the other digits,
and having like them an,anteal, not antagonistic position. The sole is
nude to the heel, and about twice as long as the longest digit, soft and
1843. ] Notice of two Marmots. 413
smooth, with four proximate roundish balls for the bases of the five digits,
and two small vague ones for the metatarse placed subcentrally as to
the entire length of the planta, and transversely in the same line. The
tail without the hair is about half the length of the body without the
head. It is not thick at the base, and thence gradually tapers, being
rather fuller of hair than the body, and the hair exceeding the tail
itself by about one inch, where it forms a blunt termination.
The anal and genital parts are void of any peculiar glands or pores.
In the females the teats are twelve, and extend from the armpits to the
back of the groins. In one specimen [I find but ten mamme: the
larger species has twelve decidedly. The talons have the general cha-
racter of those of our Mesobema, [olim Urva], being of medial subequal
size, hardly larger before than behind, moderately compressed, rounded
above, and scooped below towards their blunt extremities. The
intestines in one specimen (female) measured ten feet and four inches :
in another (male) eight feet and a half, and in the former the stomach
along the greater arch was five inches and a half, and along the lesser
two inches, while in the latter it was only four by one and a half. In
the female, whose intestinal canal was ten-four, the czecum was found at
three-two from the anal, and was two inches long by one and a half in
diamater, cylindric in shape and curved lunately as it lay in situ.
The larger gut was one inch wide, and the lesser half that width. The
stomach was purely membranous and (as flatted on a table) of an-at-
tenuate pyriform shape, having the upper orifice terminal, and the
lower remote from it, but so as to leave a good sized fundus.
N. B.—There is a prior description of the large Marmot in the
Journal, Vol. X, p. 777.*
* In Mr. Ogilby’s ‘Memoir on the Mammalogy of the Himalayas,’ published in Dr.
Royle’s Volume on the Botanical productions of that immense range, we read that —
‘Dr. Falconer, in the report of his recent journey to Cashmere and _ Little Tibet, men-
tions a rodent under the name of the Tibet Marmot, which he says was first found on a
bleak and rocky tract of country, immediately after passing to the northern slope of
the great Himalayan range; but we have no further knowledge of its characters:
however, this is precisely the locality in which mammals of this description might
naturally be expected to abound.’’
It is not improbable that the Lepus hispidus, Pearson, described in the ‘ Bengal
Sporting Magazine,’ as quoted by Dr. McClelland in Proc. Zool. Soc. for 1839, p.
152, should also be referred to this genus: I hope to be soon able to procure specimens
of it.—Cur. As, Soc.
414 Notice of tvo Marmots. [No. 137.
3. Rhinolophus Perniger, Mihi. Structure typical. Inguinal teats,
distinct large cup-shaped frontal sinus. Tongue considerably exten-
sile, fleshy, full, smooth anteally, subpapillate towards the gullet, nose-
plate spreading amply to sides, and exceeding the edge of the upper
lip, flat and free all round the margin, merely membranous, furnished
with two salient processes, whereof the lower or anteal one is like a
-door-knocker, and the upper or posteal, a graduate spire. Ears very large,
much longer than the head, shaped like a broad acutely pointed leaf,
transversely striate, nude save at base, their fine points slightly drooped ;
the false or inner ear semicircular in form, and anteally much attached
to the cheek, so as to fold over the orifice of the auditory passage,
where it doubles upon the anteal part of the helix. Tail six-jointed,
shorter than the body, and its full membrane squared nearly between
the spread radii or metatarsal processes. Wings ample: thumb free
and furnished with a nail: first finger one-jointed and no nail; the rest
three-jointed and unarmed. Fur longish, very soft, lax and slightly
curled. Colour uniform black, embrowned on the nude cutaneous parts,
slighted tipped with silver on the back. Snout to rump three inches
and a quarter (female,) tail two and one-eighth; head one and five-
sixteenths, expanse seventeen ; ears from anteal base one and eleven-
sixteenths, from the crown of the head or posteal base one and six-
sixteenths; fore arm two and five-eighth; second or longest finger
four ; leg or tarse one and three-eighth ; foot from os calcis to end of
talons thirteen-sixteenths. .
Habitat, the central region of the Sub-Himalayas: shy: never ap-
proaches houses or the cultivated country: dwells in the deep forests
and caves of the more precipitous mountains. [Mr. Hodgson has sent
some other spicees of this genus, with descriptions; but as the Society
expects shortly to receive from Europe M. Temminck’s Monograph of
the Rhinolophi, I deem it better to await the arrival of that treatise
on the group, before venturing to determine Mr. Hodgson’s and some
other species of Horse-shoe Bats in the Museum.— Cur. As. Soc. |
Nepal, February, 1848. | B. H. Hopeson.
415
Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.
Wednesday Evening, 3rd May, 1843.
The Honourable W. W. Biro, President, in the Chair.
Captain Goopwyn and Lieut. Srracuey, of the Corps of Engineers, pro-
posed at the last Meeting, were ballotted for and duly elected Members of
the Society.
Ordered.—That the usual communication of the election be made to
Capt. Goopwyn and Lieut. Srracuey, and that they be furnished with the
rules of the Society for their guidance.
Messrs. BranpretH and Cust C.S. were proposed as Members of the So-
ciety by the Honourable the President, seconded by Sir W. H. Seton.
Library.
The following Books were laid before the Meeting :—
Books received for the Meeting of the Asiatic Society, on the 3rd May, 1843.
The Oriental Christian Spectator. Bombay, April 1843. Second Series. Vol. iv,
No. 4. Presented by the Editor.
Proceedings of the London Electrical Society, 1842-3, pts. Sth and 6th. Presented
by the Society.
London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Journal of Science.
3rd Series. December 1842. Vol. xxi, No. 140.
Annals and Magazine of Natural History. London, November 1842. Vol. x, No. 64.
Statistike Tabeller for Rongeriget Norge ler till 5e. Reekke irreg. (Tableaux
Statistiques sur la Norvége. Série ler,-5e.) Presented by the University of
Christiania.
Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne 11 Hefter (Nouveau Magazin pour les
Sciences Naturelles, publieé par la Société Physiographique 4 Christiana, 11
Cahiers). Presented by ditto ditto.
Lezrebog i Mechaniken of Chr. Hansteen, 2 bande, (Cours complet de la Mechanique,
par le Professeur C. Hansteen, 2 tomes). Presented by ditto ditto..
‘¢‘ Heimskringla’’ eller Snorre Sturlesons Norske Kongers Sagaer med 3de, Karter
og fure Slaalsteb, (Chroniques des Anciens Rois de la Norvége, par Snorre Sturle-
sons, édits par T. Aall, avec Cartes et beaucoup de Planches). Presented by
ditto ditto.
Abels Varker, 2 bande, (G#uvres complétes du Mathématicien Novégien, N. H. Abel,
redigeés par ordre du Roi, par le Professeur B, Holmboe). Presented by ditto
ditto.
Descriptio Ornamentorum Aureorum et Nummorum in Norvegia Repertorum, 1825,
scripsit C. Holmboe. Presented by ditto ditto, (2 copies).
De Nummis medii Aevi, in Norvegia nuper Repertis particula Posterior, 1837. Pre-
sented by ditto ditto.
416 Asiatic Society. [No. 137.
Aarsberetning for det Kongelige Norske Frederiks Universitets for Aaret 1840,
(Annuaire de |’ Université, 1840). Presented by ditto ditto.
Norges Statistik af Schweigaard. Ist deel, (Statistique de la Norvége, par Schwei-
gaard, tome ler). Presented by ditto ditto.
De Mutationibus Virge Magnetice, Auctore Christophoro Hansteen, 1842. Pre-
sented by ditto ditto.
Index Scholarum in Universitate Regia Fredericiana, 59 ejus Semestri, 1842.
Presented by ditto ditto, (2 copies).
Gaea Norvegica, 1838, Earstex Heet. Presented by ditto ditto.
Universiteterne i Christianas. Upsala, 1836. Presented by ditto ditto.
De Prisca re Monetaria Norvegie, scripsit C. A. Holmboe, 1841. Presented by
ditto ditto.
Indby Delsesskrift i Anlidning of den Hoitidelige Nedleggelse of Grundstenen til
Nye Byginger for det Kongelige Norske Frederiks Universitet Trediveaarsdagen
efter dets Stiftelsc den 2den September, 1841. Presented by ditto ditto.
Read letter from Mr. Officiating Secretary Davipson, No. 48, of 12th
ultimo, communicating the acknowledgments of the Government for the
offer, by the Society, of copies of a Sindee Vocabulary about to be published
under its superintendence, and stating, that twenty-five copies of the work
would be sufficient for the use of Government.
Read letter from Capt. H. M. Duranp, Private Secretary to the Right
Honourable the Governor General of 8th ultimo, informing the Secretary
that His Lordship would wish twenty-four copies of the Sindee Vocabulary
to be sent to the Government of Bombay, the like number to the Secretary
in the Political Department with the Governor General, and one copy
to Major Leech, C. B.
Read letter from N. B. E. Bartuie, Esq. of 24th ultimo, wewapittiig the
office of Member of Committee of Papers, and promising to render every
assistance in his power to the best of his ability.
Read the following letter from Mr. R.S. Mauine, of 2nd ultimo, present-
ing specimen of some Oil extracted from Nuts, the produce of trees called
by the Natives Nipal Ukrote.
Dear Sir,—I beg to forward herewith a small quantity of Oil extracted from Nuts
the produce of trees called by the natives Nepal Ukrote, of which I have some few in
my compound. I am unable to give you the real name of the tree, but in order that
you may discover it, I send you, accompanying, some of its leaves and blossom, also
some of the nuts it bears. The leaves so far as I can recollect, are precisely similar
to those of the Sycamore, and the tree itself resembles it very much, so far so indeed
as to lead me to suppose, (until I observed the nuts it bore,) that it was the Sycamore —
tree. From enquiries that I have made, I learn that the full grown trees I have
were planted by Mr. Clerk of the Civil Service, some 28 or 30 years back ; they flourish
well here, and are of speedy growth. I planted some last rainy season, which are already
1843. ] Asiatic Society. 417
five and six feet high, the tree itself is ornamental, and to shew how profitable a plan-
tation of them would be if cultivated for the sake of the oil, I annex the following :—
Say, 40 Trees upon each Beegah, see pli nisie iO
Each Tree averaging 13 maund of oil,.... cldne vatatoitl A
60
Such oil would fetch at the least even in Calcutta, 12 Rs. Hee 12
qgper maund. eoce wees cece eres :
Rs. 720 each Beegah,
from which must be deducted the cost of manufacture, which, however, would in all
likelihood be paid for by any crop on the same ground, such as Indigo, Mustard, &c. &c.
I extracted the oil sent you by pressure, in a manner exactly similar to that in use in
the manufacture of cold drawn castor oil; the nut itself I have eaten, and found very
palatable, farmore so I think than the walnut, and I never experienced any bad effects
from eating it. The natives say it is a purgative, but I did not find it so. At the present
season the tree is particularly handsome, being covered with a handsome white blossom,
which contrasts well with the large dark leaf of the tree. It is my intention to send
some of the young plants I have to the Agricultural Society, and I shall have much
pleasure in sending you as many young trees, and as much seed as you may require.
Yours very faithfully,
Baugundee, 2d April, 1843. W. Matina.
P. S.—You will not fail to observe the remarkable difference between the leaves
attached to the blossom, and those separate, and yet they are off the same tree.
Read the following Letter and Memorandum from Captain Macteop, of
Moulmein, of 10th ultimo, on a specimen of Black Dye, of which samples
were on the table :— .
My pear TorRENS,
The accompanying will speak for itself, the black colour conveyed by the Dye is
the most beautiful I have seen. I would write more on the subject, but the letter and
the Dye have just reached me, and | fear to delay, the Steamer being on the point of
starting. Yours very truly,
Moulmein, 10th April, 1843. W. Mac.eop.
Zimmay, February, 1843.
*«T have the pleasure of sending you aspecimen of the Black Dye. I made the experi-
ment myself, and find it is produced from the pulp growing round a kind of plum ofa
very light colour inside, until broke, exposed to the air and sun, when it gradually
assumes the intense Black Dye, and becomes insoluble in water, and must go through the
same process as Indigo, both being insoluble in water. The manner of dying silk is
very simple ; it is immersed in a quantity of the pulp mixed with water sufficiently thin,
and either dipped or rolled over the silk which immediately being exposed to the sun
grows darker, and if not sufficiently dyed, this is repeated; it requires but a small quan-
tity todye a quantity of silk.
I shall bring down with me a piece of Long Cloth I have had dyed; the process of
dying cotton is different, it is first put in a solution of Indigo, dried, and then immersed
and exposed to dry, becomes entirely black. ‘he natives keep the Indigo in solution; with
418 Asiatic Society. [ No. 137.
it is mixed a great quantity of lime; no boiling or hot water is used in the process. Should
you have an opportunity, send the specimen to the Society in Calcutta in my name, and
I will bring a box down to be sent to England, as well as some Indigo ; and enquire of
them, if there is any premium for the production of a Black Dye that requires no
sulphate of iron.
Read the following letter from Professor Houmsog, of the university of
Christiana.
Christiana, le 21 Sept. 1842.
; MESSIEURS.
Les Directeurs de la Société Asiatique de Calcutta.
Etant informé par mon compatriote Mr. Bonnevie, que Messieurs veiulent bien
vous mettre en rapport avec notre Université afin d’échanger des articles scientifiques, |
je prends la liberté d’envoyer ci-joints 215 monnoies, dont les 160 sont de la maison
d’Oldenbourgh, non plus en cours, et les 55 des monnoies du 12me siecle recemment
découvertes, sur lesquelles j’ai publié un mémoire, dont un exempWMire est aussi
ci-joint.
Possedant deja plusieurs des monnoies, que les Anglais ont fait frapper pour les
Indes, il nous serait particuliérement agréable de recevoir des pieces frappées par les
princes indigénes. Sur tout il nous interesserait beacoup de recevoir de celles,
qui passent sous le nom de Indo-scythiques ou Indo-bactriques, et dont Messieurs
Masson et Honigberger ont trouvé de grandes quantités dans 1’ Affghanistan.
Veuillez agreér l’assurance de la parfaite considération, avec laquelle ja’i l’hon-
neur d’étre, :
Messieurs,
Votre trés humble et trés obéissant serviteur,
F. Hotmsor,
Professeur des Langues Orientales é 0 Université
Royale de Christiania, et Directeur de son Cabinet de Médailles.
Read the following letters, giving cover to papers for publication in the
Journal of the Asiatic Society ; viz. of 21st April, from Mr. Officiating Se-
cretary Davipson, with a Report by Mr. Commissioner Lusuineron, on the
results of the mining experiment conducted at “‘ Pokhree in Gurhwal.”
Of 15th April, from Capt. H. M. Duranp, with a brief History of Khelat,
by Major Leecu, C. B., and a Journal of a Tour through parts of the Pun-
jab and of Affghanistan, by Agha Abbas of Sheraz, arranged and translated
by Major Lercu, C. B.
Of 11th April, from E. C. Ravensuaw, Esq. C. S. with a memorandum on
the construction of a “ Portable Meridian,” ordered to be published ac-
cordingly.
Read letter from Mr. James Reynoups, Secretary of the Oriental Trans-
lation Fund, dated London, 14th February 1848, requesting remittance
of the subscription of the Asiatic Society for 1842 and 1843, amounting
to £21.
The remittance ordered to be made by a set of bills.
1843.) Asiatic Society. 419
The Secretary presented to the Society sundry Fire Arms of the manufac-
ture of Lahore, Cabool, and various places of Hindoostan, being as fol-
lows :—
Dokh, or Hindoostanee cut-and-thrust Sword.
Two Peshawur Firelocks, mounted after the Native and English fashions, lock made
by Cashmeeree Gunsmiths of Loodiana to imitate Tower locks.
A Gun.
A Lahore Matchlock, purchased from one of Runjeet Singh’s Ghorchurras.
Knife used by the tribes about the Khybur Pass, as Afreedees, Momunds, &c.
A small box, containing some dust of the Sandal-wood gates of Somnath was also
presented, and examined by the Members. The impression was general, that the gates
were really of Sandal-wood. A copy of the Inscription and the Report of the Com-
mittee of Engineer Officers had been sent with the box, but had been sent off for early
insertion#in the Journal without any copy being retained. The drawing of the gates
had not yet reached the Secretary’s hands. The subject was therefore ordered to be
again brought to notice at the next Meeting.
Read the following Report from the Curator of the Museum of Economic
Geology, for the month of April last :—
Report of the Curator Museum Economic Geology for the month of April.
Museum Economic Geology.—We have completed searching out and arranging our
Indian Copper Ores, and the collection comprising 72 specimens from Kemaon, Gurh-
wal, Nepal, Shekawattee, Ajmere, Nellore, and Ramree is now upon the table. Much
is yet wanting to complete this series, but we shall no doubt soon receive contributions.
Mr. Commissioner Lushington’s report on the Government experimental working of
the Kemaon mines, which is presented this evening from Government, is a highly
valuable record for future guidance, but we may remark upon it, that the outlay and
the depth penetrated are trifling when compared with mining adventures in Europe, so
that rich beds or veins may still remain to be reached by future adventurers in this
locality.
Mr. Blundell, Commissioner, Tenasserim Provinces, has sent us an interesting paper,
with specimens, being an analysis by Dr. Ure of London of the Magnetic Iron Ores
and Limestones of Tavoy, which are upon the table. His letter is as follows :—
Moulmein, 7th April, 1843.
My pear Sir,—Having last year sent home some specimens of the Iron Ores of these
Provinces, I have lately received achemical analysis of them by Dr. A. Ure, and think-
ing they might prove acceptable in the Museum of Economic Geology, I now beg to
forward to your address, a box containing similar specimens.
Inclosed is a copy of the memorandum which accompanied the specimens I sent to
England, and of Dr. Ure’s report on them.
The box is on board the Honorable Company’s Steamer Hooghly, and will be deli-
vered to you by Captain Ross.
Yours truly,
G. H. BLUNDELL.
From Captain Newbold, M. N. I. Assistant Commissioner of Kurnoul, we have to
acknowledge a specimen of a remarkable barren soil from that part of Southern India,
the label to which best describes it,
oun
420 Asiatic Society. [No. 137.
Jairi Soil from Kurnoul, infertile, very impervious to water, used for flat roofs of
native houses in Kurnoul as a protection against rains.
I have not yet been able to examine this soil, but it is remarkably like one from
Cheduba brought by Captain Halsted, also quite infertile, and is probably like it, ren-
. dered so by being almost a pulverulent Iron Ore, rather than a soil.
Geological and Mineralogical.—We have received from the University of Christiana,
in addition to several valuable works noticed in the Librarian’s report, a small but valu-
able series of Fossils and Geological and Mineralogical Specimens, in all 50 in number,
which are on the table. Of these, the Fossil and Geological Specimens are entirely new
to our collection, but some few of the Mineralogical ones we already possessed. It is
to the exertions of Captain Bonnevie of Tirhoot, a member of that University, that the
Society is indebted for this very handsome donation, which it will be our duty to return
in the best manner we can, and by the earliest opportunity. Captain Bonnevie’s letter
is as follows :— “
To the Secretary of the Asiatic Society, Calcutta.
Sir,—It is about nine months since, at the suggestion of Mr. Blyth, I wrote to the
University of Christiana in Norway, proposing an interchange of natural productions
and scientific works between that body and the Asiatic Society. I have now the honor
to enclose a letter, with accompanying lists of articles sent by the University, and beg
to inform you, that the packages shall be forwarded to the Society immediately on their
arrival. ;
I have been requested to inform the Society, that in the list of minerals, the ‘‘Acmite”’
~ Crystal, No. 35, is now very scarce, as the spot where it is found is becoming exhausted,
and also, that the specimen of ‘‘ Gadolinite’’ No. 44 is of great value. It is a very rare
production, and mostly found in small pieces mixed with other substances.
The University would feel very gratified to receive in return any minerals or rare
fossils peculiar to Asia, and if procurable, Casts in Gypsum of the cranium of the Sivathe-
rium and other fossil animals of the like kind that have been discovered in this country.
In the lists of books, you will observe a work styled ‘‘ De Mutationibus Virge Magne-
tice,’’ by Professor Hansteen. I have been requested by him to suggest to scientific
men in India, to make as many observations as possible on the dip and the variation of
the Needle. As the suggestion of a learned and influential body like the Asiatic So-
ciety will have weight, when those of a humble individual like myself would be deem-
ed presumptuous; perhaps the Society will be kind enough to assist the Professor by
urging these observations on its numerous scientific members scattered over India.
I have the honor to be, Sir,
RUNGPORE, Your most obedient servant,
The \9th February, 1843. C.S. Bonnevie.
Mr. Frith has kindly sent us a curious specimen of Wood reduced to brown Coal and
Lignite, which was taken from a well now digging at Dum-Dum by his father.
. H. PIppINGTON,
Curator, Museum Economy Geology.
For all the Presentations, the thanks of the Society were accorded.
JOURNAL
OF THE
ASIATIC SOCIETY.
Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. By Capt. W.
J. E. Boyus, 6th Light Cavalry, Assistant to the Commissioner
Kemaon and Gurwhal, with four Plates.
[ We have, from press of matter and other causes, been hitherto unable to do justice
to Capt. Boyes’ valuable and interesting communication: not the last we hope from
his pen on a subject so little known, and of such boundless extent as Indian Ento-
mology ; and those who know the difficulties attending the creditable execution of deli-
cate plates by native artists, will we trust, as well as the author, make due allowances
for our anxiety that his beautiful labours should not be marred in our hands.—Ebs. ]
Having observed that the genus Paussus among the Coleopterous In-
sects, has been placed with the Tetramerz in every work on Entomology
it has hitherto been my fortune to peruse, I am induced to forward to
you the accompanying extracts from a note book which I have kept
some time past, in hopes that the observations therein cited, may in-
duce others more competent than myself to observe, and perhaps assign
what I conceive might be a fitter place to the above-mentioned Genus.
Stark in his Natural History, correctly states, as far as I can vouch
from my own experience, that the number of joints in the tarsus of the
Paussus is five; which circumstance alone, should, I imagine, have
proved a sufficient reason, for the removal of this Genus from the
Tetramerous to the Pentamerous section of Coleopterz ; but as it will
be observed from the following notes, that in addition to its general
form, which. in outward appearance approximates to many of the
Carabici, that it is also, similarly with several of the latter genus,
No. 138. New Sertss, No. 54. 3K
422 Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. [No. 138.
endowed with the faculty of crepitation, attended with the same results
observable in many of these, their removal may (I think) well be
warranted from the place they now hold to somewhere in the vicinity
of Aptinus or Brachinus.
Regarding their form, it may be noticed, that the head is generally
narrower than the thorax, or at most of the same width, eyes promi-
nent, mostly reniform, sometimes ovaliform or gibbous ; the body when
viewed from above appears oblong, with the elytra either of one
breadth throughout, or narrowed anteriorly, depressed and truncated
posteriorly in most species ; those which have the elytra of a uniform
breadth, curved or sub-cylindrical above, present a rounded emargina-
tion to the wing cases at their latter extremities. The palpi though
small, are salient, the labial ones being subulate; those of the maxilla-
ries appear composed of four joints, of which the first is thicker than
the rest ; they differ from the labials in being arched from about mid-
way, turning inwards until their apices are so approximated, that they
appear to meet. .
The abdomen is oblong, oval and tumid at the posterior extremity,
sometimes of one.breadth throughout, but more generally narrowed
anteriorly. The femur in each fore-leg presents in many species a
longitudinal and rather deep sulcus, which when the leg is contracted
admits the tibia. The tarsus is composed of five joints, of which the
first, though very minute and nearly concealed beneath the spine of
the tibia, is still very distinguishable with a magnifier, particularly
when the insect is in motion. The thorax resembles the form which
obtains in that part of most of the Carabici, being generally cordiform,
truncated posteriorly, with margins produced, though some species
have it angulated in front and irregular.
In flight, the Paussi are exceedingly easy and agile, the lower wing
when expanded being in comparison to the size of the insect of large
dimensions, and when they alight, the movement is so sudden, and the
elytra are closed so instantaneously over the lower wings, that they
appear as having dropped down to the spot on which they rest, and
where they generally remain several seconds previous to again at-
tempting to move; facts which I have also remarked as practised by
many Carabici. Its walk, however, entirely differs from that of this
last mentioned genus, for instead of being nimble and occasionally
1843.] Haxtract from Note Pook regarding the Genus Paussus. 423
rapid, I have never seen it moving but in a slow and sedate manner, at
which time the antennz are extended to the front of the head, and to
these is occasionally given an upward vibratory motion. What should
bring these insects in nearer conjunction with the genus Carabus is the
curious fact, that on being seized they emit from the anus a very acrid
liquid, accompanied by an explosion, and attended with a strong scent
resembling that produced by Brachini, and other allied genera when
similarly treated ; and although in minuter quantities, it is abundantly
sufficient to produce a very sensible heat, and the crepitation may be
distinctly heard and felt. Wherever the skin has been subjected to
its action, discoloration immediately ensues of a reddish brown color,
_ which soon after turns to a brownish black, resembling the stain pro-
duced by the touch of caustic, and which remains permanently fixed
for many days after.
The explosion is occasionally repeated three or four times succes-
sively, at which periods a vapor may be observed to accompany each
crepitation, attended with a strong, and very penetrating odour, some-
thing like that of nitric acid.
In one species I possess, the last segment of the abdomen is provided
with two large bundles of hairs, resembling densely set brushes, which
under the microscope are objects well worthy of examination ; each
hair appears like a fibre of golden-colored glass, and so closely are they
arranged, that it is only on being disturbed that their true character
can be discerned ; yet notwithstanding the aid afforded by the move-
ment, the hairs composing this curious appendage are only so far
separable as to appear like a wetted painting brush. In another insect
of the same genus, and probably differing only from the above-men-
tioned one in sex, the abdomen beneath, near the penultimate segment,
is provided with two curved spines in addition to the hairy protu-
berance already noted. In a third, the posterior end of each elytra
gives support to a moveable incurved spine, projecting over the last
segment of the abdomen, and which when submitted to the microscope,
appears strongly accuminate, and somewhat in the form of the ex-
tremity of a scorpion’s sting. ,
In addition to these curious organs, several species are provided near
the exterior margin of the elytra, at the posterior extremity, with a
| small papillaceous follicle, giving cover to an elongated appendage of
ty
a
424 Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. [No. 138.
the same description, which is attached to the upper exterior margin
of the abdomen, and which by the aid of a pin’s point may be lifted up,
and in a slight degree outspread, but collapsing immediately the im-
pediment is removed. It would be difficult to assign reasons for the —
different addenda in the form of these insects, and observation alone
can afford a clue to their uses, but that they are objects of extreme
utility, and perhaps absolutely necessary in their economy as is easily to
be conceived. Possibly the last mentioned appendages may be a
source of further protection granted these curious insects, which are
brought into play as danger may threaten; for in one I captured on the
night of the 30th ultimo, and which flew into the lights on the table,
I observed that when placed under the microscope, if these papille
were touched, that they possessed the power of discharging a yellowish
milky liquid, resembling pus in consistency, and which speedily over-
spread the lower part of the elytron, granulating into small egg-
shaped grains. On repeating the irritation the same results occurred,
and in order to be certain of the fact, I tried each elytron twice with
the same effect. In my first trial the emission was so sudden and took
me so much by surprise, that viewing the insect through the medium
of the microscope, I fancied it sufficiently near to be injurious, and
incontinently let it fall. I should mention, that in all these trials, each
emission was accompanied with a faint acidulous odour. Although the
appearance of each discharge obtained on the elytron, I am inclined
to believe, that properly speaking, it issued from the foliaceous appen-
dage on the abdomen, and that it spread over the wing case in con-
sequence of the peculiar shape of the shards at the part which over-
laps the extremity of the above-mentioned organ, but my experiments
were unfortunately closed, ere I could satisfy my doubts, as my servant
in removing the microscope to another table contrived to lose my spe-
cimen; since which I have been unsuccessful in making a recapture.
At one time previous to my loss, I was inclined to believe that a mi-
nute perforation existed in the exterior angle of each elytron, with
margins sufficiently elastic to allow the liquid to pass through, closing
immediately after the emission, but I could not bring myself to any
certainty on this point. .
After capture, the Paussus may be made to lose its powers of crepi-
tation by too much irritation, at which time it will resort to a very
.
|
1843.| Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. 425
common ruse practised by many insects, and similate death, contract-
ing all its legs towards, but not close to, the abdomen, in which posi-
tion it will remain so long as it continues to be disturbed. This
circumstance, as far as I have hitherto noticed, is not a common prac-
tice among the Carabici, though very generally adopted by almost all
the Heteromere.
I may here observe, that many of the latter section of Coleopterz
possess the power of forcing out a very caustic liquid, which exudes
from the pores of the abdomen, and at the joints between the femur
and tibia of each leg, a practice commonly resorted to when they are
being seized. This liquid stains the skin wherever it happens to touch,
to a purplish black, remaining on the part for many days after ; and so
corrosive is its nature, that it is only when the epidermis peels off,
that the stain is removed. If plunged in hot water, a strong emission
takes place from the anus, and the water is discolored to a purple, or
ink black, according to the number of insects used, or requiring to be
killed. In a similar treatment of a Paussus, a crepitation may be heard,
and the abdomen becomes greatly distended, probably by rarefaction
of air contained in vessels which give their assistance in its explosive
powers, and the part retains the inflated appearance until a small per-
foration has been made in it with a needle’s point, or such like instru-
ment, which allowing the escape of the confined air, enables the abdo-
men to contract to its natural size. The same fact is peculiarly re-
markable in many species of Brachinus.
Regarding the habits of the Paussus, my experience can give little
or no aid, for of the seven species which I possess, one was captured
on a heap of manure while searching for Slaptryini at Mhow in Malwa;
a second came accidentally into my net while sweeping in some high
grass at Sultanpore, Benares ; three species were taken at night, gene-
rally between the hours of nine and ten Pp. M., having been attracted by
the light on the table; another was rescued from the clutches of a small
black ant, which circumstance I notice merely, because a belief exists,
that the Paussi inhabit ant-hills, and the last was found crawling up
the wall of my bathing room, from which the only conclusion I can
arrive at is, that they are most frequently on the wing at a late hour of
the night, and as noted in my memoranda, generally after rain. I now
proceed to give the extracts alluded to, just as they stand, together
426 Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. | No. 138.
with drawings, from which the accompanying sketches have been taken.
The originals being colored, I have preferred doing the copies in
outline, that a lithograph might be the more readily and correctly
produced, should this article be considered worthy of publication. The
original drawings have in all instances been taken from the living
insect, and which I shall be happy to forward if required. In the two
first, Nos. 1 and 2, the minutiz were not alluded to, and being at
some distance from my collection, I regret I am at present unable to
give any delineations of their forms ; latterly, having taken greater in-
terest in the genus, more has been done, and it now only remains with
me to assure you, that in the facts and experiments cited, I have
always leaned to the doubtful side, and I therefore trust, that the
errors which have crept in, (either as regarding the characterizing of
my specimens, or the conclusions I may have arrived at,) will receive
the indulgence an unpractised hand may merit.
No. 1. Fig. 1.—Mhow, July 19, 1839.—Genus Paussus, length
7-20th of an inch, body brown, deeper in the middle of the elytra.
Antenne of two joints, of which the last is large, cuspiform, and having
dentated edges with a scallop between each tooth, apex rounded exterior-
ly, basal angle produced, accuminate and forming a tooth at the end of
the superior margins. Lower portions carinated, front view resem-
bling the bows of a boat, head light brown, rounded posteriorly, emar-
ginated in front, sunk nearly to the thorax, and bearing a minute
depression in the centre of its upper part in the form of a diminutive
horse-shoe. Eyes round when viewed from above, reniform when seen
in flank. Thorax sub-octagonal, with rounded margins anteriorly,
angulated and scolloped at the corners posteriorly, bisected in its
centre, the posterior portion bearing a strongly produced emargination,
which crosses transversely in the form of a bracket. Tarsi simple,
cylindrical, the last longest, the first very small, almost invisible,
of five joints in each leg, all of which are furnished with hairs
beneath. Elytra truncated posteriorly, of a uniform width through-
cut, slightly depressed, body oblong, flattened, palpi conical, not very
salient, maxillary ones tumid at base and over-arching the labials.
Taken on a heap of manure at Plassie near Mhow.
Note.—This is the first insect of the kind I have seen at this place,
and differs very much from the one I captured at Nusseerabad, which,
1843.| Hxtract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. 427
I included in the collection given to Dr. J.’s lady, since taken to
Edinburgh.
No. 2, Fig 2.—Mhow, July 27, 1839.—Genus Paussus, length 6-20th
of an inch, body brown, rather deeper in color near the sutural margin
of the elytra. Antumz of two joints, the last having an elongated
pedicle resembling an intermediate joint, the club is pear-shaped when
viewed from above, irregular if seen in flank, edges compressed, form-
ing a carina which is produced into a small tooth near the basal angle.
Head has the front slightly emarginated in front and rounded, narrower
than the thorax from which it is exserted, eye rather large for the
insect, rounded when seen from above, reniform when viewed on the
side. Thorax cordiform, broadly truncated posteriorly, having a trans-
verse sinus crossing its centre. Klytra narrowed anteriorly, rounded
on the posterior external margin, squared on the internal one, abdomen
tumid and very like many of the Carabici I have been lately taking.
Tarsi of five joints, the first of the posterior tarsus scarcely discern-
ible, unless the foot is put in motion; last joint longest, all of them
cylindrical or ob-conical, and furnished with a few hairs beneath.
Note.—This insect came into the lights on the table sometime after
gunfire last night.
No. 3, Fig 3.—Sultanpore, Benares, June 21, 1840.—Genus Paussus,
length 10-20th of an inch. Antenne of two joints, the last of which is
massive, spindle-shaped when seen from above, irregular when viewed °
at the side, upper margin produced, and forming a recurved tooth at
its basal angle, at the side of each club. Near the base is a slight im-
pression somewhat in the form of a cocked hat, three rather deep
sulci cross the club near the centre, extending half way down each
side. The head, thorax and antenne, are a light reddish brown.
The under-part of the body, together with the abdomen and legs, are of
a dark brown, tarsi almost black. The elytra are black with a margin
of sienna brown, or light chesnut, and are densely covered with silvery
hairs, apparent when viewed through the microscope. Near the pos-
terior external margin of each elytron, is a curious appendage I have
not previously observed in these insects. The abdomen has its latter
segments very broad, and appears distended. The thorax is cordi-
form, broadly truncated posteriorly, with the posterior external angles
slightly produced and rounded, a deep sinus in the form of a bracket
428 Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. (No. 138.
appears to divide the thorax into two nearly equal portions. The
head is almost triangular, with a rather deep excavation on the frontal
margin; the posterior part of the head presents a strong emargination
rising in an arch between the eyes, which last are large, prominent,
rounded from above, reniform if seen at the side. Palpi elongated,
conical, those of the maxillaries overarching the labial, approximated
near their tips, and apparently of four joints, of which the first is by
far the thickest, the last cuneiform. This Paussus with its congeners
is surely misplaced, and erroneously classed with the Tetramerse, for
the joints in all the tarsi are visibly five, and may be readily dis-
tinguished with the naked eye.
Note.—It struck me that of the three I captured last night, one crepi-
tated, or made an explosion similar to that produced by the Brachini,
and most certainly while I now write my finger and thumb bear marks,
as of caustic or something like it, though I assuredly have not used any
thing of the kind for many months past. We have had very heavy
rain for the last eight days; yesterday was the first fine day we have
had since the rain set in, which may account for my great good for-
tune in capturing so many as three of these highly curious insects, all
of which by the bye came in late, for it was near one a. M. before I got
to bed. |
Note Book.—Sultanpore, Benares, June 22, 1840.—Captured ano-
ther Paussus similar to the three taken on the 2Ist instant, but it
unfortunately fell into the oil of the lamp, and was killed before I could
try its crepitating powers, which I more regret, as it is quite uncertain
when I may again procure a specimen. I have already noticed that
we have had very heavy rain for several days past, and insects both
last night and on that of the 21st were more numerous than I ever
remember to have seen before. A lamp I placed outside for the pur-
pose of attracting them to its light, was after a minute or so, extin-
gyished by the immense numbers which flitted about it, and to save
the wanton destruction of life, I was compelled to cover the lamp with
a wire shade at the expense of much light. As for myself, I could
scarcely remain near the spot, though covered from head to foot with a
black blanket ; even with this precaution, my hair and clothes were so
covered by the myriads which swarmed around the light, and caused
me so much annoyance by getting under my dress, that I was forced to
1843.| Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. 429
make a virtue of necessity, and strip myself to a pair of light trowsers
and white night cap, but for which I considered myself amply repaid in
the capture of many new, and to me rare, specimens. Among the most
common were several varieties of Carabus, four entirely new to me,
Hegeter, Tenebrio, Agieliz, and swarms of minute Capride. Of the
rarer sorts I took two new Cicindelz, two Colymbetes and very beau-
tiful Haliplus, which I had never before seen. All these came around
the light in numbers, but Staphylini and the smaller Orthopterous
insects were incredibly numerous. I was almost black with them, and
the sensation produced over my back, arms and legs, from the multi-
tude of grasshoppers and crickets which were constantly jumping on or
off me, and crawling in every direction, was very similar to what is
called ‘‘ needles and pins,” or a ‘foot asleep.” Great indeed was the
enjoyment of a bathe with some dozens of ghurrahs filled with cold
water, which I poured over my head before retiring to rest at one A. M.
I should also mention, that on visiting the Commandant of my Regi-
ment this morning, I found that he also had captured a Paussus last
night, similar to those I have been lately taking, between the hours of
nine and ten P. M., and rather strangely to say, his specimen had
shared the same fate as my last, having fallen into the oil-burner on
the table. '
No. 4, Fig. 4.-—Sultanpore, Benares, July 24, 1841.—This Paussus
has already been figured in the 2d vol. of the Transactions of the Ento-
mological Society, by W. W. Saunders, Esq., but as his drawing though
highly characteristic, must (I conclude) have been taken from a dead
specimen, perhaps a dried one, I have thought it worth while, if only for
my own satisfaction, to make another delineation of it from a living
specimen which I this morning captured, having succeeded in rescuing it
without damage from the gripe of a small black ant, which in spite of
its struggles was bearing it along with the utmost facility, holding on
by one of its antennez. Length seven-twentieths of an inch. The head ‘is
rounded posteriorly and sunk into the thorax. A deep cavity with edges
in the form of a horse-shoe, the anterior margins of which are levelled
towards the front, is a prominent feature in this organ. The bevelments
terminate at the front just above the forehead, at which spot they
turn upwards a little, and appear to spread out in the form of a rather
deeply emarginated clypeus. In the centre of this excavation are two
31
430 Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. [No. 138.
minute vesicles, resembling the eyes on the anterior extremity of the
scorpion, of a resinous color and lustre. The antenne are composed
of two joints, the last very large, somewhat irregular, approaching
in form to navicular. The edges of the upper margin present the
appearance of a screw, both edges meet posteriorly, and form a slightly
recurved spine. projecting from the basal internal angle. The club
when viewed at the side, resembles a butcher’s cleaver. The thorax
has its upper portion cardiform, and appears as if fitted into a cavity of
the lower part, which latter also presents a crenulated edging extend-
ing the whole breadth of its centre. The margins of the thorax, head,
and particularly the screw-formed edging of the antenne, appear
translucent, and in color very much resemble shell lac. The eye is
kidney-shaped, but appears round when viewed from above. The palp;
are short, and not very salient. The abdomen is turned and gibbous
near the cloaca, and its extremity is furnished with two large bundles
or brushes of densely set golden colored hairs, having also a vitreous
appearance, and which are only rendered distinguishable by being dis-
turbed with the point. of a pin or such like implement; these hairs I
found so very closely arranged, that even with my greatest care in try-
ing to separate them, I never once succeeded in singling out a fibre:
they always remained in bundles, or in the form of a moistened paint-
ing brush. _ I must not omit to state, that the character of this curious
appendage was (I believe) first made known to the world by W. W.
Saunders, Esq. ; at all events my observations on it were induced from
what I read in his account of this Paussus, published in the 2nd vol. of
Entomological Transactions. |
The elytra which are black, with their anterior and posterior margins
of a pinkish brown, have their surface closely covered with silvery
hairs, and near their posterior external margins the curious folicle I
have already observed in No. 3, is very apparent. The abdomen is of
a dirty yellow or Isabella color, approaching to light umber, and near
the penultimate segment beneath, there are a pair of spines which
curve slightly outwards, for what intent and purpose I cannot conjec-
ture. Breadth of elytra and abdomen equal throughout. Tarsi evi-
dently of five joints, the last longest.
Note.—I tried all I could to induce this specimen to crepitate, with-
out success. Probably its battery had been expended in its struggles
1843.] Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. 431
with the ant, from which I captured it. On being touched, it would
immediately similate death, and remain with contracted legs for many
minutes at the bottom of the tumbler in which it was placed. The
second day becoming more and more lethargic, and fearing its death
might ensue, I plunged it into hot-water, at which moment the abdo-
men became very much distended and glabrous; but this was the
nearest sign I could perceive of any approximation to the Brachini.
No. 5, Fig 5.—Sultanpore, Benares, August 17, 1841.—I this day
captured the Paussus delineated as No. 5, which I however consider to
be of the same species as No. 4, but differing in sex. On being captured,
it immediately emitted two loud and very distinct crepitations accom-
panied with a sensation of heat, and attended by a strong acidulous
scent. It left a dark-colored stain on the fingers resembling that pro-
duced by caustic, and which had a strong odour, something like nitric
acid. A circumstance so remarkable induced me to determine its
truth, for which purpose I kept it alive till the next morning, and in
order to certify myself of the fact, the following experiments were
resorted to. Having prepared some test paper by coloring it with
a few petals of a deep red oleander, I gently turned the Paussus
over it, and immediately placed my finger on the insect, at which
time I distinctly heard a crepitation, which was repeated in a few
seconds on the pressure being renewed, and each discharge was accom-
panied by a vapor, like steam, which was emitted to the distance of
half an inch, and attended by a very strong and penetrating odour of
nitric acid, in every respect (as far as I could judge) similar to that
produced by many species of Brachini, I have frequently had opportu-
nities of trying. On removing the Paussus from the paper, I found
that a large spot was formed, near the place where the abdomen had
been, and extending backwards for one-third of an inch. The paper
appeared strongly corroded as if with caustic, the color of the spot
being light brown, and totally distinct from the purple of the surround-
ing surface. Having repeated this experiment four times during the
day with the same results, and being perfectly satisfied that I could not
be mistaken, I proceeded to kill and set the specimen. On being
thrown into boiling water, the abdomen swelled up and appeared like
an inflated bladder, being very much distended, assuming the same
appearance as that which is observable in Brachinus and other
,
432 Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. {No. 138.
allied genera, when they are similarly treated, and which I have had
hundreds of opportunities of verifying. From these facts I presume,
that there is a greater connexion betwen Paussus Carabus than is
generally believed, and perhaps they might be removed with advantage
to the vicinity of each other. It was only when I commenced setting
my specimen for the cabinet, that I observed that it differed slightly
from my No. 4. I may therefore give the description.
The principal points in which it differs are: first, in the thorax, the
cremelations which cross its centre being more deeply sculptured and
foliated ; secondly, the antennz instead of leaving their upper margins
in the form of a screw, are dentated, having four rather large scallops
on each side, one between each tooth ; and lastly, the abdomen, though
provided at its posterior extremity with the brushes noticed in No, 4,
wants the spines beneath the abdomen, which latter organ instead of
being of one breadth throughout, is narrowed as it approaches the
thorax. In length it is the same, being 7-20th of an inch long,
including the antenne when placed at an angle with the body,
and of the latter organs the last joint is the largest, of an irregular
form, or nearly boat-shaped, with dentated margins above, which ter-
minate at the posterior and superior angle in a tooth. The excava-
tion on the head is very deep, at the bottom of which, the two vesicles
similar to those noticed in No. 4 are very apparent, and highly resinous
in lustre. The palpi are somewhat more salient, but at the same time
more attenuate than in that insect. In its markings, there is also a
strong resemblance, but the abdomen is slightly darker, and the pink- —
ish brown patches at the posterior and anterior margins of the elytra
are broader and better defined. I should notice, that in each experiment
on the detonating power of this insect, I have used a different finger
in giving the small degree of pressure required to induce its crepitating ;
all of which have been well marked, but those of the last two trials
are not quite so dark as the stain left on the three first, and I am
anxious to see how long they will remain on my hands. Although I have
for some time past suspected the fact, that the Paussus had the curi-
ous property observable in some of the Carabici, and which (I imagine)
is believed to be inclusively attached to them, it was not till the cap-
ture of the present specimen that I determined to try the truth of my
surmises. The present insect having been taken by a lady in com-
|
1843.] Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. 433
pany, who from the sensation she felt beneath the finger, concluded
she had mistaken a small Brachinus for a Paussus, and the skin of
which, bore evident marks of the displosion, I have been induced to
make these experiments, and the results have been as above stated.
Captured No. 5 at a quarter after nine P. M.
Note.—August 29, 1841.—All the marks off my right hand.
Note.— September 3, 1841.—I have now lost all the stains on the
fingers of my left hand, which I received in the experiments performed
on Paussus, No. 5, by which it appears, that those of the left hand have
remained 18 days, or 6 days longer than those on the right. This is
singular enough, and | can only attribute the loss of the marks so much
earlier in the right hand fingers to attrition, and more constant use,
as the stains left were certainly much deeper in the three first trials
than in the latter ones, and where I used the first, second, and third
fingers of my right hand respectively.
No. 6, Fig. 6.—Sultanpore, Benares, September 5, 1841.—This
Paussus has the thorax somewhat similar to that part of No 1 which
I captured at Mhow, but in other respects differs considerably.
Length 6-20th of an inch. The antume are composed of two joints,
of which the last is very large, and in the form of a wide-mouthed
cornucopia, being attached to the first at its basal angle. The mar-
gins of the upper side are slightly crenulated, and the upper surface
is rather deeply excavated, giving this part a cuspiform appearance.
Anterior and posterior margins compressed, the latter produced into a
blunt recurved tooth. The sides of the club are faintly striped with 6
grooved bands ; the eye when seen from above appears round, of an ir-
regular oval shape when viewed from the side. Head trigonal, depressed
with a marginal excavation, but no groove on the upper part. The
‘thorax appears as if composed of two portions, the anterior being
angulated, and forming a rather sharp spine on each side, with its base
inserted in the posterior part. This latter portion is crenulated, with
the exterior margins produced and rounded; a sulcus in the form of a
bracket crosses the centre. The elytra are black, broadly patched
anteriorly with brownish sienna, the posterior margin has a faint unde-
fined line of the same color, which blends into the general black of the
wing cases. The folicles at the exterior margin of the elytra posteri-
orly are much produced, and close to them on each side is a very
434 Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. [No. 138.
curious moveable spine, slightly incurved, and projecting over the lat-
ter segment of the abdomen. Body beneath a bright chestnut ; head,
antenne and thorax a livid brown; all the joints in the tarsi are simple,
cylindrical, furnished with hairs beneath, and of five joints in each leg,
the first small, the last longest.
Note.—Taken accidently while sweeping in high grass with a net
under a Munja clump, (Saccharinum Munja.) On withdrawing this in-
sect from the net, it gave two very distinct explosions, leaving the ordi-
nary black stain on my fingers, the abdomen also swelled very much
when submitted to the hot-water process.
No. 7.—Sultanpore, Benares, September 6, 1841.—A very curious
Paussus, length 6-20th of an inch. Antenne of two joints, the
last long, club-shaped and grooved all round, forming six divisions,
which, however, I could not discover to be perfoliate. The first joint
near the base beneath is furnished with a small curved spine, above
which, near the club, is a minute oval excavation. Head hexagonal,
irregular, somewhat gibbose; eyes not visible from above, rounded
when seen at the side. Thorax cordiform, broadly truncated posteriorly,
with two small depressions on each side. Abdomen cylindrical, or
shaped like-a tub, palpi small, salient, the labial ones being over-arched
by those of the maxillaries. No follicle observable on elytra. Tarsi of
five joints, all simple, the first exceedingly minute. The coloring in
this insect is peculiar; the last three divisions of the antenne, and
lower half of the elytra, are blue black. The head, antenne, thorax,
abdomen, and upper portion of the elytra, a bright light sienna. The
legs and tarsi chestnut.
Note.—-Found crawling up the wall of my bathing room. On being
plunged into hot-water, the avdomen became greatly distended ; but I
observed no crepitation at this moment, or at the time of capture.
No. 8, Fig. 8.—Almorah, July 29, 1842.-—Genus Paussus, length
9-20th of an inch. Head gibbous, strongly excavated both anteriorly
and posteriorly, exserted from the thorax, the neck appearing very
long. Antenne of two joints, the last long, shaped like a peas-cod and
bearing a small recurved tooth near ‘the base of the upper’ margin,
edges compressed, and forming a carina on each side. Thorax cordi-
form, broadly truncated posteriorly, with the lateral margins produced: —
a sulcus in the form of a crescent runs across the thorax near its
|
|
|
;
ie
4
1843.] Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. 435
centre. Elytra slightly narrowed anteriorly, and when viewed through
the microscope appearing smooth, with diminutive frettings running in
irregular lines down each; these are blue black, with a line of brown
extending along the sutural margin, and a shading of the same color
obtains both anteriorly and posteriorly. Head, thorax, and body chest-
nut brown; tarsi of five joints, the first small. Palpi rather large, sali-
ent, those of the maxillaries in particular. Eyes almost oval, but still
uniform. Follicle on the elytra very apparent.
Note.—On capturing this insect which came in towards the light on
the table some time after gun-fire, last night, I distinctly heard two
strong crepitations, and my fingers were deeply stained with a brown-
ish black color, and I accordingly reserved it for further trials, but un-
fortunately it appeared so weak this morning, that I was after ineffec-
tual attempts to induce crepitation, obliged to postpone my experi-
ments to a future date. On being killed with hot-water, the abdomen
however shewed the usual sign, becoming greatly inflated.
Almorah, July 30, 1842.—I have indeed been fortunate in capturing
the same species of Paussus as that of the 29th instant, and which was
taken under precisely similar circumstances, having come to the lights
at about 10 p.m. The crepitation on its capture was loud and very
distinct, so much so, as to be heard by the company at table, and cer-
tainly equal to that of most of the small Brachini. I therefore tested
its powers this morning again, having prepared some post paper with
the petals of a deep colored Dalilia. I went through the old trial. The
insect being carefully turned over it, I attempted its seizure, and as ex-
pected, a loud explosion was given, accompanied with vapor, and a
strong scent of nitric acid. (I have the pleasure to transmit the paper on
which the experiments were tried which bears two distinct marks, hav-
ing only tested this insect twice. )*
I now proceeded to examine the foliaceous appendage on the elytra
through the microscope, and I found that when the part was touched,
an emission immediately took place from the spot, which spread so
instantaneously over that part, that I could not observe exactly
whence it originated. The appearance of the liquid resembled pus,
which in a second or two granulated (if I may so term it) into egg-
shaped grains, of which no traces remained after a lapse of a minute.
* We have not received this.—Eps.
436 Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. [ No. 138.
I tried each elytron twice with precisely the same results; during each
emission a faint acidulous odour prevailed, and the part being touched
with my finger, imparted that scent in rather a stronger degree to it.
Having taken a drawing of the insect, I directed my servant to remove
the microscope to another table, and in so doing, he unfortunately drop-
ped the specimen, and has thus brought my experiment to a close.
Should the foregoing observations be considered worthy of publica-
tion, I shall be happy to transmit further extracts from my Note Book
as occasion may present, or apply myself to any other point of utility
in which my services may be deemed acceptable.
I also take this opportunity of enclosing the copy of a very magni-
ficent species of Scarabeus, which I was so fortunate as to capture a
few days since. The form appears familiar to me, and I fear may not
be new to science; but having no means of referring to books on the
subject myself, perhaps you can supply the required information ; at all
events, as it strikes me to resemble the general form assumed by the
equatorial Scarabei, it will be interesting to know that this insect was
captured at an elevation of near 9,000 feet above the level of the sea,
having been taken on the summit of the Gogur range in Kumaon, and
was found feeding on the leaves of a tree unknown to me, but which I
believe to be a species of Maple. Length three inches, weight one
ounce, head and thorax a jet glossy black, the former furnished with a
large recurved horn in the form of a sickle, compressed at the base.
The thorax presents four protuberances, two above and two on the an-
terior margins. Scutellum black, elytra light chesnut brown, abdomen
and legs deep chocolate. The maxillaries curiously dentated at their
apices, and furnished with hairs. Maxillary palpi of four joints, the
last spindle-shaped and longest, the first conical and smaller than the
second. Mandibles, which are corneous and squared, jut out consider-
ably beyond the sides of the head ; they are also thickly set with hairs,
both on the internal and external sides, labial palpi very small. Antennz
of ten joints, the first conical, the next three nearly round; the club is
composed of three leaflet joints, and the intervening ones are nearly cus-
piform, the tarsi are simple, of five joints, the last much produced. Hooks
nearly equal in length, and furnished beneath with a stiff seta, which near
its apex is split into a brush-like form. Taken August i7, 1842,
above Budlakhote, Kumaon. The drawing is taken of the natural size.
y
Fig:4
Se
Cw
. Lhe,
Nady ae ian ong
Bia
Ma cabal Paes. (le er oli bi?
Me
=e"
1843.] Extract from Note Book regarding the Genus Paussus. 437
The accompanying letters refer to the sketches of the Paussi equally
with the Scarabeus: a, antennz ; 6, posterior tarsus; c, abdomen; d,
side view of head ; e, inferior view of head; f, underwing ; g, spine of
elytra; h, folicle or elytra; 2, maxillary palpus and maxillar.
Almorah, September 16, 1842.
Memorandum on the construction of a Portable Meridian. By E. C.
RavensHaw, Esq., B. C. S.
lst. Those who have visited the Cathedral of Florence, or the
Church of Saint Petronio at Bologna, may recollect having observed a
straight line running down the whole length of the aisle, and a small
round hole in the wall of the building, about fifty or sixty feet above
the level of the pavement. A traveller who should enter either of the
said churches about noon, would not fail to be struck by the mysteri-
ous conduct of those about him ; a dozen watches of quaint forms and
various sizes would be seen to spring suddenly from the fobs and
waistcoat pockets of people as quaint and peculiar as their timepieces.
Their eyes would be seen to be intently fixed on some object on the
ground, and the traveller would naturally imagine that the toe-nail of
a saint or a martyr was about to perform a miracle, the exact period of
which it was as important to fix as that of the transit of Venus. On
joining this interesting group, the traveller would find that the object
_ of solicitude was a bright round spot caused by a ray of the sun pass-
_ ing through the aperture above mentioned, which is seen slowly ap-
| proaching the line that runs down the centre of the aisle. This line is
a meridian, and when the bright round spot arrives at, and is bisected
by this line, the sun intimates to the spectators, that he has reached
_his meridian altitude. The watches are returned to their fobs, and
_ voices dre heard muttering in Italian, German, French, and English,
|
1
| plimentary remarks upon the artists who manufactured their watches.
2d. Imitations of these magnificent meridians are made on a small
either self-congratulations on the accuracy of their Breguets, or uncom-
\ scale by individuals for private use ; a wooden rod or pedestal, about a
foot high, having an iron plate with a hole in the centre, fixed at right
angles on the top of the pedestal, forms the substitute for the wall
| of the Cathedral ; one of this description is (or was two years ago) to
3M
438 Memorandum on the Construction [ No. 138.
be seen at a window in’ the house of the Catholic priest adjoining the
Church at Bettiah in the Chumparun district. ‘A French gentleman,
(now Principal of the Dehli College,) acquainted me with the method
of laying down the meridian line from the above instrument, and I
have since then constructed several. All these meridians are of course
fixtures, but it occurred to me, that if a portable one could be made, it
would be extremely useful when travelling about the country in tents,
and an excellent substitute for one of Dolland’s Universal Dials.
Though inferior to the latter in the circumstance of shewing only one
hour in the day ; viz. twelve o’clock, yet it would be superior in shewing
that hour with an accuracy unattainable by the Universal Dial, owing
to the variation of the compass by which the latter is always set. The
variation of almost every needle differs considerably, so that a know-
ledge of the general or average variation of the compass at a par-
ticular place, does not afford any information as to the variation
of the particular needle in your dial, and without ascertaining
this point, no dependence can be placed on the time given by the
dial. A variation of one degree makes a difference in time of
Higa uane tds oa about five minutes, and the annexed
No. 4, 2°38 0” Variation East, memorandum, made by Lieut. Thuillier,
21 O January 1841 ‘
39 0 atCuttack. (the Revenue Surveyor of Cuttack in
; These needles 1841,) shews, that among a number of
re . puddle needles, all of the same length, some
‘ Ns ee ve differ from others to the extent of 4°;
supposing the latter to be the variation of the needle in an Universal
Dial, there would be an error in the time of about 20 minutes.
PRISMATIC COMPASSES. 3d. The Portable Meridian which I
Instrument.
No. 2. 1° 15 0" Variation East, am about to describe, if accurately con-
Arai 0) 3
gail 9:
)
nes
mHermnnwwre
=
fo)
peor Spier OF) dl 23 : :
log l45n0. 0 sees long. structed by professional instfument-
¥ BS; Be e makers, such as Dolland, or Troughton
29 s 55
f2 an 3 6 and Simms, would give the time with
¢ og amit much greater, if not perfect, accuracy,
93 nd J ° ae
» 2d. 1 15,0 as it would be free from all errors arising
3 2d 150 ge
» 40°3 45 0 from the variation of the compass.
Tees oe ( This instrument, shewing (or professing
», 21. 1 3815 to shew) the true meridian, would also
1843. | of a Portable Meridian. 439
enable any person, however unscientific, to determine the variation of
any needle in a minute by mere inspection. The altitude of the sun
or moon,* when on the meridian, can be read off with equal ease, and
the latitude of any place ascertained with the aid of a Table of Decli-
nation pasted on the lid of the box. By fixing sights at each end of
the meridian line, the instrumeut would serve for taking levels; and
last, though not least, would enable Surveyors to lay down a long
meridian line for the base of all their triangles, with much less difficul-
ty than is experienced in many of the usual methods. Though simple
and easy in theory, many of these methods are difficult in practice.
They require that an officer, perhaps suddenly ordered out to make
the survey of a district, should be in the possession of certain instru-
ments and certain astronomical works, which are not always to be ob-
tained. For instance, the most approved method of laying down a me-
ridian is said to be by observations of equal altitudes of the Polestar ;
but without the Nautical Almanac for the year, which is not always :
to be obtained, it often requires nights of watching, and the patience
of a Chaldean to catch the star in the small field of a Theodolite teles-
cope at the precise moment necessary for the accuracy of the observa-
tion. The process by observation of the sun’s azimuth is also I under-
stand not free from difficulties. Under these circumstances it is hoped,
that the simple instrument now submitted for consideration, (though it
does not pretend to perfect accuracy,) may be occasionally found use-
ful by the scientific as well as by the unscientific world. With these few
explanatory remarks, I proceed to describe the instrument, a sketch
of which accompanies this memorandum.
4th. A B C is a brass semicircular plate, about 2-10ths of an inch
thick, with the degrees marked on the rim, which are counted from the
point €&. both to the right and left, DC being of course at right an-
gles to A B. E F is a moveable radius turning on the point EK, and hav-
ing degrees of altitude marked on it, as shewn in M N. The mode of
laying down the degrees by means of a graduated circle will be under-
stood from the figure S T V; K L is a perpendicular flat rod having a
small oblong plate L with a hole in the centre, fixed at right angles to K
and parallel with the horizon. This rod KL is to be fixed at D{ perpen-
* At night.
¢ As exemplified in the figure O P.
440 Memorandum on the Construction [No. 138.
dicular to the brass semicircle A B C., so that the round hole L shall be
immediately over the centre point K. I I lare elevating screws by means
of which the instrument is first to be accurately levelled. This may be
done either by placing a common spirit level on the brass plate, or by ha-
ving two small spirit levels at right angles to each other let into the plate.
oth. Zo find the meridian line, place the instrument or rather the
line EK C due north and south by any compass, C being the north
point and E the south,-at any time (say an hour) before noon* the sun
will be observed to shine through the hole L, throwing a bright round spot
on the left side of the plate near one of the circles a,f a, a; wait till the
spot comes on the circle, say at G, and mark the point with a pencil. Then
move the right side of the radius E F up to it, and read off the number
of degrees, say 50° on the rim of the plate. The sun after crossing the
circle at G will proceed along the dotted line until it reaches the other
side of the circle at H, where it will arrive about an hour after noon ;
,mark the point as before and read off the number of degrees, say 30°,
add them to the number noted above (50°), the result will be 80°.
Divide by 2, which gives 40°, or the bisection of the arch G H, move
the radius to the point of the rim marked 10°, which is half way (or
40°t) between the extreme points Gand H. The direction of the
radius as now placed will be that of the true meridian, being the bi-
section of the arch G H, described by the sun himself, (the great
Archimedes) at equal altitudes.§ The instrument having been origin-
ally set to the magnetic meridian, the distance between the line E C
and the radius EF; viz. 10°, is the variation east of the compass with
which the instrument was set. It is evident that the variation of any
other compass may be ascertained in the same manner, or by placing the
needle with its own graduated circle on the meridian line E F.||
* Two hours would be better if the sun is very high.
+ Any number of circles may be drawn, six or eight are necessary to suit different
times of the year. .
{ Either the line M N, or the right side of the radius will answer if placed opposite —
10°, but the former is best.
§ The difference in the sun’s declination in two or even four hours is so slight, that
it would not cause an error in the position of the meridian of more than a few seconds,
it is unnecessary therefore to apply the equation of equal altitudes.
|| Where great accuracy is required, and the needles are long, the observation should
be made either at 10 a. m. or 10 Pp. M. as the needle moves slowly west in the fore-
noon, returns ‘to its mean position about 10 p. m. then deviates to the east, and returns
at 10 a. M. like the barometer.
1843. | of a Portable Meridian. 44]
6th. Zo find apparent Noon, the instrument must remain in the
same position until next day, and when the luminous round spot occa-
sioned by the sun shining through the aperture L falls on the centre
line M N of the radius, the sun is at its meridian, and shews apparent
noon. By adding or subtracting the equation of time for the day of
the month, the mean time, which a watch or clock ought to keep, will
be ascertained.
7th. To find the altitude it is only necessary to mark the point on
the radius where the sun crosses it, and read off the altitude.*
8th. Zo find the latitude, deduct the observed angle from 90°, and
add the result to the declination if north. If the declination be south,
add it to 90°, and deduct the observed angle. At the equinox, the ob-
served angle deducted from 90° gives the latitude.
9th. In order to lay down a meridian line for survey purposes, fix
the sight R on to the rim of the instrument opposite the rod 0, as
shewn in the figure O P. Look through the two corresponding aper-
tures (which are exactly on a level with each other) at a pole erected
at some distance in the line of sight. Then move round and look
through the sight P in the opposite direction at another pole erected
to the south in the line of sight, cut a line on the ground connecting
the two poles, and your meridian is complete.
10th. I have constructed a small instrument of this description, the
diameter of which A B is 94 inches, and the height of the pedestal or
gnomon 2 inches. It is made entirely of brass, and the degrees on the
rim have been marked off with great accuracy by a native mistry. The
cost of the materials is not more than two rupees. The labour, how-
ever, is considerable, and the man asked sixteen rupees for the whole,
including his own remuneration. This, however, is cheap compared
with one of Dolland’s Universal Dials, 44 inches in diameter, which in
Calcutta costs eighty rupees.
llth. Lest a scientific instrument contrived by an unprofessional in-
dividual, should be received with doubt or hesitation, I have annexed to
this memorandum extracts from two notes from the professional Sur-
veyor of Patna, giving his opinion on the accuracy and utility of the
instrument, which I hope will be thought satisfactory. The principle
* If the moon should pass the meridian at night, its altitude and the time may be
ascertained in the same manner.
442 Memorandum on the Construction [No. 138.
of it was also approved by Lieutenant Thuillier, the Revenue Surveyor
of Sylhet, who was in temporary charge of the Patna Survey, during
the absence of Lieutenant Maxwell.
Extract of a letter from Lieut. Maxwell, Revenue Surveyor.
I hope the following will be satisfactory to you, and will prove to the
world, that the little instrument deserves the name you have given it.
I send exactly what I did, and assure you that I have not attempted to
force the observations into good ones, they are all bona fide ones.
On the 27th, the morning observation was 70 50
Evening, oats 1, oe 639200
7 50
3 595 Var. of needle.
28th, the morning observation was 71 30
Evening, Se ove ROP Fou 0)
39 99
8 00
4 00 Var. of needle.
I placed two poles on the line (radius when set to the 4°), and the
following angular observation from my meridian line, (whose bearing is
352° 59’), gives a capital result.
The true bearing of line A B is 352° 59’.
Z ABC.—41° 34’ ... bearing of line B C is 214° 33.
Interior Z BC D.==325° 22’ .-. bearing of line C D is 369° 55’.
Line C D is set by your little instrument at 350° 00’ .:. the differ-
ence is 5’. Considering the difficulty of seeing through the sights, you
will perhaps agree with me in thinking the result most satisfactory.
There is no doubt whatever, that if an instrument like yours were made
with a rack and pinion and divided to minutes, that the utmost accu-
racy would be obtained.
Extract from another letter from Lieut. Maxwell, Revenue Surveyor.
It is indeed an excellent “‘hikmut ;”* its great beauty is its simplicity,
for the most ignorant can use it, and I can with great confidence state,
* ‘¢ Contrivance.’’
RAVENSHAWS PORTABLE MERIDIAN.
AND
Universal Noon -Lral
1843. | of a Portable Meridian. 443
that two or three of them made by Captain Boileau, the instrument
maker in Calcutta, would be a great acquisition in a survey where the
European assistants in general know no more about checking a meri-
dian line, or giving the latitude of their camps, than the man in the
moon.
Descriptive list of some Coins lately received from the University of
Christiana by the Asiatic Society. By Dr. E. Roger, Librarian.
Asiatic Society. 6
To H. Torrens, Esq. Secretary, Asiatic Society.
Str,—I beg to forward to you a descriptive list of the coins, which
we have lately received from the liberality of the University of
Christiana.
They consist of coins of some of the Danish kings of the Oldenburg
dynasty, and of a most valuable collection of coins of the 12th century,
especially Norwegian, forming a part of those coins which one Anders
Anderson accidentally discovered under a large heap of stones on an
uncultivated spot of his estate at Daelie in the province of Hedemarken
in Denmark. Having delivered a part of them, of the weight of forty
ounces, to the Magistrate, he afterwards sold to the University of
Christiana 5000 coins of the weight of 134 ounces, for the same weight
of unmanufactured silver.
I take this opportunity of offering a few notices on the antient coins
of Norway, for the materials of which I am indebted to the following
dissertations of Mr. Holmbée, Professor at the University of Christiana :
1. De prisca re monetaria Norvegiae et de numis saeculi 12mi
nuper repertis. Christianiae, 1841.
2. Descriptio ornamentorum, maximam partem aureorum, et numo-
rum saeculi 8vi et Oni. Christianiae, 1835.
3. De numis MD medii aevi, in Norvegia nuper repertis, 1837.
they I hope, will be of some interest for the numismatic members
of the Society; and the more so, as according to a remark of Mr.
Holmboe, the numismatics of Norway were for a long time not sufficient-
_ ly explored. This arose from the rarity of antient Norwegian coins, as
444 Descriptive list of some Coins. [No. 138.
well as from the scanty notices given by the historiographers of the
middle ages on numismatic subjects. The obscurity shrouding those
remote ages had been partly dispelled in the course of the last fifty
years by a great number of coins, dug out of the earth, or found in
the foundations of some antient churches, which had been destroyed
by various causes. Still the links were wanting to connect the coins
of the llth century with those of the 18th, which are now amply
afforded by the coins found at Daelie.
The Norwegians used, as most nations did, the same term for money
and cattle. The Norwegian word “Fe” signifies cattle and money,
an@ ‘‘penningi” does not only denote the species of coins known
under that name, but money in general.* In like manner, in accordance
with other nations which fixed the value of things by metals, they
weighed the metal before they had coins.| The antient weights of
Norway are the following —
1 Marca (mérk) = 8 Orae, (aurar)t{
1 Ora (eyrir) = 8 “Ortugae, (ortugar.)
1 “Ortuga = 10 Denarii, (penningar. )
The gold, used for weighing, was extended into a kind of wire in the
shape of a ring, either simple or of many folds (called bagr or bauger,)
which at a sale was weighed off entirely, or in pieces. The silver as a
means of exchange was used in a similar manner, having sometimes
the shape of a solid mass; sometimes of a ring; sometimes trinkets
were also applied to the same purpose, till foreign coins are at last ob-
served, especially Anglo-Saxon and German, of which a great many are
found in Norway.
* Clarke (on the connexion of the Roman, Saxon and English coins, p. 390) gives
another derivation of this word which at first sight seems highly probable; that pen-
ning (evidently the same with the Norwegian word) was formed from the Latin pendo,
and was sometimes written more agreeably to this origin ‘‘ pending,”’ and both expres-
sions were derived from the antient and universal custom of paying by weight; but
this appears rather an accidental coincidence, as the Saxon word is the same with the
Norwegian and German, and in the latter language, the term p (f) enning obviously
shews its origin from the word in use for cattle.
+t The Hebrew word opw originally denotes to weigh; thus talentum and libra
signify a balance. The principal gold and silver coins among the Greeks were
called staters, which is taken q7ro Tnc caTiKne from the scale. Thus in Rome;
all payments were made per aes et libram.
{ The terms marks and oras were first used by the Goths, and ora, which is cor-
rupted from the Latin word ‘‘aureus’’ is synonymous with solidus.—Clarke, I. c. p. 310.
1843. | Descriptive list of some Coins. 445
Copper was very rarely used as a means of exchange, and we may
notice, that during this whole period no gold or copper coins were
used in Norway, unless we should refer to the latter, the silver coins
of the end of the 13th century, with which a large portion of copper
was mixed. The price of the gold was about the 10th century eight
times higher than that of silver, which proportion seems to have obtain-
ed throughout the whole of Europe during that period.
The greater part of the ornaments dug out of the earth are made
of pure gold and silver, and it is even recorded in antient histories,
(Ségur,) that the silver was cooked (brent silfr.) It may be here noticed
as a curious fact, that many nations of no connexion whatever, and
at most different periods, have adopted gold rings of the above des-
cribed shape as the first equivalent of the price of things. Thus it is
said of Gideon, that after his victory over the Ismaelites, he took from
them a great number of gold rings, and Job received such rings from
his friends. They are represented on the antient monuments of Egypt,
are sometimes dug out of the earth in Ireland, Norway, Sweden and
Denmark, and are still in use in Abyssinia and Guinea.
It is not quite certain which king of Norway first struck coins,
though it appears probable, that it was not done previously to Hakim
the Good,* (a. p: 938-963.) Of the coins of Hakim’s successors, we
know only one of Olav. Tryggveson (995-1000), one or two of Count
Eric (1000-1016), one of Magnus the Good (1035-1047), and one
of Harold Hardrade (1074-1067), while in antient chronicles we find
no mention of Norwegian coins before Harold, of whom they state the
particular circumstance, that eight days after the celebration of
Christmas, he distributed some money to his soldiers, which according
to the same authorities were called Harold slata, (struck by Harold), and
for the greater part consisted of copper. The art of coining seems to
* In the year 1834 a great variety of ornaments and of Byzantine, Arabic, Fran-
co-Gallic and Anglo-Saxon coins of the 8th and 9th centuries were found in Norway,
and from the fact, that no Scandinavian coins were among them, we may conclude,
that at the period, when those things were used as ornaments, that is, in the 8th and 9th
centuries, no Scandinavian coins were struck. It therefore becomes probable, that
this was not done before the middle of the 10th century. The most antient Norwegian
coins as yet discovered, are those of a Hakim; but as two kings of his name have
reigned in that century, Hakim the Good and Hakim the Bad, who lived about the
end of the 10th century, it is doubtful to whom we are to assign them.
3 N
446 Descriptive list of some Coins. _ [No. 188
have been earlier introduced into Norway, than into Sweden or
Denmark ; for the most antient coins of Sweden are those of Olaus
Skotkonung (993-1024), and of Denmark those of Sveno Tueskjaeg
(991-1019), on the coins of whom the name of the same mint-master
is inscribed as the coins of Olav Tryggveson (995-1000); but in
Norway coins were already struck under the reign of Hakim the Good
or the Bad, which latter reigned between 978-995.
No coin, exceeding the value of a denar, seems to have been struck
in Norway from the commencement of their coinage to at least the first
years of the 13th century, and this sort of money apparently was then
mpst common all over Europe. The shape of the types was usulaly
borrowed from English coins, and the first coiners are evidently from
England. Godvine at least, who towards the close of the 10th cen-
tury superintended the mints of the kings of Norway, Sweden and
Denmark, bears an Anglo-Saxon name, and Ulf, the mint-master of
Harold Hardrade, inserted the preposition “on” on the Norwegian
coins. The obverse of these coins accordingly represented the bust or
the head of the king together with his title and name, while the re-
verse contained a cross and the name of the mint-master, or the town,
or of both in the Latin language. I may here notice, that with regard to
the antient coins of Norway, the same observation obtains as to those
of England. The more antient they are the better is their execution,
as the remains of Roman art in the earlier centuries of our era were
more and more overgrown by fresh influxes of barbarians. In the
period we allude to, only a few traces of the Roman way of striking
coins had remained, and still these coins are much superior to those of
the 12th century.
Beside the coins bearing types on either side, a large number of
small, thin, and hollow coins were struck in Norway at that period,
which were called bracteato (from bractea, a thin leaf.) It is, accord- —
ing to Mr. Holmbde, a common error to ascribe these coins at an
earlier period to Scandinavia than to Germany, as on a careful exami-
nation it appears, that no coin of this shape can be assigned to Nor-
way previously to the middle of the 12th century, while the Germans —
used them already in the 11th century.
The collection, presented to the Society, consists almost entirely of —
such bracteati, or hollow coins. They are very thin and brittle, and the
(
y
1843. | Descriptive list of some Coins. 447
obverse only has a sign, generally representing a single letter, or a
cross of various shape, or any other simple device, while the reverse
shews the hollow impression of the same. Some of these devices are ac-
companied by one or more points variously distributed, and surrounded
by two or more circles, which are either plain, or formed of a series of
globules. I must not omit here to mention a remark of Clarke
(1. c. p. 23) that the cross upon Anglo-Saxon coins, and in the Norman
reign is said to have been deeply impressed, that the coins might be
divided into halves, &c.
In conclusion, I would notice, that the coins bearing the device of
a spiral line and of three concentric circles with a point in the centre
are believed to belong to Sigurd, Eistein and Ingo (1142-1155) V. list
No. 41-44, those with the letters M. and R. to Magnus the son of
Erlin (1161-1184) No. 14-17, and those with the letter G to Gutter-
mus (1204) Nos. 10-12. E. Rorr.
Additions to the Catalogue of Nepal Birds. By B. H. Hopcson, Esa.
1. Meruline. Grandala, Mihi (new).
Bill medial, slender, straight, Phenicuran, but the base rather more
depressed and more excided by the nareal fosse and gular flap.
Nares oval, lateral, free, placed at the fore-end of a largish fosse,
and shaded above by a small process of its membrane. Gape smooth.
Wings very ample and firm: the first quill bastard, second longest ;
tertials hardly above half the length of the primaries.
Legs and feet simple, ambulatory, slender and delicate in all their
_ proportions. )
Tail medial, firm, forked.
Type. Gr. céelicolar (new). The male throughout black internally,
but the whole body and head glistering externally with brilliant small-
blue: bill and feet jet-black: iris dark. Female sordid slaty, or blue-
black with a brown smear, alars and caudals darker: a white bar
through the wing: body striped down the shafts with luteous-white:
bill and legs uniform black. Total length 9 inches, of bill to gape 13-16
inches; to brow 9-16 inches; tail 33 inches; closed wing 6 inches,
448 Additions to the Catalogue of Nepal Birds. _[[No. 138.
tarse to sole 1} inch, central toe and nail, 15-16 inches, hind toe and
nail 10-14 inches: female smaller, being about 8 inches in -total
length.
Habitat, the northern region or Cach4r, in under-spots near snows:
- solitary: insects and gravel in the stomach.
Remark: a singular bird, having the general structure of a Thrush,
but with the wings vastly augmented in size and the bill of a Sylvian,
Analogous to Gralline 2?*
2. Crateropodine ? Heteromorpha,} Mihi.
Bill short, stout, compressed, hard, blunt, entire, as high at the base
as long, and much concealed by the frontal plumes; ridges great, curv-
ed, and broad; sides flat: tomize even: tips equal and obtuse.
Nares small, round, remote, having a raised rim, and concealed by
incumbent setaceous plumules. Rictus narrow, furnished in both
mandibles with slenderish bristles.
Wings submedial, feeble, bowed, narrow, sixth quill longest; four
first much graduated ; first plus half of longest: tertials evanescent.
Tail largish, graduated, firm; the separate plumes wedged at their
tips.
Legs and feet very stout: the tarsi elevate, with large scales across
front-half, and posteal half smooth and sharp. Digits shortish, flat-
tened on soles, basally connected, especially the outer one: the inner
fore-toe as long as the outer and stouter; the central not elongated;
the hind as long as the lateral fore-toe, stout and depressed. Nails
large, moderately bent ; sufficiently acute.
Plumage very soft and lax.
Type. H. [ Paradoxornis, apud nos, E. B., | unicolor (new). Through-
out of an olive-brown colour, brightest on the fully crested head, and
next on the alars and caudals: bill yellow: legs slaty-grey: iris brown.
* A specimen in nestling plumage has just been received from Mr. Hodgson,
having the head, neck, interscapularies, and under-parts, marked with a pale central
line to.each feather. The bill of this individual is mutilated, but judging from the
rest of its external structure, I agree with Mr. Hodgson in considering this remarkable
bird much allied to the true Thrushes.—E. B.
¢ If the several new genera herein adverted to can be properly referred to the
Crateropodine, that group would seem to contain representatives of all the tribes of
Perchers, and perhaps should be broken up to be distributed among all of them. All
the Crateropons proper might be referred to the Garruline group, for example.
1843.) Additions to the Catalogue of Nepal Birds. 449
Length (total) seven inches and three-quarters ; of bill nine-sixteenths ;
of tail four and seven-eighths; of wing three and seven-sixteenths; of
tarsus one and one-eighth; of central toe and nail seven-eighths; of
hind ditto ditto three-quarters.
Habitat, the Cachar: dwells in thick brushwood: frequently alights
on the ground, but seems to feed aloft on bugs and other hard insects
of trees: in small flocks: not noisy.
Remark : greatly allied to Paradoxornis, also to our Temnoris and
Conostoma | J. A. §. Vol. X, p. 856]: differs from the first in the
smooth level, unarmed and equal tops and tomiz of the bill.*
3. Temnoris, olim Suthora (amended).
Bill very short and stout, as high and nearly as wide as long, with
broad, greatly curved ridges and subtumid sides: tomiz even: tips
equal and truncate: base much and softly plumed. Rictus smooth.
Nares small, round, hidden by a soft frontal zone.
Wings short, rounded, much graduated, yet firm, and tending to a
point: 6th primary longest; 5th and 7th hardly less; the two first
much, and the two next less, graduated; Ist half the length of longest.
Tail longish, much graduated, simple and feeble.
Tarsi strong, elevate, smooth. Toes short, flattish below; unequal :
the exterior fore longer and basally connected, the inner fore less,
* I have considerable doubts whether, on actual comparison of specimens (especial-
ly if recent), this form will prove to be separable from Paradozornis. The P. fiavi-
rostris, Gould, (apud Horsfield,) was obtained by Dr. McClelland in Assam, and was
described by him, under the supposition that it was new, as Bathyrhynchus breviros-
tris in the ‘India Review’ for 1838, p. 513, and a rough figure given of it. In that
description it is stated that the mandibles ‘‘ meet in an obtuse point in front without a
hook ;”? and in my P. ruficeps (J. A. S. XI, 177), which in other respects essentially
accords with the generic diagnosis of Mr. Hodgson’s Heteromorpha, the impending of
the upper mandible (so far as can be made out from the dry specimen) is in the most
trifling possible degree, which, from recollection, I think is also the case in P. flavi-
rostris. Mr. Hodgson, at page 563 of the same volume of the ‘ India Keview,’ identi-
fied McClelland’s Bathyrhynchus with his own Suthora (since named by him
Temnoris), and even suspected that his typical species, or Nipalensis, might be the
same as Dr. McClelland’s brevirostris: but the description and figure which are now
- furnished by Mr. Hodgson of his Temnoris Nipalensis indicate the very inferior size
of the latter species, to say nothing of other distinctions, amounting, however, at most,
in my opinion, to subgeneric. We have, accordingly, four species now ascertained of
this remarkable group, of which three are probably new to Ornithologists in Europe.
The diminutive Temnoris has recently been received by the Society from Darjeeling.
- —Cur. As. Soc.—Mr. Hodgson has just forwarded a specimen of his Heteromorpha,
and I consider it to be a true Paradozornis.—Jbid.
450 Additions to the Catalogue of Nepdl Birds. {_No. 188.
and freer at base; hind stout, depressed, equal to the inner fore-toe.
Nails compressed, deep, acute, Parzan, but less suited for creeping.
Plumage soft and lax.
Type. 7. Nipalensis (see ‘ India Review’ [for 1838, p. 32], Habitat)
the Cachar, in small flocks; frequenting brushwood and tall grass:
manners of Parus, of which it has the entire aspect; but besides its —
truncated bill it differs by rounder wings and larger and less arboreal
legs and feet. Is greatly allied by its strange bill to the last.
4. Ampelide, Prosorinia, olim Cochoa (amended).
Bill moderate, Thrush-like, but much more depressed and greatly
excided at base by nareal and gular cavities, and both tips armed.
Nares large, ovoid, free, lateral, and typical. Rictus wide, with
short curling bristles which partly tend over the nostrils.
Wings medial, firm; Zurdine, but rather less acuminate, with the
fourth primary longest. Tail firm, rounded.
Legs and feet simple, ambulatory, Zurdine, but the tarsi shorter
though not less strong, and thumbs longer.
Types. Pr. viridis et purpurea (see Journ. As. Soc. V, 359.)
Remark : with the size, aspect, and manners of Thrushes, these birds
are typically Ampelzne in structure, and should stand next to Casma-
rynchus. Both species are amply crested, and have subnude orbits.*
* The Society has received several specimens from Darjeeling approaching closely
to the description of Pr. purpurea, but they would seem to be less bright in colour,
certainly than the figure given, and have not the tail-feathers similarly pointed. Vide
my description of a Darjeeling male, Vol. XI, p. 182.—Cur. As. Soc. A female has
more recently been received by the Society from Mr. Hodgson, and they are the same.
Pr, viridis I have not seen.—Jbid.
Meruline
Grandala Schistacea . type .
two turds natural sire
Veapiett. of 2f
Glack- Osiuttir Lith Fres<
WIS eA YOU
AOpooluy eyudazomousyay
S£°LL YF] NIDISAI YOOT- 7, "
od
Baad
eae. oe
eee
J Bennadt del.
TL Black loth’
Temnoris Nepalensis type.
Sue of nature.
. “OUIG FON spor G-%
Q dh 7 IIGAY) ama DVUDVAOS. OAT
1/
rT
S99AL YI] °OISY) PVT. I, sO TLIPOCUa OTD FOUUT
ibe
451
On an improved Simpiesometer, “‘ The Tropical Tempest Simpiesometer,” just
received in Calcutta. By H. Ptppineton, Sub-Secretary, Asiatic Society, §c.
The following Notes were by the kindness of Mr. Lepage, of the firm of Ostell and Lepage,
Booksellers of this city, handed to Mr. Simms, of the well-known firm of Troughton and Simms,
with a request that they would try the experiment indicated, and manufacture an instrument for me
with the improvements suggested. They have done so, and the instrument was exhibited at the
August Meeting of the Asiatic Society.
eee
There are two objections made to Simpiesometers. The first, that “they
disquiet people needlessly,” and the second, that “they get out of order.”
The first objection it is evident we cannot remedy, for it depends on indivi-
dual character, on experience, on knowledge, and on many other personal or
acquired peculiarities and qualities, over which we have no control. But
with respect to the second defect, I think I can point out to the makers of
these instruments, two principal sources of it; and these are, alterations in
the chemical qualities of the oil, and the shortness of the tube. We cannot
(yet) guard against any alteration of the oil, which might affect the gas;
but ¢f this occurs, it is probably through the chemical action of light upon
the oil. I should suggest then, as an improvement, that the glass be covered
with a metallic door, to open with a hinge, so that except when observed,
the instrument would be in darkness, where pressure and temperature
would operate quite as well as in the light, and the glass would be more-
over less liable to break.
The next improvement is the main one, and is, I am convinced indispen-
sable to the efficiency of ¢ropical Simpiesometers ; viz. instruments which
are to be of use for any length of time between the tropics. If Messrs.
——— will refer to Colonel Reid’s work on the Law of Storms, they will
there see in the chapter on “Storms at the mouth of the Hooghly,” p. 293 of
2d edition, that in 1833 in the Duke of York’s Storm the Barometer fell be-
low 26.50 at a temperature of 79°! and I am certain that in many storms it
falls at least to 27.00, with a temperature of 80° or more.
Now if Messrs. ——— will try in their receiver the effect of reducing
the pressure to 27.00, and keeping the temperature at 80 or 84°, for I have
known it as high as this, I suspect they will find that the gas will escape
round the curve of the leg, and bubble up through the cistern. In a word,
the tube and scale are not long enough for tropical hurricane depressions ;
and when a ship gets through one of these, the Captain may not improba-
bly find that his Simpiesometer does not act so well as before, and thus the
452 The Tropical Tempest Simpiesometer. [ No. 138.
worst character which an instrument can get becomes (and really is)
attached to it, 2. e. that it is “very liable to get out of order.” The Duke of
York’s Simpiesometer is still in Calcutta, but gives indications differing
half an inch from the Barometer, as I have heard: one sent to me for trial
gave regularly on an average 0.7 above the Barometer standard, and at
28.5 or 27.00 inches of pressure, with temperature 80°, would have been I
think useless, or the gas would perhaps have escaped; hence, as I judge the
universal complaints against Simpiesometers which have been long in use
in tropical countries.
The remedy for this last defect is also simple enough, and if Messrs. ——
will try it, I shall be glad to assist them in making the improvement
known in India, and especially in Calcutta. It consists in making the scale
and tube long enough to leave at least half of an inch column of oil at
pressure 26.00 and temp. 849, and as I have said before, keeping the Sim-
piesometer in the dark. I think these improvements would give, if not a
title to a patent, at least to a new name, “ Tropical Tempest Simpie-
someters.”’
P. S.—I have seen in some patent Simpiesometers a contrivance for cork-
ing the cistern when moving the instrument. If instead of a cork this
was a stopper of caoutchouc, and could be screwed down, it would be a great
improvement.
Messrs. TRoucuton’s note to Mr. Lerace is as follows :—
R. C. Lepace, Esa.
29th December, 1842. Fleet Street.
Sir,—I find that in extreme cases, such as those mentioned by Mr. Pid-
dington, the Simpiesometer would get beyond the range of the scale, and
suffer the damage described in his letter; moreover, I think that a door to
the case in order that light may be admitted only when necessary, a very
judicious precaution.
If you desire it, we can soon prepare one with the improvements.
I am, &c.
(Signed) W. Simms.
The instrument has just been landed, at a cost of sixty-four rupees, and a
brief description of it may be worth putting on record for our distant sub-
scribers. The tube is, from top to the bottom of the curve, 18 inches
long, the common Simpiesometers being only about 15, and at a pres-
sure of 26 inches, with a temperature of 80°, would still leave about an
inch of oil above the level of that in the cistern: and | trust it is not likely
to undergo any severer trial. There is a slide with (I suppose,) a caoutchouc
stopper to the cistern, and the usual register plates at the bottom.
1843. | The Tropical Tempest Simpiesometer 453
The wooden frame is made very solid, and has a polished brass door in
front, with hinges and hooks, and I may mention finally, that it was brought
out from England screwed up in the cabin of a ship, and this is indeed the
only safe way of getting out these delicate and fragile instruments.—H. P.
Report on the Government experimental working of the Copper Mines
of Pokree in Ghurwal, with notices of other Copper Mines. By G.
S. Lusuineton, Esa. Commissioner, Kumaon and Ghurwal.
No. 1780.
To G. A. Bususy, Esq. Secretary to the Government of India, Ge-
neral Department, Fort William.
Srr,—With reference to your communication, No. 866, dated the
Revenue Depart- L1th November, 1840, I am directed to forward
BM: for submission to the Right Honorable the Governor
General in Council, the accompanying copy of a report by Mr. Com-
missioner Lushington, on the results of the mining experiment con-
ducted at Pokhree in Ghurwal.
I have the honor to be, Sir,
Your obedient humble servant,
R. N. C. Hamiyton,
Officiating Secretary to the Govt. N. W. P.
Agra, the \6th December, 1841.
No. 88.
To the Officiating Secretary to Government, North West Provinces,
Revenue Department.
Sir,—I have the honor to return the report on the Pokree mining
experiment received back with your letter of the 8th November, the
omissions adverted to having been supplied.
2. I am not aware of there being any inaccuracies in the report
in its present state, but should any be discovered, I would beg the
favor of their being corrected in your office if possible.
I have the honor to be, &c.
(Signed) G. S. Lusuineron, Commissioner.
Kumaon Commr’s. Office, Camp Reonee,
The 17th November, 184}.
454 Copper Mines of Pokree, §c. [ No. 138.
Account of the experiment carried on at the Pokree Copper Mine,
Ghurwal, under Mr. Wilkin, with notices of other Copper Mines
én that district. |
In the 83d Number of the Journal of the Asiatic Society, is an
account, by Captain H. Drummond of the 3rd Light Cavalry, of some
of the Kumaon copper mines visited by him ; this account was drawn
up agreeably to the orders of the Governor General of India, and
extracts from it were published for general information. In this report
Captain Drummond suggested, that with a view of obtaining more
correct details than were then forthcoming, as to the advantages or
otherwise, of working any one of the Kumaon or Ghurwal copper
mines under European superintendence, a certain sum should be ad-
vanced by Government for an experimental opening of such mine as
might appear best suited to the object in view. This proposition
received the sanction of Government in November* 1838, the sum of
Rupees 2415 was allotted from the public treasury, being the amount
of an estimate submitted by Captain Drummond, and the charge of
the experiment was assigned to Mr. Wilkin, an intelligent and res-
pectable Cornish mining assistant, who had accompanied Captain
Drummond from England. Mr. Wilkin’s personal salary was at
the same time fixed at 150 rupees per mensem, by orders of the
Governor General.
The mine selected, agreeably to Captain Drummond’s and Mr.
Pokree Mine selec- Wilkin’s opinion as the scene of operations, is situ-
ae eee ie ated near the village of Pokree, pergunnah Nagpoor,
Ghurwal, and is generally known by the name of the Pokree mine.
The village of Pokree, is distant from Almorah about eighty miles
(say seven marches) North, and about seven or eight miles ; on the —
right, or Northern bank of the Aluknundah river ; from Sreenuggur —
it is about fifty miles, or from four to five days’ journey for a loaded —
man. The elevation of the Deothal temple, or as it is commonly —
called Deothan, above the village of Pokree, is given by Captain Webb |
at 6,288 feet; the village is, I think, about five to six hundred feet {
lower, and the mines in its vicinity range from the latter to the former
altitude. |
* Letter from the Secretary to Government to the Commissioner of Kumaon, dated :
26th November, 1838.
1843. | in Kumaon and Ghurwal. 455
The climate is excellent, admirably adapted to the European consti-
Altitude, Climate, &c, tution ; water good, and oak,” fir and other timber
eb Roblrce: trees abundant. The soil of the neighboring villages
is good, and the crops are of the usual kind. ‘The roads also from the
mines to Almorah, the capital of Kumaon Proper, and to Sreenuggur,
the capital of British Ghurwal, are perfectly safe for foot and horse
travellers and loaded porters, and though rudely and unskilfully con-
_ structed, are kept in good repair by the civil authorities.
In going to Pokree from Almorah or Sreenuggur, the traveller has
to cross the Aluknunda river by a jhoola, or swinging bridge of rope,
constructed of the grass or sedge, termed bhabur by the natives, and
the botanical name of which is Criophorum canabinum.t There are
now on that route two of these jhoolas erected over the Aluknunda,
one of which is situated at Kumpryag,{ where the Pindur and Aluk-
nunda rivers unite, (thus forming one of the Pryags, or holy unions, )
and the other at Buniote,§ about five miles lower down. The ascent
from the hot valley of the Aluknunda to Pokree is steep and rugged,
but the road is safe, and the traveller is amply compensated for the
fatigue and labor of the ascent, by the beauty and picturesqueness of
the scenery, and by his transit from the hot stifling atmosphere of the
valley to the pure and salubrious temperature of the surrounding
mountains. Nor could he fail, if interested in such studies, to admire
the vast and instructive series of vegetable forms that meet the eye
in the ride up from the river ; for, leaving the mangoe, peepul, date,
and other well known tropical trees at the base, he passes by degrees
into the vegetation and climate of European or temperate countries.
The Pokree mines had for many years been known and worked
during the rule of the Hindoo Rajas of Ghurwal, and when the latter
were driven out by the Ghoorkhas, the Nepal dynasty did not over-
Jook the resources of wealth which these mines were supposed to con-
* Oak and fir were the only woods made use of in the mine by Mr. Wilkin, the
oak for frames and the fir for planking. There are three kinds of oaks, the (bauj,) 1,
(phuliart) 2, and (tilouj) 3 at or near Pokree, and one fir. The oaks are the (quercus) |
incana, (camlossa) 2, and (semicarpifolia) 3 of botanists. The fir is the pinus longifolia,
and as the wood is highly resinous, matches of it are used in lieu of candles in the
mines, also as torches in travelling.
t+ Royle’s Illustrations, page 415,
{ Elevation of the Kumpryag rope bridge, 2436 feet above the sea, (Capt. Webb.)
§ Elevation according to Capt. Webb, 2294 feet.
456 Copper Mines of Pokree, Sc. (No. 138.
tain. It is, however, impossible to ascertain with accuracy the amount
of revenue yielded from the Pokree mines, under the Hindoo or
Ghoorkha* rulers. In the absence of authentic records, tradition has
stepped in, and the result is, as usual, gross exaggeration and hyperbole.
The older miners of the place, some of whom are still extant, assert,
that one of the mines one year yielded 50,000 Rupees profit. How
much of this account is true I have no means of ascertaining, but this
much is certain, that from the time of the Ghoorkha conquest of Ghur- —
wal, (1803,) up to the year 1838, the produce of the Pokree mines had
become more and more scanty, and that when, (towards the close of
the above year,) these mines were handed over to Mr. Wilkin, the ac-
tual revenue at which they were rated in the public accounts amounted
to 100 rupees per annum, and this small sum was eventually re-
mitted for that year, owing to the poverty and utter inability of the
farmer to pay the Government demand.
Mr. Wilkin commenced operations in December 1838, and from
that month to the end of June 1841, the works were carried on under
his constant superintendence, with more or less vigor.t The progress
made in excavating the adits, varied at different seasons. It appears
to have been smallest during the rains, when frequent “ break-downs”
took place in the mines, and at other seasons the hardness of the
ground and scarcity of workmen prevented much progress being made.
The total amount of work, according to the returns sent in by the
assistant, and expenditure incurred in making them is, as follows :—
* In Mr. Traill’s Account of Kumaon, (Asiatic Researches, ) I find 4801 Rupees only
given as the Jumma fixed by the Ghoorkha Government of 1812, for the whole province
of Kumaon and Ghurwal, under the head of *‘ mines and mint duties.’? The Ghoorkha
rupee was worth about 12 annas, so that in Company’s Rupees the sum was only 3600
Rupees. This, however, was merely the Government revenue accounted for by the
Nepalese Soobahs to the Katmandhoo Government, what else may have been levied
from the former, under the heads of Bhent, Nuzerana, &c. &c. I cannot pretend to say.
From the year 1815, (conquest of Kumaon) the revenue derived by the British Go-
vernment from mines has averaged as follows :—
Kemaon Proper. Ghurwal.
Copper, «ee. Rs. 12,00 to Rs. 801, Rs, 2,086. Highest mining revenue of
Tron; inna’ wel iggt TOO estas) seeee. 5, 226. theprovince, Rupees 5,417.
+ The workings were carried on night and day, the laborers being formed into
gangs, and relieved at fixed hours. Tools were supplied from the magazines, whilst
others were made up by Mr. Wilkin’s smiths and carpenters; the whole of these ex-
penses are included in the abstract, except the value of the magazine tools, and one or
two barrels of gunpowder expended in blasting.
1843. ]
in Kumaon and Ghurwal.
Fms. Ft.
Progress in December, 1538, 0
Rajah’s Mine—
Chowmuttee ditto.
Operations suspen-
ded and repairs made
to frames.
Ditto ditto.
In this month the |
Adit, Chowmuttee
adit, broke down at >
40 fathoms from the
entrance and was par- |
tially secured.
(Same remark, )
Chowmuttee Adit) .
reopened and partly
repaired, and new
ground excavated to |
the extent of,
Repairs completed ]
and in new ground +
Adit driven.
0
SS we ROO Sts (Se)
RW ONWWRhHE OS SO
457
In.| Rs. As. Ps.
0 44 11 9
0 153 9 O
0 JER)
0 125 0 0O
Git F:BI3i 4010
0 127 110
0 130 14 O
0 80 9 0
0 7308) 0
0 120 4 8
| 135 15 4
0 TE Whats
0 112 5 O
Vl Wy 5O4a TS
6 151 138 10
0 143 10 6
0 160 12 O
2 162 10 83
9 103 5 10
0 54 10 6
0 56 15 O
0 Leb. 30
0 16 5 O
0 42 5 Q
2 0
January, 1839, 17
February, 12
March, cen
Aprils mivin yao
May, 8
June, Seviateel
July, ea mS i
August, SUEY AS
September, 2
October, 8
November, 14
December, 13
Total,.. 106
January, 1840,.. 13
Hebruary, 2) sighs
March, «04
April, 19
INAV ee 8 19
June, 3
July, Cotes O
August, 0
September, 0
October, 2
November, 0
Total,.. 190
3
ee
4 6|2600 5 4
The amount originally authorized by Government having by
the end of November 1840 been expended, a reference was made
to the Honourable the Lieutenant Governor, as to the propriety of
continuing the workings, and the point having been submitted for the
* In this is included, 60 to 70 Rupees for carriage of materials from the Delhi
magazine.
458 Copper Mines of Pokree, c. [ No. 138.
consideration of the Right Honourable the Governor General, it was
resolved, that a further sum of 1,000 rupees should be advanced for
the prosecution of the experiment in the Chowmuttee mine alone.
Mr. Wilkin’s personal salary of Rupees 150, was also sanctioned for
nine months further, commencing with October 1840, and ending with
June 1841.
I annex a Table of progress and expenditure for the above period,
2. €. from December 1840 till the end of June 1841, when operations
finally ceased.
Progress. |
Fam. Ft. In.| Rs. As. Ps.
December, 1840, 7 1 O 74 9 0
January, 1841,.. 8 O 0 67 14 O
February,.. -. 14 0 90 86 4 6
March, '23t Serene "OO 120 4 0O
April, «o> When B00 105 6 O
IMLAY 5 srorpsieess ais thence) SUM ve ve hd 125. G3
June, Pa Fits cies aes) 164 4 1
Total;S. .om65» bly 763 15 10
2,600 5 4
Add former workings,.. 190 4 6
Grand Total,.. 257 3 11
The workings above specified were carried on in three different
mines, two of which had been worked in the time of the Hindoo
Rajas, and one was entirely new. The names of the two old mines re-
opened, and worked by Mr. Wilkin were: Ist, the Chowmuttee ; 2nd,
the Raja’s mine ; and the following account of the mines and operations
carried on in them is contained in a report from Mr. Wilkin, dated
July 1841, and which as it also conveys interesting information con-
cerning other Ghurwal mines, I may be excused for quoting almost
entire.
‘‘The Chowmuttee mine at Pokree, is situated in tale which rests
Chowmuttee Mines. on dolomitic limestone. It was adopted for the
Government experiment, as the one in which ores were most likely to
be found near the surface, where the experiment would be least
likely to interfere with the revenue, and where the inhabitants were
most favourable to the introduction of a new system. The experiment
was commenced at the end of 1838, and has been continued to the
3,004 5 2 -
ee ae ee ee ee eee
1843. | in Kumaon and Ghurwal. 459
present time. During this period, an adit has been driven into the
mine on the course of the lode 77 fathoms, 0 feet, 8 inches, and an under-
lying shaft was sunk on it at 28 fathoms from the entrance; a cross
cut has been driven north from this shaft 20 fathoms, 4 feet, 0 inch
through dolomite quartz, and talcose schist; but without finding any
new lode, excepting a small bed of iron ore. A rise of seven fathoms
was driven up from the adit at sixty-one fathoms from the entrance,
and a diagonal shaft was sunk to meet the rise from whence a gallery
has been extended eastward over the adit, 19 fathoms, 2 feet, 4 inches,
of which 8 fathoms, 5 feet, 0 inch is in poor ground; 4 fathoms, 0 feet
Q inch in old workings, and 6 fathoms, 3 feet, 4 inches in ground,
which in Cornwall would be worked for one-third of the ores. Of
the adit, 5 fathoms, 3 feet, 0 inch were in old workings ; 42 fathoms
4 feet, 2 inches in ground that would on an average let for one-half
tribute, and 16 fathoms, 2 feet, 6 inches in ground that would not pay
for working, besides 12 fathoms, 3 feet, 0 inch of the outer part of the
adit, in which no ores were found ; very little ores have been left
visible in the bottom of the adit or the eastern end of the mine, but
the mine may improve if sunk deeper or extended further ; however,
I should prefer working the western part of the mine, where the lode
is wider, and the ores of better quality. A ventilating passage was
carried forward over the adit from the first mentioned shaft to the
rise, and a winse was sunk under the adit three fathoms; besides
which, other excavations, amounting to about twenty fathoms of
ground were made, and conveniences for clearing ores, workshops, &e.
have been built. The expense incurred by this part of the experi-
ment (omitting European superintendence, ) has been Rs. 2,846: 8: 9,
and the return of copper is Rs. 231: 4:4, besides 3 to 400 Rs. which
may be expected from ores yet unsold. The roof of the adit now
offers a good field for tributers, and if worked ona proper scale, it may
repay the expense which has been incurred in driving it; but it is
not likely to do so without machinery for cleaning and smelting the
ores, which generally contain only 2 or 3 per cent. of metalliferous
ores, or from + to 3 per cent. of copper.
“The Chowmuttee lode, after crossing the ridge east of the mine,
enters a very compact bason, in which is situated the Doomed
Mine; this mine has not been worked to any considerable extent,
460 Copper Mines of Pokree, &c. [ No. 138.
owing to the abundance of water, and softness of the tale; but it is
said to have a good lode in one part of it, the lode then crosses the
hill near Deothan, a small village above the mine, and is found near
Googlee and Reswarra, where I have seen ores extracted from it;
but I do not think it likely to be profitable on that side of the hill.
“The Raja’s mine is situated about 450 yards north of the Chow-
Raja’s Mine. muttee mine in common dolomite, which rests on
talcose schist. It seems to have been discovered by the out-crop of
copper in the precipice above the Pokree village, and to have been
followed down to a depth of 70 fathoms, at which level an adit
was brought into the mine, which must have been driven 100 fa-
thoms through dead ground, (z. e. in which no ores are found ere
it reached the copper formation ; how far it had been driven beyond
that cannot, be ascertained, but the old miners state it to be a consi-
derable length. There are other adits, by which the mine was
worked previous to the bringing in of the deep adit, and the next one
above it is said to have been the principal entrance by which the
ores were brought out. At the time when the adits fell together,
which occurred about 60 years ago, there were three places in which
ores were found: namely, the Gaja Chauk, Kumera Chauk, and the
Burtwal Kooa; the Gaja Chauk was entered at the level of the
deep adit, and worked on so large a scale, as to require timber 20
feet long to support the roof, and finally it became so large, that the
miners contented themselves with picking up, at the risk of their
lives, the ores that fell down from the roof, until it all fell in toge-
ther. The Burtwal Kooa was probably on the same lode as the
Gaja Chauk, under the level of the adit. The Kumera Chauk was
probably on another lode, (Kumera being the name for talc,) the
ores of that lode being muddy and requiring to be washed. The pro-
duce of the mine at the utmost is said to have been 300 seers of ores,
worth 25 per cent. of copper per day, of which the Raja claimed two-
thirds, and the remainder was shared by the laborers, who also held
land free of rent. This was the best mine in the province, and the
old inhabitants of Pokree always spoke of it as a place of great
riches. The adit was allowed to fall together during a dispute be-
tween Raja Sackrit and his brothers, and though an attempt was af-
terwards made to open a new adit near the old one, it was never
1843. | in Kumaon and Ghurwal. 461
completed. On my arrival here I commenced opening the second adit,
(z. e. the one next above the deep one,) but found it too expensive
for the limited means at my disposal ; and it was abandoned after
being opened and secured with timber 31 fathoms, 1 foot, 6 inches,
at an expense including native superintendence and materials of
Rupees 346: 12: 8 To open the mine properly, both adits should be
repaired, and two new shafts sunk from the surface into the mine,
which would cost about 4,000 Rupees, and it would be necessary for
the proper working of the mine. No information can be obtained as
to the number of lodes in this mine, but I think there are three, on
the north one of which the new mine is situated, about 60 fathoms
north-west of the Raja’s mine.”
“In the new mine the lode was very promising, and yielded good
New Mine. specimens of ore near the surface, but at a depth of
15 fathoms it became poor, and was consequently abandoned, after
being extended 23 fathoms, 3 feet, 0 inch, at an expence, including
native superintendence and materials, of Rupees 245: 11: 0.”
In addition to the above three mines, in which Mr. Wilkin’s oper-
ations were carried on, there are several other copper mines in the
vicinity of Pokree, some of which were worked in former times by the
native miners, and some again have never been tried. None of these
were attempted by Mr. Wilkin, but I find on his report the following
notices of them, and as the opinion of the practical miner must be
infinitely more valuable and satisfactory than any remarks that I
could offer, I consider it right to extract them.
“Nota mine is situated about two and a half miles north-west of
the Pokree mines, in talc, which rests on dolomite
limestone. The lode is a bed of yellow or buff
Nota Mine.
coloured tale, about four feet wide, dipping north-west at 50° ; it rests
immediately on the dolomite limestone and has a sulphuric efier-
vescence on the surface. This mine is said to have been rich; it is
situated on the western side of an extensive bason or valley, on the
eastern side of which ores have been turned up by the plough, but
no mine has been worked. This is an extensive field for mining, as the
Jode may be productive throughout the bason or valley. There is wood
and water for all purposes near this mine.
3d P
462 Copper Mines of Pokree, &c. | No. 188.
“The Thala mine is situated about a mile north-west of the Nota
mine, probably on the same lode, in an extensive
plain, or comparatively level surface. It was first
worked in 1810, and again in 1825; but there being no good facility
for adits, the water prevented its being worked to any considerable
depth. The miners who worked it state the ores to be copper pvrites
disseminated in a lode of two feet wide, one-fifth of which was me-
talliferous. An adit of fifty fathoms in length would reach the mine
ten fathoms below the surface; below this adit a machine might be
erected, which with the surface water and that of the mine would
continue to work throughout the year, and keep the water of the mine
to a considerable depth. There is plenty of wood for all purposes in
the neighbourhood of this mine.
“The Danda* mine is situated on the hill, about 500 yards above
Thala mine in chlorite slate and tale, which on
the north-western side, comes in contact with
Thala Mine.
Danda Mine.
common dolomite. This mine has been worked to a considerable
extent, and is said to have yielded 52,000 Rupees profit in one year.
The ores are of good quality, and found in three or four different beds
or lodes, which dip into the hill at an angle of 30°. The chlorite
slate, in which the beds of tale and ores are found is so hard as to
stand without timber ; it also contains finely disseminated copper in
small quantity. The lodes run into a fine fall or bason westward,
in which, I think, they would be found productive. There is
abundance of wood near this mine; but no water for machinery
nearer than the Thala mine.
“The Talapoongla mine is situated about a mile north-east of the
Danda mine in tale, which rests on dolomite lime-
stone. The strata, in which the ores are found, is
about six fathoms wide, dipping south-west at various angles. The
bed is extensive, but the ores are scarce ; however this might improve
at a distance from the surface; hitherto little has been done, except
washing away the strata during the rainy season. It has good
facilities for wood, water and adits. Ores have been found in a pre-
Talapoongla Mine. .
* A ridge or crest of a hill is called Danda in the hill language, and this mine being ;
on the ridge, gets the above name.
1843. | in Kumaon and Ghurwal. 463
cipice, east of this mine, near the village of Bungtul, but at present
the outcrop is covered with rubbish ; it is in the talcose formation, and
has good facilities for working.
‘The Khurua mine is situated in the ravine below. Bungtul, near
ayer a its junction with the Nugol river in tale; it was dis-
covered by the water of the ravine washing away
the strata, and leaving a quantity of ores exposed to view ; these ores
were taken away by the Pokree miners, and the mine worked five or
six fathoms under the surface, beyond which they were prevented
from going by the water. They tell me that the lode at the bottom
of the mine for two fathoms in length is one foot wide, of solid cop-
per pyrites. Of late years, nothing has been done at this mine beyond
washing among the surface, which contains a small quantity of copper
pyrites. There is plenty of wood in the neighbourhood of this mine,
and water for machinery, but no facility for adits.” *
Such is the account given by Mr. Wilkin of the copper mines at,
and in the vicinity of Pokree, the whole of which he has repeatedly
visited and examined, as far as the nature of the ground would
permit. Of other copper mines situated in the Ghurwal district, the
most celebrated are the Dhunpoor* and Dhobree mines, the former
being on the north, the latter on the south side of the Dhunpoor
chain of mountains. This chain, rising to an altitude of 9,500 feet
above the sea; is on the south or left bank of the Aluknunda river,
directly opposite to the Pokree hills, and to the great Himalyan chain,
covered with eternal'snow. The view from the crest of the Dhunpoor,
ridge is beyond description beautiful and majestic. The great castel-
lated peaks of Budrinath rise directly in front of the spectator, and on
either side of these as far as the eye can reach, appears a long suc-
cession of other snowy peaks ranging in form and altitude; but all
and each surpassingly grand and sublime. No view that I know of in
Switzerland, equals this in vastness and extent; and in altitude the
peaks of Gungotri, Kedarnath, and Budrinath to the left, of Trisool,
* These mines are leased toa farmer at the sum of 1,900 Rupees per annum. Some
villages are attached to the mine, and the land revenue derivable from them is included
in the above. It would amount to about 200 Rupees per annum as a separate item.
The inhabitants of the villages work in the mines, and receive a share of the produce ;
they are what Mr. Wilkin calls “ tributers.”’
464 Copper Mines of Pokree, ec. [ No. 138.
Nundadevi, Purychoola, and Kylas to the right, fully merit the title
bestowed upon them by the Shastra,* of “ Mountain Kings.” Mr.
Wilkin reports, that “‘ the Dhunpoor mine is situated on the north side
Dhunpoor Mine. Of a hight and precipitous range in compact dolo-
mite.” The ores of this mine are principally copper pyrites and grey or
vitreus copper ore with the red oxide, and green carbonate in smaller
quantities: the latter being scarce. The ores are found in a bed, (or
channel of ground fifty or sixty feet wide,)which runs nearly north and
south, and underlies east about one foot in the fathom. It is divided
by a bed of potstone or indurated talc, which runs through the
copper formation longitudinally, conforming to the strata, and having
a frith or flukan on the western side.
‘‘ This lode of potstone will facilitate the driving of passages into
the mine, and it is sometimes productive ; but the greater part of the
ores are found ‘in the adjoining rock in seams and branches, which
cross it in every direction. ‘The seams of ore are said to be one foot
thick at times, but generally they are less than one inch thick, and
any thing more than that is considered a prize by the miners. When
I visited the mine in 1838, the best seam or vein which I saw was
not more than half an inch thick; but on my last visit in 1841,
I saw one two inches thick, and I was informed that it had been
one foot thick during the interval between my visits. It is perpen-
dicular, and cut out at the bottom of the working by a horizontal
vein which carried it eastward ; the ores are mostly within one foot
of the horizontal vein, above which it dwindles away to the size
of areed. All the other places which I saw, were poor in comparison
to this. The ores are the softest part of the rock, and are consequently
dug out first, after which the miners burn the rock with wood and
then throw water on it. Owing to the calcareous nature of the rock,
this process facilitates the work considerably ; but still I think blasting
would be cheaper, as the burning does not penetrate beyond a few
* Captain Webb gives the following altitude of the Dhunpoor village, 7,956 feet; the
mine is a few hundred feet higher, and the ridge above the mine in some places is
rated at 9,500 feet above the sea.
t+ The repeated allusions to the great Himalyan chain in the sacred books of the
Hindoos, are too well known to require quoting. ‘The names assigned to some of the
peaks are, I think, appropriate and poetical: such as Kada-nath, Lord of water; Roodra-
nath, Lord of the Roodras or Demi-gods.
a a
1843. | in Kumaon and Ghurwal. 465
inches in the rock, and the passages are consequently small, except
when two or more veins meet. The veins are so numerous, that the
rocks between them are seldom more than 3 or 4 feet thick, so that
it would certainly be better to have a large working, which would
include a number of veins, than to work on the present diminutive
scale. The mine is so full of rubbish, that it is difficult to get through
the passages, for nothing is brought out of the mine but the ores,
and the rubbish being left within, fills up the mine and impedes its
future working. At the present lowest working of the mine, there is
a commodious passage on the claystone lode, 60 fathoms in length;
but the outer 20 fathoms has crushed together ; below the inner end
of this passage, there is an extensive old working, which is said to be
rich, but the present generation of miners have never been able to
get the water out of it; beyond this, the mine has been worked toa
considerable extent, but the passages were so full of rubbish, that I
could not go into them. An attempt was made to bring in a new
adit to drain the mine to a deeper level than at present, previous to
the Ghoorkha rule; but after being driven 15 fathoms, it was aban-
doned owing to the ores in the mine failing, and the laborers being sent
to the Nagpoor (2. e. Pokree) mines, which were then rich. No attempt
has been made since then to drain the mine below the level here
spoken of. The lessee informed me, that he formerly realized from
three to four thousand Rupees per annum from this mine, but that
lately, the profits have been very small. I am unable to give a correct
section of this mine, but the following will convey a tolerable idea of its
leading passages, and the rest may be considered a perfect honeycomb
from entrance to end.*
“There is water for machinery in the ravine below the mine.
Wood for all purposes is rather distant, but owing to the supply of
labour, charcoal is cheaper here than at Pokree, where the wood is
nearer. The smelters at this mine are very industrious and expert
at their work, and their mode of smelting is superior to any other
in the province, excepting the Dhobree people, who work on the
same principles, using abundance of decomposed felspar and limestone
flux.
* As there is nothing of interest in this sketch we have omitted to copy it.—Ebs.
466 Copper Mines of Pokree, &c. [ No. 138.
‘“The Dhobree mine is situated on the south side of the Dhunpoor
range, in very nearly the same kind of rock as the
Dhunpoor mine ; but in this mine, most of the veins
are horizontal, running along the side of the hill. At the surface
they are very small, containing oxide of iron and green stains of cop-
per, and occasionally copper pyrites. The present working mine is
not extended very far from the outside of the precipice or surface,
the ores being much the same near the surface as at a distance from
it. When the miners find their passages growing long and tedious,
Dhobree Mine.
they begin outside on a new vein. There are several old mines west
of the Dhobree village; on entering one of them, I found it very
extensive, the ores seem to have been most abundant where the hori-
zontal vein was crossed by perpendicular ones ; but as far as I went,
the whole of the horizontal vein had been taken away, and often
crawling to a considerable length, I was obliged to return for want of
torches, I got a small specimen of ore from one of the perpendicular
veins, of which there were two or three running south-east and north-
west. The western one of these veins is said to have been very rich,
but it fell in about the time* the Ghoorkhas entered the province, and
has not been opened since. The ores of these mines are principally
copper pyrites, worth about 25 per cent. of copper.
‘“‘ There is water for machinery about a mile and a half below the
mine, and wood for all purposes near that place. There is another
mine on this range at Molghirree; it is rented at 25 Rs. per annum,
and said to be in the same rock as the Dhobree mine. There are
other mines of both copper and iron in Dhunpoor, but none of them
are worked, nor have I seen them.”
From the following memorandum, it will be seen that the ex-
Results of Pokree periment conducted by Mr. Wilkin has entirely
Experiment. — failed, as far as a profitable return for the capital
expended is concerned.
Memorandum of expenditure on account of the Government experi-.
ment at Pokree :—
Paid to Mr. Wilkin from the Almorah Trea-
QUT V sie dnisteledeeshe ania aS oo = 3 Ae Rs. 3215 O78
1843. | in Kumaon and Ghurwal. 467
Expended in working the mine as per
monthly statements,.............-..Rs. 3364 5 2
In which is included value of Copper sold
by Mr. Wilkin, and carried to account,
SmI bOyh.iss)! & saractis sjame/ewa i wees DAD nord 2 2
Total expense to Government, —----——. 3215 0 0
Deduct value of Copper sold and paid into
SRG ASUEBY YS fyinie\at sh bile d)alo KH d -\Sebleaclancine {Ali yO ojo
Ditto of aa ae but not yet ealizei 308 0 0
630 3 3
So that when this last item has been realized, the account will
stand thus :—— Expended, .....4,....--»,-....-,«- vala 0, 0
PRQUURDITS 3c: coi a = Elo ope, Hsin eee au ehic a th) MOGUL Macs
Balance against the Experiment, ........ s.eees-see 2584 12 9
Exclusive of the cost of European Super-
intendence, at the rate of 150 Rs. per? ....-...-. 4800 0 0
month for 32 months, ...........e06- IEAM SIO
| Total Rs. 7384 0 O
This result is in my opinion to be attributed solely to the poorness*
and scarcity of ores found, and not in the least to any want of skill,
zeal, or patience on the part of Mr. Wilkin, of whose intelligence,
activity and trustworthiness I havea very high opinion, and every min-
ing undertaking is, after all, more or less a lottery. In this parti-
cular instance, every thing has, I conscientiously believe, been done
that was practicable with reference to the means placed at the superin-
tendent’s disposal, and if the result has been a failure, it cannot in fair-
ness be attributed to him. If it be urged, that the fact of the Raja’s
and Chowmuttee mines having been worked in former times, ought to
have suggested the probability of the lode being exhausted, it should
not on the other hand be forgotten, that the sum placed by Govern-
ment at Mr. Wilkin’s disposal was not sufficient to warrant his
devoting the whole of it to a new mine, which after all might have proved
equally barren as these. Native accounts represented these mines to
have been rich and productive at the period of their abandonment,
and the miners of the place still hold to this belief. Nor was it in the
first instance suspected, that the mine had been so far penetrated into
* Poor, with reference to the means of smelting.
468 Copper Mines of Pokree, c. [ No. 138.
as has been proved. ‘Taking these points into consideration, I see no
reason for believing that course adopted was injudicious.
The failure of this undertaking renders it impossible for me to re-
aj, Jacualayilipelcaee cord an opinion in favour of fresh experiments being
recommend further made under European superintendence at Pokree ;
Experiments. ‘
I fear no such experiment could pay at that place,
and with regard to the copper mines of the province generally, I have
reluctantly come to the opinion, that they do not present a fair field
for the employment of capital on the following grounds :—
Ist. The great distance of the Pokree and other copper mines of
Ghurwal from the markets to which their produce would have to
be brought.* 2d. The absence of water carriage, and slowness and
expense of carrying articles of bulk in a country like Ghurwal.
3d. The non-existence of coal and the cheapness of English copper,
carried as it is entirely by water to the great commercial towns
of Upper India. The above circumstances would, I apprehend, be
insuperable obstacles to the success of any speculation of the kind.
For supposing even that a’rich and abundant copper mine should
hereafter be discovered, and that by European superintendence and
the aid of machinery, great improvements were made in every process
of mining,{ and the price of the article (which now sells at the door
of the mine at a dearer{ rate than English copper does in the plains, )
were to be greatly reduced, I still think, that the cost of transporting
it to a good market would absorb all returns, or leave little profit to
the speculator—further that this profit would bein the course of a few
* The copper mines of Kumaon Proper, at Seera and Gungoolee for instance, are
also, all situated far in the interior of the mountains. The talcose and calcareous
formations in which the ores are found, occupy the high precipitous mountains, which
(in this province at least, ) separate the mica slate, gneiss, and not unfrequently granite
of the central hills from the similar rocks which build up the buttresses and compose
the peaks of the great Himalayan chain. This mighty chain itself appears to be
partially metalliferous, judging from the lead mines at Ghertee (now waste) between
Melum and Neetee, the copper indications at Tola and elsewhere in the Jowahir Pass,
and the ores of the latter metal and of iron actually found and worked at and about
Polan in the immediate neighbourhood of Roodurnath, one of the snowy shrines
between Kedernath and Rudrinath.
+ The washing and smelting of rich ores under the native system costs 50 per cent.
Poor ores do not pay.
{ Wrought copper sells in the hills at 1 Rupee 12 Annas to 2 Rupees per seer,
equivalent to 70 to 80 Rupees per maund. English copper can now be brought at
1843. | in Kumaon and Ghurwal. 469
years (if operations were carried on toa large extent) cease, and the
works be abandoned owing to the non-existence of coal. This is not
a mere conjectural hypothesis, but rests on what has already occurred,
and will again occur in this district. Even under the present petty
system of operations, many mines have been abandoned from this cause.
The following is an instance of the kind. In the valley of Kheisaree,
the northern extremity of which forms the boundary between Kumaon
and Ghurwal, iron ore of a good quality is found in great abundance,
and many mines have at different times been worked by the native
miners, who resort thither annually from the eastern purgunnahs.
At present, the chief supply of iron in Kumaon is from these mines, yet
although the total quantity produced would with reference to the
gigantic scale of English transactions appear perfectly ludicrous, the
valley has notwithstanding become nearly denuded of trees, and it is
only by shifting about to new sites, less removed from the forest, that
operations are now carried on. The extensive pine woods of the
Doorgadhee and Jowrasee range, even at the distance of five and six
miles from the mines, are now beginning to experience indiscriminate
havoe at the hands of the charcoal burners, who cut down and leave
to rot on the ground thousands of fine trees, merely consuming the
smaller branches, (to save themselves the trouble of splitting the large
trunks,) while no provision is made for the renewal of the forest.
As compared with the Pokree and other mining localities of Ghur-
wal, the Khetsaree valley is, in many respects favorably situated,
being four days nearer to Chilkea, to which mart the route is almost
entirely through a level country, and bisected by the Ramgunga
river, the power of which, and some of its nearer affluents, would be
ample for every kind of machinery. Limestone too exists in great
plenty, and in skilful hands, would doubtless be turned into large use
in the reducing processes. The climate, however, in the valley itself,
is unsuited to the European constitution, and until the last few years
Almorah at a less price than the hill copper, the present price of the former being
1 Rupees 10 Annas per seer, of the latter 1 Rupee 12 Annas to 2 Rupees.
By recent quotations, the price of imported copper at Calcutta is shewn to be as
follows ; viz.
Sheathing, per Factory maund,.... 36 12 to 38 0 Sicca Rupees.
Brazier’s;
arte
Sirats
trie
ie tee
s: steladelnie
; Loe
‘atelatel
To os A
. is
pegaous Ree »
wae Oe ieee bet aSeres eter : y
ne eee ~*~ -
aoe ete Pe eoeee ye!
wtainte yobier ietetgte’ a lentsbeesectatete’